JP6704312B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a main control device that controls the main control of the game, a voice emission control device that outputs sound and light for effect based on a command received from the main control device, and the like. These main control device, voice emission control device, and the like include a board inside, and the board is configured by mounting an electronic component such as an IC and a resistor and a connector on a printed wiring board. Electronic components, connectors, and the like are fixed by soldering in a state of being electrically connected to the wiring formed on the printed wiring board (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-004102, A

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to preferably perform soldering when mounting electronic components, connectors, etc. on a printed wiring board, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and provides a gaming machine capable of favorably performing soldering when mounting electronic components, connectors, and the like on a printed wiring board. It is intended.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the invention according to claim 1 has an insertion hole through which the terminal of the mounting component is inserted, and a connection region provided around the insertion hole. In a gaming machine provided with a substrate in which the terminals of the mounting component are inserted into the holes and the terminals of the mounting component and the connection area are electrically connected by soldering,
The substrate has a first connection region and a second connection region having a larger area than the first connection region as the connection regions provided for the different insertion holes. ,,
The mounting component includes a terminal row in which a plurality of terminals are arranged in a row,
The second connection region is provided so as to correspond to at least the insertion hole through which the terminal existing at one end of the terminal row is inserted,
As the mounting component, a first mounting component in which the terminal row is formed by two terminals, a second mounting component in which a predetermined terminal row is formed by a predetermined number of terminals that is three or more, and three or more A third mounting component in which the terminal row is formed by terminals,
The predetermined terminal row is provided with the predetermined number of terminals including a grounding terminal for grounding,
The grounding terminal is not arranged at the end of the predetermined terminal row, but is arranged as a terminal other than the end of the predetermined terminal row ,
The second connection region is provided as the connection region corresponding to the insertion hole through which the terminal of the first mounting component is inserted,
The terminal spacing in the second mounting component is set narrower than the terminal spacing in the third mounting component,
The second connection region is provided as the connection region corresponding to the insertion hole through which the terminal of the second mounting component is inserted,
The second connection area is not provided as the connection area corresponding to the insertion hole through which the terminal of the third mounting component is inserted,
The terminal spacing in the third mounting component is less than or equal to the terminal spacing in the first mounting component .

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably perform soldering when mounting an electronic component, a connector, or the like on a printed wiring board.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing a configuration of a game board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure regarding the discharge of the game ball which flowed down the game area. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for win/win lottery. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by the main side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure which makes the detection result of a ball detection sensor input into a main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows a ball detection processing performed by a main side CPU. It is a block diagram for explaining an electric configuration of a payout control device and various devices that communicate with the payout control device. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing performed by a payment side CPU. It is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration of a management IC. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the input port of the management side I/F. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the memory for correspondence. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of a history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the management processing performed by the management side CPU. (A) ~ (d) is a time chart showing a state in which information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers and the types of signals is stored in the correspondence memory. It is a flow chart which shows management output processing performed by the master side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows history setting processing performed by a management side CPU. 8A to 8E are time charts showing how history information is stored in the history memory. 7 is a flowchart showing a data output process executed by the main CPU. 7 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by the management-side CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the input port of the management side I/F in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the management processing performed by the management side CPU. (A) ~ (h) is a time chart showing a state in which information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers and the types of signals is stored in the correspondence memory. It is a block diagram for explaining an electric configuration of a management IC in the third embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the input port of the management side I/F. It is a flow chart which shows blackout information storage processing performed by the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure response process performed by the management side CPU. 7 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by the management-side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure response process performed by the management side CPU in 4th Embodiment. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the trigger specific process performed by the main side CPU in 5th Embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic process performed by the management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the trigger specific process performed by the main side CPU in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing performed by the management side CPU in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows history setting processing performed by a management side CPU in an 8th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for history in 9th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows history setting processing performed by a management side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric constitution of MPU of the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a ball detection processing performed by a main side CPU. It is a block diagram for explaining the electric composition of the main control unit in an 11th embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the input port of the management side I/F. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of a history memory. It is a flow chart which shows history setting processing performed by a management side CPU. 7 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by the management-side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the parameter management process performed by the main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the signal path which transmits the detection result of each ball detection sensor in 12th Embodiment to the main side CPU and management IC. It is a front view of the game board in a 13th embodiment. (A) It is a perspective view of a 1st right-left distribution nail, (b) It is a top view of a 1st left-right distribution member, (c) It is a rear view of a 1st left-right distribution member. (A) It is a perspective view of a fixing member, and (b) is an end view of the cut surface of the first left-right distribution nail when cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. (A) It is an end view of the vertical cross section of the 1st right-and-left distribution nail which shows the game ball which collides with a 1st distribution surface, and (b) The course of the game ball which falls from the upper side and collides with a 1st distribution surface. It is an explanatory view for explaining, and (c) is an explanatory view for explaining the course of the game ball flowing down from the upper left side and colliding with the first distribution surface. (A) It is an end view of the vertical cross section of the first left-right distribution nail showing the game ball that collides with the second distribution surface, and (b) the course of the game ball that falls from above and collides with the second distribution surface. It is an explanatory view for explaining, and (c) is an explanatory view for explaining the course of the game ball flowing down from the upper left side and colliding with the second distribution surface. (A) It is a perspective view of a 2nd left-right distribution nail, (b) It is a top view of a 2nd left-right distribution member, (c) It is a rear view of a 2nd left-right distribution member. (A) is a table showing the direction of the reaction force received by the game ball that collides with the first left-right distribution nail, and (b) is a table that shows the direction of the reaction force received by the game ball that collides with the second left-right distribution nail. (C) A table showing the direction of the resistance received by the game ball that collides with the obstacle nail. (A) It is an explanatory view for explaining how the game ball located on the back side is guided to the left guide nail group, and (b) The game ball located on the front side is guided to the left guide nail group. It is an explanatory view for explaining. (A) It is an explanatory view for explaining how the game ball located on the back side is guided to the right guide nail group, and (b) The game ball located on the front side is guided to the right guide nail group. It is an explanatory view for explaining. It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the periphery of the left side guidance member in another form of 13th Embodiment. It is the front view of the game board in which the 1st right-and-left distribution nail and the 2nd left-and-right distribution nail are provided in the upper stream vicinity of an operation mouth, and an enlarged view near the operation mouth. (A) It is a perspective view of a 1st left-right distribution nail, (b) It is an end view of the cut surface of a 1st left-right distribution nail when it cut|disconnects by the plane perpendicular|vertical to the surface of a game board. (A) It is a perspective view of a reversal nail, (b) It is an end view of the cut surface when the reversal nail is cut by a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board, and (c) A game ball colliding with the first reversal surface. It is an explanatory view for explaining the course of, and (d) an explanatory view for explaining the course of the game ball that collides with the second reversal surface. It is the front view of the game board in 14th Embodiment, and the enlarged view of the upstream part periphery of a left guide nail group. (A) is a perspective view of a front-rear distribution nail, (b) is a plan view of a front-rear distribution member, and (c), (d) front-rear distribution nail when cut by a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. It is an end view of the cross section of FIG. (A) It is a perspective view of a back nail, (b), (c) It is an end view of the cut surface of a back nail when it cut|disconnects by the plane perpendicular|vertical to the surface of a game board. (A) It is an explanatory view for explaining the course in the left guide nail group of the game ball located on the back side of the game area, and (b) The course in the left guide nail group of the game ball located on the front side of the game area. It is an explanatory view for explaining. (A) It is a top view of the front priority member in another form of a 14th embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining a course of a game ball in a left guide nail group including a front priority member. It is a front view of the game board in a 15th embodiment, and an enlarged view of the neighborhood of a repulsion nail. (A) It is a disassembled perspective view of a repulsion nail, (b) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a repulsion nail. (A) It is an end view of the cutting surface when the repulsive nail is cut by a plane perpendicular to the plane of the game board, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the course of the game ball colliding with the high repulsion portion, (C) It is an end view of the cutting surface when the repulsion nail is cut by a plane perpendicular to the plane of the game board, and (d) an explanatory view for explaining the course of the game ball colliding with the low repulsion member. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the course of the game ball which collides with the high repulsion part of a repulsion nail, (b) Explains the course of the game ball after collision in the case of colliding with the low repulsion member of the repulsion nail. FIG. It is a front view of the game board in a 16th embodiment. (A) is a perspective view of the front-rear distribution table, (b) is a plan view of the front-rear distribution table, (c), (d) when the front-rear distribution table is cut by a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board It is an end view of the cross section of FIG. It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the left center part. It is a front view of the game board in another form of the 16th embodiment. (A), (b) It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the front-back distribution table and the left side guide nail group periphery. (A) is a perspective view of a front-rear distribution table having a groove for guiding the game ball on the back side to the farthest side, and a groove for guiding the game ball on the front side to the foremost side, and (b) the back side. It is a perspective view of a front-rear distribution table having a groove for guiding the game ball to the front side and a groove for guiding the game ball on the front side to the back side. It is a front view of the game board in a 17th embodiment, and an enlarged view of the position change passage circumference. (A) is a perspective view of the passage forming member, (b) is a front view of the passage forming member, (c), (d) a cut surface when the passage forming member is cut by a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board FIG. (A), (b) It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the downstream periphery of a position change passage. (A), (b) It is an end view of the cut surface when the passage forming member for exchange is cut by a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. It is a front view of the game board in the 18th embodiment. (A) It is an exploded perspective view of a guide member, and (b) is a left side view of the guide member. It is an end view of a cut surface when the guide member is cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the downstream periphery of (a), (b) guide passage. It is an end view of a cut surface when the guide member for exchange is cut by a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. (A) It is an end view of a cut surface when the guide member is cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of a game board in another form of the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board for replacement. FIG. 6 is an end view of a cut surface when the guide member is cut. (A) It is the surface view of the main control board which expands and shows a part of main control board in 19th Embodiment, (b) It is the front view of the main control board which expands and shows the periphery of a 1 row connector. .. (A) It is a perspective view of a 1 row connector, (b) It is a perspective view of a 2 pole connector, (c) It is a perspective view of a 2 row connector. (A) It is a perspective view which expands and shows a part of back surface of a printed wiring board, and (b) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which expands and shows the via hole periphery of the printed wiring board cut|disconnected by the plane perpendicular to the surface. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which expands and shows the pin periphery of the printed wiring board cut|disconnected by the plane perpendicular|vertical to the surface. (A) It is a back view which expands and shows a part of main control board, (b) It is a back view of the printed wiring board which expands and shows the back area|region for 1 row before mounting a 1 row connector. (A) It is an explanatory view for explaining the jet flow of the molten solder, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the appearance that the jet flow hits the back surface of the printed wiring board. (A) A vertical cross-sectional view of a comparative printed wiring board shown for explaining a state in which a second pin, a third pin, and a fourth pin of a one-row connector are in contact with a jet flow, and (b) one row FIG. 5C is a vertical cross-sectional view of a comparative printed wiring board shown for explaining how the second pin of the connector comes out of contact with the jet, and (c) the third pin of the one-row connector comes out of contact with the jet. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a comparative printed wiring board shown for explaining the situation. (A) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a comparative printed wiring board shown for explaining the state where the third pin of the one-row connector has come out of contact with the jet flow, and (b) the fourth pin of the one-row connector is the jet flow. FIG. 4C is a vertical cross-sectional view of a comparative printed wiring board shown for explaining a state where it has come out of a contact state with (c) a state where a solder bridge is formed between a third pin and a fourth pin of the one-row connector. FIG. 6 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a comparative printed wiring board showing. FIG. 6 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a printed wiring board shown for explaining a solder fillet formed around a fourth pin of a one-row connector. (A) It is a back view of the printed wiring board which expands and shows the back area for 2-poles before a 2-pole connector is attached, and (b) Expands the back area for 2-rows before a 2-row connector is attached. 3 is a rear view of the printed wiring board shown in FIG. (A) It is a back view of the printed wiring board which expands and shows the 1st row back surface area provided with the inclination short circuit prevention hole in another form of 19th Embodiment, and (b) expands the 1 row back surface area. FIG. 4C is a back view of the printed wiring board shown in FIG. 7C, which is an enlarged back view of the back row region for one row of the printed wiring board in FIG. (A) It is the back view of the printed wiring board which expands and shows the back surface area for 1 rows in 20th Embodiment, (b) The longitudinal cross-sectional view of the printed wiring board which expands and shows the pin periphery of the 1 row connector. Is. (A) It is a back view of the printed wiring board which expands and shows the back area|region for 1 rows in which 6 separate type short circuit prevention holes in another form of 20th Embodiment are formed, (b) Two 3 directions. It is a back view of the printed wiring board which expands and shows the back surface area|region for 1 rows in which the separation-type short circuit prevention hole is formed. It is a rear view of the printed wiring board which expands and shows the back surface area for 1 rows in which the short circuit prevention hole group for suppressing generation|occurrence|production of the solder bridge in 21st Embodiment is formed. It is a front view of the game board in a 22nd embodiment. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the connection aspect of a 1st working opening detection sensor and a 2nd working opening detection sensor, and a main control board, (b) 1st working opening area|region and 2nd working opening area|region. FIG. 4 is a back view of the printed wiring board shown in an enlarged manner.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main components of the pachinko machine 10. Note that, in FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in a forward direction. Have. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plate members to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. The outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10, and the island facility of the game hall may be equipped with the outer frame 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward when the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side when viewed from the front.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be turned forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. A back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side in front view.

In addition, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating front end portion, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 in a locked state, and It has a function of locking the door frame 14 against the inner frame 13 so that the door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

Next, the configuration on the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 guide the means. The guide rail as is configured. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window 23 in the resin base 21 is guided by the guide rail to the upper part of the game area PA.

By the way, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying game balls stored in an upper plate 55a described later onto the launch rail 27a, and a launch rail 27a. And a solenoid 27c which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. By rotating the firing operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, the solenoid 27c is drive-controlled, and the game ball is fired.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general winning opening 31, a special electricity winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a universal drawing unit 38, etc. are provided in each opening. ing. A total of four general winning openings 31 are provided, and one is provided for each other.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Regarding the number of prize balls, specifically, when one game ball enters the first operating port 33 or when one game ball enters the second operating port 34. When one gaming ball is paid out and one gaming ball is thrown into the general winning opening 31, ten winning balls are paid out and the special prize winning device 32 is paid. In the case where one of the game balls has entered, the payout of 15 prize balls is executed.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls may be smaller in the second operating port 34 than in the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 may be the first operating port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 24b are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a wind turbine are provided.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening portion, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening portion, but also the game area PA after passing through the opening portion. A mode in which the flow of the game area PA is continued without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to be clearly distinguished from the game ball entering the out port 24a, a general prize hole 31, a special electric prize winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, and a through gate 35. Entering a game ball into is also referred to as a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are open upward. Further, both the operation ports 33, 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operation port 33 faces upward. The second actuating port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the universal electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34, and when the universal electric object 34a is in the open state, the prize can enter the second operating port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side in the flow-down direction of the game ball with respect to the second operation port 34. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning in the through gate 35 flows down in the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning of the through-gate 35, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is triggered by the winning of the through-gate 35, and a general display of the general-purpose unit 38 provided in the lower right corner of the game area PA where the game ball does not pass. The variable display of the pattern is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electric power combination opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the universal graphic display portion 38a is ended, the operation shifts to the universal electric open state. In the general electric open state, the general electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

Note that the general-purpose display section 38a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device is provided. , A CRT, a dot matrix display, or other type of display device. Further, as the pattern variably displayed on the universal figure display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the universal figure unit 38, a universal figure hold display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal figure display section 38a. The maximum number of game balls that have won the through gate 35 is four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by turning on the universal figure reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is carried out with the winning of the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly shown through the display effect on the symbol display device 41 of the special drawing unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

More specifically, the special drawing unit 37 is provided with a special drawing display portion 37a. The display area of the special figure display portion 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display unit 37a, a winning or lottery is performed with the winning of the first operating opening 33 or the winning of the second operating opening 34 as a trigger, whereby a variable display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The special figure display unit 37a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , A CRT, a dot matrix display, or other type of display device. As the picture displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors are displayed. A configuration in which is displayed is considered.

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure reservation display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The maximum number of game balls that have won in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the special figure reservation display portion 37b.

In detail about the symbol display device 41, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. May be.

In the symbol display device 41, when the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is performed on the special symbol display portion 37a based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34, the symbol is displayed accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. For example, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol columns of upper, middle and lower tiers are set as a plurality of display areas, and each of the symbol columns is numbered "1" to "9". The symbols are scroll-displayed with the symbols arranged in ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, the scroll display in all the symbol rows is started first, and the scroll display is switched from the scroll display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row → the lower symbol row → the middle symbol row, and finally in each symbol row It ends with the pattern still displayed. Then, for example, in a game game in which the game result is a jackpot result, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the preset effective line on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41.

In addition, in the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by the winning of the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34, but also the display effect in the opening/closing execution mode that shifts after the winning is won. Be seen. In addition, based on the winning of any one of the operation ports 33, 34, the display is started on the special figure display portion 37a and the symbol display device 41, and a predetermined result is displayed and ended until one of the game times. Equivalent to times. Further, the manner of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, and the number of symbol columns, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the picture variably displayed on the picture display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned picture, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the picture.

When a big hit is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the first working opening 33 or the winning of the second working opening 34, the opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won is performed. The special electric prize winning device 32 includes a big winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32a for opening and closing the big winning opening. The open/close door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game balls cannot win, and when the game is transferred to the open/close execution mode in the internal lottery, the game balls can be switched to the open state in which the game balls can win. It has become. By the way, the opening/closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted when a winning result is obtained. It should be noted that in the closed state, the winning is not impossible, but the winning state may be less likely to occur than in the open state.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration related to the discharge of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

As described above, the game balls that enter the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a are discharged from the game area PA. In other words, the game ball shot from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and flowing into the game area PA is any one of the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a. By entering the ball will be discharged from the game area PA. The game ball that entered the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, or the out opening 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

On the back surface of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 42 to 48 are formed corresponding to the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a. . The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passages 42 to 48 are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 by flowing down the flowed out discharge passages 42 to 48, and to the discharge ball collecting portion (not shown). Be recovered. Then, the game balls collected by the discharge ball collecting section are discharged to the ball circulating device of the island facility in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting a game ball are provided in the respective discharge passage portions 42 to 48. The discharge passage portions 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since the four general winning openings 31 are provided as described above, the discharge passage portions 42 to 44 are provided corresponding to each of the four. In this case, one detection sensor 42a is provided for each of the first discharge passage portion 42 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage portion 43 corresponding to the right general winning opening 31 adjacent thereto. 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the first discharge passage portion 42, and the detection range is formed in the middle position of the second discharge passage portion 43. The second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. The game ball that has entered the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a while passing through the first discharge passage portion 42, and the game that entered the general winning opening 31 on the right side thereof. The ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage portion 43. In addition, a third discharge passage portion 44 formed so as to join at the middle position with respect to the two right winning openings 31 on the right side is provided. The third discharge passage portion 44 has an entrance side area corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and also has one exit side area due to the entrance side areas joining in the middle. is doing. The third winning opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the outlet side region of the third discharge passage portion 44. The game ball that has entered one of the two right prize holes 31 on the right side is detected by the third prize hole detection sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage portion 44.

The fourth discharge passage portion 45 is provided so as to correspond to the special electric winning device 32. The special electricity detection sensor 45a is provided so that the detection range exists at the midway position of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and the game ball that has entered the special electricity winning device 32 is in the middle of passing through the fourth discharge passage portion 45. It is detected by the special electric power detection sensor 45a. The fifth discharge passage portion 46 is provided so as to correspond to the first operation port 33. The first working port detection sensor 46a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharging passage part 46, and the game ball entering the first working port 33 moves the fifth discharging passage part 46. During the passage, it is detected by the first working port detection sensor 46a. The sixth discharge passage portion 47 is provided so as to correspond to the second operation port 34. The second working port detection sensor 47a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the sixth discharging passage part 47, and the game ball that has entered the second working port 34 moves through the sixth discharging passage part 47. During the passage, it is detected by the second working port detection sensor 47a. The seventh discharge passage portion 48 is provided corresponding to the outlet 24a. The outlet detection sensor 48a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage portion 48, and the game ball entering the outlet 24a is in the middle of passing through the seventh discharge passage portion 48. It is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a.

It should be noted that the game ball detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a is not detected by the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. Further, a gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and a game ball passing through the through gate 35 while flowing down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

An electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used as each of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, but any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect a game ball. The various detection sensors 42a to 49a are electrically connected to a main control device 60 described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal when the game ball is not detected, and output a HI level signal when the game ball is detected. Note that the relationship between HI and LOW is not limited to this, and may be reversed.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 that allows almost the entire game area PA to be viewed from the front. The window 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is made of glass and is colorless and transparent. However, the window panel 52 is not limited to this and may be made of synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent, and the game area PA is provided from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. If it is visible, it may be formed to be colored and transparent.

A display light emitting portion 53 is provided above the window portion 51. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 54 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulge portion 55 and a lower bulge portion 56 which bulge toward the front side are arranged in parallel vertically. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper plate 55a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from a payout device to be described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower plate 56a has a function of storing game balls that have become redundant in the upper plate 55a.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24), a main controller 60 that controls the main game is mounted. The main controller 60 has a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. It should be noted that the substrate box 60a may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of the opening. Examples of the trace means include a configuration of a coupling portion that requires inseparable coupling of a plurality of case bodies that form the substrate box 60a and requires destruction of a predetermined portion during the separation, or that an adhesive layer remains on an object to be adhered during peeling. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. In addition, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to a boundary between a plurality of case bodies forming the substrate box 60a is conceivable.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the payout mechanism unit 73 and the control device assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game ball paid out from the payout device 76 is discharged to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with a main power source of, for example, 24 V AC, and a back pack substrate having a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power source.

The control device gathering unit 74 generates and outputs a payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76, a predetermined electric power required by various control devices and the like, and accompanies the player's operation of the firing operation device 28. It is provided with a power supply/launching control device 78 for controlling the launch of a game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply/launch control device 78 are arranged in front of and behind each other so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical structure of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game, and a power failure monitoring board 67 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 contains a main side ROM 64, a main side RAM 65, and a management IC 66 in addition to the main side CPU 63 which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 62 contains an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

The main-side ROM 64 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage, and is used as a read-only memory. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 63 and fixed value data.

The main RAM 65 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) such as an SRAM and a DRAM that needs power supply from the outside to retain the storage, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 can be randomly accessed, and has a shorter read time than the main ROM 64 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data and the like for execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64.

The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA based on the information supplied from the main CPU 63. Although the details will be described later, while the management IC 66 grasps the entry history of the game balls into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, The frequency of entering the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is ascertained according to the obtained winning history.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. To the input side of the MPU 62, the power failure monitoring board 67 and the payout controller 77 provided in the main controller 60 are connected. A power supply/launch control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 67, and operating power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 67.

Various sensors such as various ball detection sensors 42a to 49a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The various winning ball detection sensors 42a to 49a are, as already described, the first winning hole detecting sensor 42a, the second winning hole detecting sensor 43a, the third winning hole detecting sensor 44a, the special electricity detecting sensor 45a, and the first working opening detecting sensor. 46a, a second operation port detection sensor 47a, an out port detection sensor 48a, and a gate detection sensor 49a. On the basis of the detection results of these ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines a ball to enter each ball. Further, in the main CPU 63, various kinds of lottery are executed based on the winning of the first operating port 33, and various kinds of lottery are executed based on the winning of the second operating port 34.

A power failure monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and a sound emission control device 81 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. To the payout control device 77, for example, a prize ball command is output based on the fact that a game ball has entered a prize ball-corresponding ball input part corresponding to the payout of a game ball in which the occurrence of a ball has occurred. It Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 81.

On the output side of the MPU 62, a special electric drive unit 32b for opening/closing the opening/closing door 32a of the special electric prize winning device 32, a general electric drive unit 34b for opening/closing the general electric officer 34a of the second operating port 34, The drawing unit 37 and the universal drawing unit 38 are connected. By the way, the special drawing unit 37 is provided with a special drawing display portion 37a and a special drawing reservation display portion 37b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the universal figure unit 38 is provided with a universal figure display section 38a and a universal figure hold display section 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the main CPU 63 executes drive control of the drive unit 32b for special electricity so that the special electricity winning device 32 is opened and closed. Further, when the general electric outlet 34a is in the open state, the main CPU 63 performs drive control of the general electric drive unit 34b so that the general electric outlet 34a is opened and closed. Further, at the time of each game, the main CPU 63 executes display control of the special figure display portion 37a. Further, in the case of clearly indicating the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a, the main CPU 63 executes the display control of the general figure display unit 38a. Further, when a winning is generated in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, or when the variable display is started in the special figure display unit 37a, the main CPU 63 controls the display of the special figure hold display unit 37b. Is executed and a prize is paid to the through gate 35, or when the variable display is started on the general figure display section 38a, the main CPU 63 executes the display control of the general figure hold display section 38b.

The power failure monitoring board 67 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 78 and monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

The power supply/launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, and the like are generated with the necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power interruption is mainly used. Electric power for storage is supplied to the main RAM 65 of the control device 60 and the payout control device 77. Further, the power supply/launch control device 78 is responsible for the launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

The sound emission control device 81 drives and controls the display light emission part 53 and the speaker part 54 provided in the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 82. Is. The display control device 82 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the voice emission control device 81.

<Electrical structure for performing various lottery in the main CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various kinds of lottery in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main side CPU63 uses various counter information at the time of a game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of display of the special symbol display portion 37a, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the general symbol display portion 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the winning random number counter C1 used in the lottery for winning, the jackpot type counter C2 used in determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are displaced. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when performing, random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and display duration in the special figure display portion 37a and the symbol display device 41 are determined. The fluctuation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the universal electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the ordinary electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 should be in the universal electric open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to "0". Each counter is updated at short time intervals. The information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided as acquisition information storage means in the main RAM 65 when a prize is awarded to the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34. It is stored in the reserved storage area 65a.

The hold storage area 65a includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and the winning history of the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 is stored in the holding area RE. In addition, a combination of numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the winning of the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 occurs in succession a plurality of times, the first holding area RE1→the second holding area RE1 Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the holding area RE2→the third holding area RE3→the fourth holding area RE4. Since the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 are provided in this manner, the winning history of the game balls to the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 can be held and stored up to a maximum of four. ..

Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, and may be another number such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical value information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display portion 37a, and starts one game time. At that time, a win/fail judgment is made on the basis of various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the general electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. For example, the ordinary electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, and returned to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The ordinary electric accessory release counter C4 is regularly updated and is stored in the ordinary electric power holding area 65c of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric auditors article 34a to be in the open state by the stored value of the general electric officer object opening counter C4.

In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric accessory 34a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with the situation in which the game balls are continuously fired in the game area PA in the same manner, the general utility object 34a of the second working port 34 is opened per unit time. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the state becomes relatively high and low.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the ordinary electric open state in the ordinary electric lottery using the ordinary electric outlet release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the general electric open state is won is set to a larger number than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time of one time is set longer. Has been done. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the general electric open state is elected and the general electric auditors a thing 34a is opened a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum securing time (that is, in the general map The one-time display duration on the display section 38a is set to be short.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operating opening 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the first operation port 33 is higher than in the second operation port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than the first operation port 33. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 increases. Then, when a prize is generated in the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls that he or she holds. It can be carried out.

Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency of the high frequency support mode to be in the general electric open state per unit time more than the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, in the general electric open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the ordinary electric open state. In addition, a securing time that is ensured when the next ordinary electric train open lottery is performed after one ordinary electric train open lottery is performed (for example, it is executed in the universal map display portion 38a based on the winning of the through gate 35). In the configuration where multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter securing time can be selected more easily or the average securing time is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. Good. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the time of opening is lengthened, and the securing time that is secured when the next ordinary electric train opening lottery is performed after one ordinary electric train opening lottery is shortened. The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or a condition of any combination of shortening the averaging time and increasing the winning probability.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved storage area 65a of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored in the main ROM 64 as a win/loss table. As the win/loss table, a win/loss table for the low probability mode and a win/loss table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the win/loss lottery means.

In the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that is a big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the high probability mode win/loss table is referred to in the above-mentioned lottery, the number of random numbers to be a big win is 20. If the winning probability in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 29, and returned to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved storage area 65a at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plural jackpot results are (1) a mode of opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery means after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode, and (3) a result after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode. A plurality of jackpot results are set by differentiating the three conditions of the support mode in the universal electric accessory 34a of the 2 working port 34.

As an aspect of the opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, the high frequency is set so that the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in either the high frequency winning mode or the low frequency winning mode, the round game of a predetermined number of times is executed as an upper limit.

Here, the round game continues until either one of the condition that a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses and that a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are won in the special electric prize winning device 32 is satisfied. It is a game to play. Further, the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the same as the fixed round number regardless of the type of jackpot result triggered by the transition. Specifically, no matter which jackpot result is obtained, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of opening mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 are set with different open durations from the opening of the special electric winning device 32 to the closing. Specifically, a long time mode in which the open duration time is set to 29 sec, which is a long time, and a short time mode in which the open duration time is set to 0.06 sec, which is a short time shorter than the above long time, are set. Has been done.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the firing operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA in 0.6 sec. To be done. Further, the upper limit number of end conditions for the round game is set to nine. Then, in the long time mode of the above-mentioned opening modes, the opening duration time is set to be longer than the product of the game cycle of the game ball and one round game. On the other hand, in the short time mode, the opening duration is set to be shorter than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and one round game, and more specifically, shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, when the opening is performed once in the long time mode, it is expected that the special electric prize winning device 32 will be won by the upper limit number in one round game. It is expected that if the special opening award device 32 is opened once, no prize is won in the special electric prize winning device 32, or even if a prize is won, the number is one.

In the high frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round game in a long time mode. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a short time mode in each round game.

In addition, the number of times of opening and closing the special electric prize winning device 32 in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are the higher frequency winning mode. Is not limited to the above value as long as the frequency of winning the special electric prize winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher than that in the low frequency winning mode. Is.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 64 as a distribution table. Then, as the distribution destination, a low-probability jackpot result, a low winning high-probability jackpot result, and a most advantageous jackpot result are set.

The low-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/winning lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

The low winning high-accuracy jackpot result is a big hit result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/loss lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. is there. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the winning/winning lottery is a big hit state winning and the big hit state is brought about.

The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/winning lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the winning/winning lottery is a big hit state winning and the big hit state is brought about.

Note that the normal game state in relation to each of the above-mentioned game states means not the open/close execution mode but the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In addition, as a game result, a low winning high probability jackpot result may not be set. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode in the low winning high-probability jackpot result, the number of round games may be smaller than that in the low-probability jackpot result and the most advantageous jackpot result.

In the distribution table, "0-9" of the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0-29" correspond to the low-probability jackpot result, and "10-14" correspond to the low winning high-probability jackpot result. "15-29" corresponds to the most advantageous jackpot result.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and returned to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and in a game machine in which a final stop result is a given response result in a game time that is a predetermined jackpot result, the symbol display device 41 The display state for making the player think that the variation display state is likely to be the above-mentioned assignment correspondence result in the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol is started. In addition, as for the assignment correspondence result, specifically, a combination of symbols having the same number is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines.

Two types of expected display are set: a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display or the result of the assignment response in a stage before the reach display occurs.

In the reach display, the symbols are stopped and displayed for some of the plurality of symbol columns displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, thereby displaying the combination of the reach symbols, and the remaining symbols in that state. A display state in which a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol column is included. In addition, while displaying the combination of reach symbols as described above, while performing variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol columns, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, , Which includes reducing or displaying the combination of reach patterns and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect.

In the notice display, after the variable display of the symbols is started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns, or some symbol columns are plural. In the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in the symbol column, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol column is included. Further, it also includes a background screen having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes and a pattern on the symbol row having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes. Such advance notice display can occur at both game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the reach display is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability.

Reach display is executed irrespective of the value of the reach random number counter C3 at the game time when the same symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed. Further, in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, it is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the deviation result, it is executed when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. ..

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to display the advance notice is made in the sound emission control device 81, not in the main control device 60. In this case, the voice emission control device 81 is more likely to give a notice display in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the miss result, and to give a notice display with a low appearance rate. The lottery process for displaying the advance notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions that is likely to occur. By the way, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for game use is executed on the symbol display device 41.

Next, the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the main CPU 63 determines the display duration of the special figure display portion 37a and the display duration of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation display is determined on the special figure display unit 37a and when the variation display of the symbol is started by the symbol display device 41 when the variation pattern is determined.

<Regarding the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed by the main CPU 63 for advancing a game will be described. The processes of the main CPU 63 are roughly classified into a main process that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt process that is started regularly (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the main process is started, and a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) elapses without waiting for the next process. In the execution period of the power-on wait process, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. After that, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function register of the main CPU 63 is set (step S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply/launch control device 78 is manually operated (step S104), and whether or not the power failure flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" is determined. The determination is made (step S105). In addition, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (step S106), and it is determined whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored at the time of power-off, that is, the validity of the stored and held data ( Step S107).

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Also, when the power-off occurrence information is not set, or when an abnormality in the stored and held data is confirmed by the checksum, the process similarly proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 65 is cleared. Then, it progresses to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch is not pressed, the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal, and the process of step S108 is not executed, and step S109 is performed. Proceed to. In step S109, power-on setting processing is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 65 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. Further, after the processing of step S109 is executed, the recognition processing for causing the management IC 66 to recognize various information (step S110), and the data output for outputting various data to the reading device connected to the MPU 62. The process is executed (step S111). Details of the recognition process and the data output process will be described later.

Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited at the stage when the main process is started. The state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is released at the timing before the process of step S111 is completed and the process of step S112 is executed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process of step S111 ends, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process of step S112 is started. Therefore, the process for advancing the game in the main CPU 63 is not started until the situation is reached.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual process of steps S112 to S115. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps S112 to S115 is repeatedly executed using this irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual process of steps S112 to S115 is an irregular process that is irregularly executed.

In the residual processing, first, in step S112, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In a succeeding step S113, a random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and at the same time, a fluctuation counter updating process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed in step S114. In these updating processes, the current numerical value information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 65, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical value information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the counter of the reading source is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S115, the setting of interrupt permission for switching the generation of the timer interrupt processing from the prohibited state to the permitted state is performed. After executing the process of step S115, the process returns to step S112, and the processes of steps S112 to S115 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 msec).

First, a power failure information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power cutoff is received from the power failure monitoring board 67, and when the occurrence of the power failure is identified, the power failure processing is executed and an infinite loop is executed. Become. In the power failure process, "1" is set to the power failure flag of the main RAM 65, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

After that, the random number for lottery updating process is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number updating process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility article release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the present numerical value information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility open counter C4, and the process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical value information is executed. After that, a process of overwriting the counter of the reading source is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S203, the random number initial value updating process is executed as in step S113, and at the same time, the fluctuation counter updating process is executed in step S204 as in step S114.

After that, the fraud detection process of monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraudulent monitoring target has occurred is executed (step S205). In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, "1" is set in the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 65. In a succeeding step S206, it is determined whether or not the game progress is stopped by determining whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag. When a negative determination is made in step S206, the processing of step S207 and thereafter is executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting the various drive units 32b and 34b corresponding to the output information is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information for switching the universal electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 to the open state is set, output of a drive signal to the drive unit 34b for general electric power should be started and switched to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

Then, the reading process is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes.

After that, the ball detection processing is executed (step S209). In the entrance detection process, signals received from the entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a are read, and based on the read results, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, and the first operating opening 33. The presence or absence of a ball entering the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 is specified. The details of the ball detection process will be described later.

After that, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical value information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S210). In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are handled collectively, but both the subtraction-type timer counter update and the addition-type timer counter update are performed collectively. It may be configured.

Then, the firing control process for controlling the firing of the game ball is executed (step S211). In the situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is fired at a predetermined firing cycle of 0.6 sec. In a succeeding step S212, as input state monitoring processing, based on the information read in the reading processing in step S208, disconnection confirmation of each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a and opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed. I do.

After that, the special figure special electric power control processing for executing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the opening/closing execution mode is executed (step S213). In the special figure special electric power control process, when a prize is generated in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 in a situation where the number of pieces of reservation information stored in the reservation storage area 65a is less than the upper limit number, A process of sequentially storing the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as pending information in the pending storage area 65a is executed. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, whether or not the holding information corresponds to the jackpot winning is determined on condition that the holding information is not stored during the game play and the opening/closing execution mode and the holding information is stored. If it corresponds to the processing and the jackpot winning, the jackpot determination processing for determining which jackpot result the holding information corresponds to is executed. In addition, in the special map special electric control process, not only the winning/disabling judgment process and the sorting judgment process, but also when the holding information does not correspond to the jackpot winning, whether the holding information corresponds to the reach occurrence or not. The reach determination process for determination is executed, and the process for selecting the duration of the game time is executed by using the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time. Then, the command for variation including the information on the duration corresponding to the result of each of the processes and the type command including the information on the game result are transmitted to the sound emission control device 81, and at the same time, the pattern on the special figure display unit 37a is displayed. Start variable display. Upon receiving the variation command and the type command, the voice light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to start the effect for game play corresponding to the contents of these commands. Further, the voice emission control device 81 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command to the display control device 82. By receiving the variation pattern command, the display control device 82 causes the symbol display device 41 to start the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the content of the variation pattern command. As a result, one game is started.

In the special figure special electric control process, by determining whether or not the duration of the game time determined at the start of the game time has elapsed during the execution of one game time, whether or not it is the end timing of the game time. To judge. If it is the end timing, the process for ending the game number is executed in a state where the display corresponding to the game result is displayed. In this case, when the game number of this time corresponds to the occurrence of any of the jackpot results, the pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot results is stopped and displayed on the special figure display portion 37a, When the game time corresponds to the result of deviation, the picture corresponding to the result of deviation is stopped and displayed on the special figure display portion 37a. In addition, a final stop command indicating that the game time should be ended is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. Upon receiving the final stop command, the voice emission control device 81 ends the effect for the current game play in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Further, the voice emission control device 81 transmits a final stop command to the display control device 82. By receiving the final stop command, the display control device 82 ends the effect for the current game use in the symbol display device 41.

In the special figure special electric power control process, when the result of the game times is a result corresponding to the shift to the open/close execution mode, a process for starting the open/close execution mode is executed. At the time of this start, an opening command indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. When the round game is started, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened, and when the round game is finished, the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed. In each of these processes, an opening command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81, and a closing command indicating that the round game is ended is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. In addition, in the special figure special power control process, when ending the opening/closing execution mode, an ending command indicating this is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. The sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to execute the effect for the opening/closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to various commands received in the opening/closing execution mode. Further, the voice emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding to the command received during the open/close execution mode to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 causes the symbol display device 41 to perform an effect for the opening/closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to various commands received during the opening/closing execution mode. Further, in the special figure special electric power control process, when the opening/closing execution mode is ended, the win/loss lottery mode and the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode correspond to the types of the jackpot result that triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode. Perform the process to set the mode.

After the special figure special power control processing of step S213 is executed in the timer interrupt processing, the universal figure normal power control processing is executed (step S214). In the general/universal/universal electric power control process, a process for obtaining the general/universal-university-side pending information is executed when a prize is paid to the through gate 35, and the general-universal/universal-side pending information is stored. Then, the release information is determined to be released, and the processing for performing the effect for the universal figure is executed when the release determination is triggered. In addition, based on the result of the open determination, a process of opening and closing the universal electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is executed. In this case, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed, and if the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed. Further, in the case of the open/close execution mode, even if the support mode immediately before that is the high frequency support mode, it becomes the low frequency support mode.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, the output information for reflecting the increased/decreased number of the hold information related to the special figure display section 37a in the special figure hold display section 37b is set and The output information for reflecting the increased/decreased number of the hold information on the universal figure display section 38a on the universal figure hold display section 38b is set. Further, in step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, output information for updating the display content of the special figure display portion 37a is set, and the display content of the general figure display portion 38a is set. Set the output information for updating.

After that, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and the payout state receiving process for performing the process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (step S216). Further, the payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S217). Also, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed (step S218). Then, the management output process for outputting the information corresponding to the result of entering the game ball in the game area PA to the management IC 66 is executed (step S219). Details of the management output process will be described later.

Next, in the main CPU 63, based on the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, the second working opening 34 and the through. A configuration for specifying whether or not a game ball enters the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which the detection results of the ball entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a are input to the main CPU 63.

The main CPU 63 has an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that it can simultaneously handle eight types of signals. Areas in which information of "0" or "1" is stored according to the voltage of each signal are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7 are provided as the area. Although more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 63a, the signal group to be input to the input port 63a depends on the driver IC in order to limit the types of signals that are input simultaneously to eight types. It is switched through switching control.

In the incoming ball detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set to the signal group from each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. In such a situation where the setting is made, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electricity detection sensor 45a. , The fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working port detection sensor 46a, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 47a. The 6-bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the 7th bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a.

When the passage of the game ball is not detected, each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a outputs a LOW level signal as a detection signal indicating that the game ball is not being detected, and detects the passage of the game ball. In that case, a HI level signal indicating that the detection is being performed is output as the detection signal. Then, the input port 63a stores "0" information for the corresponding bit when receiving the LOW level signal, and "1" for the corresponding bit when receiving the HI level signal. Stores the information of. That is, in the situation where passage of the game ball is not detected in the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, information "0" corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored for the corresponding bit, and the passage of the game ball is detected. In the detected state, the information of "1" corresponding to the information indicating the detection is stored for the corresponding bit.

FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the incoming ball detection process executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of “0” is stored in the 0th bit D0 is switched to the state in which the information of “1” is stored, one piece is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S301: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S302), and the value of the 10 award ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S303). .. The first output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a should be executed to the management IC 66. It is a flag. The ten prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times the payout of ten game balls should be executed. When the value of the counter for 10 award balls is 1 or more, the 10 award ball command is output to the payout controller 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), and the 10 award balls are paid out. When the command is output once, the value of the counter for 10 prize balls is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of “0” is stored in the first bit D1 is switched to the situation in which the information of “1” is stored, one piece is detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S304: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S305), and the value of the 10 award ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S306). .. The second output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the second bit D2 is switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored, the third winning hole detection sensor 44a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S307: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S308), and the value of the 10 award ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S309). . The third output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a should be executed to the management IC 66. It is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the third bit D3 is switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S310: YES). In this case, the special electricity prize flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S311), and the fourth output flag provided to the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S312). The value of the counter for 15 prize balls provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S313). The special electric prize flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the special electric prize device 32 in the round game in the opening/closing execution mode. In the special map special electric power control processing (step S213) of the timer interruption processing (FIG. 8), by confirming that the special electric prize winning flag is set to "1", one game ball is inserted into the special electric prize winning device 32. It is specified that a ball has occurred, and the remaining possible number of balls to enter the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game is subtracted by one. When the process of subtracting 1 from the number of possible balls to enter is executed, the special electric prize flag is cleared to "0". The fourth output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the special electric power detection sensor 45a should be executed to the management IC 66. .. The counter for 15 prize balls is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that the payout of 15 game balls should be executed. When the value of the counter for 15 prize balls is 1 or more, the 15 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), and the 15 prize balls are also displayed. When the command is output once, the value of the counter for 15 prize balls is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of “0” is stored in the fourth bit D4 is switched to the state in which the information of “1” is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 46a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S314: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S315), and the fifth output flag provided to the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S316). Further, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S317). The first operation prize flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the first operation opening 33. In the special figure special electric power control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), it is confirmed that the first operation winning flag is set to “1”, and thus the result is stored in the holding area RE of the holding storage area 65a. On condition that the number of held information items is less than 4, which is the upper limit number, a process of newly storing the held information items is executed. In the special electric special electric power control processing (step S213), it is confirmed that the first operation winning flag is set to "1", and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0". To do. The fifth output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag. The one prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that one gaming ball should be paid out. When the value of the one prize ball counter is 1 or more, the one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), and the one prize ball is obtained. When the command is output once, the value of the one prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the one prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the fifth bit D5 is switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored, one is detected by the second working port detection sensor 47a. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S318: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S319), and the sixth output flag provided to the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S320). Further, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S321). The second operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the second operation opening 34. In the special figure special electric power control process (step S213) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 8), it is confirmed that the second operation winning flag is set to “1”, and thus the result is stored in the holding area RE of the holding storage area 65a. On condition that the number of held information items is less than 4, which is the upper limit number, a process of newly storing the held information items is executed. In the special electric special electric power control processing (step S213), it is confirmed that the second operation winning flag is set to "1", and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0". To do. The sixth output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the second working opening detection sensor 47a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the sixth bit D6 is switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a. Is detected (step S322: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S323). The seventh output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a should be executed for the management IC 66. is there.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored in the seventh bit D7 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S324: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S325). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the universal communication control process (step S214) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), it is confirmed that the gate winning flag is set to "1", and the universal communication stored in the universal communication holding area 65c is confirmed. A process of storing the numerical information of the current general electric utility article release counter C4 in the general electric power holding area 65c as the general-purpose-side holding information, provided that the number of pieces of the holding information on the side is less than the upper limit number of 4. To execute. It is confirmed that the gate winning flag is set to "1" in the normal/universal control process (step S214), and the gate winning flag is cleared to "0" when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed.

Since the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) is activated in a 4 msec cycle as already described, when the detection of one game ball is started by the one ball detection sensor 42a to 49a, the ball In the situation where the detection sensor 42a to 49a continues to detect the one game ball, the main CPU 63 specifies that the game ball detection sensor 42a to 49a has detected one game ball. Done. Therefore, it suffices if each one of the first to seventh output flags is provided.

Next, the content of processing executed by the payout control device 77 will be described. First, the electrical configurations of the payout control device 77 and various devices that communicate with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 11.

The payout control device 77 includes an MPU 91. The MPU 91 has a payout side ROM 93, a payout side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like, in addition to the payout side CPU 92, which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit.

The payout-side ROM 93 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage and storage (that is, a non-volatile storage means), and is used as a read-only memory. The payout-side ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the payout-side CPU 92 and fixed value data.

The payout side RAM 94 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) such as an SRAM and a DRAM that needs power supply from the outside to retain the storage, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 94 is randomly accessible and has a shorter read time than the payout side ROM 93 when compared with the same data capacity. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data and the like for execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93.

The payout side CPU 92 can perform bidirectional communication with the main side CPU 63. Upon receipt of the prize ball command from the main CPU 63, the payout side CPU 92 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. Further, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the payout of the game balls can be normally performed, and when it is specified that the payout of the game balls is not normally possible, the payout side RAM 94 is displayed. The payout device 76 is stopped even in the situation where the number of unpaid prize balls is stored. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits to the main side CPU 63 a payout restriction command indicating that the normal payout is not possible. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 perform a notification indicating that the payout of gaming balls cannot be normally performed. As described above, the notification command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. As a state in which it is not possible to normally pay out the game balls, the lower plate 56a is filled with the game balls, the tank 75 is not filled with the game balls, and the payout device 76 is provided. Is not operating normally, there is a payout abnormal state, a main body opened state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11, and a front door opened state in which the front door frame 14 is opened from the inner frame 13. .

An unillustrated full tank detection sensor is provided at an intermediate position of the game ball passage leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a, and the detection result of the full tank detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming ball is in a full state when the gaming ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and the state in which the gaming ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor is released. In this case, it is specified that the full tank state has been released.

A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided at an intermediate position of the game ball passage leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that there is no ball when the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball no-detection sensor, and when the state where the game ball is not continuously detected by the no-ball detection sensor is released. Specify that the ball-free state has been released.

The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the game balls paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when the game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. Further, the payout side CPU 92 specifies that the payout detection sensor is in the payout abnormal state when the payout detection sensor does not continuously detect the game ball despite the drive control of the payout device 76 so that the game ball is paid out. , When the state in which the game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is released, it is determined that the payout abnormal state has been released.

A front door opening sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a close detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. In the case of, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when the closing detection signal is received from the front door opening sensor 95, and when the opening detection signal is received from the front door opening sensor 95. The front door frame 14 is specified to be in the open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a front door opening command to the main CPU 63 at the timing specified that the front door frame 14 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the open state to the closed state. The front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at the timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when receiving the front door opening command, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closing state when receiving the front door closing command.

A main body opening sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2 ), and the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body opening sensor 96 sends an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when the closing detection signal is received from the opening sensor 96, and the gaming machine when the opening detection signal is received from the opening sensor 96. It specifies that the main body 12 is in the open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 sends a main body opening command to the main CPU 63 at the timing specified that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at a timing. The main CPU 63 identifies that the gaming machine body 12 is in the open state when receiving the body opening command, and identifies that the gaming machine body 12 is in the closing state when receiving the body closing command.

The timer interrupt process executed by the payout CPU 92 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

First, a full tank process is executed (step S401). In the full tank process, as described above, it is determined whether the tank is full based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor, and when the tank is full, the process for stopping the payout of gaming balls. And sends a command indicating that the tank is full to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the full tank state is released, processing for enabling payout of gaming balls is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the ball non-use process is executed (step S402). In the ball non-use processing, as described above, it is determined whether or not there is no ball based on the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor, and in the case of no ball, the processing for stopping the payout of the game ball Along with the execution, a command indicating that there is no ball is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the non-sphere state is released, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball is executed, and a command indicating that the non-sphere state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the payout abnormality monitoring processing is executed (step S403). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the payout state is abnormal based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and when the payout state is abnormal, the process of stopping the payout of the game ball is executed. At the same time, a command indicating that the payout is in an abnormal state is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Also, when the payout abnormal state is canceled, processing for enabling the payout of gaming balls is executed, and a command indicating that the payout abnormal state has been canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

Then, the front door opening monitoring process is executed (step S404). In the front door opening monitoring process, as described above, it is specified whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state based on the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95, and when the front door frame 14 is in the open state, A process for stopping the payout of the game balls is executed, and a front door opening command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the processing for enabling the payout of the game balls is executed, and the front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the main body opening monitoring process is executed (step S405). In the main body opening monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the game machine main body 12 is in the open state based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96, and when the game machine main body 12 is in the open state, the game ball The process of stopping the payout of the main body is executed and the main body opening command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, processing for enabling the payout of gaming balls is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

Then, the command reading process is executed (step S406). In the command reading process, a process of reading the prize ball command transmitted from the main CPU 63 is executed. Then, the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. Then, after executing the prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S407), the payout device 76 pays out the game balls. The payout control process for controlling the execution of is executed (step S408). In the payout control process, when the unpaid prize ball number information stored in the payout side RAM 94 has a value of 1 or more, the payout device 76 is driven and controlled, and the payout detection sensor detects one game ball. In this case, the value of the prize ball number information is decremented by 1. Then, when the value of the prize ball number information becomes “0”, the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. After that, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed (step S409).

Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal board 97. The external terminal board 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals. Some of the external terminals are electrically connected to the main CPU 63 and some of the external terminals are provided. A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92. Since each of the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 97 in this manner, the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 send information to the hall computer HC as shown in FIG. It is possible to output.

One external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the front door opening sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the main body opening sensor 96. In detail regarding the configuration of this electrical connection, a signal relay board 98 is provided at an intermediate position of a signal path from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92. The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branching from the signal path SL1 directed from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is connected to the external terminal for opening the front door of the external terminal board 97. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the front door of the external terminal board 97. As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without the control of the payout side CPU 92.

For details of the main body opening sensor 96, the signal relay board 98 is provided with a branching path SL4 branched from the signal path SL3 from the main body opening sensor 96 to the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL4 is connected to the external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal board 97. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal board 97. As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without the control of the payout side CPU 92.

Next, the content of the information externally output from the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be described. First, the content of the information externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be described.

In the external information setting process (step S218) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), the main CPU 63 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 in the external terminal board 97. As information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97, information indicating that the open/close execution mode is in effect, information indicating that the support mode is in the high-frequency support mode, and one game time have ended. And a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls from the game area PA through any one of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. The information indicating that the game ball has been discharged, the information indicating that the game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and the information that the game ball has entered the second operating port 34 are included. .

In the external information setting process (step S409) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), the payout side CPU 92 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 92 in the external terminal board 97. As information output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97, information indicating that 10 gaming balls have been paid out is included.

In the hall computer HC, according to various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97, it is possible to grasp the execution mode of payout of the game balls in the pachinko machine 10 or the like. For example,
・The payout rate, which is the ratio of the number of payouts of the game balls generated until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine ・The output in the normal game state that is not the opening/closing execution mode or the high frequency support mode Ball rate (hereinafter, this ball output rate is referred to as "B")
-Ball output rate in open/close execution mode-ball output rate in high-frequency support mode-number of game times executed until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is "S")
B-S x "the number of prize balls for winning in the first working opening 33 and the second working opening 34"
-The number of game balls entering the first operating port 33, which has occurred until 100 game balls have been ejected from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1")
-The number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 that have occurred until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S2")
B-(S1 x "the number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + S2 x "number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")
Is calculated. As a result, it becomes possible to manage the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. The number of prize balls is the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding ball input section.

<Structure for managing the winning mode of the game ball>
Next, a configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball by using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As described above, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 includes the main CPU 63, the main ROM 64, the main RAM 65, and the management IC 66. Further, the MPU 62 includes an I/F 101 and a reading terminal 102 in addition to these.

The I/F 101 is an interface for transmitting/receiving a signal to/from a device external to the MPU 62. The I/F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. The detection result from the sensors such as the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a and the command from the payout side CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I/F 101, and based on the input detection result and the content of the command. As described above, the main CPU 63 executes various processes. Further, when a signal is output to a device such as the drive unit 32b for special electric power as a result of the various processes executed by the main CPU 63, the signal is output through the output port of the I/F 101, and When a command is output to the payout side CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81 as a result of the CPU 63 performing various processes, the command output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101.

The reading terminal 102 is a terminal for electrically connecting the reading device, which is an external device of the pachinko machine 10, to the MPU 62, and is provided such that the connection terminal portion is exposed on the surface of the MPU 62. . However, as already described, the main control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted is housed in the board box 60a, and the reading terminal 102 faces the wall portion of the board box 60a so as not to be exposed to the outside of the main control device 60. ing. Therefore, in order to electrically connect the reading device to the reading terminal 102, it is necessary to open the substrate box 60a and expose the MPU 62. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and an opening for exposing the reading terminal 102 to the outside of the main control device 60 is formed in the substrate box 60a, so that the reading can be performed without destroying the substrate box 60a. The reading device may be electrically connected to the terminal 102.

The management IC 66 includes a management side I/F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117. These devices are connected to each other through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication.

The management-side I/F 111 receives various signals from the main CPU 63 via the signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and the signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. It is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 102 via the interface. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management-side I/F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 102 are output from the output port of the management-side I/F 111. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 via a bidirectional communication signal path group 120 built in the MPU 62.

The management side CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management-side ROM 113 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage and storage (that is, nonvolatile storage means), and is used as a read-only memory. The management-side ROM 113 stores various control programs executed by the management-side CPU 112 and fixed value data. The management side RAM 114 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) such as an SRAM and a DRAM that needs to be supplied with electric power from the outside to retain the storage, and is used for both reading and writing. The management-side RAM 114 is capable of random access and has a shorter read time than the management-side ROM 113 when compared with the same data capacity. The management side RAM 114 temporarily stores various data and the like for execution of the control program stored in the management side ROM 113.

The RTC 115 is a real-time clock, and is configured to constantly measure date information and time information and output the measured date information and time information according to an instruction from the management CPU 112. Note that the RTC 115 is provided with a backup power supply, and it is possible to measure the date information and the time information even while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The correspondence relationship memory 116 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM that requires external power supply for storage and storage (that is, volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence memory 116 stores information on the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111 and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p. Used for. Details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be described later.

The history memory 117 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage and storage (that is, a non-volatile storage unit), and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information regarding the entry of a game ball received from the main CPU 63 through the management-side I/F 111. Details of the contents of the history memory 117 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management-side I/F 111 will be described. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111.

The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a to 122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through the signal paths 118a to 118p, and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p is an input target signal. Is low level, the information of "0" is stored as the first data, and when the signal to be input is the HI level, the information of "1" is stored as the second data. The relationship between the LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

The first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU63 outputs the first signal of the LOW level in the situation where a new game ball has not been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, and one game by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a. When the sphere is detected, the HI level first signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level first signal is input to the first buffer 122a.

The second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a second signal of LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and one game is played by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. When the sphere is detected, the HI level second signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level second signal is input to the second buffer 122b.

The third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a third signal of LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, and one game is played by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. When the sphere is detected, the HI level third signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level third signal is input to the third buffer 122c.

The fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, when the main CPU 63 outputs the fourth signal of the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. And outputs a fourth signal of HI level for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level fourth signal is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

The fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fifth signal in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the first working opening detection sensor 46a, and one game is played by the first working opening detection sensor 46a. When the sphere is detected, the HI level fifth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level fifth signal is input to the fifth buffer 122e.

The sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main side CPU63 outputs the 6th signal of LOW level in the situation where the new game ball is not detected by the second working port detection sensor 47a, and one game is played by the second working port detection sensor 47a. When the sphere is detected, the HI level sixth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level sixth signal is input to the sixth buffer 122f.

The seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level seventh signal in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a, and one game ball is detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a. In that case, the seventh signal of HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level seventh signal is input to the seventh buffer 122g.

An eighth signal corresponding to whether the open/close execution mode is in operation is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal of LOW level in the situation not in the opening/closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the eighth signal of HI level in the situation in the opening/closing execution mode.

The ninth signal corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is in operation is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW-level ninth signal in the situation not in the high-frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the HI-level ninth signal in the situation in the high-frequency support mode.

A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and continues the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. And output.

An output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p for causing the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the trigger for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal in a situation where it is not necessary to output history information, and outputs a HI level output instruction signal for a specific period when history information needs to be output. To do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p.

The eleventh buffer 122k, the twelfth buffer 122l, the thirteenth buffer 122m, the fourteenth buffer 122n, and the fifteenth buffer 122o can input signals from the main CPU 63, but normal signals are not input in the pachinko machine 10. It is blank. As described above, as the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111, the number of buffers 122a to 122p, which are larger than the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 in the pachinko machine 10, are provided. The management IC 66 can be used for a model different from the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66. Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p in a one-to-one correspondence with the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the signal paths 118k to 118o may not be formed between the buffers 122k to 122o to be blanked.

It is decided in the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111, and the management side CPU 112 receives an instruction from the main side CPU 63. Can specify that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and these kinds of signals are instructed by the main CPU 63. As a result, it is specified by the management-side CPU 112. Although the details of the types of these signals in the management-side CPU 112 will be described later, when the control is started in the main-side CPU 63 and the management-side CPU 112 along with the supply of operating power to the MPU 62, the main-side CPU 63 transfers to the management-side CPU 112. This is performed by transmitting the type identification command. In this case, the information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the type of various signals is specified by the management side CPU 112 in a situation where operating power is supplied, The information stored in the correspondence memory 116 is referred to.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. The correspondence relationship memory 116 has first to fifteenth correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o in a one-to-one correspondence with the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111. It is provided.

In the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a. In addition, in the first correspondence area 123a, together with information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31, information on the number of gaming balls paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 (10 pieces) Is stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b. Further, in the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 and information (10 pieces) on the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 are also provided. Is stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c. In addition, in the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 and information (10 pieces) of the number of gaming balls paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 Is stored.

In the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating the special electric prize winning device 32 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 122d. In addition, in the fourth correspondence area 123d, together with information indicating that it is the special electric prize winning device 32, information (15 pieces) on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the special electric prize winning device 32. Is stored. In the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating the first operating port 33 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e. Further, in the fifth correspondence area 123e, together with information indicating that it is the first operating port 33, information on the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the first operating port 33 (1 ) Is also stored. Information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored in the sixth correspondence area 123f as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f. In addition, in the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating that it is the second operation port 34 and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the second operation port 34 (1 ) Is also stored. Information indicating the outlet 24a is stored in the seventh correspondence area 123g as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

In the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating the open/close execution mode is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. Information indicating the high frequency support mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. In the tenth correspondence area 123j, information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j.

In the eleventh correspondence area 123k, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k by the management CPU 112, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any is stored. In the twelfth correspondence area 123l, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l by the management-side CPU 112, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any is stored. In the thirteenth correspondence area 123m, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m by the management CPU 112, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any is stored. In the fourteenth correspondence area 123n, as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any is stored. In the fifteenth correspondence area 123o, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the management side CPU 112, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any is stored.

As described above, what kind of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is specified by the management side CPU 112 by receiving an instruction from the main side CPU 63. The management IC 66 can be used for a model different from the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66.

Further, each time the signal output corresponding to the storage of history information is performed to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, the information for recognizing the signal type is not output, but the signal type is recognized in advance. And the information for specifying the type of the signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o on the management side CPU 112 based on the output information is stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116. It is a configuration. As a result, when the signal output corresponding to the storage of the history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, the information for recognizing the type of the signal is output. The amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 can be suppressed.

In addition, the output of information for specifying the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o by the management-side CPU 112 is performed at the start of supply of operating power. As a result, when the game is started on the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o.

Further, information setting that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p is performed at the design stage of the management IC 66. As a result, the type of signal input to the sixteenth buffer 122p is specified for the output instruction signal that is surely used not only by the pachinko machine 10 but also by another model of the pachinko machine that uses the management IC 66. It is possible to omit the processing for. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the processing for specifying the type of the signal.

Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be described. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117.

The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set in serial numbers, and a history information storage area 125 is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each pointer information. The history information storage area 125 can store a combination of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and an area for storing correspondence information. A data capacity of 1 byte is assigned. When it is necessary to store the correspondence information in accordance with the signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (actually, the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j of the pachinko machine 10) First, the date/time information and the time information measured by the current RTC 115 are stored in the area for storing the RTC information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information which is the current writing target. After that, the correspondence relationship information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the information storage this time is read from the correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o in the correspondence relationship memory 116, and the read correspondence relationship information. Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information which is the current writing target.

Regarding the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, specifically, the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g are input with signals corresponding to the detection results of the ball entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a as described above. Therefore, information corresponding to the types of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116. More specifically, the information corresponding to the type of the ball entering portion corresponding to each of the ball detecting sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a are all for detecting the game balls that have entered the general winning hole 31, these first to third winning holes Information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored in each of the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a. In addition, information indicating that it is the special electricity winning device 32 is stored in the fourth correspondence area 123d, and information indicating that it is the first operation port 33 is stored in the fifth correspondence area 123e. Information indicating the second operating port 34 is stored in the sixth correspondence area 123f, and information indicating the outlet 24a is stored in the seventh correspondence area 123g. When the buffers 122a to 122o that have triggered the information storage this time are any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of the ball entering portion corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is the first to the first. The information on the type of the ball entering portion read out from any of the seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g is stored as it is in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

On the other hand, a signal indicating whether the eighth buffer 122h is in the open/close execution mode is input, a signal indicating whether the ninth buffer 122i is in the high frequency support mode is input, and the tenth buffer 122j is A signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input. Therefore, the eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating the open/close execution mode, the ninth correspondence area 123i stores information indicating the high-frequency support mode, and the tenth correspondence area Information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored in 123j.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level eighth signal in the situation where the open/close execution mode is not set, and continuously outputs the HI level eighth signal in the situation where the open/close execution mode is set. The side CPU 112 identifies that the opening/closing execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and identifies that the opening/closing execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It becomes possible. Then, regardless of whether the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level or when the HI level changes to the LOW level, the management-side CPU 112 generates a trigger to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identify as done. That is, when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the open/close execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h, but also the start information is stored together with the history information storage area 125. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of. Further, when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the open/close execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the end information is recorded together with the history information storage area 125. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW-level ninth signal in the situation where the high-frequency support mode is not set, and continuously outputs the HI-level ninth signal in the situation where the high-frequency support mode is set. The managing CPU 112 identifies that the high frequency support mode is started when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and ends the high frequency support mode when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It becomes possible to specify that it did. Then, regardless of whether the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level or when the HI level changes to the LOW level, the management-side CPU 112 causes the history information storage area 125 to store the correspondence information. Identify as done. That is, when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information is stored together with the history information storage area. It is stored in the area for storing 125 correspondence information. Further, when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the end information together with the history information storage area It is stored in the area for storing 125 correspondence information.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and outputs the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Since the continuous output is performed, the management-side CPU 112 specifies that the front door frame 14 has been opened when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It is possible to specify that the front door frame 14 is closed. Then, both when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the HI level changes to the LOW level, the management-side CPU 112 causes the history information storage area 125 to store the correspondence information. Identify as done. That is, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information is stored together with the history information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the area 125. Further, when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information is stored together with the history information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the area 125.

The history information storage area 125 is capable of storing all history information generated during the 10 consecutive business days during which game balls are continuously emitted from the pachinko machine 10 from opening to closing. It is provided for a few minutes. For example, if history information is generated 60,000 times a day, 600,000 or more history information storage areas 125 are provided. As a result, all history information can be stored and held in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 in addition to the history area 124. The pointer area 126 stores information for the management CPU 112 to specify the pointer information that is the current write target in the history memory 117. Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, the pointer area 126 is set with information designating the pointer information of “0” as a writing target. Then, each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. If the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the last-order pointer information and the last-order pointer information is written, the pointer information of “0” is set as the write target. The information in the usage area 126 is updated. As a result, when the history information storage trigger exceeds the number of history information items that can be stored, new history information is overwritten in order from the history information storage area 125 in which old history information is stored. Become.

Also, when history information is read from the history memory 117 by the reading device, all the history information storage area 125 is cleared to “0” and the pointer information of “0” is set as a write target. The information in the pointer area 126 is updated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information that has once been read from being read again.

Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the processing configuration for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111 and the types of signals in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the recognition process executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 7).

First, "15" is set to the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S501). The recognition output counter indicates the remaining necessary number of information outputs for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize which kind of signal each buffer 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management I/F 111 corresponds to. This is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify. As already described, 15 of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are targets for recognition of signal types, so "15" is set in the recognition output counter.

Then, the output process of the identification start command is executed (step S502). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 so that the management CPU 112 can recognize which type of signal the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o correspond to. When outputting this command, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used. That is, using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management side CPU 112 to store the history information, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a are used. Command output is performed to cause the management CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal corresponds to 122o. This reduces the number of signal paths as compared with a configuration in which a signal path for performing the command output is provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. It becomes possible to simplify the configuration. The identification start command has an 8-bit data capacity, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output process of the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification start command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. Further, the output period of the identification start command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the ninth signal. Has been done. Upon receiving the identification start command, the management-side CPU 112 should start the processing for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals in the correspondence memory 116. Identify.

After that, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). In this case, the first buffer 122a corresponds to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o so that the signal type setting target is first, and then the n+1th buffer is the signal type setting target after the nth buffer. The recognition setting of the signal type to be performed is performed. Therefore, if the recognition output counter is "15" to "13", the type identification command indicating the general winning opening 31 and the number of prize balls is read out, and if the recognition output counter is "12", the special prize winning The type identification command indicating the device 32 and the number of prize balls is read, and if the recognition output counter is “11”, the type identification command indicating the first operation port 33 and the number of prize balls is read. If the recognition output counter is "10", it is the second operation port 34, and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls is read out. If the recognition output counter is "9", it is the out port 24a. The type identification command shown is read out, and if the recognition output counter is "8", the type identification command indicating the open/close execution mode is read out, and if the recognition output counter is "7", it is the high frequency support mode. Is read, and if the recognition output counter is "6", the kind identification command indicating the front door frame 14 is read, and if the recognition output counter is "5" to "1", it is blank. The type identification command indicating that is is read.

Then, the output process of the read type identification command is executed (step S504). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity similarly to the identification start command, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output processing of the identification type command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification type command is started so that the management side CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been transmitted. Further, the output period of the identification type command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification type command and the ninth signal. Has been done. By receiving the identification type command, the management-side CPU 112 responds to the identification type command in the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffer that is the current setting target among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o. Information to be stored.

Then, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S505), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the decrement is 1 is "0" (step S506). When the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S506: NO), the process for outputting the type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtraction of 1 is executed (step S503 and Step S504).

On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S506: YES), the identification end command output process is executed (step S507). The identification end command has an 8-bit data capacity, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the output processing of the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification end command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification end command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. Has been done. Upon receiving the identification end command, the management-side CPU 112 identifies that the process for storing the information on the correspondence relationship between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal type in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is completed. To do.

Next, the management processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is started. The processing speed of the management CPU 112 is faster than that of the main CPU 63, and the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8) is started after the main CPU 63 starts one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8). By the time the process starts, the combination of the processes from step S606 onward in the management process is executed 16 times or more.

When the identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S601: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S602). The setting target counter is a counter for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of the buffers 122a to 122o for which the signal type is set. The first buffer 122a is the target for setting the signal type first, and then the n+1th buffer is the target for setting the signal type after the nth buffer.

After that, on condition that the type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S604). In the correspondence relation setting process, of the first to fifteenth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence relation memory 116, in the correspondence relation area corresponding to the current value of the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114, the type identification received this time is identified. Stores the signal type information set in the command. Then, the value of the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S605).

If a negative determination is made in step S603, or if the processing of step S605 is executed, it is determined whether or not an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606). When the identification end command has not been received (step S606: NO), the process returns to step S603, and on condition that the type identification command is newly received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), steps S604 and S605 are performed. Execute the process again.

When the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the processes of steps S607 and S608 are repeatedly executed. Although details will be described later, in step S607, history setting processing for storing history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117 is executed. In step S608, an external output process for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102, which will be described in detail later, is executed.

FIG. 19 is a time chart showing a state in which information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122o is stored in the correspondence memory 116. 19A shows a period in which a command is output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h), and FIG. 19B shows the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is at the HI level, and FIG. 19C shows the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122o. 19D shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed, and FIG. 19D shows the timing at which the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process (step S604).

As the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. It Further, at the timing of t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 19B. After that, at the timing of t2 in which the output of the identification start command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 19B. The management-side CPU 112 confirms that the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level, thereby specifying that the command is transmitted from the main-side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. The contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped by confirming the information of. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management-side CPU 112 enters the identification state by making a positive determination in step S601 of the management process (FIG. 18). Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG.

Thereafter, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 19A, the output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started. Further, at the timing of t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 19B. After that, at the timing of t5, which is the situation where the output of the type identification command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 19B. The management-side CPU 112 confirms that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, thereby specifying that the command has been transmitted from the main-side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are identified. By confirming the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 is grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the management-side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 19D at the timing of t5. In the correspondence relationship setting process, information indicating the general winning opening 31 and information on the number of prize balls are stored in the first correspondence area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. Then, at the timing of t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG.

Thereafter, at each of the timing from t7 to t9, the timing from t10 to the timing from t12, the timing from t13 to the timing from t15, and the timing from t16 to the timing at t18, similar to the timing from t4 to t6, Correspondence relationship setting processing corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63 is executed by the management side CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting process corresponding to the fifteenth type identification command is completed from the timing t16 to the timing t18.

After that, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 19A, the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started. Further, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 19B, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. After that, at the timing of t20 in which the output of the identification end command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 19B. The management-side CPU 112 confirms that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, thereby specifying that the command has been transmitted from the main-side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are identified. By confirming the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 is grasped. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management-side CPU 112 ends at the timing of t20 as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing of t21, the output of the identification end command is stopped as shown in FIG.

In order to instruct the management-side CPU 112 to trigger the storage of history information, the management-side CPU 112 is configured to recognize whether or not the command is output using the ninth signal as described above. Even if the command is output using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths) used, it is clear to the management CPU 112 that the command is being output. It becomes possible to recognize.

Next, a processing configuration for storing history information in the history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the management output process executed by the main CPU 63. The management output process is executed in step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

First, "10" is set in the managed counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S701). The management target counter specifies, by the main CPU 63, whether or not there is a management target that is not a target for specifying whether or not the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed in this management output process. At the same time, it is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which management target should be changed in the signal output state to the management CPU 112. In one management output process, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed. There are a total of 10 whether the open/close execution mode is executed, the high-frequency support mode is executed, and the front door frame 14 is opened/closed. Therefore, “10” is first set in the managed counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the output state of the signal to the management-side CPU 112 for the management target corresponding to the current value of the management target counter is the HI level (step S702). If it is not at the HI level (step S702: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the managed counter is 4 or more, so that the entry detection sensors 42a having seven managed objects corresponding to the value of the managed counter are detected. To 48a are specified (step S703).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter (step S704). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is “10” and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not the first output flag is set to “1”, When the value of the managed counter is “9” and corresponds to the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the second output flag, and the value of the managed counter is determined. Is “8” and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not the third output flag is set to “1”, and the value of the managed counter is “7”. If it corresponds to the special electric power detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the fourth output flag, the value of the managed counter is "6", and the first working opening detection sensor 46a. If it corresponds to the second output port detection sensor 47a, it is determined whether or not the fifth output flag is set to "1". In this case, it is determined whether or not the sixth output flag is set to "1". If the value of the managed counter is "4" and it corresponds to the outlet 24a, the seventh output flag is set to " It is determined whether "1" is set. As described above, "1" is set to the first to seventh output flags in the incoming ball detection process (FIG. 10).

When "1" is set to the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter (step S704: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals is set to the HI level. Is set (step S705). After that, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S706).

When a negative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether a trigger for switching the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the HI level has occurred (step S707). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is “3”, it is determined whether or not the transition to the open/close execution mode has occurred, and when the value of the managed counter is “2”, it is high. It is determined whether or not the transition to the frequency support mode has occurred, and when the value of the managed counter is "1", it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state. When an affirmative determination is made in step S707, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the HI level (step S708).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined whether or not a trigger for switching the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S709). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is 4 or more and the current management target is any of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals is set. It is determined whether or not the HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the output state of the corresponding signal was switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S607) of the management process (FIG. 18) in the management side CPU 112, and the output of the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level It is a period during which the state can be reliably specified by the management CPU 112. When the value of the managed counter is “3” and the current managed object is the open/close execution mode, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode has ended, and the value of the managed counter is “2”. If the current management target is the high-frequency support mode, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode has ended, the value of the management target counter is “1”, and the current management target is the front door frame 14. In this case, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is closed. When a trigger for switching the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level occurs (step S709: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the LOW level ( Step S710).

If a negative determination is made in step S704, the process of step S706 is executed, a negative determination is made in step S707, the process of step S708 is executed, a negative determination is made in step S709, or When the process of S710 is executed, the value of the managed counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S711). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the managed counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S712). When the value of the management target counter is 1 or more (step S712: NO), the process from step S702 is executed for the management target corresponding to the new management target counter value.

Next, the history setting process executed by the management-side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 18).

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set to the confirmation counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S801). Specifically, of the first to fifteenth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relation memory 116, the number of correspondence relation areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the identification is performed. The information of the number that was set is set in the check target counter. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 stores information other than the information indicating that it is blank in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j, so that "10" is set in the confirmation target counter in step S801. To do.

Then, it is confirmed whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S802). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the check targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “10”, the tenth buffer 122j is the check target of the numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer 122e is the check target of the numerical information. .

When an affirmative determination is made in step S802, the RTC information which is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S803). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S804). In the writing process, the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is referred to identify the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target, and the pointer information corresponds to the writing target pointer information. The RTC information read in step S803 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. If the correspondence information is any one of the information indicating the open/close execution mode, the information indicating the high frequency support mode, and the information indicating the front door frame 14, Not only the correspondence information but also the start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. In addition, when the value of the check target counter is “n”, the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123o is a target for reading correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "10", the tenth correspondence area 123j is the read target of the correspondence information, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence relationship. It is a target for reading information.

When the value of the check target counter is any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 by executing the writing process as described above. In the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the RTC information, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 are stored. And the correspondence relationship information indicating that it is any of the above is stored as history information. Further, when the value of the check target counter is one of the open/close execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. A combination of the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the correspondence information indicating any one of the front door frames 14 and the start information is stored as history information.

After that, the update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S805). In the updating process, the numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

If a negative determination is made in step S802, or if the process of step S805 is executed, it is determined whether the signal output has been switched to the LOW level in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter. It is determined whether or not the correspondence information to be confirmed is stored (step S806). Specifically, when the current value of the check target counter is "8" to "10", the corresponding correspondence areas 123h to 123j have the information indicating the open/close execution mode and the high frequency support mode. Since either the information indicating that there is the information or the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored, a positive determination is made in step S806.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S806, the numerical value information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is changed from "1" to "0". By checking whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the HI level to the LOW level (step S807). If an affirmative decision is made in step S807, the RTC information is read out (step S808), as in step S803, and write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S809). In the writing process, the RTC information read in step S808 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information that is the writing target. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, not only the correspondence information but also the end information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this way, when the value of the confirmation target counter is one of the open/close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the pointer information corresponding to the writing target is dealt with. In the history information storage area 125, a combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating any one of the opening/closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, and the end information is stored as history information. It will be in the state of being. After that, similar to step S805, the target pointer update processing is executed (step S810).

If a negative determination is made in step S806, a negative determination is made in step S807, or the process of step S810 is executed, the value of the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S811). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S812). If the value of the check target counter is 1 or more (step S812: NO), the process from step S802 is executed on the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

Next, how the history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 22A shows a period in which the HI level signal is input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and FIG. 22B shows the eighth buffer 122h in which the HI level signal is input. 22C shows a period in which a HI level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 22D shows a HI level signal in the tenth buffer 122j. 22E shows the period, and FIG. 22E shows the timing of writing history information to the history memory 117.

At the timing of t1, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g is switched from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. Therefore, history information is written in the history memory 117 at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the signal switched to the HI level at the timing of t1 is switched to the LOW level as shown in FIG. However, since the signal is a signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and the switching of the LOW level is not a target for storing history information, the timing of t2 in FIG. As shown in e), writing of history information is not executed.

After that, at each of the timing of t3, the timing of t5, the timing of t6, the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. The output state of the signal input to any of .about.122g is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, at each of these timings, the history information is written as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 22B, the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h becomes the HI level from the timing of t4 to the timing of t7. The eighth buffer 122h corresponds to the presence/absence of the open/close execution mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22E, the timing t4, which is the timing when the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t7. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t4 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing of t7 includes end information. As a result, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, the execution period of the open/close execution mode can be grasped.

Further, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, or the second operating opening 34 is in the opening/closing execution mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34 can be obtained. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has entered is in the opening/closing execution mode.

As illustrated in FIG. 22C, the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i becomes the HI level from the timing t8 to the timing t11. The ninth buffer 122i corresponds to the presence/absence of occurrence of the high frequency support mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22E, the timing t8, which is the timing when the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t11. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t8 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing of t11 includes end information. As a result, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, the execution period of the high frequency support mode can be grasped.

Further, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, history information indicating that a ball has entered into any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is displayed even in the high-frequency support mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34 can be obtained. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has entered is in the high frequency support mode.

As illustrated in FIG. 22D, the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j becomes the HI level from the timing t12 to the timing t15. The tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22E, the timing t12, which is the timing when the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing of t15. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t12 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing of t15 includes end information. As a result, by confirming the history information in the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

Further, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, history information indicating that a ball has entered into any one of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is opening the front door frame 14. It is possible to distinguish whether or not it is. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34 can be obtained. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has entered the car is during opening of the front door frame 14.

Next, a processing configuration for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the data output processing executed by the main CPU 63. The data output process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 7).

In the data output process, first, it is determined whether or not a connection signal indicating that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is received from the reading terminal 102 (step S901). The reading device is configured to output a connection signal when electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and when the reading signal is received through the reading terminal 102, an affirmative determination is made in step S901. do.

When a negative determination is made in step S901, this data output processing is ended as it is. In this case, in order to execute the data output process, it is necessary to restart the supply of operating power to the MPU 62. Thus, in order to output the history information to the outside, it is necessary to start supplying the operating power to the MPU 62 with the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. . Since the power supply operation unit for performing the stop operation and the start operation of the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is provided on the back surface of the back pack unit 15, the outer frame 11 is required to perform the stop operation and the start operation. It is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 to expose the back surface of the back pack unit 15. Under such circumstances, in order to output the history information to the outside, it is necessary to start supplying the operating power to the MPU 62 with the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the operation of reading the history information, even if the person other than the game hall manager performs the operation.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S901, it is determined whether or not a control information confirmation signal has been received from the reading terminal 102, so that the current connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is the main ROM 64. It is determined whether or not the control information (program and data) is confirmed (step S902). The reading device has a configuration capable of confirming both control information and history information. When the confirmation of the control information is selected by manual operation on the reading device, the reading device confirms the control information. A signal is transmitted, and when confirmation of history information is selected by a manual operation on the reading device, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the reading device. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the control information confirmation reading device and the history confirmation reading device may be separate. In this case, when a reading device for confirming control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, a signal for confirming control information is transmitted from the reading device and the reading terminal 102 reads for history confirmation. When the device is electrically connected, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the reading device.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S902, an output process for confirming control information is executed (step S903). In the output process, a program and data are read as control information from the main ROM 64, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible for the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 to read the control information, and confirm whether the control information is authentic or normal. Will be possible.

When a negative determination is made in step S902, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management side CPU 112 (step S904). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from LOW level to HI level. This HI level output state continues for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p. When the output state of the output instruction signal is switched to the HI level, the management side CPU 112 executes the process for outputting the history information. The process will be described in detail later.

When the process of step S903 is executed or the process of step S904 is executed, it is determined whether or not the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is continued (step S905). If it is continued (step S905: YES), the process stands by in step S905. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed until the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released. When the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released (step S905: NO), this data output process ends.

Next, the external output process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 18).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1001: YES), processing for outputting history information after step S1002 is executed. Specifically, first, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 in which the correspondence information indicating the outlets 24a is stored, The number of entered balls is calculated (step S1002). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the entry into the general winning opening 31 is achieved. The number is calculated (step S1003). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the corresponding relationship information indicating the special electric prize winning device 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the special electric prize winning device 32 can enter the ball. The number is calculated (step S1004). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the corresponding relationship information indicating the first operation port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the first operation port 33 is stored. The number of entered balls is calculated (step S1005). Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 in which the corresponding relationship information indicating the second operation ports 34 is stored, The number of entered balls is calculated (step S1006).

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relationship indicating the front door frame 14 are stored. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in a period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the out door generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34, respectively, the number of balls entered is calculated (step S1007). A history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and The period between the end information and the history information storage area 125 is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. Further, in the entire pointer information that is the serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relation indicating the front door frame 14 are stored. When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the total number of balls entered is calculated. Further, although the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored exists, the RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is present. If the correspondence information and the start information indicating the front door frame 14 are not stored in the history information storage area 125 in which is stored, the correspondence information and the start information indicating the front door frame 14 are stored. The history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as if the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

Then, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1002 to S1007 (step S1008). Specifically, first, the number of incoming balls calculated during the opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1007 is subtracted from the number of incoming balls calculated in each of steps S1002 to S1006. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the respective numbers of incoming balls after the subtraction. In addition, the difference between the number of incoming balls calculated in step S1002 and the number of incoming balls of the outlet 24a calculated in step S1007 is defined as the number of incoming balls K1, and the number of incoming balls calculated in step S1003 is calculated in step S1007. The difference in the number of entered balls of the general winning opening 31 is defined as the number of entered balls K2, and the difference in the number of entered balls of the special electric prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of entered balls is defined as the number of entered balls K3, The difference between the number of entered balls calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of entered balls calculated in step S1005 is defined as the number of entered balls K4, and the number of entered balls calculated in step S1006 is calculated in step S1007. The difference in the number of entered balls at the second working port 34 is defined as the number of entered balls K5.
・First parameter: Total number of game balls to be paid out (K2דNumber of prize balls for winning in the general winning hole 31”+K3דNumber of prize balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32”+K4דFirst working hole The ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as “the number of prize balls for winning the prize in 33”+K5דthe number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)/ "D1")
-Second parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls K2 into the general winning opening 31 / the total number of game balls (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) discharged from the game area PA-Third parameter: game balls to the special prize winning device 32 Of the total number of entered balls K3/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5)-Fourth parameter: Total number of entered game balls into the first working port 33 K4/discharged from the game area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D2”)
・Fifth parameter: ratio of total number of game balls K5 entering second operation port 34/total number of game balls discharged from game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D3”)
-Sixth parameter: D1-(D2 x "number of prize balls for winning in first working port 33" + D3 x "number of prize balls for winning in second working port 34")
-Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning in second working port 34")/total payout number of game balls (K2 x "general "Number of prize balls for winning in prize hole 31" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for prize in first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34" 8th parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" / total payout number of game balls (K2 x for winning in general winning hole 31) "Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34" )) ratio thereafter, using the oldest RTC information and the newest RTC information in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the total required to extract all the history information targeted for the calculation this time. The time is calculated (step S1009). Then, the first output process is executed (step S1010). In the first output processing, all history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. The various parameters calculated in step S1008 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102, and the total time calculated in step S1009 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads each piece of information that is the output target in the first output process.

Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the end information and the history information storage area 125, the outlet 24a and the general winning opening 31 generated in the opening/closing execution mode are referred to. , The special electric prize winning device 32, the first actuation opening 33 and the second actuation opening 34, respectively, the number of balls entered is calculated (step S1011). A history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and correspondence information and end information indicating the open/close execution mode. The period between the history information storage area 125 and the history information storage area 125 is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the total number of entered balls for the section is calculated. Further, although there is the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and the start information are stored, the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored. When the stored history information storage area 125 does not store the correspondence information and the start information indicating the open/close execution mode, the correspondence information and the start information indicating the open/close execution mode are stored. All history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as in the open/close execution mode.

Then, during the period of the opening/closing execution mode specified in step S1011, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the opening 24a generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state. The number of balls entering each of the second working ports 34 is calculated (step S1012). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as in the case of step S1007, except that the period of the opening/closing execution mode specified in step S1011 is premised.

Then, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1011 and S1012 (step S1013). Specifically, first, the number of incoming balls generated during the opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1012 is subtracted from each number of incoming balls calculated in step S1011. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the respective numbers of incoming balls after the subtraction. The difference in the number of balls entered into the outlet 24a calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls entered into the outlet 24a calculated in step S1011 is defined as the number of entered balls K11. The difference in the number of balls of the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of balls entered K12, and the special prize winning device calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls of the special prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1011. The difference in the number of entered balls of 32 is K13, and the difference in the number of entered balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of entered balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1011 is entered. The number K14 is defined as the number K14, and the difference between the number of balls entered in the second operation port 34 calculated in step S1011 and the number of balls entered in the second operation port 34 is set as number K15.
Eleventh parameter: total payout number of game balls (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning in general prize hole 31" + K13 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K14 x "first operating port 33" The ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is "D11")
・Twelfth parameter: ratio of total number of game balls K12 to the general winning opening 31/total number of game balls (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) discharged from the game area PA. ・Thirteenth parameter: game ball to the special prize winning device 32. Of the total number of entered balls K13/the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15)-Fourteenth parameter: The total number of entered balls K14 into the first operation port 33/discharged from the game area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D12”)
Fifteenth parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls K15 entering the second operation port 34/the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D13”)
-Sixteenth parameter: D11-(D12 x "number of prize balls for winning in first operating port 33" + D13 x "number of prize balls for winning in second operating port 34")
Seventeenth parameter: (K13 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning in the second working port 34")/total payout number of gaming balls (K12 x "general "Number of prize balls for winning in prize hole 31" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of prize balls for winning in first working port 33" + K15 x "Second working port 34" 18th parameter: K13 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" / total payout number of gaming balls (K12 x for winning in general winning hole 31) “Number of prize balls”+K13דNumber of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32”+K14דNumber of prize balls for winning in first operating port 33”+K15דNumber of prize balls for winning in second operating port 34” )) After that, the second output process is executed (step S1014). In the second output processing, various parameters calculated in step S1013 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads each piece of information that is the output target in the second output process.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relationship indicating the high frequency support mode. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in a period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the outlet 24a generated in the high frequency support mode, The number of balls entered into each of the winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1015). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and The period between the end information and the history information storage area 125 is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. Further, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relation indicating the high frequency support mode. When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the total number of balls entered is calculated. Further, although there is the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored, the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is present. If the correspondence information and the start information indicating the high frequency support mode are not stored in the history information storage area 125 in which is stored, the correspondence information and the start information indicating the high frequency support mode are stored. All history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as in the high frequency support mode.

After that, during the period of the high-frequency support mode specified in step S1015, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, and the first operating opening 33 that are generated when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Then, the number of balls entering each of the second operation ports 34 is calculated (step S1016). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as the case of step S1007, except that the period of the high frequency support mode specified in step S1015 is assumed.

Then, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1015 and S1016 (step S1017). Specifically, first, the number of incoming balls generated during opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1016 is subtracted from each number of incoming balls calculated in step S1015. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the respective numbers of incoming balls after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entered into the outlet 24a calculated in step S1015 and the number of balls entered into the outlet 24a calculated in step S1016 is defined as the number of entered balls K21, and the number of the general winning openings 31 calculated in step S1015 is calculated. The difference in the number of balls of the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of balls entered K22, and the special prize winning device calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls of the special prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1015. The difference in the number of entered balls of 32 is defined as the number of entered balls K23, and the difference in the number of entered balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of entered balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1015 is entered. The number K24 is defined as the number K24, and the difference between the number of balls entered in the second working port 34 calculated in step S1015 and the number of balls entered in the second working port 34 is set as number K25.
21st parameter: total payout number of game balls (K22 x "number of prize balls for winning in general prize hole 31" + K23 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K24 x "first operating port 33" Ratio of the number of prize balls for winning the prize”+K25דnumber of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34)/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is “ D11")
-Twenty-second parameter: ratio of total number of game balls K22 to the general winning opening 31 / total number of game balls (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) discharged from the game area PA-Twenty-third parameter: game ball to special prize winning device 32 Ratio of the total number of entered balls K23/the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25)-The 24th parameter: the total number of entered game balls K24 into the first operating port 33/discharged from the game area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D22”)
Twenty-fifth parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls K25 entering the second operation port 34/the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D23”)
-Twenty-sixth parameter: D21-(D22 x "number of prize balls for winning in first operating port 33" + D23 x "number of prize balls for winning in second operating port 34")
After that, the third output processing is executed (step S1018). In the third output processing, various parameters calculated in step S1017 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads each piece of information to be output in the third output process. Then, a clear process is executed (step S1019). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is all cleared to "0" and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is in the initialized state.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

Since the game ball is paid out when the game ball enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, the player is required to play one of these entering portions. A game will be played while expecting a game ball to enter. In the configuration, a game ball enters the any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 (hereinafter, also referred to as a history target entering portion). If the occurrence occurs, the history information corresponding to it will be stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can store and hold information for managing the number of game balls or the frequency of game balls entering each history-targeted ball entering unit, and use this managed information. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the entering mode of the game ball into each history target entering part. Further, by storing and holding the history information in the pachinko machine 10 itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification.

All of the ball-in units that discharge the game balls from the game area PA are targets for execution of the history information storage processing and targets for management using the history information. As a result, it becomes possible to manage the ball entry frequency for any history-target ball entry section by using the history information. Further, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering each history target ball portion to the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA using history information.

The history information includes RTC information, which is information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the history-targeted ball entering portion that has caused the history information to be stored. Thereby, by using the history information, it becomes possible to grasp the entry history of the game ball into the history-target entry portion in detail.

In the history memory 117, not only history information corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the history target entry portion, but also history information indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, and the high frequency support mode in effect. The history information indicating whether or not and the history information indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open are stored. As a result, it is possible to manage whether or not the game sphere enters the history target ball-in part by distinguishing whether or not each of these situations is present.

It is possible to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to a reading device which is a device outside the pachinko machine 10. With this, it becomes possible to read the history information with the reading device and analyze the entering mode of the game ball into the history target entering part by using the read history information.

The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 102, and a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 can read a program from the main ROM 64. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the program is normal. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is externally output using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program. This makes it possible to output history information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

The information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is specified as a program or history information, and the information on the side corresponding to the specified result is externally output through the reading terminal 102. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the history information is externally output using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program, it is determined whether the information to be externally output is the program or the history information. It is specified on the side, and the specified information is output to the outside. Therefore, it is possible to read out only the necessary information even if the reading terminal 102 is also used.

Based on the information received from the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, it is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is the program or the history information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the configuration regarding selection of information to be output to the outside from becoming complicated.

An MPU 62 having a main ROM 64 that stores a program in advance has a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 102. As a result, the signal paths for the reading terminal 102 can be integrated in the MPU 62. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the reading terminal 102.

A main CPU 63 that executes a process for paying out a game ball based on a game ball entering any of the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. A management CPU 112 is provided separately from the management CPU 112, and the management CPU 112 executes processing for storing history information in the history memory 117. As a result, it is possible to manage the entry mode of the game ball into each history target entry part while preventing the processing load of the main CPU 63 from increasing extremely.

The main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 uses the signal paths corresponding to the detection results of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a and the signal paths corresponding to the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, respectively, to buffer the input port 121 of the management IC 66. 122a to 122g. As a result, the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 corresponds to each of the buffers 122a to 122g (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible to do.

The main CPU 63 has information corresponding to whether the open/close execution mode is in effect, information corresponding to whether the high frequency support mode is in effect, and information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is open. Is transmitted to each of the buffers 122h to 122j of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using the signal paths corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the type of information corresponding to each of these situations corresponds to each buffer 122h to 122j (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management side CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible.

The main CPU 63 transmits to the management CPU 112 correspondence information indicating which type of information each of the buffers 122a to 122j (that is, each of the signal paths 118a to 118j) corresponds to. This eliminates the need to store the correspondence information in the management IC 66 in advance. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. As a result, in a situation in which a game ball may enter the history-targeted ball entrance portion, the management IC 66 can specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history-targeted ball entrance portion. It becomes possible to become.

Correspondence relationship information is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 by using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the history target ball entry unit. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with the configuration in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting the correspondence information is provided.

The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and the correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. As a result, each time the main CPU 63 transmits the information of the detection result of each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a, the information that enables the management IC 66 to identify the history target entrance part corresponding to the information of the transmission target. Eliminates the need to provide. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the detection result of each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main CPU 63.

Information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102 when the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is switched from LOW level to HI level. In this case, the management-side CPU 112 can specify that the signal path corresponding to the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal, without receiving the correspondence information from the main-side CPU 63. . This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the transmission of the correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

The management IC 66 is provided with buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63, the number of which is larger than the number of types of information required to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Has been. As a result, even when the number of types of the information increases or decreases depending on the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to deal with it without changing the configuration related to the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

When the history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102, each history information includes correspondence information indicating the type of the history-target ball entrance portion corresponding to the history information. As a result, it is possible to specify the entry mode of the game ball into each history target entry part by using the read history information.

By using the history information stored in the history memory 117 in the management IC 66, various parameters (first to eighth, 11 to 18, 21-26 parameters) are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible to externally output various parameters that are the results of calculation using the history information.

Various parameters are calculated with the history information corresponding to the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is excluded. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. In addition, various parameters corresponding to the open/close execution mode and the high-frequency support mode are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to understand the entering mode of the game ball according to each situation.

When various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing the clear process of the history memory 117. As a result, the history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117 becomes a storage target in the history memory 117, and the history information that should normally be stored and retained is erased by overwriting. It becomes possible to make it difficult to generate.

When outputting various parameters to the reading terminal 102, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is also output to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to refer not only to the various parameters but also to the history information that is the basis of the calculation of the various parameters when reading the various parameters and analyzing the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA.

The management-side CPU 112 calculates various parameters when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of calculating various parameters.

When the main CPU 63 specifies that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and when the information of the output instruction is transmitted from the main CPU 63, various parameters are calculated by the management IC 66. , Various parameters of the calculation result are output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, various parameters can be output to the reading device outside the pachinko machine 10 based on the instruction from the main CPU 63.

Whether or not the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is specified by a process executed by the main CPU 63 at the time of starting the supply of operating power, and the reading device is electrically connected. If is specified, the output instruction information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Thereby, in the situation where the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being executed by the main CPU 63 or the like, that is, before the normal processing for advancing the game in the main CPU 63 is started, various The parameter calculation and the external output of various parameters as the calculation result are completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the calculation results from being performed in a situation in which the game ball may enter the history target ball entering portion, and the processing load of the management IC 66 is reduced. It is possible to reduce.

When the game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, an external output corresponding to that is performed through the external terminal board 97, and history information is stored in the history memory 117. . With this, by using the information output to the outside through the external terminal board 97, the history while easily grasping the number and the frequency of entering the game balls into the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 By using the history information stored in the memory 117 for use, it is possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls and the frequency of entering the game balls into the history target ball entering unit.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management-side I/F 111, the type of the signal to be input, which has been determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, is the above-mentioned type. This is different from the first embodiment. Further, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 for causing the management CPU 112 to specify the type of the input signal is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same kind of signal as that of the first embodiment is input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the 16th buffer 122p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. Two signals are input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning hole detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric power detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A signal is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working opening detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working opening detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. The sixth signal is input, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the open/close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as the eighth signal, and the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as the ninth signal. Although the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, the buffers to which these signals are input are different in the present embodiment. Specifically, the signal corresponding to the open/close execution mode is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m as the open/close execution mode signal, and the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n as the high frequency support mode signal. The signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o as a door opening signal.

An open/close execution mode signal is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, a high-frequency support mode signal is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n, a door opening signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o, and It is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p, and the management CPU 112 receives these instructions from the 13th to 16th buffers 122m to 122p without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. It is possible to specify that each of the above-mentioned signals corresponding to each is input. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and these kinds of signals are instructed by the main CPU 63. As a result, it is specified by the management-side CPU 112. The process for specifying the type of the signal is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the recognition processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 7) as in the first embodiment.

First, "12", which is the number of the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l to be the target of signal type recognition, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1101). After that, the output processing of the identification start signal is executed (step S1102). In the output process, output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open/close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode input signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n. Is set to the HI level, the output of the identification start signal is started. The period in which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output states of these signals.

After that, the information on the output count corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read output count information is set in the output counter provided in the main RAM 65 ( Step S1103). The output number counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the output number of the type identification signal.

In the present embodiment, when making the management side CPU 112 recognize the types of signals input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l, the number of prize balls set for the ball entering portion corresponding to the signal type. And the type identification signal is output the same number of times as. The management-side CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal is received for each of the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l in the first to twelfth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence relation memory 116. . That is, the type of the signal input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l is grasped as the number of prize balls set for the ball entering portion corresponding to the type of the signal.

In step S1103, if the value of the recognition output counter is any of "12", "11" and "10", "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the general winning opening 31 is set in the output number counter. . When the value of the recognition output counter is "9", "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32 is set in the output counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "8", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operating port 33 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "7", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second operating port 34 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the output counter for recognition is “6”, the payout of the game ball is not executed even though the game ball enters the out port 24a although it corresponds to the out port 24a. Therefore, the output number counter Set "0" to. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is any of "5" to "1", the corresponding ball entry portion does not exist and is blank, so "0" is set to the output number counter.

Then, the output process of the start trigger signal is executed (step S1104). In the output process, the output of the start trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to the HI level. The period in which the first signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

After that, on the condition that the value of the output counter of the main RAM 65 is not "0" (step S1105: YES), that is, on the condition that a value of 1 or more is set on the output counter in step S1103, It proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, output processing of the type identification signal is executed. In the output process, the output of the type identification signal is started by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to the HI level. The period in which the second signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

After that, the value of the output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1107), and it is determined whether or not the value of the output counter after the decrement is 1 is "0" (step S1108). When the value of the output counter is 1 or more (step S1108: NO), the process returns to step S1106.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1105, or if an affirmative decision is made in step S1108, output processing of the termination trigger signal is executed (step S1109). In the output process, the output of the termination trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to the HI level. The period in which the third signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

Then, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1110), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the decrement is 1 is "0" (step S1111). When the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S1111: NO), the process returns to step S1103 to execute the process for recognizing the type of the signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtraction by one. To do.

On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S1111: YES), the output process of the identification end signal is executed (step S1112). In the output process, the output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open/close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high-frequency support mode input signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n. Is set to the HI level, the output of the identification end signal is started. The period in which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output states of these signals.

Next, the management processing executed in the management CPU 112 in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The management process is started when the supply of the operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is started as in the first embodiment.

When the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S1201: YES), the value of the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S1202). After that, on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES), the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether or not the type identification signal is received from the main CPU 63. When the type identification signal is received (step S1204: YES), the value of the reception number counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1205). The reception counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify the number of times the type identification signal is received from the main CPU 63. The value of the reception number counter is cleared to "0" when a positive determination is made in step S1203.

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, or if the processing of step S1205 is executed, it is determined whether or not an end trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1206). When the termination trigger signal is not received (step S1206: NO), the process returns to step S1204, and when the termination trigger signal is received (step S1206: YES), the correspondence relationship setting process is executed (step S1207). In the correspondence relation setting process, among the first to twelfth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence relation memory 116, the correspondence relation area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 is set in the reception number counter. Stores the specified value. In this case, "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the general winning opening 31 is set in the first correspondence area 123a, the second correspondence area 123b, and the third correspondence area 123c, and the fourth correspondence area 123d is set. Is set to “15” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first working port 33 is set to the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence relationship In the area 123f, "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second working port 34 is set. Further, "0" is set in the seventh to twelfth correspondence areas 123g to 123l. After that, the value of the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1208).

When a negative determination is made in step S1203 or when the processing of step S1208 is executed, it is determined whether or not the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S1209). When the reception of the identification end signal has not ended (step S1209: NO), the process returns to step S1203, and on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES), the processes of step S1204 and thereafter are executed. Run. When the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S1209: YES), the history setting process of step S1210 and the external output process of step S1211 are repeatedly executed.

FIG. 28 is a time chart showing a state in which information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l is stored in the correspondence memory 116. 28A shows a period during which the output state of the first signal is at the HI level, FIG. 28B shows a period during which the output state of the second signal is at the HI level, and FIG. ) Indicates a period during which the output state of the third signal is at the HI level, FIG. 28(d) indicates a period during which the output state of the signal in the open/close execution mode is at the HI level, and FIG. FIG. 28(f) shows a period in which the output state of the signal in the high frequency support mode is at the HI level. FIG. 28(f) shows the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l. 28G shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed, FIG. 28G shows the timing when the value of the reception counter of the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1, and FIG. The timing at which the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process (step S1207) is shown.

As the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 28(a), 28(d) and 28(e), the first signal The output states of the open/close execution mode signal and the high-frequency support mode signal are changed from the LOW level to the HI level. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Then, at the timing of t2, the output states of the first signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t2, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative decision in step S1201 of the management process (FIG. 27), and the identification state is entered as shown in FIG. 28(f).

After that, from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management-side CPU 112. Then, from the timing t5 to the timing t7, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28(b). As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management-side CPU 112. In this case, the value of the reception number counter of the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG.

After that, from the timing of t8 to the timing of t10, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28(c). As a result, the termination trigger signal is output to the management-side CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t9, the management side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. Since the value of the reception number counter is “1” at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, the correspondence information “1” is set as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116 to be set this time. Information is stored.

After that, from the timing t11 to the timing t12, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management-side CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(b), the timings of t13 to t15, t16 timing to t18 timing, t19 timing to t21 timing, and t22 timing to t24 timing are changed as shown in FIG. The output state of the signal is maintained at the HI level. As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management-side CPU 112 once. In this case, the value of the reception number counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 28G at each of the timing t14, the timing t17, the timing t20, and the timing t23.

After that, from the timing of t25 to the timing of t27, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28(c). As a result, the termination trigger signal is output to the management-side CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t26, the management side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. Since the value of the reception number counter is “10” at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, “10” is set as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123 a to 123 l of the current setting target in the correspondence memory 116. Information is stored.

After that, at the timing of t28, the output states of the third signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are LOW, as shown in FIGS. 28(c), 28(d), and 28(e). Level is changed to HI level. As a result, the main CPU 63 starts outputting the identification end signal to the management CPU 112. After that, at the timing of t29, the output states of the third signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t29, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative decision in step S1209 of the management process (FIG. 27), so that the identification state is canceled as shown in FIG. 28(f).

Note that, in the present embodiment, since the information on the number of prize balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is stored in the history information, and the prize balls corresponding to the ball-entering portion that triggered the storage of the history information. Information on the number of pieces is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, when there are a plurality of types of ball entry parts having the same number of prize balls, the ball entry parts cannot be distinguished in the history information. Specifically, since the number of prize balls in each of the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is one, it is possible to distinguish the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the history information. Can not. In such a situation, the number of prize balls of the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 may be different. This makes it possible to distinguish the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the history information even if the history information is stored as in the second embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, “15” is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 in step S801 of the history setting process. As a result, all the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are to be confirmed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the output instruction signal, but also information corresponding to whether the open/close execution mode is in effect, information corresponding to whether the high frequency support mode is in effect, and the front door Regarding the information corresponding to whether or not the frame 14 is open, the management CPU 112 can specify that the signal path corresponds to the information without receiving the correspondence information from the main CPU 63. Has become. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection result of each of the ball entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is the information required to cause the management CPU 112 to recognize the correspondence between each information and each signal path 118a to 118g. Become. When causing the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the correspondence information, the same number of pulse signals as the number of prize balls corresponding to each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is transmitted from the main-side CPU 63 to the management-side CPU 112 using the second signal. Is output to. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration related to the transmission of the correspondence information.

<Third Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the calculation of various parameters using history information is executed. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 29 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in this embodiment. The management IC 66 is provided with a management side I/F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence relationship memory 116, and a history memory 117, as in the first embodiment. These functions are the same as those in the first embodiment.

In addition to the above, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131. In the present embodiment, as will be described in detail later, when a calculation trigger occurs, various parameters are calculated by the management-side CPU 112 using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. Then, the calculated various parameters are sequentially stored in the calculation result memory 131. The various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102.

The timing for calculating various parameters occurs before the timing when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. As a result, it is possible to make the timing of calculating various parameters different from the timing of external output to the reading device, and it is possible to disperse the processing load.

Further, since the calculation result memory 131 for storing the calculation results of various parameters is provided, not only various parameters for one calculation occasion but also various parameters for multiple calculation occasions are collected. It becomes possible to remember. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time required to calculate various parameters at each calculation trigger.

FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same type of signal as that of the first embodiment is input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. Two signals are input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning hole detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric power detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A signal is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. The sixth signal is input, the seventh buffer 122g is input with the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a, the eighth buffer 122h is input with the signal corresponding to the open/close execution mode, and the ninth signal is input. A signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the buffer 122i, a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the various signals described above, a calculation instruction signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o. The calculation instruction signal is a signal output from the main CPU 63 in order to provide the management CPU 112 with a calculation trigger for various parameters. Input of the operation instruction signal to the fifteenth buffer 122o is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, similarly to input of the output instruction signal to the sixteenth buffer 122p, and an instruction from the main CPU 63 is given. Without receiving this, the management-side CPU 112 can specify that the respective signals corresponding to the 15th to 16th buffers 122o to 122p are input. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and these kinds of signals are instructed by the main CPU 63. As a result, it is specified by the management-side CPU 112. The process for specifying the type of the signal is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

Next, a processing configuration for causing the management-side CPU 112 to execute calculation of various parameters in response to the occurrence of a calculation trigger will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a power failure information storage process executed by the main CPU 63. The power failure information storage process is executed in step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

In the power failure information storage processing, when the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power shutdown is received from the power failure monitoring board 67 (step S1301: YES), the calculation instruction signal output processing is executed (step S1302). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level. After that, after the power failure process is executed in step S1303, an infinite loop is formed, and the operation waits until the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is completely stopped. In the power failure process, "1" is set to the power failure flag of the main RAM 65, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a power failure handling process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the power failure handling process is configured to be executed after the external output process in the management process (FIG. 18), and in the management process, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), step S607. The history setting process, the external output process in step S608, and the power failure handling process are repeatedly executed in this order.

In the power failure handling process, when the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes the HI level (step S1401: YES), the external output in the first embodiment is performed in steps S1402 to S1406. Similar to steps S1002 to S1006 of the processing (FIG. 24), the number of balls entered for each of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33 and the second working opening 34 is calculated. .. Further, in step S1407, similarly to step S1007 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the number of various balls entered when the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. Further, in step S1408, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1008 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, and in step S1409, external output for the first embodiment is performed. Similar to step S1009 of the process (FIG. 24), the total time is calculated. Then, the information of the calculation result of step S1408 and the information of the calculation result of step S1409 are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1410). In this case, when the information of another operation result is already stored in the operation result memory 131, the operation result information should be written so as not to overwrite the already stored operation result information. To do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are added to the information of the calculation result which is written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the operation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

Thereafter, in step S1411, similar to step S1011 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the number of various incoming balls in the opening/closing execution mode is calculated, and in step S1412, the first Similar to step S1012 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the embodiment, the number of various balls entered in the open/close execution mode and the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. Further, in step S1413, various parameters are calculated as in step S1013 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Then, the information of the calculation result of step S1414 is written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1414). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are added to the information of the calculation result which is written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the operation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

After that, in step S1415, as in step S1015 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the number of various incoming balls in the high frequency support mode is calculated, and in step S1416, the above-mentioned first number is entered. Similar to step S1016 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, various numbers of incoming balls in the high-frequency support mode and the front door frame 14 is open are calculated. Further, in step S1417, various parameters are calculated as in step S1017 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Then, the information of the calculation result of step S1417 is written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1418). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are added to the information of the calculation result which is written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the operation result written this time corresponds to the timing. After that, an infinite loop is formed, and the operation waits until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by the management CPU 112. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 18).

When the output state of the output instruction signal from the main CPU 63 becomes the HI level (step S1501: YES), output processing of the calculation result is executed (step S1502). In the output process, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are read. In this case, when only the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of one calculation trigger are stored in the calculation result memory 131, only the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of the one calculation trigger are stored in the reading device. When the calculation result memory 131 stores various calculation results corresponding to a plurality of occurrences of calculation triggers, the reading device reads various calculation results corresponding to a plurality of occurrences of calculation triggers. .

After that, an output process of history information is executed (step S1503). In the output process, all history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, various history information stored in the history area 124 is read. By outputting not only the various calculation results but also the history information in this way, it becomes possible for a worker who uses the reading device to perform a detailed analysis of the various calculation results.

After that, clear processing is executed (step S1504). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is all cleared to “0” and the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the history area 124 is in the initialized state. In the clearing process, all areas of the calculation result memory 131 are cleared to “0”. As a result, the operation result memory 131 is in the initialized state.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. This makes it possible to manage various parameters on a business day basis.

When the main CPU 63 specifies that the supply of operating power is stopped, the output state of the calculation instruction signal is changed to the HI level, so that the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. As a result, it becomes possible for the management-side CPU 112 to calculate various parameters based on an instruction from the main-side CPU 63.

Various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are sequentially written in the calculation result memory 131. As a result, various parameters can be accumulated in the management IC 66, and when various parameters are read by the reading device, various parameters for a plurality of business days can be collectively read.

When various parameters are written in the calculation result memory 131, information for identifying the time when the various parameters are calculated is written in the calculation result memory 131 along with the various parameters. This makes it possible to analyze various parameter information while grasping the time when various parameters are calculated.

It should be noted that when a calculation trigger occurs and the calculation results of various parameters corresponding thereto are written in the calculation result memory 131, the history memory 117 may be cleared to “0”. As a result, it becomes difficult for new history information to be written to the history memory 117 when the maximum number of history information that can be stored is already stored in the history memory 117.

Further, the target information to be externally output to the reading device is only the information of various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131, and the history information stored in the history memory 117 may not be externally output. . This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information output to the outside.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the power failure handling processing executed by the management-side CPU 112 is different from that of the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from that of the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a power failure handling process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes the HI level (step S1601: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S1602). In various arithmetic processing, each processing of step S1402 to step S1409, step S1411 to step S1413, and step S1415 to step S1417 of the power failure handling processing (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment is executed.

After that, it is determined whether a predetermined parameter among the various parameters calculated in step S1602 is within the reference range (step S1603). In particular,
・Seventh parameter: (K3דnumber of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32”+K5דnumber of prize balls for winning in second operation port 34”)/total payout number of game balls (K2דgeneral”) "Number of prize balls for winning in prize hole 31" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for prize in first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34" 8th parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" / total payout number of gaming balls (K2 x for winning in general winning hole 31) "Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34" )) is set as a parameter to be determined whether or not it is within the reference range. Then, when the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, assuming that the predetermined parameter is the reference range.

The predetermined parameters are not limited to the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter, and instead of or in addition to these, other parameters may be set as the predetermined parameters. For example,
Second parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 K2/the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) may be set as a predetermined parameter. . In this case, for example, when the value of the second parameter is 0.1 or more and 0.2 or less, the predetermined parameter may be determined to be in the reference range. Further, only the predetermined parameter to be determined in step S1603 may be calculated by various calculation processes in step S1602.

When the predetermined parameter is not within the reference range (step S1603: NO), the various parameters calculated in step S1602 are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1604). In this case, when the information of another operation result is already stored in the operation result memory 131, the operation result information should be written so as not to overwrite the already stored operation result information. To do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are added to the information of the calculation result which is written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the operation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

On the other hand, when the predetermined parameter is within the reference range (step S1603: YES), the process of step S1604 is not executed. As a result, only various parameters in the case where the predetermined parameter is not within the reference range are written in the calculation result memory 131. Therefore, when an abnormal situation occurs, the storage capacity required for the operation result memory 131 can be suppressed while leaving the history in the operation result memory 131.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1603, or if the processing of step S1604 has been executed, clear processing of the memory 117 for history is executed (step S1605). In the clearing process, all the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is in the initialized state. After executing the processing of step S1605, an infinite loop is formed, and the operation waits until the supply of operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is completely stopped.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, it is determined whether or not the contents of various calculated parameters are included in the reference range, and only the various parameters that are determined to be included in the reference range are stored in the calculation result memory 131. Written. As a result, the amount of various parameters to be stored in the calculation result memory 131 can be suppressed, and the storage capacity required in the calculation result memory 131 can be suppressed.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management-side CPU 112 to execute the calculation of various parameters is different from that of the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from that of the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 35A is a flowchart showing the trigger specifying process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the trigger specifying process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 20).

It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, or the second operating opening 34 (step S1701). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, the addition processing of the entry counter provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S1702). In the addition process, the number of game balls that have entered the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is calculated as It is specified based on the number of times step S705 is executed in the management output process (FIG. 20). Then, the number of the specified game balls is added to the incoming ball counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the entry counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number "500" (step S1703). If it is equal to or greater than "500" (step S1703: YES), the subtraction process of the entrance counter of the main RAM 65 is executed (step S1704). In the subtraction process, the value of the entrance counter is subtracted by "500". Then, the output processing of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S1705). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

FIG. 35B is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing executed by the management CPU 112. The arithmetic processing is processing that is executed instead of the power failure handling processing in the third embodiment. Therefore, the arithmetic processing is configured to be executed after the external output processing in the management processing (FIG. 18). In the management processing, after the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the processing of step S607 is performed. The history setting process, the external output process of step S608, and the arithmetic process are repeatedly executed in this order.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes the HI level (step S1801: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S1802). In various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the management side CPU 112 calculates various parameters. In this case, various parameters are calculated every time a calculation trigger repeatedly occurs in a situation where the operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, so that a game ball enters the game area PA within one business day. It becomes possible to manage the mode in detail.

Further, since various parameters are calculated based on whether the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA has become equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, various parameters are provided on the condition that the game is being executed. Is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent meaningless calculation of various parameters in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the operation trigger that causes the management-side CPU 112 to execute the operation of various parameters is different from that of the fifth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the fifth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the trigger specifying process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the trigger specifying process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 20).

It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, or the second operating opening 34 (step S1901). When a negative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the continuation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S1902). The continuation counter is a CPU 63 on the main side for a period in which the game ball does not enter any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34. It is a counter for specifying in.

When the value of the continuation counter after adding 1 is greater than or equal to the stop reference value (step S1903: YES), the time measurement flag provided in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S1904). When the state in which the game ball does not enter any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 continues for 5 seconds, an affirmative determination is made in step S1903. The stop reference value is set so that The time measurement flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not to measure the time for specifying the timing of switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level. When the value of is 0, the time is not measured, and when the value of the time measurement flag is 1, the time is measured. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the time measurement flag is set to "1" (step S1905).

If a negative determination is made in step S1903, the process of step S1904 is executed, or the process of step S1905 is executed, "1" is set to the time measurement flag of the main RAM 65 as a condition ( Step S1906: YES), 1 is added to the value of the measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1907). The measurement counter is a counter used for measuring the time for specifying the timing of switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level.

It is determined whether or not the value of the measurement counter after adding 1 is equal to or larger than the instruction reference value (step S1908). The instruction reference value is set so that a positive determination is made in step S1908 when the time measured by the measurement counter reaches 10 hours. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1908, the value of the measurement counter is cleared to "0" (step S1909), and the calculation instruction signal output process is executed (step S1910). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, since various parameters are calculated every time a predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the various parameters only by adjusting the predetermined period. Become. In this case, the measurement for a predetermined period is stopped in the situation where the game is not executed, and the measurement for the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop when the game time is started. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation where the game is not executed from the calculation targets of the various parameters, and it is possible to appropriately derive the various parameters in the situation where the game is executed.

It should be noted that instead of the configuration in which the measurement counter is used to measure whether or not the predetermined period has elapsed, the RTC 115 may be used in the configuration.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management-side CPU 112 to execute the calculation of various parameters is different from that of the first embodiment, and whether or not the calculation trigger has occurred is specified by the main-side CPU 63. Instead of the above, the management-side CPU 112 does it independently. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing executed by the management CPU 112. The calculation process is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S812 in the history setting process (FIG. 21).

Corresponding to the occurrence of a game ball entering any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 in the history setting processing of this processing time It is determined whether or not the history information to be stored is stored in the history memory 117 (step S2001). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, addition processing of the entry counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is executed (step S2002). In the addition process, the number of game balls that have entered the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is calculated as In the history setting process, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of a game ball is identified based on the number of times stored. Then, the number of the specified game balls is added to the entrance counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the entry counter is equal to or larger than the trigger reference number "500" (step S2003). If it is equal to or larger than "500" (step S2003: YES), the subtraction process of the entry counter of the main RAM 65 is executed (step S2004). In the subtraction process, the value of the entrance counter is subtracted by "500". After that, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2005). In various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the management side CPU 112 calculates various parameters. In this case, various parameters are calculated every time a calculation trigger repeatedly occurs in a situation where the operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, so that a game ball enters the game area PA within one business day. It becomes possible to manage the mode in detail.

Further, since various parameters are calculated based on whether the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA has become equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, various parameters are provided on the condition that the game is being executed. Is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent meaningless calculation of various parameters in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

Further, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is measured by the management side CPU 112, and the management side CPU 112 determines whether or not the total number is equal to or larger than the trigger reference number. That is, the management side CPU 112 independently determines the timing of calculation of various parameters. As a result, it is not necessary for the main CPU 63 to execute the processing for determining the timing of calculation of various parameters, so that the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the history setting processing executed by the management-side CPU 112 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

In this embodiment, as in the third embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with the operation result memory 131 (see FIG. 29). When the calculation trigger occurs, the management side CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117, and writes the various parameters of the calculation result to the calculation result memory 131. Further, in the present embodiment, a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has been started, a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has ended, a signal indicating that the high frequency support mode has been started, and a high frequency support mode are A signal indicating that the front door frame 14 has been opened, a signal indicating that the front door frame 14 has been opened, and a signal indicating that the front door frame 14 has been completely opened are individually transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Sent to.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment.

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2101). Specifically, of the first to fifteenth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relation memory 116, the number of correspondence relation areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the identification is performed. The information of the number that was set is set in the check target counter. In the present embodiment, information indicating that any one of the ball entry portions is supported is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, and the opening/closing execution mode is started in the eighth correspondence area 123h. Corresponding information is stored, information corresponding to the end of the open/close execution mode is stored in the ninth correspondence relationship area 123i, and information corresponding to the start of the high frequency support mode is stored in the tenth correspondence relationship area 123j. The information corresponding to the end of the high frequency support mode is stored in the eleventh correspondence area 123k, and the information corresponding to the opening start of the front door frame 14 is stored in the twelfth correspondence area 123l. Information corresponding to the end of opening the front door frame 14 is stored in the thirteenth correspondence area 123m. Therefore, in step S2101, the check target counter is set to "13".

After that, it should be confirmed whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2102). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the check targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “10”, the tenth buffer 122j is the check target of the numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer 122e is the check target of the numerical information. .

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the RTC information that is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S2103). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2104). In the writing process, the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is referred to identify the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target, and the pointer information corresponds to the writing target pointer information. The RTC information read in step S2103 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. In addition, when the value of the check target counter is “n”, the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123o is a target for reading correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "10", the tenth correspondence area 123j is the read target of the correspondence information, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence relationship. It is a target for reading information.

Then, the value of the target pointer is incremented by 1 (step S2105). Specifically, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and the numerical information is incremented by one. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 (step S2106).

When it exceeds the maximum value (step S2106: YES), various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2107). In various arithmetic processing, the same processing as step S1002 to step S1009, step S1011 to step S1013, and step S1015 to step S1017 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment is executed. Then, the various parameters of the calculation result and the information of the total time are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2108). In this case, when the information of another operation result is already stored in the operation result memory 131, the operation result information should be written so as not to overwrite the already stored operation result information. To do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are added to the information of the calculation result which is written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the operation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

After that, the state information takeover process is executed (step S2109). In the takeover process, based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, whether the current state is the open/close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14 is open. Or not. Then, the state information is written in the management side RAM 114.

After that, the history memory 117 is cleared (step S2110). In the clearing process, all the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is in the initialized state. After executing the clearing process, the state information written in the management side RAM 114 in step S2109 is read out. When the state information indicating that the open/close execution mode is being stored, the history information indicating that the open/close execution mode is being stored is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. While writing, the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. Further, when the status information indicating that the high frequency support mode is being stored, the history information storage area corresponding to the pointer information to which the history information indicating that the high frequency support mode is being written is written At the same time as writing to 125, the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. When the state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is stored, the history information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open corresponds to the pointer information to be written. The pointer information to be written is incremented by 1 while being written in the history information storage area 125.

When a negative determination is made in step S2102, a negative determination is made in step S2106, or when the processing of step S2110 is executed, the value of the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2111). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2112). When the value of the check target counter is 1 or more (step S2112: NO), the process from step S2102 is executed on the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, various parameters are calculated when the history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the upper limit number that can be stored in the history memory 117. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the history information exceeds the upper limit number that can be stored in the history memory 117 and the history information becomes a storage target, and various parameters cannot be accurately calculated.

Further, when various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized and all history information is erased. This makes it possible to prevent the history information that has already been the calculation target of various parameters from becoming the calculation target of various parameters again.

Further, even if the history memory 117 is initialized, the state information takeover process is executed. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the state information.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 and the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management-side CPU 112 are different from those in the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144. In each of these areas 141 to 144, first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, 144a to 144o are provided. Information about the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the first counters 141a to 144a of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the second counters 141b to 144b of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information about the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the third counters 141c to 144c of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fourth counters 141d to 144d of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fifth counters 141e to 144e of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the sixth counters 141f to 144f of each of the areas 141 to 144. The seventh counters 141g to 144g of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eighth counters 141h to 144h in each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the ninth counters 141i to 144i of each area 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the tenth counters 141j to 144j of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eleventh counters 141k to 144k in each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the twelfth counters 141l to 144l of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the thirteenth counters 141m to 144m of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the 14th signal input to the 14th buffer 122n is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the 14th counters 141n to 144n of each area 141 to 144. The fifteenth counters 141o to 144o of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifteenth signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

However, the measurement targets using the first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, 144a to 144o are the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, and the first operation. It is the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g to which a signal corresponding to the result of the ball entering either the mouth 33 or the second operating opening 34 is input. Therefore, the signals corresponding to the state information such as whether the open/close execution mode is in operation, the high-frequency support mode is in operation, and the front door frame 14 is in the open state are input. The 10 buffers 122h to 122j are excluded from the measurement target. The distinction between these measurement objects is made based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment.

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2201). Specifically, of the first to fifteenth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relation memory 116, the number of correspondence relation areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the identification is performed. The information of the number that was set is set in the check target counter. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 stores the information other than the information indicating that it is blank in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j, so that "10" is set in the check target counter in step S2201. To do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the buffers 122a to 122o corresponding to the current check target counter are buffers to which the signal of the status information is input (step S2202). Specifically, in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, as correspondence information, information indicating the open/close execution mode, information indicating the high frequency support mode, and It is determined whether any of the information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored.

When a positive determination is made in step S2202, state information setting processing is executed (step S2203). In the setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not the open/close execution mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the first state indicating that the open/close execution mode is set is displayed on the management side. When the output state of the eighth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the first state is stored in the RAM 114 and is erased from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high frequency support mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the second state information indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress is provided to the management side RAM 114. When the output state of the ninth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the second state is erased from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the third state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open Is stored in the management side RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the third state is erased from the management side RAM 114.

When a negative determination is made in step S2202, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter and to which the signal of the information different from the state information is input. Whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the relevant buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level by confirming whether or not the numerical information stored is changed from "0" to "1". It is determined whether or not (step S2204). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the corresponding summing counter addition processing is executed (step S2205). In the addition processing, the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the check target counter of the total first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o in the total area 141 of the history memory 117 is incremented by one. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth total counter 141e is the addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first total counter 141a is the addition target. .

Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether or not it is in the open/close execution mode (step S2206). If it is in the first state (step S2206: YES), the corresponding addition process of the counter for the first state is executed (step S2207). In the addition processing, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 142a to 142o for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117 is incremented by 1. .. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth counter 142e for the first state is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first counter 142a for the first state is the addition target. It becomes an addition target.

Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode (step S2208). When it is in the second state (step S2208: YES), the corresponding addition processing of the counter for the second state is executed (step S2209). In the addition processing, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 143a to 143o for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117 is incremented by 1. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 143e for the second state is the addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 143a for the second state is the addition target. It will be added.

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is open (step S2210). If it is in the third state (step S2210: YES), the addition processing of the corresponding counter for the third state is executed (step S2211). In the addition processing, the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 144a to 144o for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117 is incremented by 1. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 144e for the third state is the addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 144a for the third state is the same. It will be added.

When the process of step S2203 is executed, the negative determination is made in step S2204, the negative determination is made in step S2210, or the process of step S2211 is executed, the value of the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to 1 Subtract (step S2212). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2213). When the value of the check target counter is 1 or more (step S2213: NO), the process from step S2202 is executed on the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the history of game balls entering the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is changed to the above. Instead of being stored as history information as in the first embodiment, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball is detected by each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117, as compared with a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

As described above, since the game ball is stored as the information on the number of times the game ball is detected by each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, in the external output process (FIG. 24) in the present embodiment, the outlet 24a such as step S1002. To calculate the number of game balls entered into the special electric prize winning device 32 such as step S1004, and to calculate the number of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 such as step S1005. The process of calculating and the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34, such as step S1006, are unnecessary. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

In the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 such as step S1003, all of the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, 144a to 144c are general winning openings. Since it corresponds to 31, it is necessary to execute a process of summing the values of the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, 144a to 144c. Further, it is impossible to distinguish the number of balls entered in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open in the opening/closing execution mode from the number of balls entered in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1012 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 24) in this embodiment. Similarly, it is not possible to distinguish the number of balls entered in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open in the high-frequency support mode from the number of balls entered in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1016 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 24) in the present embodiment.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the storage means for storing the history information is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 41 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the MPU 62 in this embodiment. Like the first embodiment, the MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I/F 101, and a reading terminal 102. Further, the management IC 66 is provided with a management side I/F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, and a management side RAM 114, as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence memory 116, and the history memory 117. Instead, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131 as in the third embodiment. Since the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence memory 116, and the history memory 117, history information is not stored in the management IC 66 in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the history of the ball entering the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is stored in the main RAM 65. That is, the main RAM 65, which temporarily stores information necessary for executing the program in the main CPU 63, is also used as a memory for storing the entry history. Then, the management IC 66 can access the main RAM 65 through the management I/F 111, and when the calculation trigger of various parameters occurs, the main IC RAM 65 is accessed to read the entry history and read it. Various parameters are calculated using the entry history. The calculated various parameters are stored in the calculation result memory 131. When the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, various parameters are provided from the calculation result memory 131 to the reading device, but the ball entry history stored in the main RAM 65 is not provided to the reading device. .

FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the incoming ball detection process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The incoming ball detection process is executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of “0” is stored for the 0th bit D0 is switched to the state in which the information of “1” is stored, the first winning hole detection sensor 42a outputs 1 It is determined that one game ball has been detected (step S2301: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2302). The general winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls that have entered the general winning opening 31 as a history of entered balls. The value of the general winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the value of the general winning counter is Retained. After that, the value of the 10 prize ball counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2303).

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of "0" is stored for the first bit D1 is switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored, the second winning hole detection sensor 43a outputs 1 It is determined that the individual game balls have been detected (step S2304: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2305). After that, the value of the counter for 10 prize balls in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2306).

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of "0" is stored for the second bit D2 is switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored, the third winning hole detection sensor 44a outputs 1 It is determined that the individual game balls have been detected (step S2307: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2308). After that, the value of the 10 prize ball counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2309).

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the third bit D3 is switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored, one game is performed by the special electric power detection sensor 45a. It is determined that a sphere has been detected (step S3210: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the special electricity winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2311). Further, the value of the special electric prize winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2312). The special electric prize winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the special electric prize winning device 32 as a entering history. The value of the special electric prize winning counter is cleared to “0” when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the special prize winning counter is not changed even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state. Retained. After that, the value of the counter for 15 prize balls in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2313).

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information “0” is stored for the fourth bit D4 is switched to the state in which the information “1” is stored, the first working port detection sensor 46a outputs 1 It is determined that one gaming ball has been detected (step S2314: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the first operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2315). Also, the value of the first operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2316). The first operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the first operation port 33 as a ball entry history. The value of the first operation counter is cleared to “0” when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. . By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state, the value of the first operation counter Is retained. Then, the value of the one prize ball counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2317).

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information “0” is stored for the fifth bit D5 is switched to the state in which the information “1” is stored, the second working port detection sensor 47a outputs 1 It is determined that the individual game balls have been detected (step S2318: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2319). In addition, the value of the second operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2320). The second operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the second operation port 34 as a history of entering balls. The value of the second operation counter is cleared to "0" when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. . By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state, the value of the second operation counter Is retained. Thereafter, the value of the one prize ball counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2321).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of “0” is stored for the sixth bit D6 is switched to the situation in which the information of “1” is stored, one sensor is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S2322: YES). In this case, the value of the out counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2323). The out counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the outlet 24a as a history of entered balls. The value of the out counter is cleared to “0” when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the out counter is stored even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state. Retained.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored for the seventh bit D7 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game is performed by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that a sphere has been detected (step S2324: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2325).

By performing the entrance detection process as described above, the entrance history into the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is recorded in each entering portion. It is stored in the main side RAM 65 as the number of spheres entered. As a result, a signal is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 each time a ball enters any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. No need to output. Therefore, the configuration for outputting a signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 can be simplified.

In the present embodiment, when a calculation trigger occurs, the management-side CPU 112 reads the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 from the general winning counter of the main RAM 65, and transfers the special electric prize counter of the main RAM 65 to the special electric winning device 32. The number of balls entered is read, the number of balls entered into the first operation port 33 is read from the first operation counter of the main RAM 65, the number of balls entered into the second operation port 34 is read from the second operation counter of the main RAM 65, The number of balls entered into the out port 24a is read from the out counter of the main RAM 65. Then, the first parameter to the eighth parameter described in the first embodiment are calculated by using the read respective numbers of incoming balls. However, the number of incoming balls is not measured in a state where the number of incoming balls when the front door frame 14 is open and the number of incoming balls when the front door frame 14 is closed are distinguished. Therefore, the first parameter to the eighth parameter are calculated in a state in which the number of balls entered when the front door frame 14 is open is also included. In addition, since the number of incoming balls in the open/close execution mode and the number of incoming balls in the high frequency support mode are not individually measured, the first parameter to the eighteenth parameter and the twenty-first parameter described in the first embodiment. ~ The 26th parameter is not calculated. The calculated first to eighth parameters are written in the calculation result memory 131. Then, when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, all the parameters written in the operation result memory 131 at that time are provided to the reading device. At this time, the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to "0".

It should be noted that the management IC 66 does not access the main RAM 65 independently, but the information of each number of balls stored as the ball entry history in the main RAM 65 is transmitted to the management IC 66 by the transfer control by the main CPU 63. May be configured. In this case, it is possible to reliably prevent the main RAM 65 from being simultaneously accessed by the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the main control board 61, the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112, and the method of storing the entry history in each entry portion are different from those in the first embodiment. ing. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 43 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control board 61 in this embodiment. The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61 as in the first embodiment. Like the first embodiment, the MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I/F 101, and a reading terminal 102. Further, the management IC 66 is provided with a management side I/F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, a correspondence relationship memory 116 and a history memory 117, as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115. Also. In addition to the MPU 62, the main control board 61 is provided with a notification light emitting section 151. The notification light emitting unit 151 is directly controlled by the main CPU 63 to emit light. The main side CPU 63 can access the history memory 117 of the management IC 66, and calculates various parameters by using the information of the history of entering the respective ball portions read from the history memory 117. Then, the light emitting state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled according to the contents of the calculated various parameters. The light emitting unit 151 for notification is housed in the housing space of the substrate box 60a of the main control device 60. The substrate box 60a is formed transparent, and the light emitting state of the light emitting unit 151 for notification is set outside the substrate box 60a. The notification light emitting unit 151 is provided so that the user can visually check it. In this way, the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the outer frame 11 so that the main control device 60 can be visually checked, so that the notification light emitting unit 151 does not need to open the board box 60a. It is possible to visually confirm the light emitting state of.

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same type of signal as that of the first embodiment is input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the 16th buffer 122p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. A signal is input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning a prize detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric power detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. Is input to the fifth buffer 122e, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working opening detection sensor 46a is input, and the sixth buffer 122f corresponds to the detection result of the second working opening detection sensor 47a. Six signals are input, a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the open/close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as the eighth signal, and the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as the ninth signal. Although the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, in the present embodiment, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode, and the front The signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is not input to the input port 121. That is, no signal regarding the entry history is input to the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o.

What kind of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the kind of these signals is determined by receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. It is specified by the management CPU 112. The process for specifying the type of the signal is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, it is decided at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p, and the management CPU 112 outputs the 16th buffer 122p to the 16th buffer 122p without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. It is possible to specify that the instruction signal is input.

FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o. The first buffer counter 152a stores information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The second buffer counter 152b stores information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The third buffer counter 152c stores information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourth buffer counter 152d stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifth buffer counter 152e stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The sixth buffer counter 152f stores information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The seventh buffer counter 152g stores information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eighth buffer counter 152h stores information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The ninth buffer counter 152i stores information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The tenth buffer counter 152j stores information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eleventh buffer counter 152k stores information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The twelfth buffer counter 152l stores information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 13th buffer counter 152m stores information on the number of times the output state of the 13th signal input to the 13th buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourteenth buffer counter 152n stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifteenth buffer counter 152o stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifteenth signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

However, the target to be measured using the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o is any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34. These are the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g to which signals corresponding to the result of entering the ball are input. Therefore, the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o are excluded from the measurement target. The distinction between these measurement objects is made based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 18).

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2401). Specifically, of the first to fifteenth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relation memory 116, the number of correspondence relation areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the identification is performed. The information of the number that was set is set in the check target counter. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 stores information other than the information indicating that it is blank in the first to seventh response areas 123a to 123j, and therefore, in step S2401, the check target counter is set to "7". To do.

After that, it is necessary to confirm whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2402). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the check targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the check target of the numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first buffer 122a is the check target of the numerical information. ..

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2402, the addition processing of the corresponding buffer counters 152a to 152o is executed (step S2403). In the addition processing, the counter value corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the counters of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o of the history memory 117 is incremented by one. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth buffer counter 152e is the addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first buffer counter 152a is the addition target.

When a negative determination is made in step S2402, or when the process of step S2403 is executed, the value of the check target counter of the management-side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2404). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2405). When the value of the check target counter is 1 or more (step S2405: NO), the process from step S2402 is executed on the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the history of game balls entering the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is changed to the above. Instead of being stored as history information as in the first embodiment, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball is detected by each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117, as compared with a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the external output process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 18).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes the HI level (step S2501: YES), the output target counters provided in the management RAM 114 have the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to. In the management CPU 112 of 152o, the number of counters to which the count information is output is set (step S2502). Specifically, of the first to fifteenth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relation memory 116, the number of correspondence relation areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the identification is performed. The information of the number that was set is set in the check target counter. In the present embodiment, as already described, the information other than the information indicating that it is blank is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. Therefore, in step S2502, "7" is set in the output target counter. ..

After that, the correspondence information stored in the area corresponding to the current output target counter value among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is read (step S2503), and the history information is stored. Of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o in the memory 117, the number-of-times information stored in the counter corresponding to the current value of the output target counter is read (step S2504). In this case, when the value of the output target counter is “n”, the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123o becomes the read target of the correspondence information, and the n-th buffer counters 152a to 152o read the number-of-times information. Be the target. For example, if the value of the output target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e becomes the read target of the correspondence relationship information, the fifth buffer counter 152e becomes the read target of the count information, and the value of the output target counter is If the value is "1", the first correspondence area 123a is the target for reading the correspondence information, and the first buffer counter 152a is the target for reading the number-of-times information.

After that, information output processing is executed (step S2505). In the information output process, the combination of the correspondence information read in step S2503 and the number-of-times information read in step S2504 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads the number-of-times information about the correspondence information that is the current output target.

After that, the value of the output target counter of the management-side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2506). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the output target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2507). When the value of the output target counter is 1 or more (step S2507: NO), the process from step S2503 is executed on the output target corresponding to the new output target counter value. In addition, when a positive determination is made in step S2507, the values of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o are cleared to "0".

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the parameter management process executed by the main CPU 63. The parameter management process is executed after the management output process of step S219 is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

First, it is determined whether or not there is a trigger for calculation of various parameters (step S2601). The calculation trigger is when the parameter management processing is first executed after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and as in the fifth embodiment, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, and the special prize winning. It occurs every time the total number of game balls entered into the device 32, the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 becomes 500 or more, which is the trigger reference number. Since the case where the parameter management processing is first executed after the supply of the operating power is started is set as the calculation trigger, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off and then turned on again to calculate various parameters. The trigger can be easily generated. Then, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, notification corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters is executed as described later, and therefore, only by performing the power OFF/ON operation in the game area PA up to that point. It is possible to grasp the entering mode of the game ball. Further, by having a configuration in which a calculation trigger is generated each time the total number of entered balls of the game balls becomes 500 or more, which is the trigger reference number, it is possible to finely manage the entered form of the game balls in the game area PA. Becomes

When the calculation trigger occurs (step S2601: YES), the entry history is read from the counters of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o of the history memory 117, which are the storage targets of the entry history. Specifically, the numerical information of the first to seventh buffer counters 152a to 152g is read. In this case, the main CPU 63 can recognize the buffer counters 152a to 152o from which the entry history is read based on the programs and data stored in the main ROM 64.

After that, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2603). In the various calculation processes, various parameters are calculated by using the entry history read in step S2602 and the information on the number of prize balls corresponding to the entry history. The main CPU 63 uses the programs and data stored in the main ROM 64 to determine that each entry history read in step S2602 is an outlet 24a, a general winning opening 31, a special electricity winning device 32, a first working opening 33, and a first working opening 33. It is possible to specify which one of the two working ports 34 corresponds to, and it is also possible to specify information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each entry history read in step S2602. ..

Regarding the various parameters calculated in step S2603, specifically,
・Seventh parameter: (K3דnumber of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32”+K5דnumber of prize balls for winning in second operation port 34”)/total payout number of game balls (K2דgeneral”) "Number of prize balls for winning in prize hole 31" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for prize in first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34" 8th parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" / total payout number of gaming balls (K2 x for winning in general winning hole 31) "Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34" )) is calculated.

Then, it is determined whether the calculated various parameters are within the first range (step S2604). When the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, a positive determination is made in step S2604 assuming that the calculated various parameters are in the first range. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2604, the setting process of the first notification state is executed (step S2605). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to be in the first notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 151 is in a blue light emitting state.

When a negative determination is made in step S2604, it is determined whether the calculated various parameters are in the second range (step S2606). When the condition that only one of the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, the calculated various parameters are A positive determination is made in step S2606 assuming that the range is two. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, the second notification state setting processing is executed (step S2607). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to be in the second notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 151 is in a yellow light emitting state.

A negative determination in step S2606 means that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6. In this case, the third notification state setting process is executed (step S2608). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to be in the third notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 151 is in a red light emitting state.

Regarding the light emission state set in step S2605, step S2607, or step S2608, the supply of operating power to the light emission section 151 for notification is stopped until a new notification state is set for the light emission section 151 for notification. To continue. Further, since the notification state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is stored and held in the main RAM 65 and backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and the notification light emitting unit 151 is stopped. Even if 151 is turned off once, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed, the light emitting state corresponding to the type of information of the notification state stored in the main RAM 65 is set. The light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 is executed.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

The entry history of the game ball into the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is stored as history information as in the first embodiment. Instead, it is stored as information on the number of times the game ball is detected by each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117, as compared with a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

A notification light emitting unit 151 is provided to notify the contents corresponding to various parameters calculated by the management-side CPU 112. As a result, the contents corresponding to various parameters are notified by the pachinko machine 10 itself, so that the manager of the game hall or the like does not need to read the information stored in the history memory 117 to read the game balls in the game area PA. It is possible to grasp the entering mode.

The main control board 61 housed in the board box 60a is provided with the notification light emitting section 151 together with the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the MPU 62 and the notification light emitting unit 151.

The calculation of various parameters and the light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 are executed by the main CPU 63 instead of the management CPU 112. This makes it possible to increase the reliability of the notification content in the notification light emitting unit 151.

When the calculation results of various parameters correspond to the first range, the first notification state is set. When the calculation results of various parameters correspond to the second range, the second notification state is set. The third notification state is set when neither the first range nor the second range is supported. That is, not the various parameters are reported as they are, but the content corresponding to the range including the various parameters is reported. This makes it possible to prevent the notification light emitting unit 151 from having too many notification patterns, and reduce the load for controlling the notification light emitting unit 151.

Immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped by continuing the power supply to the notification light emitting unit 151 even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. The light emitting state may be maintained. In this case, even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, by checking the notification light emitting unit 151, it is possible to grasp the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA. ..

Further, instead of the configuration, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the notification light emitting unit 151 is turned off, but when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Alternatively, the notification light emitting unit 151 may be controlled to emit light so that the light emitting state corresponds to the result of various parameters calculated before the supply of the operating power is stopped. In this case, for example, by checking the notification light emitting unit 151 before the start of business in the game hall, it is possible to grasp the entering mode of the game ball on the last business day.

The notifying means for notifying the calculation results of various parameters is not limited to the notification light emitting unit 151, and may be a display device having a display surface such as the symbol display device 41, and the speaker unit 54. May be In addition, it may be configured such that signals corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters are externally output to the hall computer HC of the game hall through the external terminal board 97.

The special figure display part 37a of the special figure unit 37 or the general figure display part 38a of the general figure unit 38 may also function as the notification light emitting section 151. For example, various parameters are calculated when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is started, and the calculation result is included in the first range, the second range as in the above-described embodiment, or other than them. The configuration corresponding to the calculation result may be executed on the special figure display unit 37a or the general figure display unit 38a immediately after the supply of the operating power is started. In this case, the notification may be configured to end when the condition for starting the variable display of the picture on the special figure display unit 37a or the condition for starting the variable display of the picture on the general figure display unit 38a is satisfied. A configuration may be adopted in which when the variable display start condition is satisfied, the process is temporarily suspended, and when the variable display of the pattern is finished, it is restarted. According to this configuration, it is possible to use the special figure display portion 37a or the general figure display portion 38a as an informing means for informing the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA.

The notification light emitting unit 151 may be provided at a position visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are closed. For example, the notification light emitting unit 151 may be provided at a position behind the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the window panel 52 and visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. In this case, it is possible to confirm the content of the notification corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters without the need to open the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for providing the information of each entrance result to the management IC 66. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a signal path for allowing the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a to be input to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

The detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. The detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. The detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. The detection result of the special electric power detection sensor 45a is input to the main CPU 63 via the fourth signal path SL14. Further, the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. The detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. The detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

A first branch path SL21 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, the second branch path SL22 is formed so as to branch from the middle position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a third branch path SL23 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fourth branch path SL24 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. A fifth branch path SL25 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

With the above configuration, the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without the intervention of the processing by the main CPU 63. As a result, the main CPU 63 executes a process for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize the respective entrance results of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. Since it is not necessary to do so, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main CPU 63.

Further, branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 are present in the MPU 62. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to access the branch point and the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and it is possible to prevent an improper act of inputting an abnormal entry result only to the management IC 66. ..

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the left-right distribution nails 213, 214 which distribute the path on the downstream side of the game ball B1 (FIG. 53A) to the game board 233 (FIG. 50) in the depth direction according to the position in the depth direction. (FIG. 50) is provided, which is the difference from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, basically the description of the same configurations as those of the first embodiment will be omitted.

The configuration of the game board 233 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a front view of the game board 233. The game board 233 in this embodiment is different from the game board 24 in the first embodiment in that the game area PA is formed not only on the left side of the surface but also on the right side. As shown in FIG. 50, the game board 233 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. In each opening, there are a general winning opening 241, a special electricity winning device 32, a first working opening 33, a second working opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special figure display section 225, a general figure display section 226 and the like. It is provided. In addition, a total of three general winning openings 241 are provided on the left and right of the game board 233, and one through gate 35 is provided on each of the left and right. The other openings are provided one by one.

Detection sensors are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each of the general winning openings 241, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the through gates 35. All of these detection sensors are provided on the back side of the game board 233, and the detection result is output to the main controller 60 (FIG. 5). An electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor that detects changes in the magnetic field is used as the detection sensor. However, if the winning of the game ball B1 (FIG. 53(a)) can be detected individually, the sensor used is It is optional and, for example, an optical sensor may be used. Here, the game ball B1 is a steel ball having a diameter of 11 mm.

When the occurrence of a ball entering the general winning opening 241, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 is detected, a predetermined number of game balls B1 are awarded to the player as prize balls. Regarding the number of prize balls, specifically, three prize balls are generated when a ball enters the first operation port 33 and when a ball enters the second operation port 34. Further, the general winning opening 241 in the present embodiment plays the same role as the general winning opening 31 in the first embodiment, and when a ball enters the general winning opening 241, 10 prizes are awarded. A sphere is generated. Also, when a ball enters the special electric winning device 32, 15 prize balls are generated. However, the number of prize balls is arbitrary and, for example, the number of prize balls of the second operation port 34 is larger than the number of prize balls of the first operation port 33. May be. Further, the number of special balls of the special electric winning device 32 is not limited to a configuration in which the number of special balls is larger than the number of other special balls. For example, the number may be smaller than that of the general winning port 241.

In addition, the outlet 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 233, and the game ball B1 that has not entered the various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 24a. Further, the game board 233 is provided with a large number of nails 228, 213, and 214 for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game ball B1.

The special figure display unit 225 and the general figure display unit 226 are provided as a display unit in a predetermined range. The area in which the display unit is installed is an area inside the game area PA partitioned using the inner rail portion 25, and the game ball B1 does not flow down in front of the front surface of the display unit. This is the area where the inflow of B1 is restricted. Further, a special figure display section 225 and a general figure display section 226 are provided on the front surface of the display unit. Thereby, although the various display portions 225 and 226 are provided in the game area PA, the game ball B1 is prevented from flowing down in front of the display area PA, and the visibility from the front of the pachinko machine 10 is secured.

In the game board 233, the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 form a guide rail. A game ball launching mechanism 27 (FIG. 2) is provided below the game board 233, and the game ball B1 launched by applying a force from the solenoid 27c (FIG. 2) of the game ball launching mechanism 27 is guided above. It is designed to be guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a rail. The game ball launching mechanism 27 includes an operation base portion that is provided so as to project forward, and an operation handle that is rotatably supported by the operation base portion, and the operation handle is rotated. Thereby, the emission intensity of the game ball B1 from the game ball firing mechanism 27 is adjusted.

As already described in the first embodiment, the front door frame 14 (FIG. 2) is provided so that the game board 233 covers the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 (FIG. 2). The front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 (FIG. 1) that allows substantially the entire game area PA to be viewed from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 (FIG. 1) is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is made of glass and is colorless and transparent. However, the window panel 52 is not limited to this and may be made of synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent, and the game area PA is provided from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. If it is visible, it may be formed to be colored and transparent.

A center frame 252 is provided on the game board 233 so as to define an opening 233a that allows the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 (FIG. 3) to be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The center frame 252 includes a roof unit 253 provided so as to define the upper edge and the left and right side edges of the opening 233a.

Next, the arrangement of the nails 228, 213, 214 provided on the game board 233 will be described based on FIG. As shown in FIG. 50, the game board 233 is provided with a large number of nails 228, 213, and 214. Here, the nails provided on the game board 233 of the present embodiment include a metal obstacle nail 228 which is a round nail used in a conventional pachinko machine and a first left/right distribution member 215 made of resin. There are three types, namely, a first left/right distribution nail 213 and a second left/right distribution nail 214 having a second left/right distribution member 231 made of resin. The details of the left-right distribution nails 213 and 214 will be described later.

The obstacle nail 228 made of metal has a cylindrical trunk shaft portion, a head provided on the proximal end side of the trunk shaft portion, and a conical sharpened head portion formed on the tip end side of the trunk shaft portion, Consists of. The obstruction nail 228 has a pointed head buried deeper than the surface of the game board 233, and a state in which a part of the trunk shaft portion and the head project from the surface of the game board 233. It is provided in. The length from the surface of the game board 233 to the free end of the obstacle nail 228 (the end on the front side of the pointed portion) is 17 mm. Here, the front side is the window panel 52 side close to the player, and the back side is the game board 233 side far from the player.

The distance from the front surface of the game board 233 to the back surface of the window panel 52 is 18 mm. Moreover, the diameter of the game ball B1 is 11 mm as described above. Therefore, in the game area PA, there is a margin of 7 mm in which the game ball B1 can move in the depth direction. The position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 in the game area PA is the position where the solenoid 27c contacts when the solenoid 27c (FIG. 2) of the game ball firing mechanism 27 (FIG. 2) applies a force to the game ball B1 to fire it. In addition to the change, the game ball B1 changes by colliding with the roof unit 253 on the game board 233, a decorative member, and the like while flowing down the game area PA.

The range in which the center of the game ball B1 can be located is a range from a position advanced by 5.5 mm to a position advanced by 12.5 mm from the surface of the game board 233 to the window panel 52 side. In the following, the range in which the game ball B1 can contact the nails 228, 213, 214 on the game board 233 is the contactable range of the game ball B1. The game ball B1 flowing down in the game area PA can collide with the obstacle nail 228 in the flowing down process regardless of whether it is located on the game board 233 side or the window panel 52 side. The course of the game ball B1 after the collision is changed by the obstacle nail 228.

Since the game area PA is formed not only on the left side of the game board 233 but also on the right side of the game board 233 as described above, the obstacle nail 228 is provided on the entire surface of the game board 233 as shown in FIG. Has been. On the other hand, the left and right sorting nails 213 and 214 made of resin are arranged as nails forming guide nail groups 211 and 212 for guiding the game ball B1 to the operation ports 33 and 34 in the game board 233. Here, the guide nail groups 211 and 212 are a left guide nail group 211 composed of seven first left/right distribution nails 213 arranged in a row at equal intervals on the lower left side of the game board 233, and a game board 233. Is a generic name for a right guide nail group 212 including seven second left/right distribution nails 214 arranged in a row at equal intervals in the lower right part of the.

The left guide nail group 211 is a nail row in which the first left/right distribution nail 213 located on the right side is provided below the first left/right distribution nail 213 adjacent to the left side. The nail row is a row extending in a direction inclined downward to the right, and the angle formed by the row direction of the left guide nail group 211 and the horizontal direction is 30°. The angle is an angle at which the game ball B1 can be guided to the operation ports 33 and 34 while gradually lowering the height of the game ball B1. The operation ports 33 and 34 are present on the extension line of the left guide nail group 211 in the column direction. The space above the left guide nail group 211 is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1 so that the game ball B1 can pass therethrough. Further, since the first left/right distribution nails 213 forming the left guide nail group 211 are arranged at intervals slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 is from the gap between the first left/right distribution nails 213. Can fall down. When the game ball B1 loses the speed in the left-right direction on the first left/right distribution nail 213, the game ball B1 falls downward from the gap between the first left/right distribution nails 213. It does not stop on the nail 213.

The right guide nail group 212 is a nail row in which the second left/right distribution nail 214 located on the left side is provided below the second left/right distribution nail 214 adjacent to the right side. The nail row is a row extending in a direction inclining downward to the left, and the angle formed by the row direction of the right guide nail group 212 and the horizontal direction is 30°. The angle is an angle at which the game ball B1 can be guided to the operation ports 33 and 34 while gradually lowering the height of the game ball B1. The operation ports 33 and 34 are present on the extension line in the column direction of the right guide nail group 212. The space above the right guiding nail group 212 is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1 in such a manner that the game ball B1 can pass therethrough. Further, the second left/right distribution nails 214 forming the right guide nail group 212 are arranged at intervals slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1, so that the game ball B1 comes from the gap between the second left/right distribution nails 214. Can fall down. When the game ball B1 loses the speed in the left-right direction on the second left/right distribution nail 214, the game ball B1 falls downward from the gap between the second left/right distribution nails 214, so the game ball B1 is distributed to the second left/right distribution. It does not stop on the nail 214.

Next, the structure of the first left/right distribution nail 213 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51A is a perspective view of the first left/right distribution nail 213. As shown in FIG. 51A, the first left/right distribution nail 213 is an elongated nail formed to extend in the direction of the axis 213c. The first left/right distribution nail 213 fixes the first left/right distribution member 215, which distributes the game ball B1 which falls from the top and collides, in the left/right direction, and the first left/right distribution member 215 to the surface of the game board 233. And a fixing member 216 for fixing. The first left-right distribution member 215 is a substantially square-pillar-shaped resin member formed to extend in the direction of the axis 213c, and has a different inclination as a surface that can collide with the game ball B1 falling from above. It has two distribution surfaces 217a and 218a.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the first left/right distribution nail 213, the axis 213c is substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 233, and the first left/right distribution member 215 projects from the surface of the game board 233. It is fixed to the game board 233. The length dimension of the first left/right distribution member 215 in the axis 213c direction is 17 mm, and the first left/right distribution member 215 of the first left/right distribution nail 213 fixed to the game board 233 projects 17 mm into the game area PA. ing. The first left/right distribution nail 213 covers the contactable range of the game ball B1. Therefore, the first left/right distribution nail 213 can collide with the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA and also with the game ball B1 located on the front side. In the following description, in the first left/right distribution nail 213 and the second left/right distribution nail 214 fixed to the game board 233, the end fixed to the game board 233 is described as a fixed end, and the game area PA The end projecting at is described as the free end.

As shown in FIG. 51A, the first left-right distribution member 215 has a first distribution portion 217 formed to extend in the direction of the axis 213c and a free end side of the first distribution portion 217. The second distribution portion 218 is formed so as to extend in the direction of the axis 213c in a manner continuous with the side surface of the second distribution portion 218. In a state where the first left/right distribution nail 213 is fixed to the game board 233, the boundary surface between the first distribution portion 217 and the second distribution portion 218 is parallel to the surface of the game board 233.

Since the length dimension of the first distribution unit 217 in the direction of the axis 213c is 9 mm, in the state where the first left/right distribution nail 213 is fixed to the game board 233, the first distribution unit 217 has a game area PA. It projects to the back half of the. Further, the length dimension from the left end to the right end of the first distributing portion 217 is 7 mm, which is longer than the radius of the game ball B1 and shorter than the diameter. The 1st distribution part 217 is provided with the 1st distribution surface 217a formed in the aspect which extends from the left end of the 1st distribution part 217 to the right end as the upper surface. The said 1st distribution surface 217a inclines below toward the right, and it bounces back the game ball B1 which falls from the upper side and collides with it to the upper right side.

Further, since the length dimension of the second distribution unit 218 in the direction of the axis 213c is 8 mm, the second distribution unit 218 plays the game when the first left/right distribution nail 213 is fixed to the game board 233. It projects in most of the front half of the area PA. Further, the length dimension from the left end to the right end of the second distribution unit 218 is 7 mm which is longer than the radius of the game ball B1 and shorter than the diameter. The second distribution unit 218 has, as its upper surface, a second distribution surface 218a formed in a manner extending from the left end to the right end of the second distribution unit 218. The said 2nd distribution surface 218a inclines below toward the left, and it bounces back the game ball B1 which falls from the upper part and collides with the left upper part.

Here, the body diameter of the body shaft portion of the metal obstacle nail 228 (FIG. 50) is 2 mm. As described above, the first left-right distribution member 215 is made of resin, but by making the size around the axis 213c larger than the trunk of the obstacle nail 228, the game ball B1 may be broken even if repeated collisions occur. It does not have strength.

The first left-right distribution member 215 has side surfaces that are vertical surfaces at each of the fixed end and the free end. Of these, a first fixing hole 215a for inserting and fixing the fixing member 216 is formed in the fixed end surface 215b which is the side surface on the fixed end side. The shape of the first fixing hole 215a will be described below with reference to FIGS. 51(b) and 51(c). 51B is a plan view of the first left/right distribution member 215, and FIG. 51C is a rear view of the first left/right distribution member 215.

As shown in FIG. 51( b ), the first fixing hole 215 a has an opening in the fixed end surface 215 b of the first left/right distribution member 215, and is close to the free end of the first left/right distribution member 215. The first fixing hole 215a has a depth of 15 mm. As shown in FIG. 51( c ), the first fixing hole 215 a is formed large so as to occupy more than half the volume of the first left-right distribution member 215. The first fixing hole 215a is formed at a sufficient distance from the upper, lower, left, and right side surfaces of the first left-right distribution member 215 to maintain the strength of the first left-right distribution member 215.

Next, a state in which the first left/right distribution nail 213 is fixed to the game board 233 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b). 52(a) is a perspective view of a fixing member 216 for fixing the first left/right distribution member 215 to the game board 233, and FIG. 52(b) is cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 233. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the first left-right distribution nail 213 in the case.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), the fixing member 216 includes a cylindrical fixing trunk shaft portion 216a having a length dimension of 30 mm in the axis 213c direction and a cone having a length dimension of 5 mm in the axis line 213c direction. The fixed tip 216b has a length dimension capable of stably supporting the first left-right distribution member 215 protruding from the surface of the game board 233. The body diameter of the fixing member 216 is the same as the inner diameter of the first fixing hole 215a, and the fixing member 216 can be fitted such that its surface is in close contact with the inner surface of the first fixing hole 215a.

The first left/right distribution member 215 and the fixing member 216 that form the first left/right distribution nail 213 are separable. The fixing member 216 is independently fixed to the game board 233 by impacting the free end with a hammer or the like. Then, the first left/right distribution member 215 is fixed to the fixing member 216 by fitting the protruding portion of the fixing member 216 into the first fixing hole 215a. As a result, the first left/right distribution nail 213 is fixed to the game board 233.

As shown in FIG. 52B, in the fixing member 216, the entire fixing cusp 216b and a part of the fixing trunk shaft portion 216a are buried deeper than the surface of the game board 233. At the same time, the remaining portion of the fixing trunk shaft portion 216a is fixed to the game board 233 in such a manner as to project from the surface of the game board 233 in a substantially vertical direction. In the fixing member 216 fixed to the game board 233, the length dimension of the protrusion from the surface of the game board 233 is a dimension that can stably support the first left-right distribution member 215, and specifically, Is 15 mm. The first left-right distribution member 215 fixes the surface of the protrusion and the inner surface of the first fixing hole 215a with an adhesive, so that the distribution surfaces 217a and 218a are directed upward to the game board 233. Fixed.

Next, the course after the collision of the game ball B1 that collides with the first left/right distribution nail 213 will be described based on FIGS. 53 and 54. First, the case where the game ball B1 collides with the first distribution surface 217a will be described. FIG. 53A is an end view of the cut surface of the first left/right distribution nail 213 taken along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 233. As shown in FIG. 53A, the game ball B1 flowing down the back side (game board 233 side) of the game area PA sandwiched between the game board 233 and the window panel 52 collides with the first distribution surface 217a. To do.

FIG. 53(b) is an explanatory view for explaining the rebound direction of the game ball B1 that flows down from above and collides with the first distribution surface 217a, and FIG. 53(c) flows down from above on the left side to the first. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the rebound direction of the game ball B1 which collides with the distribution surface 217a. As shown in FIG. 53(b), on the back side of the game area PA, the first distribution surface 217a is inclined downward to the right, and therefore flows down from above and becomes the first distribution surface 217a. A drag having an upward component and a rightward component acts on the game ball B1 that collides. As a result, the game ball B1 after the collision bounces upward to the right.

Further, as shown in FIG. 53(c), a drag having an upward component and a rightward component acts on the game ball B1 that flows down from the upper left side and collides with the first distribution surface 217a. As a result, the game ball B1 after the collision bounces upward to the right. In this case, since the game ball B1 before the collision already has a velocity component in the right direction, the game ball B1 which flows down from the upper left side and collides with the game ball B1 falls to the right direction from the collision with the game ball B1. It greatly advances to.

Next, a case where the game ball B1 collides with the second distribution surface 218a will be described. FIG. 54A is an end view of the cut surface of the first left/right distribution nail 213 taken along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 233. As shown in FIG. 54A, the game ball B1 flowing down on the front side (the window panel 52 side) of the game area PA sandwiched between the game board 233 and the window panel 52 collides with the second distribution surface 218a. To do.

54(b) is an explanatory view for explaining the rebound direction of the game ball B1 that flows down from above and collides with the second distribution surface 218a, and FIG. 54(c) flows down from above on the left side. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the rebound direction of the game ball B1 which collides with the 2 distribution surface 218a. As shown in FIG. 54(b), on the back side of the game area PA, the second distribution surface 218a is inclined downward to the left, so that it flows down from above and becomes the second distribution surface 218a. A drag having an upward component and a leftward component acts on the game ball B1 that collides. As a result, the game ball B1 after the collision bounces upward on the left side.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54(c), the drag having the upward component and the leftward component also acts on the game ball B1 that flows down from the upper left side and collides with the second distribution surface 218a. In this case, the velocity component to the right of the game ball B1 before the collision is reduced due to the influence of the component to the left of the reaction force received by the collision, and thus the game ball B1 after the collision bounces slightly upward to the right.

Next, the structure of the second left/right distribution nail 214 will be described based on FIGS. 55(a) to 55(c). FIG. 55A is a perspective view of the second left/right distribution nail 214. As shown in FIG. 55(a), the second left/right distribution nail 214 is an elongated nail extending in the direction of the axis 214c. The second left-right distribution member 214 fixes the second left-right distribution member 231 that distributes the game ball B1 that falls from above and collides in the left-right direction, and the second left-right distribution member 231 to the surface of the game board 233. And a fixing member 216 for fixing. The second left-right distribution member 231 is a resin member having a substantially quadrangular prism shape that is formed to extend in the direction of the axis 214c, and has a different inclination as a surface that can collide with the game ball B1 falling from above. Two distribution surfaces 232a and 234a are provided.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the second left/right distribution nail 214, the axis 214c is substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 233, and the second left/right distribution member 231 projects from the surface of the game board 233. It is fixed to the game board 233. The length dimension of the second left/right distribution member 231 in the direction of the axis 214c is 17 mm, and the second left/right distribution member 231 of the second left/right distribution nail 214 fixed to the game board 233 projects 17 mm into the game area PA. ing. The second left/right distribution nail 214 covers the contactable range of the game ball B1. Therefore, the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA may collide with the second left/right distribution nail 214, and the game ball B1 located on the front side may collide.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), the second left-right distribution member 231 has a first distribution portion 232 formed to extend in the direction of the axis 214c, and a free end side of the first distribution portion 232. And a second distribution portion 234 formed to extend in the direction of the axis 214c in a manner continuous with the side surface of the second distribution portion 234. In the state where the second left/right distribution nail 214 is fixed to the game board 233, the boundary surface between the first distribution portion 232 and the second distribution portion 234 is parallel to the surface of the game board 233.

Since the length dimension of the first allocating portion 232 in the direction of the axis 214c is 9 mm, the first allocating portion 232 has the game area PA when the second left/right allocating nail 214 is fixed to the game board 233. It projects to the back half of the. In addition, the first distribution unit 232 has a length dimension of 7 mm that is longer than the radius of the game ball B1 and shorter than the diameter thereof in the left-right direction. The 1st distribution part 232 is provided with the 1st distribution surface 232a formed in the aspect which extends from the left end of the 1st distribution part 232 to the right end as the upper surface. The said 1st distribution surface 232a inclines below toward the left, and it bounces back the game ball B1 which falls from the upper part and collides to the upper left side.

Further, since the length dimension of the second distribution portion 234 in the direction of the axis 214c is 8 mm, the second distribution portion 234 is a game when the second left/right distribution nail 214 is fixed to the game board 233. It projects in most of the front half of the area PA. Further, the second distribution unit 234 has a length dimension of 7 mm that is longer than the radius of the game ball B1 and shorter than the diameter in the left-right direction. The 2nd distribution part 234 is equipped with the 2nd distribution surface 234a formed in the aspect which extends from the left end of the 2nd distribution part 234 to the right end as the upper surface. The said 2nd distribution surface 234a inclines below toward the right, and the game ball B1 which falls from the upper part and collides is repelled to the upper right side.

The second left-right distribution member 231 is made of resin, but by making the size around the axis 214c larger than the trunk shaft portion of the metal obstacle nail 228, it does not break even when the game ball B1 is repeatedly collided. Has strength.

The second left-right distribution member 231 has side surfaces that are vertical surfaces at the fixed end and the free end, respectively. Of these, a second fixing hole 231a for inserting and fixing the fixing member 216 is formed in the fixed end surface 231b which is the side surface on the fixed end side. The shape of the second fixing hole 231a will be described below with reference to FIGS. 55(b) and 55(c). 55(b) is a plan view of the second left/right distribution member 231, and FIG. 55(c) is a rear view of the second left/right distribution member 231.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), the second fixing hole 231a has an opening at the fixed end surface 231b of the second left/right distribution member 231 and is located near the free end of the second left/right distribution member 231. The second fixing hole 231a has a depth of 15 mm. As shown in FIG. 55(c), the second fixing hole 231a is formed large so as to occupy more than half the volume of the second left/right distribution member 231. The second fixing hole 231a is formed at a sufficient distance from the upper, lower, left, and right side surfaces of the second horizontal distribution member 231 to maintain the strength of the second horizontal distribution member 231.

The fixing member 216 forming the second left/right distribution nail 214 is the same member as the fixing member 216 forming the first left/right distribution nail 213 described above, and the second left/right distribution member 231 is the first left/right distribution member. It is fixed to the game board 233 in the same manner as the member 215. Specifically, the second left/right distribution member 231 forming the second left/right distribution nail 214 and the fixing member 216 can be separated. The fixing member 216 is independently fixed to the game board 233 by impacting the free end with a hammer or the like. Then, the second left-right distribution member 231 is fixed to the fixing member 216 with an adhesive in such a manner that the protruding portion of the fixing member 216 is fitted in the second fixing hole 231a. As a result, the second left/right distribution nails 214 are fixed to the game board 233 with the distribution surfaces 232a and 234a facing upward.

Next, a case where the game ball B1 collides with the second left/right distribution nail 214 will be described. The first distribution surface 232a of the second left/right distribution nail 214 has the same inclination as the second distribution surface 218a of the first left/right distribution nail 213. Specifically, on the back side of the game area PA, since the first distribution surface 232a is inclined downward to the left, the game ball B1 flows down from above and collides with the first distribution surface 232a. Has a drag force having an upward component and a left component. As a result, the game ball B1 after the collision bounces upward on the left side.

Further, the drag having the upward component and the leftward component acts on the game ball B1 that flows down from the right upper side and collides with the first distribution surface 232a. In this case, the velocity component to the right of the game ball B1 before the collision is reduced due to the influence of the component to the left of the reaction force received by the collision, and thus the game ball B1 after the collision bounces slightly upward to the right.

The second distribution surface 234a of the second left/right distribution nail 214 has the same inclination as the first distribution surface 217a of the first left/right distribution nail 213. Specifically, on the front side of the game area PA, since the second distribution surface 234a is inclined downward to the right, the game ball B1 is dropped from above and collides with the second distribution surface 234a. Has a drag force having an upward component and a rightward component. As a result, the game ball B1 after the collision bounces upward to the right.

In addition, a drag having an upward component and a rightward component acts on the game ball B1 that flows down from the upper right side and collides with the second distribution surface 234a. As a result, the game ball B1 after the collision bounces upward to the right. In this case, since the game ball B1 before the collision already has a velocity component in the right direction, the game ball B1 which flows down from the upper left side and collides with the game ball B1 falls to the right direction from the collision with the game ball B1. It greatly advances to.

Next, regarding the difference between the path of the game ball B1 after colliding with the left/right distribution nails 213 and 214 and the path of the game ball B1 after colliding with the obstacle nail 228, based on FIGS. 56(a) to (c). Explain. FIG. 56(a) is a table showing the direction of the resistance received by the game ball B1 that collides with the first left/right distribution nail 213, and FIG. 56(b) shows the game ball B1 that collides with the second left/right distribution nail 214. FIG. 56C is a table showing the direction of the reaction force received by the game ball B1 colliding with the obstacle nail 228.

First, the first left/right distribution nail 213 will be described. As shown in FIG. 56(a), a reaction force having a rightward component and an upward component acts on the game ball B1 that collides with the first distribution surface 217a on the far side of the game region PA, and at the same time, the game region. A drag having a leftward component and an upward component acts on the game ball B1 that collides with the second distribution surface 218a on the front side of the PA. In the first left/right distribution nail 213, in the case where the game ball B1 collides with the left side of the first left/right distribution nail 213 and in the case where the game ball B1 collides with the right side of the first left/right distribution nail 213. , The direction of the drag force acting on the game ball B1 at the time of collision is the same.

Next, the second left/right distribution nail 214 will be described. As shown in FIG. 56(b), a reaction force having a leftward component and an upward component acts on the game ball B1 that collides with the first distribution surface 232a on the back side of the game area PA, and at the same time, 2 A drag having a rightward component and an upward component acts on the game ball B1 that collides with the second distribution surface 234a on the front side of the game area PA of the left/right distribution nail 214. In the second left/right distribution nail 214, a case where the game ball B1 collides with the left side of the second left/right distribution nail 214 and a case where the game ball B1 collides with the right side of the second left/right distribution nail 214. , The direction of the drag force acting on the game ball B1 at the time of collision is the same.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 56(c), the game ball B1 that has collided with the left side surface of the obstacle nail 228 acts as a drag having a leftward component and an upward component, and also has an obstacle nail 228. A drag having a rightward component and an upward component acts on the game ball B1 that has collided with the surface on the right side of. In the obstacle nail 228, when the game ball B1 collides on the back side of the obstacle nail 228 and when the game ball B1 collides on the front side of the obstacle nail 228, the reaction force acting on the game ball B1 at the time of collision The direction is the same.

In this way, by using the left/right distribution nails 213, 214, the direction of the reaction force acting on the game ball B1 colliding with the left/right distribution nails 213, 214 is changed depending on the position in the depth direction in the game area PA. By doing so, the course of the game ball B1 after the collision can be made different. For this reason, compared with the obstacle nail 228 in which the course after the collision of the game ball B1 does not change regardless of whether the game ball B1 is located on the front side or the back side of the game area PA, in the game area PA. The game balls B1 can be dispersed in a manner to increase the variation of the movement of the game balls B1. In this way, by preventing the movement of the game ball B1 from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The behavior pattern of the game ball B1 in the conventional game board in which only the obstacle nail 228 is arranged as a nail for allocating the path of the game ball B1 is a behavior pattern in which the game ball B1 colliding with the left side of the obstacle nail 228 bounces to the left side. , And the game ball B1 that collides with the right side of the obstacle nail 228 bounces back to the right. On the other hand, by arranging the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 on the game board 233, the behavior pattern of the game ball B1 in which the game ball B1 that collides with the left side of the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 bounces to the right side, And the behavior pattern of the game ball B1 in which the game ball B1 colliding with the right side of the left/right distribution nails 213, 214 bounces to the left side can be added as a new behavior pattern of the game ball B1. By increasing the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA and preventing the movement of the game ball B1 from becoming monotonous, the interest of the game can be improved.

As described above, when the game ball B1 collides with the left/right distribution nails 213 and 214, the course of the game ball B1 after the collision changes depending on the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction. Further, as described above, in the game board 233 (FIG. 50) of the present embodiment, the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 are a group of guiding nails provided to guide the game ball B1 to the operating ports 33 and 34. It is arranged as a part of 211, 212.

The behavior when the game ball B1 located on the far side of the game area PA collides with the first left/right distribution nail 213 forming the left guide nail group 211 will be described based on FIG. 57(a). FIG. 57A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the course of the game ball B1 located on the back side on the left guide nail group 211. As described above, the seven first left/right distribution nails 213 belonging to the left guide nail group 211 are arranged in one line toward the operation ports 33 and 34.

As described above, the interval between the first left-right distribution nails 213 forming the left guide nail group 211 is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. As shown in FIG. 57(a), the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA receives a reaction force in the upper right direction due to the collision with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left/right distribution nail 213, and the upper right side. Bounces back to. After the collision, since the velocity component of the game ball B1 in the right direction increases, the game ball B1 drops downward from the gap left immediately to the right of the first left/right distribution nail 213 and is collected from the out port 24a. The likelihood of Further, after the collision, since the moving distance of the game ball B1 to the right increases, the number of collisions with the first left/right distribution nail 213 necessary for the game ball B1 to reach the operation ports 33, 34 decreases. However, the possibility that the game ball B1 falls downward from the gap between the two first left/right distribution nails 213 and is collected from the out port 24a is reduced. In this way, the game ball B1 located on the far side of the game area PA is guided to the operation ports 33, 34 with a high probability by the left guide nail group 211.

Next, the behavior when the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA collides with the first left/right distribution nail 213 forming the left guide nail group 211 will be described with reference to FIG. 57(b). .. FIG. 57B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the course of the game ball B1 located on the front side on the left guide nail group 211.

As shown in FIG. 57(b), the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA receives a reaction force in the upper left direction due to the collision with the second distribution surface 218a of the first left/right distribution nail 213, and the upper right side. Bounces small to. After the collision, the right velocity component of the game ball B1 decreases due to the influence of the drag force in the opposite direction. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the game ball B1 will fall downward from the gap provided on the right side of the first left-right distribution nail 213 that has collided and be collected from the out port 24a. In addition, since the right speed component of the game ball B1 is reduced by the collision, the number of collisions with the first left/right distribution nail 213 necessary for the game ball B1 to reach the operation ports 33 and 34 is increased. To do. In addition, since the right speed component of the game ball B1 decreases with each collision, the game ball B1 may drop downward from the gap between the two first left/right distribution nails 213 and be collected from the out port 24a. Will increase with each collision. In this way, the probability that the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA is guided to the operation ports 33, 34 by the left guide nail group 211 is low.

Next, FIG. 58(a) shows the behavior of the game ball B1 when the game ball B1 located on the far side of the game area PA collides with the second left/right distribution nail 214 forming the right guiding nail group 212. It will be explained based on. FIG. 58A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the course of the game ball B1 located on the far side on the right guiding nail group 212. As described above, the seven second left/right distribution nails 214 belonging to the right guiding nail group 212 are arranged side by side in one row toward the operation ports 33 and 34.

The distance between the second left/right distribution nails 214 forming the right guide nail group 212 as described above is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. As shown in FIG. 58(a), the game ball B1 located on the far side of the game area PA receives a drag force in the upper left direction due to the collision with the first distribution surface 232a of the second left/right distribution nail 214, and the upper left side. Bounces back to. After the collision, the left velocity component of the game ball B1 increases under the influence of the drag force in the same direction. Therefore, the moving distance of the game ball B1 in the left direction increases, and the game ball B1 falls downward from the gap provided on the left side of the colliding second left/right distribution nail 214 and is collected from the out port 24a. Less likely to be done. Further, after the collision, since the moving distance of the game ball B1 to the left increases, the number of collisions with the second left/right distribution nail 214 required to reach the operating ports 33, 34 decreases, and the game ball The possibility that B1 falls downward from the gap between the two second left/right distribution nails 214 and is collected from the out port 24a is reduced. In this way, the game ball B1 located on the far side of the game area PA is guided to the operation ports 33, 34 with a high probability by the right guide nail group 212.

Next, FIG. 58B shows the behavior of the game ball B1 when the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA collides with the second left/right distribution nail 214 which constitutes the right guiding nail group 212. It will be explained based on. FIG. 58B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the course of the game ball B1 located on the front side on the right guide nail group 212.

As shown in FIG. 58(b), the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA receives a reaction force in the upper right direction due to a collision with the second distribution surface 234a of the second left/right distribution nail 214, and the upper left side. Bounces small to. After the collision, the left velocity component of the game ball B1 is reduced by the influence of the drag force in the right direction, so the game ball B1 is downward from the gap provided on the right side of the second left/right distribution nail 214 that collides. There is an increased possibility that it will fall to the outside and be collected from the outlet 24a. Further, after the collision, since the moving distance of the game ball B1 to the left decreases, the number of collisions with the second left/right distribution nail 214 required for the game ball B1 to reach the operation ports 33 and 34 increases. To do. Since the velocity component of the game ball B1 to the left decreases at each collision, the game ball B1 can be dropped downward from the gap between the two second left/right distribution nails 214 and collected from the out port 24a. Sexuality increases. Thus, the probability that the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA is guided to the operation ports 33 and 34 by the right guide nail group 212 is low.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 57(a), (b) and FIGS. 58(a), (b), the game ball B1 colliding with the vicinity of the upstream side of the first operating port 33 has a high probability of having the operating port 33, Four obstacle nails 228 are arranged to win the prize. The four obstacle nails 228 bounce the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA and the game ball B1 located on the front side in the same manner. Therefore, even if the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA is operated with high probability when it is guided by the guide nail groups 211 and 212 to the obstacle nail 228 near the first operation port 33. Win a prize in mouths 33 and 34.

In this way, by using the nail provided in the vicinity of the first operation port 33 as the obstacle nail 228, the player's sense of security that the game ball B1 reaching the periphery of the operation ports 33 and 34 will win with a high probability is left. Meanwhile, it is possible to make a difference in the probability that the game ball B1 wins the operating ports 33, 34 depending on the position of the game area PA in the depth direction.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

The left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 are provided with two distribution surfaces 217a, 218a, 232a and 234a having different inclinations, and the two distribution surfaces 217a, 218a, 232a and 234a are distributed to the left and right in a manner facing upward. The nails 213 and 214 are provided on the game board 233. As a result, when the game ball B1 flowing down from above collides with the first distribution surfaces 217a and 232a, the game ball B1 bounces in a manner different from that when it collides with the second distribution surfaces 218a and 234a. .. By using the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214, the course of the game ball B1 after the collision can be changed in a mode according to the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA. By increasing the pattern in which the game balls B1 are dispersed in the game area PA, it is possible to avoid the movement of the game balls B1 in the game area PA becoming monotonous and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, by using the left-right distribution nails 213 and 214 for the nails forming the guide nail groups 211 and 212 for guiding the game ball B1 to the operation ports 33 and 34, the depth direction in the game area PA of the game ball B1 is achieved. The difference in position can be reflected in the result of the game. Compared with a conventional gaming machine in which the difference in the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA cannot be reflected in the result of the game, the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA is increased and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

Further, the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the resin left and right sorting members 215 and 231 forming the left and right sorting nails 213 and 214 are larger than the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the metal obstacle nail 228. Further, large left and right distributing members 215 and 231 are provided with large fixing holes 215a and 231a, and a fixing member 216 made of metal is fitted into the fixing holes 215a and 231a. In this way, since the resin member is reinforced by the metal member over the entire area, the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 have durability so as not to be damaged even when the game ball B1 is repeatedly hit. There is. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall for a long time, the number of maintenances for the left and right sorting nails 213 and 214 can be minimized.

In the game board 233, the left/right distribution nails 213 and 214 that occupy a larger area than the obstacle nail 228 are used only for some of the nails provided on the game board 233 that are largely related to the game result. Therefore, the obstruction nail 228 is used for the remaining nails. Therefore, unlike the case where the left/right distribution nails 213 and 214 are used for all the nails provided on the game board 233, while ensuring the number of nails that can be provided on the game board 233, the game in the game area PA. The game result can be different depending on the position of the ball B1 in the depth direction.

Further, since the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 are provided with the fixing holes 215a and 231a, the protruding portion of the fixing member 216 previously fixed to the game board 233 is fitted into the fixing holes 215a and 231a. The left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 can be fixed with. The left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 are fixed to the fixing member 216 with an adhesive. At this time, the left/right distribution nails 213, 214 are rotated around the fixing member 216 until the adhesive hardens, and the distribution surfaces 217a, 218a, 232a, 234a of the left/right distribution nails 213, 214 are moved upward. Since it can be adjusted to face, the game ball B1 flowing down from above can be collided with the distribution surfaces 217a, 218a, 232a, 234a.

<Another form of the thirteenth embodiment>
-In the game board 233 (FIG. 50) of the thirteenth embodiment described above, the region in which the guide nail groups 211 and 212 are arranged may be configured by a detachable member. A case where the left guide nail group 211 is configured to be removable will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is an enlarged view of the lower left front part of the game board 235 constituted by the left guide member 255, which is a base on which the left guide nail group 211 is detachable, and the seven first left/right distribution nails 213.

As shown in FIG. 59, the seven first left/right distribution nails 213 are fixed to the left guiding member 255. The left side guide member 255 is formed with three fixing protrusions 255a that enable the left side guide member 255 to be screwed to the game board 233. The fixing protrusion 255a is used for screwing. A through hole is formed. In addition, the game board 235 is formed with a hole into which the left guide member 255 is fitted without a gap, and a recessed portion corresponding to the fixing protrusion 255a of the left guide member 255 is formed at the edge of the hole of the game board 235. Has been formed. Then, a screw hole for screwing the left guide member 255 is formed in the recess.

In the assembling process of the pachinko machine 10, after fixing the seven first left/right distribution nails 213 to the single left-side guiding member 255 that has been removed, the left-side guiding member 255 is attached to the game board 235 and the fixing protrusion is formed. The portion 255a is screwed into the recess of the game board 233. In this way, by configuring the seven first left/right distribution nails 213 to be integrally attached to the game board 235 at the same time, the first left/right distribution nail 213 is fixed to the game board 235. The work efficiency can be improved, and the fine adjustment of the attachment angle of the first left/right distribution nail 213 can be facilitated. In this configuration, the left guiding member 255 and the first left/right distribution nail 213 fixed to the left guiding member 255 may be integrally formed.

In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the left/right distribution nails 213 and 214 may be provided as so-called life nails located near the upstream side of the first operation port 33. A configuration in which the left-right distribution nails 213 and 214 are provided in the vicinity of the first operation port 33 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board 236 in which the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 are arranged in the vicinity of the first operation opening 33, and an enlarged view around the operation openings 33 and 34 of the game board 236. Four left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 are arranged near the upstream side of the operation ports 33 and 34.

In detail, a second left/right distribution nail 214 is provided near the upper left of the operation ports 33, 34, and a space slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 on the left side of the second left/right distribution nail 214. A first left/right distribution nail 213 is arranged so as to leave the space. Since the gap between the two left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 arranged near the upper left of the operation ports 33 and 34 has a width that allows the game ball B1 to pass through, the game ball B1 has the width of the two balls. It is configured such that it is not pinched between the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 and does not stop. A first left/right distribution nail 213 is provided near the upper right of the operation ports 33, 34, and a space larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided on the right side of the first left/right distribution nail 213. A second left/right distribution nail 214 is provided. Since the gap between the two left/right distribution nails 213, 214 arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the operation ports 33, 34 has a width that allows the game ball B1 to pass, the game ball B1 has the width of the two balls. It is configured such that it is not pinched between the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 and does not stop.

Most of the game balls B1 that collide with the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 arranged near the upper left of the operation ports 33 and 34 are guided to the obstacle nail 228 arranged on the left side of the game area PA. It is a game ball B1. The game ball B1 collides with the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 from the upper left side. The game ball B1 which is located on the far side of the game area PA and which collides with the first left and right distribution nails 213 on the left above the operation ports 33, 34 collides with the first distribution surface 217a. The game ball B1 receives a drag force in the upper right direction, greatly bounces in the right direction, which is the direction toward the operation ports 33, 34, and wins the operation ports 33, 34 with a high probability.

Further, the game ball B1 which is located on the far side of the game area PA and which collides with the inner second left/right distribution nail 214 above the left side of the operation ports 33, 34 collides with the first distribution surface 232a. The game ball B1 receives a drag force in the upper left direction, bounces slightly to the right, which is the direction toward the operating ports 33, 34, and wins the operating ports 33, 34 with a high probability. Here, the outer side is the side far from the working ports 33, 34, and the inner side is the side close to the working ports 33, 34.

As described above, with respect to the game ball B1 on the back side of the game area PA, the game ball B1 colliding with the first left/right distribution nail 213 on the outer side relatively far from the operation ports 33, 34 greatly advances to the right and the operation port B1. The left/right distribution nails 213, 214 are arranged so that the game ball B1 colliding with the inner second left/right distribution nail 214 relatively close to 33, 34 advances to the right side in a small manner. Therefore, the game ball B1 located on the far side of the game area PA collides with the outer first left/right distribution nail 213 at the upper left side of the operation ports 33, 34, and the inner second left/right distribution nail 214. In both of the cases of collision with, there is a high probability of winning in the operating ports 33, 34.

Further, the game ball B1 which is located on the front side of the game area PA and which collides with the outer first left/right distribution nail 213 above the left side of the operation ports 33, 34 collides with the second distribution surface 218a. The game ball B1 receives a drag force in the upper left direction, bounces slightly in the right direction, which is the direction toward the operating ports 33, 34, and wins the operating ports 33, 34 with a low probability. Further, the game ball B1 which is located on the front side of the game area PA and which collides with the inner second left/right distribution nail 214 above the left side of the operation ports 33, 34 collides with the second distribution surface 234a. The game ball B1 receives a drag force in the upper right direction, greatly bounces in the right direction, which is the direction toward the operating ports 33, 34, and wins the operating ports 33, 34 with a low probability.

As described above, with respect to the game ball B1 on the front side of the game area PA, the game ball B1 colliding with the first left/right distribution nail 213 on the outer side relatively far from the operation ports 33, 34 advances to the right side slightly, and the operation port B1 The left/right distribution nails 213, 214 are arranged so that the game ball B1 colliding with the inner second left/right distribution nail 214 relatively close to 33, 34 advances greatly to the right. Therefore, the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA collides with the outer first left/right distribution nail 213 at the upper left side of the operating ports 33, 34, and the inner second left/right distribution nail 214. In either of the case of colliding with and the case of winning in the operation ports 33 and 34 with a low probability.

On the other hand, most of the game balls B1 that collide with the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 arranged near the upper right of the operation ports 33 and 34 are guided to the obstacle nail 228 arranged on the right side of the game area PA. It is the coming game ball B1. The game ball B1 collides with the left/right distribution nails 213 and 214 from the upper right side. The game ball B1 which is located on the far side of the game area PA and which collides with the outer second left/right distribution nail 214 on the upper right side of the working ports 33, 34 collides with the first distribution surface 232a. The game ball B1 receives a drag force in the upper left direction, greatly bounces to the left, which is the direction toward the operating ports 33, 34, and wins the operating ports 33, 34 with a high probability.

Further, the game ball B1 which is located on the far side of the game area PA and which collides with the inner first left/right distribution nail 213 at the upper right side of the operation ports 33, 34 collides with the first distribution surface 217a. The game ball B1 receives a drag force in the upper right direction, bounces back slightly to the left, which is the direction toward the operating ports 33, 34, and wins the operating ports 33, 34 with a high probability. Here, the outer side is the side far from the working ports 33, 34, and the inner side is the side close to the working ports 33, 34.

Thus, with respect to the game ball B1 on the back side of the game area PA, the game ball B1 colliding with the second left/right distribution nail 214 on the outer side relatively far from the operation ports 33, 34 greatly advances to the left, and the operation port The left/right distribution nails 213, 214 are arranged so that the game ball B1 colliding with the first left/right distribution nail 213 relatively close to 33, 34 advances to the left side small. Therefore, the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA collides with the outer second left/right distribution nail 214 at the upper right side of the operating ports 33, 34, and the inner first left/right distribution nail 213. In any of the cases of collision with, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the operation ports 33 and 34 are won with high probability.

Further, the game ball B1 which is located on the front side of the game area PA and which collides with the outer second left/right distribution nail 214 on the upper right side of the operation ports 33, 34 collides with the second distribution surface 234a. The game ball B1 receives a drag force in the upper right direction, bounces back a small amount to the left, which is the direction toward the operating ports 33, 34, and wins the operating ports 33, 34 with a low probability. Further, the game ball B1 which is located on the front side of the game area PA and which collides with the inner first left/right distribution nail 213 on the upper right side of the operating ports 33, 34 collides with the second distribution surface 218a. The game ball B1 receives a drag force in the upper left direction, bounces largely to the left, which is the direction toward the operating ports 33, 34, and wins the operating ports 33, 34 with a low probability.

As described above, with respect to the game ball B1 on the front side of the game area PA, the game ball B1 colliding with the second left/right distribution nail 214 on the outer side relatively far from the operation ports 33, 34 advances to the left side small, and the operation port The left/right distribution nails 213, 214 are arranged so that the game ball B1 colliding with the first left/right distribution nail 213 on the inner side relatively close to 33, 34 greatly advances to the left. Therefore, the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA collides with the outer second left/right distribution nail 214 on the upper right side of the operating ports 33, 34, and the inner first left/right distribution nail 213. In either of the case of colliding with and the case of winning in the operation ports 33 and 34 with a low probability.

In this way, the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 are provided in the vicinity of the upstream side of the first actuation port 33, so that the game ball B1 is in a mode according to the front-back direction position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA. The probabilities that the player wins in the operating ports 33, 34 can be different. On the other hand, in the case of the conventional pachinko machine in which the obstacle nail 228 is arranged immediately in front of the operation opening, the probability that the game ball B1 wins the operation opening is not influenced by the position of the game ball B1 in the front-rear direction in the game area PA. ..

Therefore, by disposing the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 immediately before the operation ports 33 and 34, compared with the conventional pachinko machine in which the obstacle nail 228 is disposed immediately before the operation ports. , The variation of the movement of the game ball B1 immediately before the operation ports 33, 34 can be enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 may be used as so-called top nails arranged near the top of the game board 233. In this configuration, the game ball B1 that collides with the top nail is distributed to either the left side or the right side of the game board 233 according to the position of the game area PA in the depth direction. By using a game board in which the probability that the game ball B1 flowing down on the left side will win the operating ports 33, 34 and the probability that the game ball B1 flowing down on the right side will win the operating ports 33, 34 will be different. The course of the game ball B1 after the collision can be sorted in a manner according to the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction.

In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the left and right distribution nails 213, 214 are shaped such that the distribution surfaces 217a, 218a, 232a, 234a are provided over the entire length of the left and right distribution nails 213, 214. It is not limited to the shape. For example, instead of the first left/right distribution nail 213, the first left/right distribution nail 242 in which the distribution surfaces 244a, 245a are provided only in the collision possible range of the game ball B1 may be used.

The first left/right distribution nail 242 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b). 61(a) is a perspective view of the first left/right distribution nail 242, and FIG. 61(b) is an end view of a cut surface of the first left/right distribution nail 242 taken along a plane perpendicular to the game board 233. .. As shown in FIG. 61A, the first left/right distribution nail 242 is a nail formed to extend in the direction of the axis 242a. The first left/right distribution member 243 includes a first left/right distribution member 243 having distribution surfaces 244a, 245a for distributing the course of the game ball B1 in collision after the collision, and the first left/right distribution member 243. And a fixing member 216 for fixing to the game board 237 (FIG. 61(b)). Here, the fixing member 216 forming the first left/right distribution nail 242 is the same member as the fixing member 216 forming the first left/right distribution member 215 of the thirteenth embodiment.

The first left-right distribution member 243 is a resin member having a substantially quadrangular prism shape formed by extending in the direction of the axis 242a. The first left/right distribution member 243 includes a fixed end side non-contact portion 246 having a fixed end side non-contact surface 246a which is a horizontal surface on the fixed end side that does not contact the game ball B1 as an upper surface. On the front side of the fixed end side non-contact portion 246, the first distribution portion 244 having the first distribution surface 244a inclined downward to the right as the upper surface is the fixed end side non-contact portion 246. It is integrally formed in a continuous manner. On the front side of the first distribution unit 244, a second distribution unit 245 having a second distribution surface 245a inclined downward to the left as an upper surface is provided in the first distribution unit 244. It is integrally formed in a continuous manner. Then, on the front side of the second distribution portion 245, the free end side non-contact portion 247 having the free end side non-contact surface 247a which is a horizontal surface on the free end side that does not contact the game ball B1 as the upper surface is the second distribution portion. It is integrally formed so as to be continuous with the dividing portion 245.

As shown in FIG. 61(b), the length dimension in the direction of the axis 242a of the fixed end side non-contact portion 246 located on the fixed end side of the first left/right distribution member 243 is shorter than the radius of the game ball B1. The length dimension in the direction of the axis 242a (FIG. 61(a)) of the first distributing portion 244, which is 5 mm and is adjacent to the front side of the fixed end side non-contact portion 246, is 4 mm. Further, the height dimension of the non-contact portion 246 on the fixed end side is the same as the height dimension of the right end of the first distributing portion 244.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61(b), the length dimension in the direction of the axis 242a (FIG. 61(a)) of the second distributing portion 245 adjacent to the front side of the first distributing portion 244 is 4 mm. In addition, the length dimension of the free end side non-contact portion 247 adjacent to the free end side of the second distributing portion 245 in the direction of the axis 242a (FIG. 61(a)) is shorter than the radius of the game ball B1. It is 4 mm. Further, the height dimension of the free end side non-contact portion 247 is the same as the height dimension of the left end of the second distribution portion 245. Here, in the state where the first left/right distribution nail 242 is fixed to the game board 237, the side surface on the fixed end side, the boundary surface between the fixed end side non-contact portion 246 and the first distribution portion 244, the first distribution The boundary surface between the portion 244 and the second distribution portion 245 and the boundary surface between the second distribution portion 245 and the free end side non-contact portion 247 are both surfaces parallel to the surface of the game board 237.

As already described in the thirteenth embodiment, the contactable range of the game ball B1 is 5.5 mm from the surface of the game board 237 to the window panel 52 side, from the surface of the game board 237 to the window panel 52 side. It is up to the place moved by 12.5 mm. On the other hand, since the length dimension of the fixed end side non-contact portion 246 in the first left/right distribution member 243 in the direction of the axis 242a is set to be shorter than 5.5 mm, the game located on the back side of the game area PA is played. The ball B1 can collide only with the first distribution surface 244a, and the game ball B1 does not collide with the fixed end side non-contact surface 246a. Further, the length dimension (4 mm) of the non-contact portion 247 on the free end side of the first left/right distribution member 243 in the direction of the axis 242 a and the length from the free end of the first left/right distribution member 243 to the back surface of the window panel 52. Since the total of the size (1 mm) and 5.5 mm is set to be shorter than 5.5 mm, the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA can collide only with the second distribution surface 245a, The ball B1 does not collide with the non-contact surface 247a on the free end side.

In this way, the fixed end-side non-contact portion 246 having the fixed end-side non-contact surface 246a, which is a horizontal surface, as the upper surface is provided at the fixed end of the first left/right distribution nail 242, and the fixed end-side non-contact portion 246 is in the axial line 242a direction. By making the length dimension of the game ball B1 shorter than the radius of the game ball B1, the first left and right are eliminated while eliminating the possibility that the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA contacts the fixed end side non-contact surface 246a. It is possible to reduce the possibility that a large angle error will occur when the distribution nail 242 is attached. Specifically, when attaching the first left-right distribution nail 242 to the game board 237, the distribution surfaces 244a and 245a are upward by adjusting the rotation angle with the fixed end side non-contact surface 246a which is a horizontal plane as a guide. It becomes easy to fix the first left/right distribution nail 242 to the game board 237 in a state of facing.

-In the thirteenth embodiment described above, a configuration may be used in which, instead of the left-right distribution nails 213 and 214, a reversing nail 251 that reverses the position of the colliding game ball B1 in the game area PA. The shape of the reversal nail 251 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62(a) to 62(d).

FIG. 62(a) is a perspective view of the reversing nail 251, and FIG. 62(b) is an end view of a cut surface when the reversing nail 251 is cut by a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 238. c) is an explanatory view for explaining the reaction force received by the game ball B1 colliding with the first reversing surface 254a of the reversing nail 251. FIG. 62D is the game colliding with the second reversing surface 254b of the reversing nail 251. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the drag force which the ball B1 receives.

As shown in FIG. 62(a), the reversal nail 251 is a nail formed to extend in the direction of the axis 251a. The reversing nail 251 includes a reversing member 254 having reversing surfaces 254a and 254b for changing the course of the game ball B1 colliding with the upper surface, and a fixing member 216 for fixing the reversing member 254 to the game board 238. Become. The fixing member 216 forming the reversing nail 251 is the same member as the fixing member 216 forming the first left/right distribution nail 213 in the thirteenth embodiment.

The reversing member 254 is a resin member having a substantially rectangular prism shape formed by extending in the direction of the axis 251a. The upper surface of the reversing member 254 has four vertices and is composed of a first reversing surface 254a and a second reversing surface 254b. Of these, the first reversal surface 254a is a triangular flat surface that has vertices on the right back, left back, and right front, and the right back vertices are higher than the other two vertices. Therefore, the first reversal surface 254a is inclined downward to the left and the front.

The second inversion surface 254b is a triangular flat surface having vertices on the front left side, the back left side, and the front right side, and the vertices on the front left side are higher than the other two vertices. Therefore, the second inversion surface 254b is inclined downward to the right and the rear.

The length dimension of the reversing member 254 in the direction of the axis 251a is 17 mm. As shown in FIG. 62( b ), the reversing nail 251 is formed with a fixing hole into which the fixing member 216 is fitted, and is driven and fixed to the inner wall of the fixing hole and the game board 238. The reversal member 254 is fixed to the game board 238 by fixing the outer wall of the fixing member 216 that is present with an adhesive. In the state where the reversing nail 251 is fixed to the game board 238, since the reversing member 254 is entirely projected from the surface of the game board 233, the reversing nail 251 is in front of the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA. It can collide with both of the game balls B1 located on the side.

As shown in FIG. 62(a), the area of the first reversal surface 254a is larger than the area of the second reversal surface 254b on the fixed end side of the reversal nail 251. Therefore, the game ball B1 located on the far side of the game area PA is highly likely to collide with the first reversal surface 254a. Since the first inversion surface 254a is inclined downward to the left and to the front, as shown in FIG. 62(c), the game ball B1 colliding with the first inversion surface 254a has a leftward component and an upper portion. Upon receiving a drag having a direction component and a front direction component, the subject jumps to the left front.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62A, the area of the second inversion surface 254b is larger than the area of the first inversion surface 254a on the free end side of the inversion nail 251. Therefore, the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA is highly likely to collide with the second reversal surface 254b. Since the second inversion surface 254b is inclined downward to the right and the rear, as shown in FIG. 62(d), the game ball B1 colliding with the second inversion surface 254b has a rightward component and an upper component. Upon receiving a drag force having a directional component and a depth component, the subject jumps to the rear right.

Thus, the reversal nail 251 is a nail that has a high probability of bouncing the game ball B1 colliding on the back side toward the front side, and a nail having a high probability of bouncing the game ball B1 colliding on the front side back toward the back side. Therefore, for example, the reversing nail 251 is provided upstream of the left guide nail group 211 in the game board 233 of the thirteenth embodiment, and the depth direction of the game ball B1 that collides with the reversing nail 251 is upstream of the left guide nail group 211. By reversing the positional relationship, the probability that the game ball B1 located on the far side of the game area PA will win the operating ports 33, 34, and the probability that the game ball B1 located on the front side will win the operating ports 33, 34. Can be changed.

By using the reversing nail 251 that greatly changes the probability of winning in the operating ports 33, 34, it is possible to increase the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA and improve the interest of the game. Further, by using the reversing nail 251, the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 in the game area PA may be biased toward the front side or the back side due to a malfunction of the game ball firing mechanism 27 (FIG. 2). Even in the case of being lost, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the probability that the game ball B1 wins the operating ports 33, 34 is greatly biased.

<Fourteenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, instead of the distribution nails 213 and 214, the front and rear distribution nails 262 (FIG. 63) and the rear nails 271 (FIG. 63) are provided on the game board 261 (FIG. 63). This is different from the embodiment. Hereinafter, the description of the same configuration as that of the thirteenth embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 63 is a front view of the game board 261 of the present embodiment and an enlarged view of an upstream portion of the left guide nail group 281 in the game board 261. As shown in FIG. 63, in the game board 261 of the present embodiment, in order to guide the game ball B1 flowing down the left side of the game area PA to the operation ports 33, 34, an obstacle nail 228, a front-rear distribution nail 262, A left guide nail group 281 including a rear nail 271 and a rear nail 271 is provided. Here, the front-rear distribution nail 262 is a nail that changes the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 that collides in the game area PA. Further, the rear nail 271 is a nail that only the game ball B1 flowing down the back side (game board 261 side) of the game area PA can collide with.

The left guide nail group 281 is located diagonally to the left above the working ports 33, 34. Since the space above the left guide nail group 281 is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 can pass over the left guide nail group 281. A front-rear distribution nail 262 and a rear nail 271 are arranged on the upstream side of the left guide nail group 281.

As shown in FIG. 63, since the four front-rear distribution nails 262 are arranged in a line at the most upstream side of the left guide nail group 281, most of the game balls B1 guided by the left guide nail group 281 are It collides with one of the front and rear distribution nails 262 in the upstream portion. The game ball B1 that has collided with the front-rear distribution nail 262 reaches the downstream side of the left guide nail group 281 with the positions in the depth direction being distributed. As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 63, the row of the front-rear distribution nails 262 formed by the four front-rear distribution nails 262 is referred to as a first guide nail row 282.

The four front-rear distribution nails 262 forming the first guide nail row 282 are arranged in one row such that the right front-rear distribution nail 262 is located below the adjacent left-rear distribution nail 262. .. The interval between the front and rear distribution nails 262 forming the first guide nail row 282 is narrower than the diameter 11 mm of the game ball B1, and the game ball B1 does not drop downward from the gap between the two front and rear distribution nails 262. is there.

Further, although the upper surface of the front/rear distribution nail 262 is a plane having no inclination in the left/right direction, as shown in FIG. 63, the front/rear distribution nail 262 is in a state of being rotated by approximately 20° clockwise in a front view. It is fixed. For this reason, in the first guide nail row 282, the upper surface of the front-rear distribution nail 262 is inclined in a mode in which it has a gentle downward slope to the right. Thereby, even if the game ball B1 loses the speed component in the right direction on the first guide nail row 282, it is possible to avoid the situation in which the game ball B1 stays on the spot.

Immediately downstream of the first guide nail row 282, a gap that is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided, and three rear nails 271 are arranged in a row downstream of the gap. A row of rear nails 271 formed by the three rear nails 271 is referred to as a second guide nail row 283. In the second guide nail row 283, the three rear nails 271 are arranged without a gap, and the game ball B1 does not drop downward from the gap between the two rear nails 271.

Further, downstream of the second guide nail row 283, four obstruction nails 228 are provided without leaving a gap to form a third guide nail row 284. Then, downstream of the four obstacle nails 228, a plurality of obstacle nails 228 are arranged in one row with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. The row of the obstacle nails 228 continues until immediately before the operating ports 33 and 34, and guides the game ball B1 to the operating ports 33 and 34.

In the present embodiment, the right guide nail group arranged on the right side of the game board 261 is composed of obstacle nails 228.

Next, the structure of the front-rear distribution nail 262 will be described based on FIGS. 64(a) to 64(d). 64(a) is a perspective view of the front-rear distribution nail 262, FIG. 64(b) is a plan view of the front-rear distribution member 263 constituting the front-rear distribution nail 262, and FIGS. 8A is an end view of a cut surface when the front-rear distribution nail 262 is cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 261. As shown in FIG. 64(a), the front-rear distribution nail 262 is an elongated nail extending in the direction of the axis 262c. The front-rear distribution nail 262 is a front-rear distribution member 263 that distributes the game ball B1 that falls from above and collides in the depth direction, and a fixing member 216 that fixes the front-rear distribution member 263 on the surface of the game board 261. It consists of and. The front-rear distribution member 263 is a resin member having a substantially quadrangular prism shape formed to extend in the direction of the axis 262c, and the first vibration having a different inclination as a surface that can collide with the game ball B1 falling from above. The surface 264a and the second distribution surface 265a are provided.

As shown in FIG. 63, the front-rear distribution nail 262 is attached to the game board 261 in such a manner that the axis 262c is substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 261 and the front-rear distribution member 263 projects from the surface of the game board 261. It is fixed. The length dimension of the front-rear distribution member 263 in the direction of the axis 262c is 17 mm, and the front-rear distribution member 263 of the front-rear distribution nail 262 fixed to the game board 261 projects 17 mm in the game area PA. Since the front-rear distribution nail 262 covers the contactable range of the game ball B1, the front-rear distribution nail 262 can collide with the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA and is located on the front side. It may collide with the ball B1. In the following description, in the state of being fixed to the game board 261, the end fixed to the game board 261 is used as the fixed end of the front-rear distribution nail 262, and the end protruding in the game area PA is front-rear distribution. The free end of the nail 262.

As shown in FIG. 64(a), the front-rear distribution member 263 has a first distribution portion 264 on the fixed end side having a first distribution surface 264a and a first distribution portion 264 on the free end side having a second distribution surface 265a. It is composed of two sorting units 265. The length dimension of the first distributing portion 264 in the axis line 262c direction is 9 mm, and the length dimension of the second distributing portion 265 in the axis line 262c direction is 8 mm. The first distribution surface 264a is an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and the second distribution surface 265a is an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the front. Then, in the state where the front-rear distribution nail 262 is fixed to the game board 261, the boundary surface between the first distribution portion 264 and the second distribution portion 265 is parallel to the surface of the game board 261, and the boundary surface. Is located at the center of the game area PA in the depth direction.

As shown in FIG. 64(b), the front-rear distribution member 263 has square side surfaces at each of the fixed end and the free end. Of these, a fixing hole 263a for fitting the fixing member 216 when fixing the front-rear distribution member 263 to the game board 261 is formed in the fixed end surface 263b which is the side surface on the fixed end side. The fixing hole 263a is a cylindrical hole formed in a manner having an opening on the side of the fixed end of the front-rear distribution member 263 and extending from the fixed end of the front-rear distribution member 263 to the vicinity of the free end. The depth of the fixing hole 263a is 15 mm. As shown in FIG. 64( b ), the fixing hole 263 a is formed large so as to occupy a volume of half or more of the front-rear distribution member 263. The fixing hole 263a is formed at a sufficient distance from the upper, lower, left, and right side surfaces of the front-rear distribution member 263 to maintain the strength of the front-rear distribution member 263.

Next, a state in which the front-rear distribution nail 262 is fixed to the game board 261 will be described. The fixing member 216 forming the front-rear distribution nail 262 is the same member as the fixing member 216 forming the first left-right distribution nail 213 described in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 64C and 64D, in the fixing member 216, the entire fixing cusp 216b and a part of the fixing trunk 216a are deeper than the surface of the game board 261. While being buried in the side, the remaining portion of the fixing body shaft portion 216a is fixed to the game board 261 so as to project from the surface of the game board 261 in a substantially vertical direction. In the fixing member 216 fixed to the game board 261, the length dimension of the protruding portion from the surface of the game board 261 is 15 mm. The front-rear distribution member 263 is fixed to the game board 261 with the distribution surfaces 264a and 265a facing upward by fixing the outer wall of the protrusion and the inner wall of the fixing hole 263a with an adhesive.

As shown in FIG. 64(c), the game ball B1 flowing down the back side (game board 261 side) of the game area PA sandwiched between the game board 261 and the window panel 52 collides with the first distribution surface 264a. To do. On the back side of the game area PA, since the first distribution surface 264a is inclined rearward and downward, the game ball B1 that falls from above and collides with the first distribution surface 264a has an upward component. And a drag force having a component in the back direction acts. As a result, the game ball B1 after the collision bounces in the depth direction and flows down on the depth side of the play area PA downstream.

Further, the game ball B1 flowing down on the front side (window panel 52 side) of the game area PA collides with the second distribution surface 265a. On the back side of the game area PA, the second distribution surface 265a is inclined downward toward the front, so that the game ball B1 that falls from above and collides with the second distribution surface 265a has an upward component. And a drag force having a forward component acts. As a result, the game ball B1 after the collision bounces in the front direction and flows down on the front side of the game area PA on the downstream side.

Next, the relationship between the rear nail 271 and the game ball B1 in the game area PA will be described based on FIGS. 65(a) to (c). FIG. 65(a) is a perspective view of the rear nail 271, and FIGS. 65(b) and 65(c) are vertical cross-sectional views of the rear nail 271 when cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 261.

As shown in FIG. 65(a), the rear nail 271 is composed of a cylindrical trunk shaft portion 271a and a conical pointed portion 271b. The diameter of the trunk shaft portion 271a and the diameter of the bottom surface of the pointed head portion 271b are both approximately 2 mm, which is the same as the trunk diameter of the obstacle nail 228. As shown in FIG. 65(b), in the rear nail 271, the whole of the pointed head 271b and a part of the body shaft portion 271a are buried deeper than the surface of the game board 261 and the body shaft portion 271a The game board 261 is fixed such that a part of the game board 261 projects in a substantially vertical direction.

In the rear nail 271 fixed to the game board 261, the length from the surface of the game board 261 to the front end of the protruding portion of the rear nail 271 is 6 mm. Here, the distance from the tip of the protruding portion of the rear nail 271 fixed to the game board 261 to the back surface of the window panel 52 is 12 mm, and a game ball B1 having a diameter of 11 mm is sandwiched between the rear nail 271 and the window panel 52. It is a structure that does not happen to stop due to being stopped.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), a game ball B1 having a diameter of 11 mm that flows down along the surface of the game board 261 from the back side of the game area PA collides with the rear nail 271 and changes the traveling direction. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65(c), since the game ball B1 flowing down along the front surface of the window panel 52 from the front side of the game area PA does not collide with the rear nail 271, the traveling direction is maintained as it is. And go downstream.

Next, the movement of the game ball B1 that has entered the space above the left guide nail group 281 will be described based on FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b). 66(a) is an explanatory view for explaining the course in the left guide nail group 281 of the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA, and FIG. 66(b) is located on the front side of the game area PA. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the course in the left guide nail group 281 of the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 66A, when the game ball B1 flowing down the back side of the game area PA enters the space above the left guide nail group 281, the game ball B1 constitutes a first guide nail row 282. It collides with one of the four front-rear distribution nails 262 and bounces back. At this time, since the game ball B1 collides with the first distribution surface 264a (FIG. 64(a)) of the front-rear distribution nail 262, the game ball B1 flows down on the back side of the game area PA with a high probability downstream.

The front and rear distribution nail 262 and the upstream of the second guide nail row 283 in which the game ball B1 that collided and bounced back and forth constituting the first guide nail row 282 is located at the downstream end of the first guide nail row 282 When jumping over the gap with the rear nail 271 located at the end, the game ball B1 enters the space above the second guide nail row 283. When the game ball B1 is located on the back side of the game area PA and collides against any of the three rear nails 271 forming the second guide nail row 283 and bounces off, the game ball B1 is the third guide nail row 284. Is guided toward the actuating ports 33, 34.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66(b), when the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA enters the space above the left guide nail group 281, the game ball B1 moves the first guide nail row 282. It collides with any one of the four front and rear distribution nails 262 and bounces off. At this time, since the game ball B1 collides with the second distribution surface 265a (FIG. 64(a)) of the front-rear distribution nail 262, the game ball B1 flows down along the back surface of the window panel 52 with a high probability in the downstream. ..

The game ball B1 that collided and rebounded with the second distribution surface 265a and the front-rear distribution nail 262 located at the downstream end of the first guide nail row 282 and the rear nail 271 located at the upstream end of the second guide nail row 283. When jumping over the gap of, the game ball B1 enters the space above the second guide nail row 283. When the game ball B1 is moving along the back surface of the window panel 52 and does not collide with any of the three rear nails 271 forming the second guide nail row 283, the game ball B1 is connected to the rear nail 271 and the window. It passes through the panel 52 and falls, and is collected at the outlet 24a.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

The game board 261 is provided with a front-rear distribution nail 262 that sorts the course after collision into the back side and the front side of the game area PA according to the position of the collision game ball B1 in the game area PA in the depth direction. With this configuration, for the game ball B1 located near the center in the depth direction of the game area PA, the path after the collision can be divided into either the game board 261 or the window panel 52. Then, downstream of the front-rear distribution nail 262, in each of the case where the game ball B1 is located on the game board 261 side of the game area PA and the case of being located on the window panel 52 side of the game area PA, respectively. It is a configuration that sets the second guide nail row 283 that makes the course of the game ball B1 different. Therefore, the path downstream of the game ball B1 can be different depending on the path sorted by the front-rear distribution nail 262. In this way, by arranging the second guide nail row 283 downstream of the front-rear distribution nail 262, the path downstream of the game ball B1 is determined according to the position of the game ball B1 in the front-rear direction in the game area PA. It can be changed. Compared with a configuration in which only the position in the left-right direction in the game area PA affects the path downstream of the game ball B1, it is possible to increase the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 and improve the interest of the game.

Further, when provided on the game board 261, a rear guide 271 in which a space through which the game ball B1 can pass is formed between the free end of the protruding portion and the back surface of the window panel 52 is arranged side by side with the second guide nail row 283. Because of the configuration, the course of the game ball B1 located on the side of the game board 261 is changed, and the course of the game ball B1 located on the side of the window panel 52 is changed without changing the course of the game ball B1. Can be By using the rear nail 271 as a nail that constitutes the second guide nail row 283, it is possible to increase the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA and improve the interest of the game.

<Another form of the fourteenth embodiment>
-In the fourteenth embodiment described above, instead of a configuration in which three rear nails 271 are arranged as the second guide nail row 283, when fixed to the game board 261, a rear nail from the surface of the game board 261 to the window panel 52 side. It is also possible to have a configuration in which one inclined member that protrudes by the same length as 271 and that has the same inclined surface as the angle at which the rear nails 271 are arranged in the second guide nail row 283 is arranged. By arranging the inclined member, it is possible to move along the surface of the game board 261 without changing the course of the game ball B1 that is moving along the rear surface of the window panel 52. It is possible to change the course of the playing game ball B1. In this case, the inclined member can be fixed to the game board 261 more easily than when the three rear nails 271 are provided side by side on the game board 261.

In the fourteenth embodiment described above, all the nails configuring the second guide nail row 283 and the third guide nail row 284 are obstacle nails 228, and the first guide nail row 282 and the first guide nail row 282 The rear nail 271 may be arranged in a gap with the two-guide nail row 283. In this case, the probability that the game ball B1 flowing down on the front side of the game area PA is guided to the left guide nail group 281 and wins the operation ports 33 and 34 is a conventional game machine using only the obstacle nail 228 as a nail. It is possible to increase the probability that the game ball B1 flowing down the back side of the game area PA is guided by the left guide nail group 281 and wins the operating opening while maintaining the same level as.

-In 14th Embodiment mentioned above, the shape of the front-back distribution nail 262 is an upper surface of the front-back distribution nail 262, and the surface arrange|positioned at the front end side inclines upward from a base end to a front end. In addition, the upper surface of the front-rear distribution nail 262, which is disposed on the base end side, may have a shape that is inclined downward from the base end toward the tip.

For example, in the front-back distribution nail 262 described above, the first distribution portion 264 located on the fixed end side is located on the free end side, and the second distribution portion 265 located on the free end side. The nail positioned on the fixed end side may be used as the front-rear distribution nail. That is, in the front-rear distribution nail 262 described above, a nail having a shape in which the first distribution portion 264 and the second distribution portion 265 are interchanged may be used as the front-rear distribution nail. In this way, the front-rear distribution nail in which the upper two inclined surfaces are inclined downward toward the center is referred to as a concave front-rear distribution nail.

When the game ball B1 flowing down the back side of the game area PA collides with the concave-type front and rear distribution nail, the course on the downstream side of the game ball B1 is changed to the front side of the game area PA. Further, when the game ball B1 flowing down on the front side of the game area PA collides with the concave front-rear distribution nail, the course on the downstream side of the game ball B1 is changed to the back side of the game area PA. That is, it is possible to reverse the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 that collides with the concave front-rear distribution nail. For example, due to a malfunction of the game ball firing mechanism 27, if all the game balls B1 fired toward the game area PA are located behind the game area PA, or if all the game balls B1 fired are the game area PA. In the case of being located on the front side, the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 that collides with the concave-type front and rear distribution nail is reversed, and thus the game ball is located on the front side with respect to the number of the game balls B1 located on the back side. It is possible to avoid a situation where the ratio of the numbers of the game balls B1 is significantly biased.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment described above, by disposing four concave-type front-rear distribution nails on the game board 261 instead of the four front-rear distribution nails 262 forming the first guide nail row 282, Unlike the fourteenth embodiment described above, the game ball B1 flowing down on the front side of the game area PA is operated with high probability by the first guide nail row 282, the second guide nail row 283, and the third guide nail row 284. The game ball B1 flowing down the back side of the game area PA while being guided toward the mouths 33 and 34 can be highly likely to be collected from the outlet 24a.

By configuring the course in the downstream of the game ball B1 according to the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA, only the position in the left-right direction in the game area PA affects the course in the downstream of the game ball B1. Compared with the configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 and improve the interest of the game.

In the fourteenth embodiment described above, instead of the front-rear distribution nail 262, the game board 261 may be provided with a nail that guides the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA in only one direction. For example, by providing a front guide nail having only an inclined surface having a downward slope toward the front side of the game area PA on the game board 261, the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 colliding with the front guide nail is determined. It can be guided to the front side. Further, by disposing the back side guiding nail having only the inclined surface having the downward slope toward the back side of the game area PA on the game board 261, the depth direction of the game ball B1 that collides with the back side guiding nail. The position can be guided to the back side.

In the game board 261 of the above-described fourteenth embodiment, the first and second front and rear distribution nails 262 from the upstream of the first guide nail row 282 are replaced with front guide nails, and the third and fourth front and rear. By replacing the distribution nail 262 with the back guide nail, the game ball B1 that collides with the first guide nail row 282 at a relatively shallow position in the upstream portion of the left guide nail group 281 wins the operating ports 33, 34. It is possible to decrease the probability that the game ball B1 that collides with the first guide nail row 282 at a relatively deep position wins the operating ports 33 and 34, while increasing the probability of playing. In this way, by making the winning probability different according to the collision position of the game ball B1 in the first guide nail row 282, it is possible to prevent the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA from becoming monotonous, and to make the game interesting. It is possible to improve.

-In the fourteenth embodiment described above, the rear nail 271 may be configured to have an inclined surface that gives a drag force having a component in a predetermined direction to the game ball B1 that collides. For example, the rear nail 271 in the above-described fourteenth embodiment may be a right guide nail having an upper surface inclined downward to the right. By providing the right guide nail on the game board 261, the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA collides and accelerates to the right, and the game ball B1 located on the front side does not collide. The route of the game ball B1 can be sorted according to the mode. As a result, the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction is reflected in the path of the game ball B1 in the left-right direction, and the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, for example, the rear nail 271 in the above-described fourteenth embodiment may be a front guide nail having an upper surface inclined downward toward the front. By providing the front guide nail on the game board 261, the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA moves to the front side due to collision, and the game ball B1 located on the front side does not collide. It can be configured to change the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction. Thereby, in the game area PA, the number of game balls B1 located on the front side can be increased. For example, by providing the first left/right distribution nail 213 in the above-described thirteenth embodiment downstream of the front guide nail, a large number of game balls B1 are collided with the second distribution surface 218a and distributed to the left. can do. Also, for example, by providing the second left/right distribution nail 214 in the above-described thirteenth embodiment downstream of the front guide nail, there are many game balls B1 which collide with the second distribution surface 234a and are distributed to the right. It can be configured. In this way, by providing the front guiding nail upstream of the means for allocating the course of the game ball B1 in a manner according to the position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA in the depth direction, the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA can be improved. It is possible to increase variations and improve the enjoyment of the game.

In the fourteenth embodiment described above, a shape of the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA in place of the rear nail 271 is likely to collide and a shape of the game ball B1 located on the back side is unlikely to collide. The front priority member 291 having the above may be arranged on the game board 261. The front priority member 291 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b). 67(a) is a plan view of the front priority member 291, and FIG. 67(b) is an explanatory view for explaining the course of the game ball B1 in the left guide nail group 281 including the front priority member 291.

As shown in FIG. 67( a ), the front priority member 291 fixes the plate member 292 on the front side of the game area PA to which only the game ball B1 can collide, and the plate member 292 to the game board 261. A first support member 293 and a second support member 294 for The plate member 292 is a rectangular parallelepiped resin plate formed to extend in the left-right direction. The lateral dimension of the upper surface of the plate member 292 with which the game ball B1 can collide is 36 mm, which is longer than three times the diameter of the game ball B1, and the length dimension in the depth direction is 5.5 mm, which is the same as the radius of the game ball B1. is there. Further, the plate member 292 has a thickness of 6 mm, and has strength enough not to be damaged even when the game ball B1 is repeatedly hit.

In order to fix the first support member 293, the plate member 292 is formed with a first support hole 295 having an inner diameter and a depth of 4 mm at a distance of 3 mm from the left end, and a second support member. To fix 294, a second supporting hole 296 having an inner diameter and a depth of 4 mm is formed at a distance of 3 mm from the right end.

The first support member 293 and the second support member 294 are the same member. The supporting members 293, 294 have a cylindrical supporting trunk shaft portion 293a, 294a having a length dimension of 28 mm in the axis lines 293c, 294c, and a conical support having a length dimension of 5 mm in the axis line 293c, 294c direction. It is comprised from the pointed heads 293b and 294b. Since the body diameters of the support members 293 and 294 are 4 mm, which is the same as the inner diameters of the support holes 292a and 292b, the first support member 293 can be fitted in the first support hole 295 without any gap, and The second support member 294 can be fitted in the second support hole 296 without any gap.

The plate member 292 and the support members 293 and 294 that form the front priority member 291 can be separated. By impacting the free end with a hammer or the like, the separated support members 293 and 294 are fixed to the game board 233. In addition, a part of the protruding portion of the first supporting member 293 is fitted in the first supporting hole 295, and a part of the protruding portion of the second supporting member 294 is fitted in the second supporting hole 296. Since the plate member 292 is fixed to the support members 293 and 294, the front priority member 291 is fixed to the game board 233.

As shown in FIG. 67( b ), in the support members 293, 294, all of the supporting pointed parts 293 b, 294 b and a part of the supporting trunk shaft parts 293 a, 294 a are more than the surface of the game board 233. While being buried in the back side, the remaining portions of the supporting body shaft portions 293a, 294a are fixed to the game board 261 in such a manner as to project from the surface of the game board 261 in a substantially vertical direction. In the support members 293 and 294 fixed to the game board 261, the length dimension of the protrusion from the surface of the game board 261 is 15 mm. The plate member 292 is fixed to the game board 261 by fixing the outer wall of the protrusion and the inner walls of the support holes 292a and 292b with an adhesive.

While fixed to the game board 261, the distance between the first support member 293 and the second support member 294 is 22 mm, which is twice the diameter of the game ball B1, and the end on the back side of the plate member 292 is the game. It is 11.5 mm wider than the diameter of the game ball B1 from the surface of the board 261.

In the game board 261 of the fourteenth embodiment, if the three rear nails 271 forming the second guide nail row 283 are replaced with the front priority member 291 without changing the inclination of the upper surface, FIG. 67(b). As shown in, the probability that the game ball B1 sorted to the back side in the first guide nail row 282 on the upstream side will drop downward from the gap between the first support member 293 and the second support member 294, and at the front The probability that the game ball B1 distributed to the side collides with the plate member 292 and enters the space above the third guide nail row 284 is increased.

In this way, by making the path of the game ball B1 located on the front side different from the path of the game ball B1 located on the back side, the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA is increased and the game The interest can be improved.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the thirteenth embodiment in that a repulsion nail 322 (FIG. 68) is provided on the game board 321 (FIG. 68) instead of the distribution nails 213 and 214. Hereinafter, the description of the same configuration as that of the thirteenth embodiment will be basically omitted.

The game board 321 of the present embodiment is provided with a repulsive nail 322 in addition to the obstacle nail 228 as a nail for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game ball B1. First, the position of the repulsion nail 322 on the game board 321 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a front view of the game board 321 and an enlarged view of an upstream portion of the left guide nail group 323 arranged on the game board 321.

As shown in FIG. 68, the game board 321 is provided with a guide nail group including a plurality of nails 228 and 322 for guiding the game ball B1 to the operation ports 33 and 34. The guide nail group is a left guide nail group 323 arranged to guide the game ball B1 from the left side to the operation ports 33, 34 located at the lower center of the game board 321, and the game ball B1 from the right side. The right guide nail group 324 is arranged to guide the operation ports 33 and 34 located at the lower center of the board 321.

The obstacle nails 228 and the repulsive nails 322 that form the left guide nail group 323 are lined up in one direction, and the lined direction has an inclination with a downward slope of 30° toward the right. In addition, the obstacle nail 228 and the repulsive nail 322 that form the right guide nail group 324 are arranged in one direction, and the arrangement direction has an inclination of a downward slope of 30° toward the left. ..

As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 68, the left guide nail group 323 is divided into a first nail row 331 located in the most upstream and a second nail row 332 located downstream of the first nail row 331. .. In the first nail row 331, four repulsive nails 322 are arranged in one row in a direction having a downward slope of 30° to the right. In the first nail row 331, the interval between the adjacent repelling nails 322 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, the game ball B1 does not drop downward between the two repulsion nails 322.

Further, in the second nail row 332, thirteen obstacle nails 228 are arranged in one row in a direction having a downward slope of 30° toward the right. The gap between the repulsive nail 322 located at the downstream end of the first nail row 331 and the obstacle nail 228 located at the upstream end of the second nail row 332 is set to 13 mm, which is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. The game ball B1 may drop downward from the gap. In particular, when the rebound of the game ball B1 that collides with the repulsive nail 322 forming the first nail row 331 is small, the game ball B1 falls downward from the gap between the first nail row 331 and the second nail row 332. Then, there is a high possibility that it will be collected from the outlet 24a provided at the bottom of the game board 321.

Next, the shape of the repulsive nail 322 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69(a) and 69(b). 69(a) is an exploded perspective view of the repulsive nail 322, and FIG. 69(b) is a vertical sectional view of the repulsive nail 322. As shown in FIG. 69(a), the repulsion nail 322 is an elongated nail formed to extend in the direction of the axis 322a. The repulsion nail 322 has a low coefficient of restitution and a low repulsion member 333 having a surface that rebounds the gaming ball B1 that collides small, and a repulsion coefficient that is larger than the surface of the low repulsion member 333, and a height that repels the gaming ball B1 that collides greatly. And a shaft member 334 having a repulsion portion 334d.

The shaft member 334 is a metal member having a cylindrical free end side body shaft portion 334a formed on the free end side so as to extend in the direction of the axis 322a. A cylindrical fixed end side body shaft portion 334b is integrally formed on the inner side of the free end side body shaft portion 334a so as to extend in the direction of the axis 322a so as to have a body diameter larger than that of the free end side body shaft portion 334a. Has been done. Further, a conical pointed head portion 334c is integrally formed on the inner side of the fixed end side body shaft portion 334b in a manner having a vertex on the axis 322a and being continuous with the fixed end side body shaft portion 334b.

The diameter of the free end side body shaft portion 334a is 2 mm, and the length dimension in the axial direction is 8 mm. The diameter of the fixed end side body shaft portion 334b is 6 mm, and the length dimension in the axial direction is 22 mm. When the repulsion nail 322 is fixed to the game board 321, the fixed end side body shaft portion 334b has a high repulsion portion 334d that protrudes toward the front side of the game board 321 surface, and a buried portion 334e that is buried at the back side. Consists of. Further, the pointed head 334c has a pointed tip, and while the pointed head 334c is pressed against the surface of the game board 321, by impacting the free end of the repulsion nail 322 with a hammer or the like. It is possible to fix the repulsion nail 322 to the game board 321.

The low repulsion member 333 is a low repulsion urethane member having a columnar shape formed by extending in the direction of the axis 322a. The low-resilience member 333 has a diameter of 6 mm, and the length dimension in the direction of the axis 322a is 8 mm. Therefore, in the state where the repulsion nail 322 is fixed to the game board 321, the boundary between the low repulsion member 333 and the high repulsion portion 334d is located at the center of the game area PA in the depth direction. The low-repulsion member 333 is formed with a mounting hole 333a that penetrates the center of the low-repulsion member 333 in the direction of the axis 322a. The mounting hole 333a is a cylindrical hole having an inner diameter of 2 mm. As shown in FIG. 69A, the free end side body shaft portion 334a of the shaft member 334 is inserted into the mounting hole 333a. Thus, as shown in FIG. 69(b), the low-repulsion member 333 is fixed to the fixed end side body shaft portion 334b to become the repulsion nail 322. Note that the low-repulsion member 333 is not limited to low-repulsion urethane as long as it is a material that reduces the rebound of the game ball B1 that collides and is durable. For example, the low repulsion member 333 may be made of silicon resin.

Next, the course of the game ball B1 that collides with the repulsion nail 322 fixed to the game board 321 will be described based on FIGS. 70(a) to 70(d). 70(a) and 70(c) are end views of the cut surface when the repulsion nail 322 is cut along a plane perpendicular to the game board 321, and FIG. 70(b) is a game ball that flows down from the upper left side and collides. FIG. 70D is a transverse cross-sectional view of the high-repulsion portion 334d shown for explaining the course of the B1 after the collision, and FIG. 70D is for explaining the course after the collision of the game ball B1 that flows down and collides from the upper left side. It is a cross-sectional view of the low repulsion member 333 and the free end side body shaft portion 334a shown.

As shown in FIG. 70(a), the repulsive nail 322 is driven and fixed so that the axis 322a is substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 321. Here, the depth of the game area PA sandwiched between the front surface of the game board 321 and the back surface of the window panel 52 is 18 mm. As shown in FIG. 70( a ), the repulsion nail 322 is fixed to the game board 321 in such a manner that the buried portion 334 e and the pointed head 334 c of the shaft member 334 are buried deeper than the surface of the game board 321. .. In a state where the repulsion nail 322 is fixed to the game board 321, the high repulsion portion 334d is exposed on the back side of the game area PA and the low repulsion member 333 is exposed on the front side.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 70(a), the game ball B1 flowing down the back side of the game area PA collides with the high repulsion portion 334d having a large restitution coefficient and rebounds greatly. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(b), the game ball B1 after having a rightward initial velocity and a downward initial velocity and colliding with one point on the upper side of the high repulsion portion 334d from the upper left side is , A rightward speed that is slightly less than the rightward initial speed, and an upward speed that is slightly less than the downward initial speed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70(c), the game ball B1 flowing down on the front side of the game area PA collides with the low-repulsion member 333 having a small coefficient of restitution and bounces off a small amount. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(d), the game ball B1 after having a rightward initial velocity and a downward initial velocity and colliding with one point on the upper side of the low repulsion member 333 from the upper left side is , A rightward speed that is significantly less than the rightward initial speed, and an upward speed that is significantly less than the downwardly initial speed.

Next, the course after the collision of the game ball B1 that collides with the repulsive nail 322 that constitutes the first nail row 331 will be described based on FIGS. 71(a) and 71(b). 71A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the course of the game ball B1 after the collision when the game ball B1 collides with the high repulsion portion 334d of the repulsion nail 322, and FIG. 71B is the game ball B1. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the course of the game ball B1 after a collision at the time of colliding with the low-repulsion member 333 of the repulsion nail 322.

As shown in FIG. 71(a), the game ball B1 located on the far side of the game area PA collides with the high-repulsion portion 334d of the repulsion nail 322 which constitutes the first nail row 331. The game ball B1 bounces greatly after colliding with the high-repulsion portion 334d having a large coefficient of restitution. Therefore, the game ball B1 after the collision is guided to the operation ports 33 and 34 by the second nail row 332 without dropping downward from the gap between the downstream end of the first nail row 331 and the upstream end of the second nail row 332. There is a high probability

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71(b), the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA collides with the low repulsion member 333 of the repulsion nail 322 forming the first nail row 331. The game ball B1 bounces back after colliding with the low-repulsion member 333 having a small coefficient of restitution. Therefore, it is highly probable that the game ball B1 after the collision will drop downward from the gap between the downstream end of the first nail row 331 and the upstream end of the second nail row 332 and be collected from the out port 24a.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

The repulsion nail 322 is configured to include a high repulsion portion 334d having a large restitution coefficient on the tip side and a low repulsion member 333 having a small restitution coefficient on the base end side. By disposing the repulsion nail 322 on the game board 321, the course of the game ball B1 after the collision can be different depending on the position in the depth direction in the game area PA. For this reason, only the obstacle nail 228 is arranged on the game board 321, and when compared with the conventional pachinko machine in which the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA does not affect the course of the game ball B1, the game is compared. It is possible to increase the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 in the area PA and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the repulsion nail 322 is used for the first nail row 331 that constitutes the upstream portion of the left guide nail group 323, and between the downstream end of the first nail row 331 and the upstream end of the second nail row 332. It is a configuration in which a gap having a width larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 is set. Therefore, it is highly probable that the game ball B1 located on the far side of the game area PA will be guided to the operation ports 33 and 34 by the second nail row 332 after colliding with the first nail row 331. Also, the probability that the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA will drop downward from the gap between the downstream end of the first nail row 331 and the upstream end of the second nail row 332 after colliding with the first nail row 331. Is high.

In this way, since the probability that the game ball B1 is guided to the operation ports 33 and 34 is different in a mode depending on the position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA, the depth direction of the game ball B1 in the game area PA is different. Compared with the conventional pachinko machine 10 in which the position of does not affect the course of the game ball B1, it is possible to increase the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the repulsion nail 322 is used for all the nails forming the first nail row 331. By arranging a plurality of repulsion nails 322 at intervals shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1, the probability that the game ball B1 is guided to the operating ports 33, 34 due to the difference in the position in the depth direction in the game area PA of the game ball B1. Can be greatly reflected in the difference.

<Another form of the fifteenth embodiment>
In the fifteenth embodiment described above, an inclined nail having a plurality of inclined surfaces inclined in the same direction at different angles may be used instead of the repulsive nail 322. Specifically, the inclined nail is located on the fixed end side and has a first inclined surface having a first inclined surface having a downward slope of 30° to the right, and is located on the free end side and is on the right side. A second slanted portion having a second slanted surface having a downward slope of 15° toward the side. The game ball B1 that collides with the inclined nail always receives a reaction force that bounces to the right, but the velocity component to the right after the collision changes according to the collision position in the depth direction. Specifically, a reaction force with a large right component and a small up component acts on the game ball B1 that collides with the first inclined surface on the back side of the game area PA. On the other hand, on the game ball B1 that collides with the second inclined surface on the near side of the game area PA, a drag force having a small right component and a large upward component acts.

Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment, by using the inclined nail instead of the repulsive nail 322, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA wins the operating ports 33, 34. The probability that the game ball B1 located on the front side wins can be reduced. By making the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction reflected in the game result, the enjoyment of the game is improved as compared with the conventional pachinko machine in which only the position of the game ball B1 in the left-right direction is reflected in the game result. Can be planned.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
The game board 341 (FIG. 72) of the present embodiment is different from the thirteenth embodiment in that a front-rear distribution table 351 (FIG. 72) that distributes the game ball B1 in the depth direction of the game area PA is provided. is doing. Hereinafter, the description of the same configuration as that of the thirteenth embodiment will be basically omitted. Note that all the nails provided on the game board 341 of this embodiment are obstacle nails 228.

First, the configuration of the game board 341 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a front view of the game board 341.

As shown in FIG. 72, a center frame 252 is arranged on the game board 341 so as to define an opening 341a that allows the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 to be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The center frame 252 includes a roof unit 253 provided so as to define an upper edge and left and right side edges of the opening 341a, and a stage unit 354 provided so as to define a lower edge of the opening 341a. ing. At the left end of the stage unit 354, a ball entrance 363 that allows the game ball B1 existing in the game area PA to move onto the stage unit 354 is formed, and the game ball B1 entering the ball entrance 363 is It is guided to the stage unit 354. The stage unit 354 has, on its upper surface, a rolling surface 357 on which the game ball B1 can roll. The rolling surface 357 has a width of about two gaming balls B1 arranged in the depth direction, and has a smooth streamline shape that is symmetrical with respect to the central portion. Specifically, a ridge portion 358 that bulges upward is formed at the center of the rolling surface 357, and a valley portion 359 that is recessed downward is formed on the left and right sides thereof. The left and right ends of the rolling surface 357 are located above the central portion.

The left and right ends of the rolling surface 357 and the crests 358 are inclined downward toward the rear side. On the other hand, the valley portion 359 has a shape inclined downward toward the front side. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has reached the valley portion 359 in a sufficiently decelerated state is guided by the inclination of the valley portion 359 and discharged from the front edge of the valley portion 359 toward the lower side of the stage unit 354. ..

A guide passage 366 is formed below the mountain portion 358 in the stage unit 354, an inlet to the guide passage 366 is formed at the rear portion of the mountain portion 358, and the mountain portion 358 is inclined downward toward the inlet. Is becoming The guide passage 366 is inclined downward toward the front, and the game ball B1 introduced into the guide passage 366 is discharged below the stage unit 354 through the guide passage 366. The outlet of the guide passage 366 is located vertically above the first working port 33. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has passed through the guide passage 366 can easily enter the first actuation port 33.

Further, as described above, the game board 341 is provided with the front-rear distribution table 351 for distributing the game balls B1 in the depth direction of the game area PA. In detail, as shown in FIG. 72, the front-rear sorting table 351 is arranged on the left side of the ball entrance 363 formed at the left end of the stage unit 354 and on the left upper side of the left guide nail group 355. ing.

Here, a detailed position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 in the game area PA is defined. In the present embodiment, the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA is the game ball B1 whose center is less than 9 mm from the surface of the game board 341. Further, the game ball B1 located at the deepest side of the game area PA is a game ball B1 in a state where the game ball B1 is in contact with the surface of the game board 341 or a state corresponding thereto. The game ball B1 located on the near side of the game area PA is the game ball B1 whose center is less than 9 mm from the back surface of the window panel 52. Further, the game ball B1 located closest to the game area PA is the game ball B1 in a state where the game ball B1 is in contact with the back surface of the window panel 52 or in a state corresponding thereto.

The front-rear distribution table 351 is a table for distributing the game ball B1 to either the innermost side or the frontmost side of the game area PA, and the front-rear distribution table 351 is distributed to the innermost side. The ball B1 is fixed to the game board 341 in such a manner as to move onto the stage unit 354 through the ball entrance 363.

FIG. 73A is a perspective view of the front-rear distribution table 351 and FIG. 73B is a plan view of the front-rear distribution table 351. Further, FIGS. 73(c) and 73(d) are end views of cut surfaces when the front-rear distribution table 351 is cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 341. As shown in FIG. 73(a), the front-rear distribution table 351 is a plate-shaped and resin-made table, and the surface thereof is a game area PA that is a game ball B1 rolling on the front-rear distribution table 351. Has an inclination for sorting to either the farthest side or the foremost side. The inclination of the surface of the front-rear distribution table 351 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 73(b) and 73(c).

As shown in FIG. 73(b), the front-rear distribution table 351 is formed such that the length dimension from the upstream end to the downstream end thereof is approximately three times the diameter of the game ball B1. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 73(c), the front-rear distribution table 351 has a buried portion 351a that is buried deeper than the surface of the game board 341 in a state where the front-rear distribution table 351 is mounted on the game board 341. And a projecting portion 351b projecting to the front side of the surface of the game board 341. The game board 341 has a fixing hole for fixing the front-rear distribution table 351. The adhesive is used in such a manner that the buried portion 351a of the front-rear distribution table 351 is fitted into the fixing hole. The front-rear distribution table 351 is fixed to the game board 341.

As shown in FIG. 73C, the protrusion 351b is formed from the surface of the game board 341 to the vicinity of the rear surface of the window panel 52. Therefore, the protrusion 351b can contact both the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA and the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA. In addition, the buried portion 351a has substantially the same depth dimension as the depth dimension of the protruding portion 351b so that the buried portion 351a can withstand the impact of repeated collision of the game ball B1 with the protruding portion 351b.

As shown in FIG. 73( b ), the surface of the front-rear distribution table 351 is a rolling distribution surface 371 that is an upstream half of the surface of the front-rear distribution table 351 and is a horizontal surface, and the back side of the surface of the downstream half. It is composed of a first downstream surface 372 that is a half and a second downstream surface 373 that is a front half surface of the downstream half surface.

Returning to FIG. 73(a), a specific inclination mode of the first downstream surface 372 and the second downstream surface 373 will be described. As shown in FIG. 73(a), in the state where the front-rear distribution table 351 is fixed to the game board 341, the first downstream surface 372 has an inclination that becomes a downward slope toward the back side, The second downstream surface 373 has an inclination that is a downward slope toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 72, the front-rear distribution table 351 is fixed to the game board 341 in a state in which the rolling distribution surface 371 is slightly rotated so that the rolling distribution surface 371 has a downward slope of 3° toward the right. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 73A, when the game ball B1 rolling on the rolling distribution surface 371 toward the downstream side is guided to the inner side of the game area PA in the rolling process. It is guided to the first downstream surface 372, and is guided to the second downstream surface 373 when it is guided to the front side in the rolling process.

As shown in FIG. 72, a first guide nail 228a and a second guide nail 228b for guiding the game ball B1 to the rolling distribution surface 371 are provided around the upstream side of the front-rear distribution table 351 in the game board 341. , A third for preventing the game ball B1 guided to the rolling distribution surface 371 from jumping up and rolling the game ball B1 for several seconds while being in contact with the surface of the front-rear distribution table 351. Guide nails 228c are provided. The first guide nails 228a are arranged in two rows with a space slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. The two rows of the first guide nails 228a guide the game ball B1 that has entered between the rows from the diagonally upper right to the rolling distribution surface 371, and the rows of the first guide nails 228a are arranged by the front and rear distribution table 351. The game balls B1 other than the allocated game balls B1 are prevented from entering the space above the stage unit 354 from the ball entrance 363 opened toward the game area PA.

On the upper left side of the rolling distribution surface 371 in the game board 341, the game ball B1 guided by the first guide nail 228a collides, so that the speed component in the left direction of the game ball B1 disappears and the right direction. One second guide nail 228b for providing the velocity component of is provided. The second guide nail 228b is located 7 mm above the rolling distribution surface 371.

When the second guide nail 228b is set at a position lower than the center of gravity of the game ball B1 on the rolling distribution surface 371, the game ball B1 is guided on the rolling distribution surface 371 from diagonally above right. The point where the second guide nail 228b collides is lower than the center of gravity of the game ball B1, and the left velocity component of the game ball B1 guided by the rolling distribution surface 371 cannot be sufficiently reduced. there is a possibility. In this case, the game ball B1 passes over the second guide nail 228b and drops to the lower left. Further, when the second guide nail 228b is set at a position higher than the height of the game ball B1 existing on the rolling distribution surface 371, the game ball B1 guided by the rolling distribution surface 371. May collide with the second guide nail 228b, pass under the second guide nail 228b, and move leftward and fall downward.

On the other hand, the second guide nail 228b, which is located 7 mm above the rolling distribution surface 371, collides with the game ball B1 guided by the rolling distribution surface 371, and the center of gravity of the game ball B1. Above that. Therefore, it is prevented that the game ball B1 guided from the upper right to the rolling distribution surface 371 passes above or below the second guide nail 228b and moves leftward to fall from the rolling distribution surface 371. The game ball B1 guided from the upper right can be bounced back in the right direction (downstream side).

Further, the second guide nail 228b located 7 mm above the rolling distribution surface 371 is the second game ball in the state where the game ball B1 already exists on the rolling distribution surface 371. When B1 is guided to the rolling distribution surface 371, it does not come into contact with the second game ball B1. In this case, the second game ball B1 falls from above the rolling distribution surface 371 to the lower left without reaching the rolling distribution surface 371. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the game ball B1 staying around the front-rear sorting table 351.

A plurality of third guide nails 228c are provided above the downstream portion of the rolling distribution surface 371 and above the first downstream surface 372 and the second downstream surface 373 with a spacing slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Has been. After being guided to the rolling distribution surface 371 by the first guide nail 228a, the game ball B1 that collides with the second guide nail 228b and advances to the right is the surface of the third guide nail 228c and the front-rear distribution table 351. It invades the narrow space between and. On the surface of the front-rear sorting table 351, the game ball B1 collides with the third guide nail 228c a plurality of times and loses the velocity component in the vertical direction, and the surface of the front-rear sorting table 351 rolls to the right along the slope. Move.

As shown in FIG. 73(c), the game ball B1 guided by the first downstream surface 372 by rolling the rolling distribution surface 371 of the front-rear distribution table 351 fixed to the game board 341 is a game area. It is distributed to the deepest side of the PA. Further, as shown in FIG. 73(d), the game ball B1 rolled on the rolling distribution surface 371 and guided to the second downstream surface 373 is distributed to the foremost side of the game area PA. In this way, the game ball B1 existing at a random position in the depth direction of the game area PA rolls on the front-rear distribution table 351 to have an extreme pair relationship of being the farthest side or the foremost side. It is assigned to one of two positions.

Next, the course of the game ball B1 after being sorted by the front-rear sorting table 351 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is an enlarged view of the left central portion of the game board 341 (FIG. 72). As described above, the game ball B1 distributed to the innermost side on the front-rear distribution table 351 moves onto the rolling surface 357 through the ball entrance 363 formed at the left end of the stage unit 354.

Since the left and right ends of the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 are provided sufficiently higher than the mountain portion 358, when the game ball B1 sorted by the front and rear distribution table 351 rolls on the rolling surface 357, The sphere B1 does not fall short of force from the trough portion 359 provided in front of the mountain portion 358 due to insufficient momentum. Further, in the rolling surface 357, the width in the left-right direction of the valley portion 359 where the game ball B1 can fall toward the front is approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1, and the width dimension in the left-right direction of the rolling surface 357. The ratio to is set low. Further, the height difference between the bottom of the valley 359 and the top of the crest 358 on the rolling surface 357 is set to be small. In other words, the game ball B1 rolling on the rolling surface 357 is difficult to fall forward from the valley 359.

The game ball B1 rolls on the rolling surface 357 while accelerating from the left end of the stage unit 354 and reaches the mountain portion 358. In the mountain portion 358, the game ball B1 is inclined downward toward the rear so that the game ball B1 can easily enter the entrance of the guide passage 366 formed rearward. Therefore, the game ball B1 sorted to the innermost side by the front and rear sorting table 351 wins the first operating port 33 with a high probability.

On the other hand, the game ball B1 sorted to the front side on the front-rear sorting table 351 does not enter the ball entrance 363 and falls downward. The game ball B1 can be guided to the operation ports 33, 34 by the left guide nail group 355, but the game nail B1 is guided by the left guide nail group 355 toward the operation ports 33, 34 while the obstacle nail 228 is being guided. When the game ball B1 falls down from the gap, the game ball B1 is collected from the out port 24a without winning the operation ports 33 and 34. In the game board 341, the probability that the game ball B1 guided by the left guide nail group 355 wins the operating openings 33, 34 is determined by the gaming ball B1 rolling on the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354. Lower than the probability of winning.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

The front-rear distribution table 351 is configured to distribute the game ball B1 to either the farthest side or the frontmost side according to the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 on the upstream side of the front-rear distribution table 351. Then, it is determined whether or not the game ball B1 moves to the stage unit 354 through the ball entrance 363 in a mode according to the distribution result. The game ball B1 that has moved onto the stage unit 354 wins in the operating ports 33, 34 with a higher probability than the game ball B1 that has not moved onto the stage unit 354.

That is, by arranging the front-rear distribution table 351 on the game board 341 in such a manner that only the game ball B1 distributed to the innermost side enters the ball entrance 363 of the stage unit 354, the upstream side of the front-rear distribution table 351. The game result can be different depending on the position of the game ball B1 in the front-back direction. Compared with the conventional pachinko machine in which only the left-right position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA is reflected in the game result, the relationship between the position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA and the game result becomes monotonous. It is possible to prevent and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the game board 341, there are two rows above the front-rear distribution table 351 with a row spacing slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1 and toward the rolling distribution surface 371 of the front-rear distribution table 351. The first guide nail 228a is provided. By using the first guide nail 228a, the game ball B1 can be guided to the rolling distribution surface 371 in one row.

Further, on the upper left side of the rolling distribution surface 371, a second guide nail 228b is provided at a height higher than the center of gravity of the game ball B1 on the rolling distribution surface 371 and lower than the upper end. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B1 guided to the rolling distribution surface 371 from deviating to the left and to prevent a plurality of game balls B1 from staying above the rolling distribution surface 371. You can

Then, a third guide nail 228c is provided above the downstream portion of the rolling distribution surface 371 and above the first downstream surface 372 and the second downstream surface 373 with a space slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Has been. As a result, the game ball B1 guided on the front-rear distribution table 351 is rolled in a state of being in contact with the front-rear distribution table 351, and the position in the depth direction is the farthest side or the frontmost side of the game area PA. It can be assigned to either side.

<Another form of the 16th embodiment>
The position of the front-rear distribution table 351 on the game board 341 according to the sixteenth embodiment described above is not limited to the vicinity of the upstream side of the stage unit 354. For example, the left guide nail group 382 is composed of the first left-right distribution nail 213 (FIG. 51(a)) already described in the thirteenth embodiment, and is located near the upstream side of the left guide nail group 382. The front-rear distribution table 351 may be arranged. The configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76.

FIG. 75 is a front view of the game board 381 in this configuration. As shown in FIG. 75, the game board 381 is provided with a left guide nail group 382. Four first right/left distribution nails 213 are provided on the upstream side of the left guide nail group 382, and seven obstacle nails 228 are provided on the downstream side. Further, the front-rear distribution table 351 described in the sixteenth embodiment is arranged upstream (left side) of the left guide nail group 382. The game ball B1 is sorted by the front and rear sorting table 351 to either the innermost side or the frontmost side.

76A and 76B are enlarged views of the game board 341 around the front-rear sorting table 351 and the left guide nail group 382. As shown in FIG. 76(a), the game ball B1 that is distributed to the deepest side of the game area PA by the front-rear distribution table 351 comes into contact with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left-right distribution nail 213 in order. Since the game ball B1 receives a directional force, the game ball B1 is guided to the operation ports 33 and 34 with a high probability and wins. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76(b), the game ball B1 sorted to the foremost side of the game area PA by the front/rear sorting table 351 comes into contact with the second sorting surface 218a of the first left/right sorting nail 213. Therefore, since the game ball B1 receives a force in the opposite direction, the game ball B1 is highly likely to drop downward from the gap between the first left/right distribution nails 213 and is collected from the out port 24a.

Thus, even if the front-rear distribution table 351 is arranged near the upstream side of the left guide nail group 382, the game result varies depending on the position in the front-rear direction of the game ball B1 upstream of the front-rear distribution table 351. Can be something. Compared with the conventional pachinko machine in which only the left-right position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA is reflected in the game result, the relationship between the position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA and the game result becomes monotonous. It is possible to prevent and improve the enjoyment of the game.

As the front-rear distribution table 351 in the sixteenth embodiment described above, a front-rear distribution table 391 having a groove formed on the upper surface for distributing the game balls B1 may be used. The front-rear sorting table 391 having the configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 77.

FIG. 77(a) shows a groove for guiding the game ball B1 located on the far side of the game area PA to the innermost side and guiding the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA to the most front side. It is a perspective view of the front and rear distribution table 391 provided. As shown in FIG. 77(a), one wide groove is formed on the upper surface of the front-rear distribution table 391 on the back side and the front side of the upstream portion 391a. The groove on the back side is the most inner guide groove 391b for guiding the game ball B1 to the farthest side in the downstream portion, and the groove on the front side is for guiding the game ball B1 to the most front side in the downstream portion. This is the foremost guide groove 391c.

The game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA is configured to fit in the innermost guide groove 391b of the upstream portion 391a, and the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA is the frontmost side of the upstream portion 391a. It fits in the guide groove 391c. Therefore, by using the front-rear distribution table 391, the game ball B1 located on the upstream side of the front-rear distribution table 391 is guided to the innermost position on the downstream side, and the game ball B1 located on the front side on the upstream side. Can be guided to the most front side in the downstream.

Since the path in the depth direction of the game ball B1 can be divided into two ways according to the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1, the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 does not affect the path of the game ball B1. Compared with the configuration of a pachinko machine, the relationship between the position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA and the behavior of the game ball B1 can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, FIG. 77(b) is a front-rear sorting table provided with a groove for guiding the game ball B1 located on the far side to the front side and guiding the game ball B1 located on the front side to the far side. FIG. 392 is a perspective view of 392. As shown in FIG. 77(b), one wide groove is formed on the upper surface of the front-rear distribution table 392 on the inner side and the front side of the upstream portion 392a. The groove on the back side is the most front cross groove 392e for guiding the game ball B1 to the foremost side in the downstream portion, and the groove on the front side for guiding the game ball B1 to the most back side in the downstream portion. It is the deepest cross groove 392d.

The game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA is configured to fit in the foremost cross groove 392e of the upstream portion 392a, and the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA is the farthest side of the upstream portion 392a. The configuration is such that it fits in the cross groove 392d. Therefore, by using the front-rear distribution table 392, the game ball B1 located on the back side upstream of the front-rear distribution table 392 is guided to the most front side on the downstream side, and the game ball located on the front side on the upstream side. B1 can be guided to the innermost side on the downstream side.

Thus, the front-rear distribution table 392 can reverse the position of the game ball B1 in the front-rear direction. By arranging a configuration that makes the game result different depending on the position of the game ball B1 in the front-rear direction, downstream of the front-rear distribution table 392, the game ball B1 rolls on the front-rear distribution table 392. By doing so, the game result can be reversed. As a result, the player's attention can be focused on the behavior of the game ball B1 on the front-rear sorting table 392, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<17th Embodiment>
The game board 421 (FIG. 78) of the present embodiment is provided with a position changing passage 423 (FIG. 78) for changing the position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA in the depth direction. This is different from the embodiment. Hereinafter, the description of the same configuration as that of the sixteenth embodiment will be basically omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 421 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78.

78 is a front view of the game board 421 according to the present embodiment and an enlarged view of the vicinity of the position change passage 423 in the game board 421. As shown in FIG. 78, the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 is located at the center of the game board 421, and the display surface 41a is visible from the opening 421a as in the 16th embodiment. The opening 421a is defined by the center frame 252. The center frame 252 includes a roof unit 253 provided so as to define an upper edge and left and right side edges of the opening 421a, and a stage unit 354 provided so as to define a lower edge of the opening 421a. Is equipped with. Here, the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 in the present embodiment has the same shape as the rolling surface 357 described in the sixteenth embodiment.

On the left side of the display surface 41a of the game board 421, there is provided a position change passage 423 which is a straight passage whose total length is approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1. The position change passage 423 is a passage that takes in the game ball B1 located above from the entrance, changes the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 passing through the position change passage 423, and then discharges downward from the exit. .. Details of the position change passage 423 will be described later.

In the game board 421, in the vicinity of the position change passage 423 and on the upper left side, a right guide nail 431 having a downward slope toward the right is provided to guide the game ball B1 to the entrance of the position change passage 423. Has been. The right guiding nail 431 has the same inclination as the inclination of the first distribution surface 217a in the first left/right distribution nail 213 (FIG. 51(a)) of the thirteenth embodiment. It is a resin nail created by changing to. The right guiding nail 431 has a protruding portion that protrudes from the surface of the game board 421 toward the window panel 52 side by 17 mm in a state of being fixed to the game board 421, and the protruding portion faces rightward as an upper surface. And an inclined surface that is inclined downward. The inclined surface is formed from the fixed end of the protrusion to the free end, and is also formed from the left end to the right end of the protrusion. The game ball B1 that collides with the right guide nail 431 receives the drag force in the upper right direction and is guided to the entrance of the position change passage 423.

The structure of the right guide nail 431 is not limited to this. In short, it suffices if the game ball B1 flowing down from above and colliding with the game ball B1 is provided with an inclined surface having a slope capable of being bounced back to the right and guided to the entrance of the position change passage 423.

In the game board 421, directly below the exit of the position change passage 423, first left/right distribution nails 213 are arranged at intervals of 13 mm wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. A game area PA is widened on the left side of the first left/right distribution nail 213, and a rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 is formed on the right side of the first left/right distribution nail 213. Therefore, the game ball B1 sorted to the right by the first left/right sorting nail 213 rolls on the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354. The game ball B1 sorted leftward by the first left/right sorting nail 213 returns to the game area PA.

The position changing passage 423 is formed by a transparent polycarbonate passage forming member 422 and is a passage that can be visually recognized from the outside. The position changing passage 423 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79(a) to (d). 79(a) is a perspective view of the passage forming member 422, FIG. 79(b) is a front view of the passage forming member 422, and FIGS. 79(c) and (d) are vertical to the surface of the game board 421. It is an end view of a cut surface when the passage forming member 422 is cut along a plane.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), the passage forming member 422 includes a passage forming portion 424 forming the position changing passage 423, an upper fixing portion 425 for fixing the passage forming portion 424 to the game board 421, and And a lower fixing portion 426. The shape of the passage forming portion 424 is a width that is larger than the diameter of the game ball B1, a depth that is approximately twice the length of the depth of the game area PA, and a length dimension that is approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1. Is a rectangular parallelepiped having a height of A plate-shaped upper fixing portion 425 is integrally formed on the passage forming portion 424 so as to project upward, and a plate-shaped lower fixing portion 426 is integrally formed so as to project downward. There is.

Both fixing portions 425 and 426 are formed to extend from the left end to the right end of the passage forming member 422, and have a rectangular parallelepiped shape. Both fixing parts 425, 426 are formed in such a manner that the front side plane of both fixing parts 425, 426 is located at a position 18 mm away from the front side plane of the passage forming part 424. As shown in FIG. 79(b), holes 425a and 426a for screwing the passage forming member 422 to the surface of the game board 421 are made to penetrate in the center of the front side planes of both fixing portions 425 and 426 in the depth direction. Is formed.

As shown in FIGS. 79(c) and 79(d), the passage forming member 422 is a game in which a part of the back surface of the passage forming portion 424 is fitted in the fixing hole 421b formed on the surface of the game board 421. It is fixed to the board 421. The width and height of the fixing hole 421b are the same as the width and height of the passage forming portion 424, and the depth of the fixing hole 421b is substantially the same as the depth of the game area PA. On the surface of the game board 421, an upper fixing recess 421c and a lower fixing recess 421d that have the same shape and the same size as both the fixing portions 425 and 426 are formed above and below the fixing holes 421b. Has been done. Then, a screw hole corresponding to a hole 425a formed in the center of the upper fixing portion 425 is formed in the center of the upper fixing recess 421c, and the center of the lower fixing recess 421d is formed in the center. A screw hole corresponding to a hole 426a formed at the center of the lower fixing portion 426 is formed.

The passage forming member 422 is attachable in a detachable manner by screwing the upper fixing portion 425 to the upper fixing concave portion 421c and the lower fixing portion 426 to the lower fixing concave portion 421d. 421 is attached. At this time, the surface of the upper fixing portion 425 and the surface of the lower fixing portion 426 are located on the same plane as the surface of the game board 421. Therefore, the movement of the game ball B1 does not change by passing over both the fixing portions 425 and 426.

As shown in FIG. 79A, in the passage forming member 422 mounted on the game board 421, the front side of the passage forming portion 424 projects 18 mm toward the window panel 52 side. In the passage forming portion 424, a position changing passage 423 is formed by a through hole that penetrates the passage forming portion 424 in the vertical direction in a portion protruding toward the window panel 52. The upper opening of the position changing passage 423 is an inlet, and the lower opening is an outlet.

The position change passage 423 is a back side wall surface 422a which is an inner wall on the back side of the path forming member 422, a front side wall surface 422b which is a front side inner wall, a left side wall surface 422c which is a left side inner wall, and a right side inner wall. It is defined by the four surfaces of the right wall surface 422d. Of these, the width of the position change passage 423 defined by the left side wall surface 422c located on the left side of the position change path 423 and the right side wall surface 422d located on the right side is constant from the entrance to the exit, and specifically, the game ball B1. It is 13 mm, which is one size larger than the diameter of. As shown in FIG. 78, the center of the first left-right distribution nail 213 in the left-right direction is directly below the center of the position changing passage 423 in the left-right direction. The game ball B1 passing through the position changing passage 423 can move 1 mm leftward from the center of the position changing passage 423 and 1 mm rightward from the center. On the other hand, since the lateral dimension of the first left/right distribution nail 213 is 7 mm, the game ball B1 discharged from the exit of the position change passage 423 collides with the first left/right distribution nail 213 and follows its path. It is distributed to either the left direction or the right direction.

As shown in FIG. 79(c), the back side wall surface 422a is a plane parallel to the surface of the game board 421, and the distance from the back surface of the window panel 52 to the back side wall surface 422a at the entrance is 18 mm, and at the exit. The distance from the back surface of the window panel 52 to the inner side wall surface 422a is 18 mm. Further, the front side wall surface 422b has a slope that gradually approaches the back side wall surface 422a as it goes downward, and the distance from the surface of the game board 421 to the front side wall surface 422b at the entrance is 17.5 mm and the exit. In, the distance from the surface of the game board 421 to the front side wall surface 422b is 16 mm. As described above, the position changing passage 423 is configured such that the dimension in the depth direction of the passage is shortened from the inlet to the outlet, and the center of the passage is moved to the back side.

Here, the front side wall surface 422b has an inclination that advances toward the inner side as it goes downward, but the inclination is a slight inclination. Therefore, when the vertically falling game ball B1 collides with the front side wall surface 422b near the entrance, the course of the game ball B1 is before the game ball B1 collides with the first left/right distribution nail 213 located below the exit. Moreover, it does not change so much that it collides with the inner side wall surface 422a or the surface of the game board 421. In this case, the game ball B1 changes its course such that the game ball B1 collides with the first distribution surface 217a which is the front surface of the first left/right distribution nail 213 located 13 mm below the exit of the position change passage 423.

Further, the inclination provided on the front side wall surface 422b is an angle that suppresses chattering in which the game ball B1 collides with the front side wall surface 422b and the rear side wall surface 422a repeatedly in the position change passage 423. is there. The inclination of the front side wall surface 422b is set to an inclination that suppresses a large rebound of the game ball B1 that vertically falls and collides with the front side wall surface 422b, so that the difference in the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction is played. It can be reflected in the course of the game ball B1 in the downstream in a manner easily understood by the person.

As shown in FIG. 79(c), the boundary line between the first distribution surface 217a and the second distribution surface 218a of the first left/right distribution nail 213 is located at the center of the game area PA in the depth direction. .. As shown in FIG. 79(c), at the entrance, the game ball B1 located on the far side from the center in the depth direction of the game area PA is discharged from the exit as it is, and the first left/right distribution nail 213 first It collides with the distribution surface 217a and is distributed to the right.

Further, as shown in FIG. 79(d), the distance from the center of the game ball B1 to the back surface of the window panel 52 is 7.5 mm or less for the game ball B1 located closer to the front side than the center of the game area PA. The game ball B1 is a contact ball with the front side wall surface 422b of the position change passage 423 to change the course to the back side, and after being discharged from the exit, it collides with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left/right distribution nail 213. To the right. In addition, the game ball B1 whose distance from the center of the game ball B1 to the back surface of the window panel 52 is longer than 7.5 mm is discharged from the exit as it is and collides with the second distribution surface 218a of the first left/right distribution nail 213. To the left.

Thus, the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 passing through the position change passage 423 is changed to the back side with a high probability. By combining the position change passage 423 and the first left/right distribution nail 213, the game ball B1 can be guided onto the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 in a mode according to the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction. You can improve your sex.

Next, the path on the downstream side of the game ball B1 that collides with the first left/right distribution nail 213 provided below the position change passage 423 will be described based on FIGS. 80(a) and (b). 80(a) and 80(b) are front views of the game board 421 showing the downstream periphery of the position change passage 423 in an enlarged manner.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), the game ball B1 which is collided with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left/right distribution nail 213 and is distributed to the right is formed on the upper surface of the stage unit 354. It is guided to the surface 357. As already described in the sixteenth embodiment, the left and right ends of the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 are provided sufficiently higher than the mountain portion 358, and the game ball B1 is moved forward in the rolling surface 357. The width of the valley 359 that can be dropped toward the left and right is approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1, and the ratio of the rolling surface 357 to the width of the left and right is set low. Further, the difference in height between the bottom of the valley 359 and the top of the crest 358 on the rolling surface 357 is set to be small. In other words, the game ball B1 rolling on the rolling surface 357 is difficult to fall forward from the valley 359. Therefore, it is highly possible that the game ball B1 sorted in the direction by the first left/right sorting nail 213 will win the operating ports 33, 34.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 80(b), the game ball B1 sorted leftward by the first left/right sorting nail 213 flows down the left side game area PA. As shown in FIG. 80(b), a left guide nail group 429 for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down the left side of the game area PA to the operating ports 33, 34 on the game board 421 is on the left side of the operating ports 33, 34. It is provided above. The left guide nail group 429 is composed of obstacle nails 228.

The game ball B1 sorted to the left by the first left/right sorting nail 213 may be guided by the left guide nail group 429 to win the operating ports 33, 34, and configure the left guide nail group 429. There is a possibility that it will fall downward from the gap between the obstacle nails 228 that are running and be collected from the out port 24a. In the game board 421, the probability of being guided by the left guide nail group 429 to win the operating ports 33, 34 is lower than the probability of being guided by the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 and winning the operating ports 33, 34.

Next, FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b) regarding the case of using the replacement position changing passage 442 defined by the replacement passage forming member 441 in place of the position changing passage 423 defined by the passage forming member 422 It will be explained with reference to FIG. 81(a) and 81(b) are end views of cut surfaces when the exchange passage forming member 441 is cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 421. Here, the exchange passage forming member 441 is a member in which the inclination of the back side wall surface 422a is changed in the passage forming portion 424 forming the passage forming member 422, and other than the back side wall surface 422a of the exchange passage forming member 441. The structure of is the same as the structure of the passage forming member 422.

As shown in FIGS. 81A and 81B, the exchange passage forming member 441 includes an exchange passage forming portion 443 having the same outer shape as the passage forming portion 424 of the passage forming member 422, and an upper side of the passage forming member 422. It includes an upper replacement fixing portion 444 that is the same as the fixing portion 425, and a lower replacement fixing portion 445 that is the same as the lower fixing portion 426 of the passage forming member 422. The exchange passage forming member 441 is fixed in such a manner that a part of the back surface of the exchange passage forming portion 443 is fitted into the fixing hole 421b formed on the surface of the game board 421. Specifically, the replacement upper fixing portion 444 is screwed into the upper fixing recess 421c and the replacement lower fixing portion 445 is screwed into the lower fixing recess 421d, so that the replacement upper fixing portion 444 is attached to and detached from the game board 421. It is mounted in a possible manner.

As shown in FIGS. 81A and 81B, the passage forming portion 443 for replacement has a passage forming portion 443 in that the inclination of the rear side wall surface 443a is different from the inclination of the rear side wall surface 422a of the passage forming portion 424. Different from 424. The back side wall surface 443a has a slope that gradually approaches the front side wall surface 443b as it goes downward, and the distance from the back surface of the window panel 52 to the back side wall surface 443a at the entrance is 17.5 mm, and the window at the exit is the window. The distance from the rear surface of the panel 52 to the inner side wall surface 443a is 15 mm.

Here, the inner side wall surface 443a has an inclination that advances toward the front side as it goes downward, but the inclination is a slight inclination. Therefore, when the vertically falling game ball B1 collides with the back side wall surface 443a near the entrance, the course of the game ball B1 is before the game ball B1 collides with the first left/right distribution nail 213 located below the exit. It does not change so much that it collides with the front side wall surface 443b and the rear surface of the window panel 52. The path of the game ball B1 that vertically falls and collides with the inner side wall surface 443a is the second distribution which is the surface on the front side of the first left/right distribution nail 213 located 13 mm below the exit of the exchange position changing passage 442. It changes to such an extent that it collides with the surface 218a.

Here, the inclination provided on the rear side wall surface 443a and the inclination provided on the front side wall surface 443b of the exchange passage forming member 441 are the same as the front side wall surface 443b of the game ball B1 in the exchange position changing passage 442. This is an angle that suppresses chattering that repeats the collision of No. 1 and the collision with the back side wall surface 443a. The inclination of the front side wall surface 443b is dropped vertically to prevent a large rebound of the game ball B1 colliding with the back side, and the inclination of the back side wall surface 443a is vertically dropped to the front side of the collision game ball B1. By setting the inclination that suppresses a large rebound, the difference in the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction can be reflected in the path of the game ball B1 downstream in a manner that is easily understood by the player.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), with respect to the game ball B1 located on the back side from the center of the game area PA, the game ball B1 which vertically falls and collides with the back side wall surface 443a changes its course to the front side. After being discharged from the outlet, it collides with the second distribution surface 218a of the first left/right distribution nail 213 and is distributed to the left. On the other hand, the game ball B1 that falls vertically and does not collide with the inner side wall surface 443a is discharged from the exit as it is, collides with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left/right distribution nail 213, and is distributed to the right.

Further, as shown in FIG. 81(b), with respect to the game ball B1 located on the front side with respect to the center of the game area PA, the game ball B1 which vertically drops and collides with the front side wall surface 443b travels to the back side. After being discharged from the exit, it collides with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left/right distribution nail 213 and is distributed rightward. On the other hand, the game ball B1 that has dropped vertically and does not collide with the front side wall surface 443b is discharged as it is from the exit, collides with the second distribution surface 218a of the first left/right distribution nail 213, and is distributed to the left.

In this way, the back side wall surface 443a that guides the game ball B1 that vertically drops and collides against the second distribution surface 218a of the first left/right distribution nail 213 and the game ball B1 that vertically drops and collides against the first left/right side. By using the exchange passage forming member 441 including the front side wall surface 443b that guides to the first distribution surface 217a of the distribution nail 213, the solenoid 27c and the game in the game ball launching mechanism 27 (FIG. 2). When the contact mode with the ball B1 is changed and only the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA is supplied or only the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA is supplied. In addition, it is possible to prevent the number of game balls B1 guided to the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 from extremely increasing or decreasing.

Further, the exchange passage forming member 441 can be attached to the game board 421 using the same fixing hole 421b as the passage forming member 422. Therefore, by attaching the exchange passage forming member 441 to the same game board 421 as the model in which the passage forming member 422 is attached, the probability that the game ball B1 wins the operation ports 33, 34 is changed, and a different model is selected. It can be manufactured. Since the same game board 421 is used, a different model can be easily manufactured as compared with the case where the game board 421 is changed.

Further, since the passage forming member 422 and the exchange passage forming member 441 are both detachably attached to the game board 421, the passage forming member 422 fixed to the game board 421 is removed to form the exchange passage. By replacing with the member 441, the game board 421 can be recycled.

According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

A position change passage 423 for changing the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA is arranged upstream of the first left/right distribution nail 213. Then, instead of the position changing passage 423, a replacement position changing passage 442 that changes the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in a mode different from the position changing passage 423 can be used. By properly using the passage forming member 422 and the exchange passage forming member 441 depending on the model, different models can be manufactured by using the game board 421 having the same shape. Therefore, compared with the case where the new game board 421 is studied and manufactured, it is possible to manufacture a model in which the course of the game ball B1 is easy to take in a short time and at low cost.

Further, since the passage forming member 422 and the exchange passage forming member 441 are both attached to the game board 421 in a detachable manner, the passage forming member 422 attached to the game board 421 is removed to replace the passage forming member 441. It becomes possible to recycle the game board 421 in such a manner that the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA is different.

Also, the first left/right distribution nail 213 is provided at the left end of the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354, and the game ball B1 which is collided with the first distribution surface 217a and distributed to the right side is guided to the rolling surface 357. In addition to the above configuration, the game ball B1 which is collided with the second distribution surface 218a and is distributed to the left side is configured to be guided to the operation ports 33 and 34 by a large number of nails 228 provided on the game board 421. .. The rolling surface 357 in which the left and right ends and the mountain portion 358 are inclined downward toward the back has a higher probability that the game ball B1 rolling on the rolling surface 357 is higher than the nail 228 of the game board 421 with the first probability. This is a configuration leading to the operation port 33. Therefore, by mounting the passage forming member 422 above the first left/right distribution nail 213 to easily guide the game ball B1 to the inner side, the probability that the game ball B1 wins the first working opening 33 is increased, and the position is increased. The interest of the player can be directed to the movement of the game ball B1 around the change passage 423 to improve the interest of the game.

The position changing passage 423 includes a rear side wall surface 422a parallel to the surface of the game board 421, and a front side wall surface 422b inclined downward toward the rear side. The inclination of the front side wall surface 422b is an angle (approximately 5°) at which the game ball B1 that vertically drops and collides with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left-right distribution nail 213 is collided. Therefore, by mounting the position change passage 423 on the game board 421, the game ball B1 colliding with the first distribution surface 217a, which is the inner surface of the first left/right distribution nail 213 provided downstream. You can increase the number.

Further, the front side wall surface 422b of the position changing passage 423 is prevented from vertically falling and colliding with the back side wall surface 422a and the surface of the game board 421 until the colliding game ball B1 collides with the first left/right distribution nail 213. Since it is inclined at an angle (approximately 5°), the occurrence of chattering is suppressed above the first left/right distribution nail 213, and the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction is largely reflected in the path of the game ball B1 downstream. be able to.

Further, the exchange position changing passage 442 is configured such that the rear side wall surface 443a and the front side wall surface 443b project into the game area PA at the exit, and the rear side wall surface 443a vertically drops the game ball B1 to collide with. While tilting at an angle (approximately 5°) for colliding with the second distribution surface 218a of the 1 left/right distribution nail 213, the front side wall surface 443b vertically falls and collides with the game ball B1 that is the first left/right distribution nail. It is inclined at an angle (approximately 5°) at which it collides with the first distribution surface 217a of 213. Therefore, by providing the game board 421 with the replacement position change passage 442 instead of the position change passage 423, the second distribution surface, which is the surface on the front side of the first left/right distribution nail 213 provided downstream. The number of game balls B1 that collide with 218a can be increased.

In the position change passage 423 or the exchange position change passage 442, the ratio of the game ball B1 guided to the front side and the ratio of the game ball B1 guided to the rear side are set to the back side wall surfaces 422a, 443a and the front side wall surface 422b. , 443b can be changed by the inclination angle, so that a replacement member for guiding the game ball B1 at a desired ratio can be manufactured at low cost.

<Another form of the seventeenth embodiment>
In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the front side wall surface 443b of the exchange passage forming member 441 may be a flat surface parallel to the back surface of the window panel 52. As a result, the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA falls from the exit as it is, collides with the second distribution surface 218a of the first left/right distribution nail 213, and is distributed to the left side. By configuring the passage forming member 441 for exchange to easily guide the game ball B1 to the front side, the difference from the passage forming member 422 that easily guides the game ball B1 to the rear side is increased, and games between different models are played. The movement of the ball B1 can be greatly changed.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, by using one passage forming member 422 and changing the angle at which the passage forming member 422 is attached to the game board 421, a game that is distributed to the left side in the first left/right distribution nail 213. It is also possible to manufacture a model in which the ratio between the number of balls B1 and the number of game balls B1 distributed to the right is different. For example, an angle changing member for changing the attachment angle of the passage forming member 422 is sandwiched between the fixing hole 421b of the game board 421 and the back surface of the passage forming member 422, and by exchanging only the angle changing member, The inclination angles of the rear side wall surface 422a and the front side wall surface 422b of the position changing passage 423 may be changed. As a result, different models can be manufactured by using the game board 421 having the same shape and the passage forming member 422 having the same shape.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the outlet of the position change passage 423 may be located above the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354. Specifically, by providing the outlet of the position changing passage 423 at the left end of the stage unit 354, the game ball B1 discharged from the outlet of the position changing passage 423 is on the rolling surface 357 at the left end of the stage unit 354. To fall. Within the range where the game ball B1 can fall, the rear side area of the rolling surface 357 is inclined toward the rear side and the front side area is inclined toward the front side, thereby changing the position. The game ball B1 guided to the back side by the passage 423 is guided to the rolling surface 357 without dropping to the front side and wins the first operating port 33 with a high probability and is guided to the front side in the position change passage 423. The played game ball B1 falls to the front side.

In this way, the exit of the position change passage 423 is provided above the rolling surface 357, and at the left end of the rolling surface 357, the path of the game ball B1 located on the far side and the game located on the front side are located. With the configuration in which the path of the ball B1 is different, the position change passage is not used without using the first left/right distribution nail 213 provided below the exit of the position change passage 423 in the seventeenth embodiment described above. According to the shape of 423, it is possible to change the ratio of the game ball B1 that wins the first operating port 33.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, by utilizing the inclination of the guide surface 462 (FIG. 83(b)) in the guide passage 461 (FIG. 82), the depth direction when the game ball B1 collides with the first left/right distribution nail 213. This is different from the seventeenth embodiment in that the collision position is changed. Hereinafter, the description of the same configuration as that of the seventeenth embodiment will be basically omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 451 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 82 is a front view of the game board 451 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82, the game board 451 includes the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the opening 451a, and the center frame 252 as in the seventeenth embodiment. Then, similarly to the seventeenth embodiment, the center frame 252 defines the roof unit 253 provided to define the upper edge and the left and right side edges of the opening 451a and the lower edge of the opening 451a. And the stage unit 354 thus provided. Here, the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 in the present embodiment has the same shape as the rolling surface 357 described in the sixteenth embodiment.

On the left side of the lower part of the display surface 41a of the game board 451, a guide member 471 having a guide passage 461 (FIG. 83(b)) for changing the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction is mounted. .. The guide member 471 is transparent, and the game ball B1 moving in the guide passage 461 is visible from the outside. As shown in FIG. 82, the guide passage 461 has an inlet 485 on the upper surface of the guide member 471 and is formed toward the rear side with respect to the surface of the game board 451. The outlet 522 of the guide passage 461 is formed in the lower surface of the guide member 471, and the first left/right distribution nail 213 already described in the thirteenth embodiment is provided directly below the outlet 522. ..

Below the first left/right distribution nail 213, an obstacle nail 228 forming a left guide nail group 491 for guiding the game ball B1 to the operation ports 33, 34 is provided, and the first left/right distribution nail is also provided. A rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 is formed on the right side of 213. Here, in the game board 451, a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 is formed between the obstacle nails 228 in the left guide nail group 491, and the game ball B1 is easily dropped downward from the gap.

As already described in the sixteenth embodiment, the left and right ends of the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 are provided sufficiently higher than the mountain portion 358, and the gaming ball B1 is directed forward on the rolling surface 357. The width in the left-right direction of the valley portion 359 that can be dropped is approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1, and the ratio to the width dimension in the left-right direction of the rolling surface 357 is set low. Further, the difference in height between the bottom of the valley 359 and the top of the crest 358 on the rolling surface 357 is set to be small. In other words, the game ball B1 rolling on the rolling surface 357 is difficult to fall forward from the valley 359. As described above, the possibility that the game ball B1 distributed rightward by the first left/right distribution nail 213 rolls on the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 and wins the first working opening 33 is It is set higher than the possibility that the game ball B1 sorted leftward by the 1 left/right sorting nail 213 is guided to the left guiding nail group 491 and wins the operating ports 33, 34.

Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball B1 distributed rightward by the first left/right distribution nail 213 rolls on the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 and wins the first working opening 33. There is a higher possibility that the game ball B1 distributed to the left by the left/right distribution nail 213 will be guided to the left guide nail group 491 and win the operation ports 33, 34.

Next, the guide member 471 in which the guide passage 461 is formed will be described based on FIGS. 83(a), (b) and FIG. 83(a) is an exploded perspective view of the guide member 471, and FIG. 83(b) is a left side view. Further, FIG. 84 is an end view of a cut surface when the guide member 471 is cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 451. As shown in FIG. 83(a), the guide member 471 is an upper guide member 481 for taking in and guiding the game ball B1, and a lower guide member 521 for discharging the game ball B1 while guiding the course. Is a member made of resin. The upper guide member 481 and the lower guide member 521 can be separated.

First, the upper guide member 481 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83(a), the upper guide member 481 does not deviate to the right side of the guide member 471 and the main body portion 483 in which the upper guide passage 482 which is the upper part of the guide passage 461 is formed. It consists of a protrusion 484 for taking in the game ball B1 while guarding it. Of these, the shape of the main body 483 is a rectangular parallelepiped, an entrance 485 for taking in the game ball B1 is formed as an opening facing forward in the upper front part, and an upper guide is provided in the center of the lower plane. A first communication opening 486 (FIG. 83(b)) which is an opening for discharging the game ball B1 guided to the passage 482 to the lower guide passage 525 is formed.

The first communication opening 486 has an area through which one gaming ball B1 can pass with a margin of 1 mm vertically and horizontally. The entrance 485 has a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 and has a height 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1. In this way, the entrance 485 is formed to extend in the up-down direction, and it is a configuration capable of taking in most of the game ball B1 that shakes in the up-down direction immediately before the entrance 485.

As shown in FIG. 83( b ), an upper guide passage 482 is formed in the main body portion 483 toward the rear lower side in a manner continuous with the inlet 485. Details of the upper guide passage 482 will be described later. As shown in FIG. 83(a), fixing protrusions 487 for fixing the upper guide member 481 to the lower guide member 521 to form the guide member 471 are provided at the four edges of the lower plane of the main body 483. Is integrally formed so as to project toward. Further, the left side surface and the right side surface of the main body portion 483 are provided with elastic protrusions 531 for fixing the upper guide member 481 to the game board 451 at the upper portions thereof.

The elastic protrusion 531 is connected to a compression coil spring (not shown) fixed inside the main body 483, and the upper guide member 481 is detachable by utilizing elastic deformation of the compression coil spring. It is fixed to the game board 451 in a mode.

The elastic projecting portion 531 is located at a projecting position projecting outward from the side surface in the initial state where no force is applied to the compression coil spring. The compression coil spring contracts into a deformed state when a force is applied from the outside of the main body 483 toward the inside of the main body 483. In the deformed state of the compression coil spring, the elastic protrusion 531 takes a deformed position in which the most outwardly protruding portion is located on the same plane as the side surface in the initial state. The elastic protruding portion 531 in the deformed position returns to the protruding position due to the restoring force of the compression coil spring when the applied force is removed.

As shown in FIG. 83(a), the elastic protrusion 531 is located on the front side of the elastic protrusion 531 and protrudes outward with a steep inclination, and the elastic protrusion 531 has a front portion 531a. The rear portion 531b is located on the back side and projects outward with a gentle inclination.

The protruding portion 484 of the upper guide member 481 is integrally formed by protruding forward from the front surface of the main body portion 483. The protrusion 484 is a guard area 489 for preventing the game ball B1 from advancing to the right of the upper guide member 481 in the game board 451, and a game area of the game ball B1 flowing down in front of the entrance 485. The game ball B1 located on the back side of the PA is guided toward the entrance 485 so as to be guided to the guide passage 461 (FIG. 83(b)), and the game ball B1 located on the front side is not guided to the guide passage 461. As described above, the distribution unit 541 for guiding in the left direction.

The guard portion 489 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is formed perpendicular to the front surface of the main body portion 483 such that the left side surface thereof is located at the right end of the entrance 485. The guard portion 489 projects 17 mm forward from the main body portion 483. Therefore, in the state where the guide member 471 is mounted on the game board 451, the guard portion 489 exists from the surface of the game board 451 to the vicinity of the rear surface of the window panel 52.

The distribution portion 541 is integrally formed on the front surface of the main body portion 483 so as to project forward by 17 mm from a region below the lower end of the inlet 485. The distribution portion 541 extends from the left end of the main body portion 483 to the left end of the guard portion 489. In addition, the distribution unit 541 is provided with an intake surface 541a for bouncing back and colliding the game ball B1 that flows down in front of the entrance 485 and collides with it as an upper surface on the back side, and flows down in front of the entrance 485. A left guiding surface 541b for bouncing back the colliding game ball B1 toward the left is provided as the front side upper surface.

The take-in surface 541a is an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the rear and bounces the game ball B1 that falls and collides from above toward the entrance 485. The left guide surface 541b is an inclined surface that has a gentle slope downward toward the left in order to prevent the game ball B1 falling from above from staying on the spot.

Next, the lower guide member 521 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83(a), the shape of the lower guide member 521 is a rectangular parallelepiped having the same length dimension as the upper guide member 481 in the left-right direction and the depth direction, and one game ball is provided on the front upper part thereof. An outlet 522 that allows B1 to be discharged vertically and horizontally with a margin of 1 mm is formed as an opening facing forward. Further, the lower guide member 521 is formed with a lower guide passage 525 for guiding the game ball B1 discharged from the upper guide passage 482 from the outlet 522 toward the upper rear side to the outlet 522. Details of the lower guide passage 525 will be described later.

In the center of the upper plane of the lower guide member 521, a second communication opening 523 for connecting the lower guide passage 525 to the upper guide passage 482 continuously is formed as an upward opening. The second communication opening 523 is formed at a position corresponding to the first communication opening 486 (FIG. 83(b)) on the lower plane of the upper guide member 481, and is the same as the first communication opening 486. Has the size and shape of.

Further, at the four edges of the upper plane of the lower guide member 521, fixing receiving portions 524 are formed corresponding to the fixing protrusions 487 of the upper guide member 481. When the entire fixing projection 487 fits into the fixing reception section 524, the fixing reception section 524 is in a state in which the surface of the fixing projection 487 and the inner wall of the fixing reception section 524 are in close contact with each other, and the upper guide is provided. It allows the member 481 to be fixed to the lower guide member 521. Further, the left side surface and the right side surface of the lower guide member 521 are provided with elastic protrusions 531 at their lower portions for fixing the lower guide member 521 to the game board 451. The elastic protrusion 531 is the same member as the elastic protrusion 531 provided on the left side surface and the right side surface of the upper guide member 481.

As described above, by fixing the upper guide member 481 to the lower guide member 521 in such a manner that the fixing protrusion 487 of the upper guide member 481 fits into the fixing receiving portion 524 of the lower guide member 521, the upper guide member 521 is fixed. The passage 482 and the lower guide passage 525 communicate with each other to assemble the guide member 471.

In the game board 451, in the state where the upper guide member 481 is fixed to the lower guide member 521, a rectangular parallelepiped fixing hole 551 in which the main body portion 483 of the upper guide member 481 and the lower guide member 521 are housed without a gap. (FIG. 84) is formed. Further, on the left side surface and the right side surface of the fixing hole 551, four recesses having the same shape and the same size as the elastic protrusion 531 in the initial state where no force is applied are formed. The four recessed portions are formed on the left and right side surfaces of the upper guide member 481 and the lower guide member 521 in a state where the main body portion 483 of the upper guide member 481 and the lower guide member 521 are housed in the fixing hole 551 without a gap. It is formed at a position corresponding to a total of four elastic protrusions 531 provided on the left and right side surfaces.

In the process of mounting the guide member 471 in the fixing hole 551, the elastic protrusion 531 is pressed from the side surface of the fixing hole 551 by the rear portion 531b protruding outward with a gentle inclination, so that the compression coil spring ( (Not shown) is in a deformed state, and the elastic protrusion 531 is in the deformed position. In the deformed compression coil spring, when the recess of the fixing hole 551 and the elastic protrusion 531 overlap each other at the mounting position, the force applied from the rear portion 531b is removed and the compression coil spring is in the initial state. As a result, the elastic protrusion 531 returns to the protrusion position, and the guide member 471 is attached to the game board 451.

The compression coil spring connected to the elastic protrusion 531 is in a deformed state again when the guide member 471 is pulled forward from the game board 451 and assumes a deformed position, so that it can be attached to and detached from the game board 451. It is fixed in the manner.

Here, the attachment/detachment of the guide member 471 is performed with the deformation of the compression coil spring (not shown) connected to the elastic protrusion 531. The deformation of the compression coil spring when the guide member 471 is mounted on the game board 451 is performed by applying a force from the fixing hole 551 to the rear portion 531b protruding outward with a gentle inclination. On the other hand, the deformation of the compression coil spring when the guide member 471 is removed from the game board 451 is performed by applying a force from the fixing hole 551 to the front portion 531a protruding outward with a steep inclination.

Therefore, the force required to remove the guide member 471 from the game board 451 is larger than the force required to remove the guide member 471 from the game board 451. The guide member 471 is mounted on the game board 451 in such a manner that the guide member 471 is unlikely to come off the game board 451 and the guide passage 461 is not displaced even if the game ball B1 collides with the guide member 471.

Next, the guide passage 461 formed inside the guide member 471 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83(b), the upper guide passage 482 once guides the game ball B1 taken in from the entrance 485 to the lower rear side, and then guides from that place to the first communication opening 486 located on the lower front side. It is a bow-shaped passage. The upper guide passage 482 continuously and smoothly connects the inlet 485 to the first communication opening 486, and the height dimension of the passage gradually decreases toward the downstream in the vicinity of the inlet 485, and at the downstream thereof. It is a passage having a passage cross section through which one game ball B1 can pass with front and rear and left and right with a margin of 1 mm. Since the passage cross section is set to be narrow, the game ball B1 in the guide passage 461 is prevented from being largely shaken in the front, rear, left, and right directions, and the course of the game ball B1 in the guide passage 461 is limited.

As shown in FIG. 83(b), the game ball B1 guided to the first communication opening 486 by the upper guide passage 482 is guided from the second communication opening 523 to the outlet 522 by the lower guide passage 525. The lower guide passage 525 is continuously connected to the upper guide passage 482, and the probability that the discharged game ball B1 collides with the second distribution surface 218a of the first left/right distribution nail 213 near the exit 522 is increased. Therefore, a guide surface 462 that is inclined downward toward the front is provided. The guide surface 462 has a length twice the diameter of the game ball B1, and the course of the game ball B1 rolling on the guide surface 462 on the downstream side is greatly affected by the inclination of the guide surface 462.

As shown in FIG. 84, the guide surface 462 is smoothly taken into the guide passage 461 at the entrance 485, and the game ball B1 passing through the guide passage 461 at a constant reference speed or higher is located on the front side of the game area PA. It has an inclination to collide with the second distribution surface 218a. The inclination of the guide surface 462 is taken in by repeatedly colliding with the inner wall of the guide passage 461 at the entrance 485, and the game ball B1 whose passing speed in the guide passage 461 is less than a certain reference speed is positioned on the front side of the game area PA. The inclination is made to collide with the first distribution surface 217a. The guide passage 461 has a structure for causing most of the game balls B1 discharged from the outlet 522 to collide with the second distribution surface 218a.

Next, the path on the downstream side of the game ball B1 that collides with the first left/right distribution nail 213 provided below the guide passage 461 will be described with reference to FIGS. 85(a) and (b). FIGS. 85(a) and 85(b) are front views of the game board 451 showing the downstream periphery of the guide passage 461 in an enlarged manner.

As shown in FIG. 85(a), the game ball B1 which is collided with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left/right distribution nail 213 and distributed to the right is formed on the upper surface of the stage unit 354. It is guided to the surface 357.

As already described in the sixteenth embodiment, the left and right ends of the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 are provided sufficiently higher than the mountain portion 358, and the gaming ball B1 is directed forward on the rolling surface 357. The width in the left-right direction of the valley portion 359 that can be dropped is approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1, and the ratio to the width dimension in the left-right direction of the rolling surface 357 is set low. Further, the difference in height between the bottom of the valley 359 and the top of the crest 358 on the rolling surface 357 is set to be small. In other words, the game ball B1 rolling on the rolling surface 357 is difficult to fall forward from the valley 359. Therefore, it is highly possible that the game ball B1 sorted in the direction by the first left/right sorting nail 213 will win the operating ports 33, 34.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 85(b), the game ball B1 sorted to the left by the first left/right sorting nail 213 flows down in the game area PA on the left side. In this case, the game ball B1 may be guided by the left guide nail group 491 to win the operating ports 33, 34, and may drop downward from the gap between the obstacle nails 228 forming the left guide nail group 491. There is a possibility that it will be collected from the outlet 24a. In the game board 451, the probability of being guided by the left guide nail group 491 to win the operating ports 33, 34 is lower than the probability of being guided by the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 and winning the operating ports 33, 34.

Here, in the fixing hole 551 of the game board 451, instead of the guide member 471 that discharges the game ball B1 in a mode that easily collides with the second distribution surface 218a, a mode that easily collides with the first distribution surface 217a. It is possible to mount a replacement guide member 561 for discharging the game ball B1. The replacement guide member 561 will be described below with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is an end view of a cut surface when the replacement guide member 561 is cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 451.

As shown in FIG. 86, the replacement guide member 561 has a replacement guide surface 562 different from the guide surface 462 in place of the lower guide member 521 when the guide member 471 is assembled. It is assembled by using the guide member 563. The replacement lower guide member 563 differs from the lower guide member 521 only in the shape of the guide surface 462 and the shape of the outlet 522.

As shown in FIG. 86, the lower end of the outlet 564 of the replacement lower guide member 563 is located below the lower end of the outlet 522 of the lower guide member 521. The replacement guide surface 562 of the replacement lower guide member 563 has a gentle arcuate shape that is convex upward near the outlet 564. Therefore, the course after the discharge of the game ball B1 rolling on the replacement guide surface 562 of the replacement lower guide member 563 is the discharge of the game ball B1 rolling on the guide surface 462 of the lower guide member 521. There is a high possibility that the game ball B1 which is on the front side of the rear course and is discharged from the outlet 564 of the replacement lower guide member 563 collides with the first distribution surface 217a located on the front side of the game area PA. ..

As described above, in the game board 451, the probability of being guided by the left guide nail group 491 to win the operating ports 33, 34 is the probability of being guided by the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 and winning the operating ports 33, 34. Since it is lower than the guide member 471, by mounting the replacement guide member 561 on the game board 451, the game ball B1 is easier to win in the operating ports 33, 34 than in the model in which the guide member 471 is mounted. Models can be manufactured.

According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

The guide member 471 has a guide passage 461 having an inclination for facilitating the game ball B1 discharged from the outlet 522 to the second distribution surface 218a of the first left/right distribution nail 213 provided below. Has been done. In addition, the first left/right distribution nail 213 located below the exit 522 of the guide passage 461 rolls the game ball B1 that collides with the first distribution surface 217a located on the back side of the game area PA of the stage unit 354. It is provided so as to be guided to the surface 357. Therefore, the player is expected to guide the game ball B1 discharged from the exit 522 of the guide passage 461 to the rolling surface 357, and the attention of the player is gathered around the exit 522 of the guide passage 461 to play the game. The interest can be improved.

In addition, in the game board 451, the game ball B1 guided to the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 has a structure that does not easily drop from the valley portion 359 of the rolling surface 357, and thus is guided to the rolling surface 357 to play the game ball. It is highly possible that B1 wins the first working opening 33. On the other hand, after the game ball B1 flows down on the left side of the game area PA, it is likely to drop downward from the gap between the obstacle nails 228 forming the left guide nail group 491, and therefore is guided to the left guide nail group 491. It is unlikely that the played game ball B1 will win the operating ports 33, 34. Therefore, when the game ball B1 discharged from the exit 522 of the guide passage 461 is distributed to the right, the player's expectation of winning the first operating opening 33 can be increased, and the first left/right swing can be performed. The interest of the game can be improved by attracting the player's attention to the distribution result by the minute nail 213.

In addition, the guide member 471 is provided with a take-in surface 541a for distributing the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA to the back side and guiding it to the entrance 485. Therefore, the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA can be largely reflected in the course of the game ball B1, and the player is focused around the entrance 485 of the guide passage 461 to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

Further, a replacement guide member 561 can be attached to the game board 451 instead of the guide member 471. The guide member for exchange 561 is provided with a guide surface for exchange 562 for facilitating collision of the game ball B1 discharged from the outlet 564 with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left/right distribution nail 213. It is possible to manufacture a new model in which the game ball B1 enters the first operation opening 33 with a probability different from that of the model in which the member 471 is mounted. By using the same game board 451 for a plurality of models, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Further, the guide member 471 takes a deformed position in the process of fitting the guide member 471 into the fixing hole 551 formed in the game board 451, and the guide member 471 is completely fitted in the fixing hole 551. The elastic protrusion 531 that returns to the protrusion position is fixed to the game board 451 in a detachable manner. Further, a replacement guide member 561 utilizing the same elastic protrusion 531 can be detachably attached to the fixing hole 551 formed in the game board 451. Therefore, by reattaching the replacement guide member 561 to the game board 451 to which the guide member 471 was attached, it becomes possible to recycle the game board 451 and manufacture a different model.

<Another form of the eighteenth embodiment>
In the eighteenth embodiment described above, as a configuration for changing the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 discharged from the outlet 522 of the guide passage 461, a change guide 721 may be provided at the outlet 522 of the guide passage 461. Good. A case where the guide member 571 including the change guide 721 is used will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 87(a) is an end view of a cut surface when the guide member 571 is cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 452. As shown in FIG. 87( a ), the guide member 571 is mounted in the fixing hole 552 provided in the game board 452. In the game board 452, the fixing hole 552 for fixing the guide member 571 is provided above the fixing hole 551 of the game board 451 in the eighteenth embodiment.

The change guide 721 is an L-shaped tube having two open ends 572 and 573. The inlet side open end 572 which is the first open end communicates with the outlet 522 of the guide passage 461 and the second open end 572. The outlet-side opening end 573 that is the opening end is attached to the outlet 522 of the guide passage 461 in a state of facing the lower side of the game area PA.

The shape of the outlet side opening end 573 is circular, and the center thereof is located on the far side from the center of the game area PA. Therefore, the game ball B1 discharged from the center of the outlet side opening end 573 collides with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left/right distribution nail 213 provided below and is distributed to the right. However, the exit side opening end 573 has a space in which the game ball B1 located at the center thereof can be squeezed forward, backward, leftward and rightward by 2 mm, and in the depth direction of the game ball B1 discharged from the exit side opening end 573. The position shifts to the back side or the front side within a certain range.

As shown in FIG. 87(a), when the game ball B1 discharged from the outlet side opening end 573 is located at the back side, the game ball B1 is provided directly below the outlet side opening end 573. It collides with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left/right distribution nail 213 and is distributed to the right. On the other hand, when the game ball B1 exiting from the outlet side opening end 573 is at the front side position, the game ball B1 is the first left/right distribution nail 213 arranged right below the outlet side opening end 573. It collides with the second distribution surface 218a and is distributed to the left.

In this way, by using the change guide 721 that limits the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 immediately before colliding with the first left/right distribution nail 213 within a certain range, the ratio assumed at the design stage The first left/right distribution nail 213 can be configured to distribute the game ball B1 to the right direction and the left direction of the game board 452 at a rate close to. Further, since the change guide 721 is configured to guide the game ball B1 downward just before the exit side opening end 573, the game ball B1 discharged from the exit side opening end 573 is directed to the first left-right distribution nail 213. It is possible to prevent the camera from swinging in the depth direction and colliding with the surface of the game board 452 or the back surface of the window panel 52 before the collision.

Further, in the configuration using the change guide 721, the change guide 721 is replaced with the change guide member 561 provided at the outlet 522 of the guide member 471 of the eighteenth embodiment. Therefore, the ratio of the game ball B1 that the first left/right distribution nail 213 distributes to the right and the ratio of the game ball B1 that the first left/right distribution nail 213 distributes to the left are different from those when the guide member 571 is used. May be manufactured. A case of using the replacement guide member 574 including the replacement change guide 722 will be described with reference to FIG. 87(b).

FIG. 87(b) is an end view of a cut surface when the replacement guide member 574 is cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 452. As shown in FIG. 87( b ), the replacement changing guide 722 is an L-shaped tube having an inlet side opening end 742 and an outlet side opening end 743 similarly to the changing guide 721. The length dimension of the horizontal tube 744, which is a tube formed by extending horizontally in the replacement change guide 722, is the same as that of the horizontal tube 745, which is a tube formed by extending horizontally in the change guide 721. It is longer than the length dimension of FIG. 87(a). Therefore, when the replacement change guide 722 is provided at the outlet 522 of the guide passage 461, the center of the outlet-side opening end 743 is the first left-right distribution nail 213 disposed immediately below the outlet-side opening end 743. It is located closer to the front than the center in the depth direction.

Further, the outlet side opening end 743 of the replacement changing guide 722 has the same size and shape as the outlet side opening end 573 of the changing guide 721. Therefore, the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 discharged from the outlet-side opening end 743 shifts to the back side or the front side within a certain range.

Here, the position range in the depth direction that the game ball B1 discharged from the outlet side opening end 743 of the replacement change guide 722 can take is the game ball B1 discharged from the outlet side open end 573 of the change guide 721. It is displaced toward the front side of the position range in the depth direction. Therefore, in the model using the replacement change guide 722, the first left/right distribution nail 213 distributes the game ball B1 to the left in the model using the change guide 721. It is higher than the rate of distributing B1 to the left. That is, the model that uses the replacement change guide 722 is a model in which the game ball B1 is less likely to win the first operating port 33 than the model that uses the change guide 721.

In this way, by using the replacement change guide 722 instead of the change guide 721, it is possible to manufacture models in which the probability that the game ball B1 wins the first operation opening 33 is different. Since it is possible to use the same game board 452 for different models, the manufacturing cost is different as compared with the case where different game boards 452 are manufactured in order to change the probability that the game ball B1 wins the first operating port 33. It is possible to increase the variety of models while suppressing.

In the eighteenth embodiment described above, the guide member 471 and the replacement guide member 561 may be fixed to the game board 451 by screwing instead of the fixing method using the elastic protrusion 531. The guide member 471 includes a screw fastening portion that projects from the main body portion 483 in the left-right direction. Further, the replacement guide member 561 also includes a screw fastening portion protruding in the left-right direction so that the exchange guide member 561 can be screwed to the game board 451. Then, around the fixing hole 551 (FIG. 84) of the game board 451, a screw that can be accommodated in a mode in which the screw fastening portion of the guide member 471 or the replacement guide member 561 does not project to the front side of the surface of the game board 451. A retaining recess is formed. The guide member 471 and the replacement guide member 561 are screwed to the game board 451 in a state where the screwing portion is fitted in the screwing recess. In this way, by fixing the guide member 471 and the replacement guide member 561 with screws, the guide member 471 and the guide member 471 and 471 in a manner that the course of the discharged game ball B1 does not shift even if the collision of the game ball B1 is repeated. The replacement guide member 561 can be firmly fixed.

In the eighteenth embodiment described above, the guide member 471 may be configured to include an opening/closing mechanism capable of opening/closing the inlet 485 of the guide passage 461. For example, the guide member 471 is configured to discharge the game ball B1 in a mode of colliding with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left/right distribution nail 213 with a high probability, and a predetermined lottery result is obtained by the internal lottery. In that case, the inlet 485 of the guide passage 461 may be opened. In this configuration, when the predetermined lottery result is obtained, the entrance 485 of the guide passage 461 is opened for a predetermined time, so that the game ball B1 has a high probability of being the first of the first left/right distribution nails 213. It collides with the distribution surface 217a and is guided to the rolling surface 357.

In this way, in the configuration in which the course of the game ball B1 changes in a manner according to the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA, the ratio of the game ball B1 located in one of the depth directions depending on the time zone is By increasing or decreasing the configuration, the flow of the game ball B1 in the same gaming machine can be changed according to the time zone, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<19th Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the eleventh embodiment in that a short circuit prevention hole 761 for preventing the generation of the solder bridge 751 is formed in the printed wiring board 741 forming the main control board 61. Hereinafter, basic description of the same configuration as that of the eleventh embodiment will be omitted.

The main control board 61 in the present embodiment is an electronic circuit mounting board configured by mounting a large number of electronic components on a printed wiring board 741. A specific configuration of the main control board 61 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b). FIG. 88(a) is an enlarged front view showing a part of the main control board 61 (FIG. 43), and FIG. 88(b) is an enlarged front view showing the periphery of the one-row connector 782 on the main control board 61. It is a figure. In FIG. 88(a), the wiring pattern 776 formed on the surface of the printed wiring board 741 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 88(a), the printed wiring board 741 of the main control board 61 has a single-row connector 782 having four pins 784a to 784d arranged in a row and two pins 784e and 784f. And a two-row connector 783 having eight pins 784g to 784p arranged in two rows are mounted. The connectors 781 to 783 are mounted by inserting pins 784a to 784p in via holes 793 (FIG. 90(a)) formed in the printed wiring board 741. Here, the via hole 793 is a through hole that penetrates the front surface and the back surface of the printed wiring board 741. In the following, on the surface of the printed wiring board 741, the rectangular area around the mounted one-row connector 782 is referred to as a one-row area 787, and the rectangular area around the mounted two-pole connector 781 is a two-pole area. 786. In addition, a rectangular area around the mounted two-row connector 783 is a two-row area 788 on the surface of the printed wiring board 741.

As already described in the first embodiment with reference to FIG. 5, the main control board 61 is connected to the payout control device 77, the sound emission control device 81, and the like. In detail, as shown in FIG. 5, the main control board 61 included in the main controller 60 is a payout control board included in the payout controller 77 and a voice emission control board included in the voice emission controller 81. Is electrically connected to. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the main control board 61 included in the main controller 60 is electrically connected to other boards such as the power failure monitoring board 67 included in the main controller 60.

As shown in FIG. 88(a), the main control board 61 is connected to another board using connectors 781 to 783 which are female connectors. The electric cable used for electrically connecting the main control board 61 and another board has male connectors at both ends. Then, the female connectors 781 to 783 mounted on the surface of the main control board 61 and the male connector at one end of the electric cable are connected, and the male connector at the other end of the electric cable is connected. The main control board 61 is electrically connected to the other board by connecting the connector and the female connector mounted on the other board. Here, the other boards include a payout control board included in the payout controller 77, a voice emission control board included in the voice emission controller 81, a power failure monitoring board 67, and the like.

Further, the printed wiring board 741 is also mounted with a large number of insertion mounting components such as a resistor 771, a capacitor 772, a transistor 773, and an IC 774, which are mounted by inserting the terminal 775 through the via hole 793. As shown in FIG. 88(b), on the surface of the printed wiring board 741, around the one-row connector 782, the pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782 and the electronic components mounted on the printed wiring board 741 are shown. A wiring pattern 776 made of copper is formed for electrical connection. Similarly, a wiring pattern 776 (FIG. 97(a)) for electrically connecting the two-pole connector 781 to an electronic component on the printed wiring board 741 is formed around the two-pole connector 781. A wiring pattern 776 (FIG. 97B) for electrically connecting the two-row connector 783 to the electronic component on the printed wiring board 741 is formed around the two-row connector 783. A solder resist 792 which is an insulator is formed on the wiring pattern 776, and the wiring pattern 776 is not exposed to the outside.

Here, the structure of the connectors 781 to 783 mounted on the printed wiring board 741 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88(a) and 89(a) to (c). 89A is a perspective view of the one-row connector 782, FIG. 89B is a perspective view of the two-pole connector 781, and FIG. 89C is a perspective view of the two-row connector 783. As shown in FIGS. 89(a) to (c), the connectors 781 to 783 are extended in the axial direction with housings 781a to 783a having a hollow rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper plane is an upward opening. And metal pins 784a to 784p made of metal. The housings 781a to 783a are resin insulators. The pins 784a to 784p are male pins, and a plating film for improving electrical connectivity, corrosion resistance, and solderability is formed on the surface thereof. The plating film contains tin. The gold plating film may be formed on the surfaces of the pins 784a to 784p.

As shown in FIG. 88A, the connectors 781 to 783 are mounted in such a manner that the lower plane of the housings 781a to 783a is parallel to the surface of the printed wiring board 741. As shown in FIGS. 89A to 89C, the pins 784a to 784p of the connectors 781 to 783 are arranged at equal intervals in such a manner that their axes are perpendicular to the lower plane of the housings 781a to 783a. The pins 784a to 784p project above and below the lower plane of the housings 781a to 783a. Of these, the protrusions on the upper side of the pins 784a to 784p make metal contact with the female pins provided in the male connector when the male connector is fitted. Further, the lower protruding portions of the pins 784a to 784p are inserted into the via holes 793 of the printed wiring board 741 and soldered when the connectors 781 to 783 are fixed to the printed wiring board 741.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), the one-row connector 782 includes a first pin 784a, a second pin 784b, a third pin 784c, and a fourth pin 784d, which are arranged in order from the right, and four pins are provided. 784a to 784d are arranged in one row in the left-right direction with a space of 1.5 mm. The periphery of the row of the pins 784a to 784d is surrounded by the side surface of the housing 782a. Further, as shown in FIG. 89(b), the two pins 784e and 784f forming the two-pole connector 781 are spaced by 2.5 mm, which is wider than the spacing between the pins 784a to 784d in the one-row connector 782. The two pins 784e and 784f are surrounded by the side surface of the housing 781a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 89C, the eight pins 784g to 784p forming the two-row connector 783 are arranged in two rows of four, and the rows around the two pins 784g to 784p are It is surrounded by a housing 783a. The distance between the pins 784g to 784p in each row is 2 mm, which is wider than the distance between the pins 784a to 784d in the one-row connector 782, and the distance between the rows is 2.5 mm.

Here, the board provided in the pachinko machine 10 has a one-row connector in which the distance between adjacent pins 784 is narrower than 1.5 mm, a one-row connector in which the distance between adjacent pins 784 is wider than 1.5 mm, and a pin. A two-pole connector in which the distance between 784 is narrower than 2.5 mm, a two-pole connector in which the distance between pins 784 is wider than 2.5 mm, the distance between rows is wider than 2.5 mm, and the distance between pins 784 in each row is large. Two-row connector narrower than 1.5 mm, spacing between rows is less than 2.5 mm, spacing between pins 784 in each row is less than 1.5 mm, and spacing between rows is 2.5 mm There is also a two-row connector that is wider than the pin 784 and the distance between the pins 784 in each row is wider than 1.5 mm.

Next, the configuration of the printed wiring board 741 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b). FIG. 90(a) is a perspective view of the printed wiring board 741 showing a part of the rear surface in an enlarged manner, and FIG. 90(b) is an enlarged view of the via hole 793 of the printed wiring board 741 cut along a plane perpendicular to the front surface. FIG. The base material 791 that constitutes the printed wiring board 741 is a paper phenol substrate manufactured by impregnating paper with phenol resin. The printed wiring board 741 is a double-sided board in which wiring patterns 776 are formed on both the front surface and the back surface of the base material 791 which is an insulating plate.

The base material 791 of the printed wiring board 741 is not limited to the paper phenol substrate. For example, a glass epoxy substrate manufactured by impregnating glass cloth with an epoxy resin may be used. Further, the printed wiring board 741 may be a single-sided board in which the wiring pattern 776 is formed only on the surface of the insulating board, or may be a multilayer board in which the wiring pattern 776 is formed in the inner layer of the insulating board. Good.

As shown in FIG. 90(a), the printed wiring board 741 is provided with a via hole 793 for inserting the terminal 775 (FIG. 88(a)) of the insertion mounting component or the pins 784a-784p of the connectors 781-783. There is. In order to describe the structure of the via hole 793, the process of forming the via hole 793 will be described below. First, a copper foil 779 (FIG. 90(b)) having a thickness of 0.04 mm is attached to the front and back surfaces of a base material 791 having a thickness of 1.6 mm. After that, a through hole 777 (FIG. 90(b)) which is a hole penetrating vertically through the base material 791 to which the copper foil 779 is attached is formed.

Then, the base material 791 having the through holes 777 is plated with copper. As a result, a copper thin film 778 (FIG. 90(b)) is formed on the copper foil 779 (FIG. 90(b)) attached to the front and back surfaces of the base material 791. Further, the through hole 777 becomes the via hole 793 by forming the copper thin film 778 on the inner wall at the timing. At this time, in the vicinity of the via hole 793, the copper foil 779 around the upper opening of the through hole 777 and the copper foil 779 around the lower opening are provided via the copper thin film 778 formed on the inner wall of the through hole 777. It will be in an electrically connected state.

A thin film of an etching resist, which is a photosensitive material, is formed on the copper foil 779 attached to the front surface and the back surface of the base material 791 in which the via hole 793 is formed. The thin film of the etching resist is irradiated with light (ultraviolet rays) to transfer the mask pattern and is developed. Then, the unnecessary etching resist other than the mask pattern is removed, whereby the mask pattern is formed on the front surface and the back surface of the base material 791.

Then, in an etching gas atmosphere, dry etching is performed to etch the copper foil 779 (FIG. 90(b)) and the copper thin film 778 on the base material 791 on which the mask pattern is formed using ions or the like, and to remove acetone or the like. By removing the etching resist in the mask pattern portion with the organic solvent, the wiring pattern 776 made of copper is formed on the base material 791 as shown in FIG. 90(a). The thickness of the wiring pattern 776 is about 0.04 mm, which is the same as the thickness of the copper foil 779. The copper foil 779 and the copper thin film 778 on the base material 791 may be etched by wet etching in which the base material 791 is immersed in an etching solution.

In the printed wiring board 741, a solder resist 792 is formed on the front surface and the back surface of the base material 791 in which the wiring pattern 776 is formed, and surface treatment such as solder plating, electroless gold plating, and water-soluble flux treatment is performed. Created by. Here, the solder resist 792 is a resist that plays a role of insulating between the wiring patterns 776 and a role of preventing the solder from adhering to a portion other than a target portion of the soldering step. In addition, the surface treatment is a treatment that is continuous with the wiring pattern 776 and that improves the solderability of a portion that is exposed to the outside, and is a treatment that makes the copper foil portion less likely to rust.

Specifically, after the resist solution is applied to the front surface and the back surface of the base material 791 in which the wiring pattern 776 is formed by the curtain coating method, the pattern portion of the solder resist 792 is dried and cured. .. Then, by removing the uncured portion of the resist, the printed wiring board 741 is formed in which the wiring pattern 776 and the solder resist 792 are formed on the base material 791.

As shown in FIG. 90A, in the printed wiring board 741, the pins 784a to 784p of the connectors 781 to 783 and the wiring pattern 776 are soldered around the upper opening and the lower opening of the via hole 793 by soldering. A joint hole 762 for electrically connecting is formed. The joining hole 762 is a circular hole having a diameter slightly larger than the width of the wiring pattern 776, and is formed on the front surface and the back surface of the printed wiring board 741. Further, as shown in FIG. 90A, in the printed wiring board 741, a short circuit prevention hole 761 having a larger area than the bonding hole 762 is formed around a part of the via hole 793 instead of the bonding hole 762. ing.

When the pins 784a to 784p of the connectors 781 to 783 are inserted into the via holes 793, the molten solder adheres to the surfaces of the bonding holes 762 or the short circuit prevention holes 761 formed around the via holes 793. Then, the attached molten solder is solidified, so that the pins 784a to 784p of the connectors 781 to 783 are fixed to the printed wiring board 741 while being electrically connected to the wiring pattern 776.

Here, the insertion mounting component is also mounted on the printed wiring board 741 by soldering with the terminal 775 (FIG. 88) inserted into the via hole 793 around which the bonding hole 762 or the short circuit prevention hole 761 is formed. Has been done.

In the soldering process, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is inserted into the adjacent via hole 793 in which molten solder attached around the pins 784a to 784p (FIGS. 89(a) to (c)) inserted into the via hole 793 is adjacent. It is provided for the purpose of preventing the short circuit from being formed on the printed wiring board 741 by merging with the molten solder attached around the pins 784a to 784p. In the printed wiring board 741, short-circuit prevention holes 761 are provided in place of the bonding holes 762 around the via holes 793 in which a short circuit is likely to be formed between the via holes 793 adjacent to each other.

When the amount of the molten solder adhered around the pins 784a to 784p inserted in the via hole 793 increases, the molten solder adheres around the pins 784a to 784p inserted in the adjacent via hole 793. The probability of joining will increase. Therefore, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 provided for suppressing the formation of the short-circuit circuit can prevent the molten solder from adhering even when the amount of the molten solder attached around the pins 784a to 784p inserted into the via hole 793 increases. It has a large area that can be held on the short-circuit prevention hole 761. As shown in FIG. 90A, the area of the short circuit prevention hole 761 is set larger than the area of the joining hole 762.

As described above with reference to FIG. 88(a), many electronic components are mounted on the printed wiring board 741. Therefore, when the area of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is set wide in all directions around the via hole 793, in addition to the via hole 793 closest to the via hole 793, a plurality of via holes 793 existing in the vicinity of the via hole 793 are provided. The possibility of forming a short circuit between them occurs. On the other hand, by making the shape of the short circuit prevention hole 761 an elliptical shape extending in one direction, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a short circuit will occur on the crowded printed wiring board 741. ..

As shown in FIG. 90A, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 formed around the via hole 793 avoids a direction in which the via hole 793 adjacent to the via hole 793 exists and is different from the adjacent via hole 793. It is formed to extend in the opposite direction. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed as an elliptical hole having a minor axis that is substantially the same as the diameter of the joining hole 762 and a major axis that is approximately twice the diameter of the joining hole 762.

In the joining hole 762 and the short-circuit prevention hole 761, the copper foil 779 (FIG. 90(b)) is exposed toward the upper side of the hole. On the front surface and the back surface of the printed wiring board 741, the regions other than the bonding holes 762 and the short circuit prevention holes 761 are masked by the solder resist 792, so that solder is selectively attached to the bonding holes 762 in the soldering process. be able to.

Next, the solder fillet 798 formed around the pins 784a to 784p of the connectors 781 to 783 and around the terminal 775 of the insertion mounting component in the soldering step will be described.

In the soldering process, the pins 784a to 784p of the connectors 781 to 783 are inserted into the via holes 793 of the printed wiring board 741. Then, the molten solder adheres to the via hole 793 and is solidified. Accordingly, the connectors 781 to 783 are fixed while being electrically connected to the wiring patterns 776 formed on the front surface and the back surface of the printed wiring board 741.

The solder fillet 798 will be described with reference to the second pin 784b of the one-row connector 782 as an example with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is an enlarged vertical cross-sectional view showing the periphery of the pin 784 of the one-row connector 782 in the printed wiring board 741 cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface. Here, the pin 784 is the same member as the pins 784a to 784p included in the one-row connector 782, the two-pole connector 781, and the two-row connector 783, and is a general term for the pins 784a to 784p.

As shown in FIG. 91, the melted solder is solidified to form a solder fillet 798 around the pins 784 of the one-row connector 782 fixed to the printed wiring board 741. The solder fillet 798 is formed on the joint hole 762, and has a substantially conical shape extending downward from the back surface of the printed wiring board 741 along the pin 784 of the one-row connector 782. The height of the solder fillet 798 in the downward direction from the bottom of the substantially conical shape to the apex is the height of the solder fillet 798. The solder fillet 798 is formed so as to include a part of the surface of the pin 784 in the one-row connector 782, the inner wall of the via hole 793, and the surface of the joint hole 762 of the printed wiring board 741. As described above, the joint hole 762 is formed on the printed wiring board 741 and is continuous with the wiring pattern 776 covered with the solder resist 792. Therefore, the pin 784 of the one-row connector 782 is formed by the solder fillet 798. It is electrically connected to the wiring pattern 776.

Further, each of the pins 784e and 784f of the two-pole connector 781 and the pins 784g to 784p of the two-row connector 783 are soldered similarly to the pin 784 of the one-row connector 782. Further, similarly to the connectors 781 to 783, the insertion mounting components forming the main control board 61 are also soldered and fixed while the terminals 775 of the insertion mounting components are inserted into the via holes 793 of the printed wiring board 741. There is. As a result, the terminal 775 (FIG. 88A) of the insertion mounting component is electrically connected to the via hole 793 and the wiring pattern 776 formed on the front surface and the back surface of the printed wiring board 741.

FIG. 92(a) is an enlarged back view showing a part of the same main control board 61 as in FIG. 88(a). On the back surface of the main control board 61, a bonding hole 762 or a short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed around the via hole 793 through which the pins 784a to 784p (FIGS. 89A to 89C) of the connectors 781 to 783 are inserted. There is. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 92(a), on the back surface of the printed wiring board 741, the back surface area 842 for one row, which is an area around the mounted one row connector 782, is formed on the joining hole 762. The circular solder fillet 798 and the elliptical solder fillet 799 formed on the short-circuit prevention hole 761 are arranged in a line.

Here, the configuration of the back surface region 842 for one row on the back surface of the printed wiring board 741 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92( b) is a rear view of the printed wiring board 741 showing the back surface region 842 for one row before enlarging the one-row connector 782.

As shown in FIG. 92B, in the rear row region 842 for one row, the via hole 793 into which the first pin 784a of the one row connector 782 is inserted is defined as the first via hole 793a, and the second pin 784b is inserted. The via hole 793 is referred to as a second via hole 793b. Further, the via hole 793 through which the third pin 784c of the one-row connector 782 is inserted is referred to as a third via hole 793c, and the via hole 793 through which the fourth pin 784d is inserted is referred to as a fourth via hole 793d.

As shown in FIG. 92B, in the one-row back surface region 842, the via holes 793a to 793d are arranged from the right side to the left side in the order of the first via hole 793a, the second via hole 793b, the third via hole 793c, and the fourth via hole 793d. They are lined up in one row. When the printed wiring board 741 is conveyed rightward in the soldering process, the fourth via hole 793d located at the left end of the back surface region 842 for one row is located at the rear end in the carrying direction. When the printed wiring board 741 is transported leftward in the soldering process, the first via hole 793a located at the right end of the back row region 842 for one row is located at the rear end in the transport direction.

As shown in FIG. 92B, the wiring pattern 776 is connected to the short circuit prevention hole 761 formed around the first via hole 793a in the back surface region 842 for one row. Further, in the back surface region 842 for one row, the short circuit prevention hole 761, the wiring pattern 776 connected to the short circuit prevention hole 761, and the bonding hole 762 are surrounded by an insulation region formed of an insulator, A GND solid 851 for grounding is provided around the insulating region. Then, only the bonding hole 762 around the third via hole 793c is electrically connected to the GND solid 851 by the connecting portion 763 having a width narrower than the major axis of the short circuit prevention hole 761. A solder resist 792 is formed on the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851. Therefore, the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851 are not exposed to the outside, and the molten solder does not adhere to the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851 in the soldering process.

Here, the GND solid 851 will be described. In addition to the wiring patterns 776 for connecting the pins 784a to 784p of the connectors 781 to 783 and the terminals 775 of the insertion mounting components mounted on the printed wiring board 741 to the front surface and the back surface of the printed wiring board 741, A GND solid 851 (FIG. 92B) is provided as a ground pattern for grounding 781 to 783 and the inserted mounting components. The GND solid 851 is a copper pattern and has a large area on the front surface and the back surface of the printed wiring board 741.

Some of the pins 784a to 784p of the connectors 781 to 783 mounted on the printed wiring board 741 are connected to the GND solid 851 for grounding. In the back row region 842 for one row of the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 92(b), the third via hole 793c located at the third position from the right is a GND solid while avoiding both ends of the row of via holes 793a to 793d. It is connected to 851. As a result, in the row of the four pins 784a to 784d in the one-row connector 782 (Fig. 89(a)), the third pins 784c (Fig. 89(a)) not located at both ends are grounded.

In the soldering step, part of the heat of the molten solder around the third pin 784c of the one-row connector 782 passes through the joint hole 762 formed around the third pin 784c and the joint hole 762c. Move to the GND solid 851 connected to the 762. Since the GND solid 851 has a large area on the printed wiring board 741, it can absorb more heat than the wiring pattern 776 having a small area.

The temperature of the molten solder around the third pin 784c of the one-row connector 782 is lower than the temperature of the molten solder around the remaining pins 784a, 784b, 784d of the one-row connector 782. Thus, the temperature of the molten solder around the pins 784a to 784p and the terminal 775 connected to the GND solid 851 for grounding becomes low, and the fluidity of the molten solder is reduced. Therefore, around the pins 784a to 784p and the terminal 775 connected to the GND solid 851, the melted solder is likely to merge with each other, and a short circuit is easily formed.

In the back row region 842 for one row of the pachinko machine 10, the third via holes 793c connected to the GND solid 851 are set so as not to be located at both ends of the row of the via holes 793a to 793d, and the back area 842 for one row. The formation of a short circuit at both ends of the is suppressed.

Next, in order to explain the mechanism by which the solder bridge 751 occurs, first, a soldering process performed for mounting the connectors 781 to 783 and the insertion mounting component on the printed wiring board 741 will be described.

In the main control board 61 shown in FIG. 88, the flow soldering is performed in the automatic soldering device 822 (FIG. 93(a)) after the connectors 781 to 783 and the insertion mounting components are fixed to the printed wiring board 741. Created. Here, the flow soldering is a method in which molten solder and heat are simultaneously supplied to a target portion of soldering to perform soldering. FIG. 93(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jet flow 821 of the molten solder, and FIG. 93(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the jet flow 821 is hitting the back surface of the printed wiring board 741. ..

As shown in FIG. 93(a), the automatic soldering device 822 includes an inclined member 822a having a gentle gradient, and the molten solder flows down on the inclined member 822a. Here, the molten solder is solder that is heated to approximately 250° C. and is in a molten state. When the temperature of the molten solder is low, the fluidity of the molten solder is reduced, which causes defective soldering. Specifically, the amount of molten solder that adheres around the pins 784a to 784p (FIGS. 89A to 89C) of the connectors 781 to 783 or the terminals 775 (FIG. 88A) of the insertion mounting component increases. At the same time, the breakage of the molten solder deteriorates, and the molten solder around the two pins 784a to 784p or the molten solder around the two terminals 775 merges to form a solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)). This will cause a short circuit.

The soldering process is performed by bringing the back surface of the printed wiring board 741 into contact with the molten solder flowing down on the inclined member 822a of the automatic soldering device 822. As shown in FIG. 93(b), in the automatic soldering device 822, the printed wiring board 741 comes into contact with the molten solder while being conveyed in a state of having a gentle slope upward. The printed wiring board 741 is conveyed rightward by a belt conveyor.

Here, the behavior of the molten solder when the jet stream 821 hits the back surface of the printed wiring board 741 being conveyed by the belt conveyor will be described to explain the effect of the short circuit prevention hole 761 formed on the back surface of the printed wiring board 741. Will be explained. First, the behavior of the molten solder in the soldering process of the comparative printed wiring board 831 (FIG. 94(a)) in which the short circuit prevention hole 761 is not formed will be described.

On the back surface of the comparative printed wiring board 831 are arranged a plurality of pins 784a to 784p forming the connectors 781 to 783 and a plurality of terminals 775 forming the insertion mounting parts. For example, as shown in FIG. 93(b), when the four pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782 are soldered, the comparative printed wiring board 831 is tilted upward and gently. Since it is being conveyed, the start timing and the end timing of contact with the jet flow 821 are different for each of the four pins 784a to 784d. Here, as shown in FIG. 93(b), in the one-row connector 782 mounted on the printed wiring board 741 conveyed rightward, the pin located on the rightmost side is the first pin 784a. , The second pin from the right is the second pin 784b. Further, the third pin from the right is the third pin 784c, and the fourth pin from the right is the fourth pin 784d.

As shown in FIG. 93( b ), the four pins 784 a to 784 d of the one-row connector 782 are in contact with the jet stream 821 in order from the first pin 784 a, and finally the fourth pin 784 d becomes the jet stream 821. It is in contact. Then, the first pin 784a comes out of the contact state with the jet flow 821 in order, and finally the fourth pin 784d comes out of the contact state with the jet flow 821.

With respect to the behavior of the molten solder when the four pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782 come out of the contact state with the jet flow 821, see FIGS. 94(a) to (c) and FIGS. 95(a) to (c). However, it will be described below. FIG. 94(a) is a vertical cross-sectional view of a comparative printed wiring board 831 shown for explaining a state in which the second pin 784b, the third pin 784c, and the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 are in contact with the jet flow 821. 94(b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the comparative printed wiring board 831 shown for explaining how the second pin 784b of the one-row connector 782 comes out of contact with the jet stream 821. FIG. (C) is a vertical cross-sectional view of a comparative printed wiring board 831 shown for explaining how the third pin 784c of the one-row connector 782 comes out of contact with the jet flow 821. Here, the vertical cross-sectional views of FIGS. 94A to 94C are vertical cross-sectional views of a cut surface when the comparative printed wiring board 831 is cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the comparative printed wiring board 831. ..

From the state where the second pin 784b, the third pin 784c, and the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 are in contact with the jet flow 821 (FIG. 94(a)), only the third pin 784c and the fourth pin 784d are jet flow. When the state transits to the state of being in contact with 821 (FIG. 94(b)), a predetermined amount of molten solder remains around the second pin 784b, and the formation of the solder fillet 798 begins. As described above, in the initial stage of forming the solder fillet 798, the amount of the molten solder remaining around the second pin 784b depends on the area of the bonding hole 762 formed around the second pin 784b and the comparative printed wiring. It is affected by the transport speed of the plate 831.

As shown in FIG. 94B, at the formation start timing of the solder fillet 798 around the second pin 784b, the solder fillet 798 and the jet flow 821 which are being formed around the second pin 784b are in a continuous state. is there. In this state, the molten solder around the second pin 784b and the molten solder of the jet stream 821 can move back and forth.

Here, the static property of the molten solder will be described. The molten solder at about 250° C. has fluidity and surface tension. Therefore, when a small amount of molten solder mass comes into contact with a large amount of molten solder mass, the molten solder forming a small amount of mass is attracted toward the large amount of molten solder mass. As a result, the amount of molten solder forming a small amount of lumps is smaller than that before contact, and the amount of molten solder forming a large amount of lumps is larger than before contact.

As shown in FIG. 94(b), when the molten solder remaining around the second pin 784b and the molten solder of the jet stream 821 are continuous, the molten solder around the second pin 784b is better. Due to the small amount, a portion of the small amount of molten solder remaining around the second pin 784b is drawn into the jet stream 821. Therefore, a smaller amount of molten solder remains around the second pin 784b than the initially attached molten solder, and as shown in FIG. 94(c), the molten solder remaining around the second pin 784b causes the second A solder fillet 798 is formed on the joint hole 762 formed around the pin 784b.

FIG. 95(a) is a vertical cross-sectional view of a comparative printed wiring board 831 shown for explaining a state where the third pin 784c of the one-row connector 782 has come out of contact with the jet flow 821, and FIG. FIG. 95C is a vertical cross-sectional view of the comparative printed wiring board 831 shown for explaining a state in which the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 has come out of contact with the jet flow 821, and FIG. 95C shows the one-row connector 782. 8 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a comparative printed wiring board 831 showing a state in which a solder bridge 751 is formed between the third pin 784c and the fourth pin 784d of FIG. Here, the vertical cross-sectional views of FIGS. 95A to 95C are vertical cross-sectional views of a cut surface when the comparative printed wiring board 831 is cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the comparative printed wiring board 831. ..

When the third pin 784c comes out of contact with the jet stream 821, part of the molten solder remaining around the third pin 784c is drawn into the jet stream 821 at an early stage when the solder fillet 798 is formed. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 95(a), a smaller amount of molten solder remains around the third pin 784c than the initially attached molten solder, and the third molten solder remains around the third pin 784c. A solder fillet 798 is formed on the joint hole 762 formed around the pin 784c.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 95(b), the fourth pin 784d located at the right end of the row formed by the four pins 784a to 784d (FIG. 93(b)) of the single row connector 782 forms the jet stream 821. In the case of exiting from the contact state of No. 2, the molten solder remaining around the fourth pin 784d and the jet stream 821 are not in contact with each other in the initial stage of forming the solder fillet 798. Therefore, the amount of the molten solder left around the fourth pin 784d in the initial stage is maintained as it is without decreasing.

In the comparative printed wiring board 831, the same joint hole 762 as that around the first pin 784a to the third pin 784c is formed around the via hole 793 through which the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 is inserted. .. An excessive amount of molten solder tends to remain around the fourth pin 784d with respect to the area of the bonding hole 762. When an excessive amount of molten solder that cannot be settled around the fourth pin 784d occurs, as shown in FIG. 95(c), it merges most with the molten solder around the third pin 784c adjacent to the front side in the transport direction. Easy to do.

When the molten solder around the fourth pin 784d and the molten solder around the third pin 784c merge to form a continuous state, the two pins 784c and 784d are interposed between the two pins 784c and 784d. A solder bridge 751 for electrically connecting the two is formed. As a result, a short circuit is formed in the main control board using the comparative printed wiring board 831. In this case, a manual correction work is required after the automatic soldering work, which reduces the manufacturing efficiency of the main control board using the comparative printed wiring board 831 and increases the manufacturing cost.

On the other hand, in the main control board 61 of the present embodiment using the printed wiring board 741, the third via hole 793c connected to the GND solid 851 has the one-row rear surface region 842 as already described in FIG. 92(b). It is arranged so as not to be located at both ends of. In the soldering process, the third via hole 793c is not located at the rear end in the carrying direction both when the printed wiring board 741 is carried to the right and when it is carried to the left.

The influence that the fluidity of the molten solder decreases with the temperature decrease of the molten solder around the third pin 784c connected to the GND solid 851, and the solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)) easily occurs, is a printed wiring. The configuration does not extend around the via holes 793a and 793d that may be located at the rear end of the plate 741 in the transport direction. This reduces the possibility that the solder bridge 751 is formed around the via holes 793a and 793d located at the end of the one-row back surface region 842 due to the influence of the GND solid 851.

Further, in the one-row connector 782, the third pin 784c connected to the GND solid 851 is located inside the row of the pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782, so that the third pin 784c is the final pin around the third pin 784c. The amount of the molten solder that forms the solder fillet 798 is smaller than the amount of the molten solder that adheres around the third pin 784c in the initial stage. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a short circuit due to the solder bridge 751 being formed around the third pin 784c connected to the GND solid 851 for grounding in the one-row connector 782.

As described above with reference to FIG. 92B, a short circuit prevention hole 761 is formed around the fourth via hole 793d into which the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 is inserted, instead of the joining hole 762. As a result, the molten solder remaining around the fourth pin 784d is suppressed from joining with the molten solder remaining around the third pin 784c, and the generation of the solder bridge 751 is suppressed. Returning to FIG. 92B, details of the short circuit prevention hole 761 will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 92B, in the back row region 842 for one row in which the via holes 793a to 793d are arranged from right to left, the first via hole 793a and the left end located at the right end of the row of via holes 793a to 793d are located. A short circuit prevention hole 761 is formed around the fourth via hole 793d located, and a bonding hole 762 is formed around the second via hole 793b and the third via hole 793c located inside the row. Thus, since the short-circuit prevention holes 761 are formed at both ends of the row of via holes 793a to 793d that are parallel to the transport direction, even when the printed wiring board 741 is transported to the left in the soldering process, It is possible to suppress the generation of the solder bridge 751 around the via hole 793 located at the right end that is the rear end in the transport direction.

As shown in FIG. 92( b ), in the back surface region 842 for one row, the distance LA 1 from the center of the via holes 793 a to 793 d to the centers of the adjacent via holes 793 a to 793 d is the pin 784 a to 784 d adjacent to the one row connector 782. It is 1.5 mm, which is the same as the distance between (Fig. 89(a)).

As shown in FIG. 92B, the distance LB1 from the left end of the short circuit prevention hole 761 around the first via hole 793a to the right end of the bonding hole 762 around the second via hole 793b, and the bonding hole 762 around the third via hole 793c. The distance LB1 from the left end to the right end of the short circuit prevention hole 761 around the fourth via hole 793d is the same as the distance LB1 from the left end of the joining hole 762 around the second via hole 793b to the right end of the joining hole 762 around the third via hole 793c. is there.

As shown in FIG. 92B, around the fourth via hole 793d, the fourth via hole 793d is located on the right side of the center of the short circuit prevention hole 761, and the short circuit prevention hole 761 is arranged in a row of the via holes 793a to 793d. It is provided on the outer side. The short circuit prevention hole 761 around the fourth via hole 793d extends outward in the row of the via holes 793a to 793d. Further, around the first via hole 793a, the short circuit prevention hole 761 is provided on the outer side of the row of the via holes 793a to 793d in such a manner that the first via hole 793a is located on the left side of the center of the short circuit prevention hole 761. .. The short circuit prevention hole 761 around the first via hole 793a extends outward in the row of the via holes 793a to 793d.

By providing the short-circuit prevention hole 761 having a major axis longer than the diameter of the joining hole 762 to the outside of the row of via holes 793a to 793d, the molten solder and the short-circuit prevention hole 761 attached on the joining hole 762 in the soldering process. The possibility that the molten solder adhering on the above will come close and merge will be reduced. This can reduce the possibility that a short circuit will be formed on the printed wiring board 741.

Next, the solder fillet 799 formed around the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 by the soldering process will be described based on FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the printed wiring board 741 showing the solder fillet 799 formed around the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782. Here, the vertical cross-sectional view of FIG. 96 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a cut surface when the printed wiring board 741 is cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the printed wiring board 741.

As shown in FIG. 96, the short circuit prevention hole 761 around the fourth pin 784d in the printed wiring board 741 has a larger area than the area of the bonding hole 762 around the fourth pin 784d in the comparative printed wiring board 831 described above. have. Therefore, a solder fillet 799 having a bottom surface larger in area than the solder fillet 798 that can be formed on the joining hole 762 can be formed on the short circuit prevention hole 761. As described above, in the printed wiring board 741 provided with the short-circuit prevention hole 761, the amount of the molten solder stably set around the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 is the one-row connector 782 in the comparative printed wiring board 831. Is larger than the amount of the molten solder that stably fits around the fourth pin 784d. By forming the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 in the printed wiring board 741, by reducing the possibility that excess molten solder is generated around the fourth pin 784d. The generation of the solder bridge 751 due to the molten solder remaining around the fourth pin 784d can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 92( b ), the short circuit prevention hole 761 around the fourth via hole 793 d is formed so as to extend toward the outside of the row of via holes 793 a to 793 d, and is accumulated on the short circuit prevention hole 761. The center of gravity of the molten solder is located in the direction away from the adjacent third via hole 793c in the row. Therefore, even if excess molten solder is generated around the fourth pin 784d in the soldering process, the excess molten solder merges with the molten solder around the distant third pin 784c and the solder bridge 751 is formed. Can be suppressed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in addition to the main control board 61 to which the one-row connector 782 is attached, the one-row connector in which the distance between the pins 784 (FIG. 91) is wider than 1.5 mm is attached. And a substrate on which a one-row connector narrower than 1.5 mm is mounted. In these one-row connectors, the pins 784 connected to the GND solid 851 (Fig. 92(b)) for grounding are positioned so that they are located at positions other than the front end and the rear end in the carrying direction in the soldering process. The rows are arranged with the ends removed. Since some of the molten solder remaining around the pin 784 connected to the GND solid 851 is drawn into the jet stream 821 at the initial stage when the solder fillet 798 (FIG. 91) is formed, the molten solder remaining around the pin 784. The amount of is less than the initial amount. As described above, the temperature of the molten solder around the pin 784 connected to the GND solid 851 is lowered, and the viscosity of the molten solder is increased, so that the solder bridge 751 may be generated around the pin 784. Has been reduced.

In the pachinko machine 10, joint holes 762 (FIG. 90(a)) are formed around all the pins 784 of the one-row connector in which the distance between the pins 784 is larger than 1.5 mm. On the other hand, when a single-row connector in which the distance between the pins 784 is 1.5 mm or less is mounted on the printed wiring board, the use of the joint holes 762 around the pins 784 at both ends of the row makes it possible to move the printed wiring board in the conveying direction. It has been experimentally found that the probability that the molten solder that adheres around the pin 784 located at the rear end and the molten solder that adheres around the pin 784 adjacent to the pin 784 merge to form the solder bridge 751 increases. I know.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the one-row connector in which the distance between the pins 784 is 1.5 mm or less is attached to the printed wiring board, the pins 784 located at the ends of the rows are joined together. A short circuit prevention hole 761 (FIG. 90A) having a larger area than the hole 762 is provided. By using the short-circuit prevention hole 761 instead of the joining hole 762, the bottom area of the formable solder fillet 798 is increased, and a large amount of molten solder is stably stored around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction. It is possible. This can reduce the probability that the solder bridge 751 is formed around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction in the single-row connector.

The short-circuit prevention hole 761 formed around the pin 784 located at the end of the row in the one-row connector is provided so as to extend to the outside of the row while avoiding the adjacent pin 784 existing inside the row. There is. In this way, the center of gravity of the molten solder accumulated in the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is positioned in the opposite direction to the adjacent pin 784, so that the molten solder once accumulated in the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is directed toward the adjacent pin 784. It is possible to prevent the solder bridge 751 from moving and joining with the molten solder around the adjacent pin 784 to form the solder bridge 751.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a one-row connector in which the distance between the pins 784 is 1.5 mm or less is mounted on the printed wiring board, not only around the pin 784 located at one end of the row but also at the other end. A short-circuit prevention hole 761 having an area larger than that of the joint hole 762 and extending toward the outside of the row of the pins 784 is also provided around the pin 784 located at. Accordingly, in the soldering step, the probability that the solder bridge 751 is formed around the pins 784 located at both ends of the row in the one-row connector can be reduced regardless of the direction in which the printed wiring board is transported. In the soldering process, the carrying direction of the printed wiring board is not limited to one direction, so that the carrying direction of the printed wiring board can be flexibly determined in the soldering process, and the manufacturing efficiency can be improved.

In addition, the reference value of the interval of the pins 784 of 1.5 mm in which holes formed around the pins 784 located at both ends of the row are changed from the joining hole 762 to the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is one row for a fixed number of printed wiring boards. When soldering for mounting the connector is performed, the probability that the solder bridge 751 is formed around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction in the single-row connector is smaller than a predetermined reference value. It is a fixed value.

As described above with reference to FIG. 89(a), the spacing between the pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782 mounted on the printed wiring board 741 (FIG. 92(b)) is 1.5 mm, and the short-circuit prevention hole 761( The condition for setting FIG. 92(b)) is satisfied. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 92(b), in the back surface region 842 for one row of the printed wiring board 741, short-circuit prevention holes 761 are provided around the first via hole 793a and the fourth via hole 793d. The possibility of forming a short circuit on the wiring board 741 is reduced.

Next, the structure around the pin 784 forming the two-pole connector 781 mounted on the printed wiring board 741 will be described. As shown in FIG. 92A, on the back surface of the printed wiring board 741, in the back surface area 841 for two poles, which is an area around the mounted two-pole connector 781, is formed on the short-circuit prevention hole 761. There are two elliptical solder fillets 799.

Here, the structure of the bipolar back surface region 841 on the back surface of the printed wiring board 741 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97(a) is a rear view of the printed wiring board 741 showing an enlarged rear area 841 for two poles before the two-pole connector 781 is attached. Two via holes 793 are formed in the two-pole rear surface region 841 so as to be aligned in the left-right direction. Here, the via hole 793 located on the right side of the bipolar back surface region 841 is referred to as a first via hole 793e, and the via hole 793 located on the left side is referred to as a second via hole 793f.

As shown in FIG. 97A, in the bipolar back surface region 841, both the first via hole 793e and the second via hole 793f are located at the ends of the bipolar back surface region 841. Therefore, unlike the case of the one-row back surface region 842 (FIG. 92(b)) described above, the via holes 793e and 793f connected to the GND solid 851 cannot be arranged at positions other than both ends in the transport direction. As described above, since the temperature of the molten solder decreases around the via holes 793e and 793f connected to the GND solid 851, the probability that the solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)) occurs around the via holes 793e and 793f. Is high. Further, around the via holes 793e and 793f which are located at the rear end in the carrying direction, excessive molten solder is likely to adhere at the initial stage of forming the solder fillet 798, so that the solder bridge 751 is likely to occur. high.

In the printed wiring board that constitutes the substrate of the pachinko machine 10, in the printed wiring board in which the two-pole connector is mounted, the two pins 784 (FIG. 91) that constitute the two-pole connector are Either of them may become the pin 784 located at the rear end in the carrying direction in the soldering process. Then, when the pin 784 connected to the GND solid 851 becomes the pin 784 located at the rear end in the carrying direction, the environment in which the solder bridge 751 is very likely to occur around the pin 784 becomes an environment.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, the standard of the interval of the pins 784 for determining whether or not to provide the short circuit prevention hole 761 around the pin 784 of the two-pole connector is the standard for the single-row connector. It is set to 2.5 mm, which is longer than the value of 1.5 mm. That is, in the board provided in the pachinko machine 10, when the two-pole connector in which the distance between the pins 784 is 2.5 mm or less is mounted, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is provided around the two pins 784 (Fig. 90(a)). ) Is formed, and a joint hole 762 (FIG. 90(a)) is formed around the two pins 784 when a two-pole connector in which the distance between the pins 784 is wider than 2.5 mm is mounted. ing.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 97(a), the distance LA2 between the centers of the two via holes 793e and 793f in the bipolar back surface region 841 is 2.5 mm. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 97A, a short circuit prevention hole 761 is formed around the two via holes 793e and 793b formed in the bipolar back surface region 841.

As described above, in the short-circuit prevention hole 761, the via holes 793e and 793f are located at the rear end in the carrying direction in the soldering process, and the pins 784e and 784f inserted in the via holes 793e and 793f (see FIG. 89(b)). Even when the amount of the molten solder adhering to )) is increased, it has a large area necessary for holding the molten solder on the short circuit prevention hole 761. Therefore, the possibility that the solder bridge 751 is formed between the two pins 784e and 784f (FIG. 89(b)) forming the two-pole connector 781 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 97(a), the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the second via hole 793f extends in a direction opposite to the direction in which the first via hole 793e adjacent to the second via hole 793f exists. Has been formed. Therefore, the center of gravity of the molten solder accumulated on the short-circuit prevention hole 761 can be located in the direction opposite to the first via hole 793e. Thereby, even if the second via hole 793f is located at the rear end in the transport direction, as an environment in which the molten solder attached on the second via hole 793f is unlikely to move toward the adjacent first via hole 793e, Generation of the solder bridge 751 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 97A, a short circuit prevention hole 761 that is the same as the short circuit prevention hole 761 around the second via hole 793f is formed around the first via hole 793e. The short circuit prevention hole 761 is formed to extend in a direction opposite to the direction in which the second via hole 793f is present. Therefore, in the soldering process, even if the first via hole 793e is located at the rear end in the carrying direction, the solder bridge 751 is formed around the two pins 784e and 784f forming the two-pole connector 781. It is possible to reduce the possibility that

As shown in FIG. 97(a), the short circuit prevention hole 761 around the first via hole 793e located on the right side of the second via hole 793f in the back surface region 841 for two poles has the first via hole 793e at the center of the short circuit prevention hole 761. It is formed on the right side so that it is located on the left side. Further, the short circuit prevention hole 761 around the second via hole 793f located on the left side of the first via hole 793e in the back surface region 841 for two poles is arranged so that the second via hole 793f is located on the right side of the center of the short circuit prevention hole 761. , Is formed to the left.

As described above, the two short-circuit prevention holes 761 are provided in such a manner that the distance LB2 from the left end of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the first via hole 793e to the right end of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the second via hole 793f is kept wide. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the molten solder attached around the two pins 784e and 784f (FIG. 89(b)) forming the two-pole connector 781 from approaching each other, and to prevent the two pins 784e, It is possible to suppress the formation of the solder bridge 751 due to the melted solder adhering around the 784f joining together.

Next, the structure around the pins 784g to 784p forming the two-row connector 783 mounted on the printed wiring board 741 will be described. As shown in FIG. 92( a ), on the back surface of the printed wiring board 741, in the back surface area 843 for the second row, which is an area around the mounted two-row connector 783, is formed on the joining hole 762. There are a circular solder fillet 798 and an elliptical solder fillet 799 formed on the short-circuit prevention hole 761.

Here, the configuration of the back row region 843 for two rows on the back surface of the printed wiring board 741 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97(b) is a rear view of the printed wiring board 741 showing an enlarged rear surface region 843 for the second row before the double-row connector 783 is mounted.

As shown in FIG. 97B, two rows of via holes 793 extending in the left-right direction of the printed wiring board 741 are formed in the up-down direction in the back row region 843 for two rows. Here, the via holes 793 forming the upper row are, in order from the right, an eleventh via hole 793g, a twelfth via hole 793h, a thirteenth via hole 793i, and a fourteenth via hole 793j. Further, the via holes 793 forming the lower row are, in order from the right, a 21st via hole 793k, a 22nd via hole 793m, a 23rd via hole 793n, and a 24th via hole 793p.

Here, the two-row connector mounted on the board of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In the pachinko machine 10, the pins 784 (FIG. 91) forming the two-row connector and the pins 784 connected to the GND solid 851 (FIG. 97(b)) for grounding are at both ends of the upper row. , And at positions other than both ends of the lower row. In this way, by not arranging the pin 784 connected to the GND solid 851 at the rear end in the transport direction, an environment in which the solder bridge 751 is likely to occur around the pin 784 that is the rear end in the transport direction is created. Can be prevented.

In the two-row connector, when the short-circuit prevention holes 761 are provided around the pins 784 located at both ends in the carrying direction, the upper row and the upper row are used when the upper and lower rows are sufficiently wide. The same criteria apply for the lower row as for the single row connector. Here, the interval between the upper and lower rows is the distance between the center of the pin 784 located at the tip of the upper row and the center of the pin 784 located at the tip of the lower row that is parallel to the upper row. Is.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the distance between the upper row and the lower row is wider than 2.5 mm, the same standard as for the single row connector is applied. In this case, in each row, when the center-to-center distance between the pins 784 is less than the distance LA1 (1.5 mm), short-circuit prevention holes 761 are formed around the pins 784 located at both ends in the transport direction, and In each row, when the center-to-center distance between the pins 784 is longer than the distance LA1 (1.5 mm), joining holes 762 are formed around the pins 784 located at both ends in the transport direction.

On the other hand, when the distance between the upper row and the lower row is 2.5 mm or less, short-circuit prevention holes are formed around the pins 784 located at both ends in the transport direction of each row regardless of the standard of the single row connector. 761 is formed. As described above, in the initial stage of forming the solder fillets 798 and 799 around the pin 784 that is to be located at the rear end in the transport direction, a larger amount of the molten solder than around the other pins 784 is formed. Adhere to. In the two-row connector, when the distance between the upper row and the lower row is 2.5 mm or less, a large amount of molten solder adheres, and the pins 784 that are likely to cause the solder bridge 751 are in each row. There is a possibility of being approached at the edge. Therefore, in the case of a two-row connector in which the distance between rows is small, even if the distance between the pins 784 in each row is wider than 1.5 mm, the short-circuit prevention holes are formed around the pins 784 located at both ends of each row. By forming 761, formation of the solder bridge 751 between the pin 784 located at the end of the upper row and the pin 784 located at the end of the lower row can be suppressed.

In the following, in the two-row connector, the case where the short-circuit prevention holes 761 are formed around the pins 784 located at both ends will be described by taking the two-row connector 783 included in the main control board 61 as an example.

As shown in FIG. 97(b), around the thirteenth via hole 793i which constitutes the upper row of the two-row connector 783 (FIG. 89(c)), and the pins 784i not located at both ends of the row are inserted. The joint hole 762 formed in the above is connected to the GND solid 851 for grounding. In this way, by not arranging the pins 784g to 784p connected to the GND solid 851 at both ends of the row, it is possible to prevent the environment where the solder bridge 751 is likely to occur at the ends of the row of the pins 784g to 784p. You can

As described above with reference to FIG. 92B, the distance LA1 between the centers of adjacent via holes 793a to 793d in the back surface region 842 for one row is 1.5 mm. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 97(b), the distance LA3 between the centers of the via holes 793g to 793p adjacent to each other in the second row back surface region 843 is 2 mm, which is longer than the distance LA1 (FIG. 92(b)). .. However, the distance LA4 from the center of the via holes 793g to 793j in the upper row to the center of the via holes 793k to 793p in the lower row is 2.5 mm. Therefore, in order to prevent the solder bridge 751 from being formed between the pins 784j and 784p (FIG. 89(c)) of the two-row connector 783 inserted into the via holes 793j and 793p located at the left end in each row. A short circuit prevention hole 761 is formed around the fourteenth via hole 793j and the twenty fourth via hole 793p.

As described above, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 has the fourteenth via hole 793j and the twenty-fourth via hole 793p positioned at the rear ends in the carrying direction in the soldering process, and the pin 784j and the twenty-fourth via hole 793j inserted into the fourteenth via hole 793j. Even when the amount of the molten solder adhering to the pin 784p (FIG. 89(c)) inserted in the via hole 793p is increased, the large area required to hold the molten solder on the short circuit prevention hole 761 is provided. Have Therefore, in the two-row connector 783, the possibility that the solder bridge 751 is formed between the pins 784j and 784p (FIG. 89(c)) located at the left end of the row of the pins 784g to 784p is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 97(b), the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the fourteenth via hole 793j is formed so as to extend toward the outside of the column, which is the direction opposite to the direction in which the adjacent thirteenth via hole 793i exists. Has been done. Therefore, the center of gravity of the molten solder accumulated on the short-circuit prevention hole 761 can be located in the direction opposite to the thirteenth via hole 793i. Thereby, even if the fourteenth via hole 793j is located at the rear end in the transport direction, as an environment in which the molten solder attached on the fourteenth via hole 793j is unlikely to move toward the adjacent thirteenth via hole 793i, Generation of the solder bridge 751 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 97B, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the 24th via hole 793p is formed so as to extend toward the outside of the column which is the direction opposite to the direction in which the adjacent 23rd via hole 793n exists. Has been done. Therefore, the center of gravity of the molten solder accumulated on the short-circuit prevention hole 761 can be located in the direction opposite to the 23rd via hole 793n. Thereby, even if the 24th via hole 793p is located at the rear end in the transport direction, as an environment in which the molten solder attached to the 24th via hole 793p does not easily move in the direction of the adjacent 23rd via hole 793n, Generation of the solder bridge 751 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 97B, a short circuit prevention hole 761 which is the same as the short circuit prevention hole 761 around the fourteenth via hole 793j is formed around the eleventh via hole 793g. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed to extend toward the outside of the row, which is the direction opposite to the direction in which the adjacent twelfth via hole 793h exists. Around the 21st via hole 793k, a short circuit prevention hole 761 that is the same as the short circuit prevention hole 761 around the 24th via hole 793p is formed. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed to extend toward the outside of the row, which is the direction opposite to the direction in which the adjacent 22nd via hole 793m exists. For this reason, in the soldering process, the via holes 793g, 793j, 793k located at both ends of the row of via holes 793g to 793p are used regardless of whether the printed wiring board 741 is transported to the right or to the left. , 793p around the solder bridge 751 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 97(b), the short-circuit prevention holes 761 around the via holes 793g, 793j, 793k, 793p located at the ends of the columns in the back row region 843 for two columns are formed on the outer sides of the columns. Specifically, the short circuit prevention hole 761 around the eleventh via hole 793g is formed such that the eleventh via hole 793g is located on the left side of the center of the short circuit prevention hole 761 and the short circuit around the twenty first via hole 793k. The prevention hole 761 is formed such that the 21st via hole 793k is located on the left side of the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the fourteenth via hole 793j is formed such that the fourteenth via hole 793j is located on the right side of the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 and the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the twenty-fourth via hole 793p. Is formed such that the 24th via hole 793p is located on the right side of the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761.

In this way, it is avoided that the molten solder that adheres on the short circuit prevention hole 761 approaches the molten solder that adheres on the joining hole 762 adjacent to the short circuit prevention hole 761. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the molten solder adhering to the short circuit prevention hole 761 merges with the molten solder adhering to the joining hole 762 adjacent to the short circuit prevention hole 761 to form the solder bridge 751.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

In the pins 784 arranged in a row on the printed wiring board 741, when the distance between adjacent pins 784 in the row is equal to or less than the reference distance, the pins 784 that are not located at the ends of the row are Around the joint holes 762 are formed, and around the pins 784 located at the ends of the rows, short circuit prevention holes 761 having a larger area than the joint holes 762 are formed. Therefore, as compared with the case where the joint hole 762 is also formed around the pin 784 at the end of the row, a large amount of molten solder is stably provided around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction. The probability that the solder bridge 751 is formed around the pin 784 is reduced.

The shape of the short circuit prevention hole 761 is elliptical. Therefore, the area of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is set to be a wide area capable of holding the molten solder attached around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction around the pin 784, and the short-circuit prevention hole 761. It is possible to prevent the molten solder on the top of the merging from merging with the molten solder attached around the plurality of pins 784 existing near the pin 784.

The short circuit prevention hole 761 around the pin 784 located at the end of the row is formed to extend toward the outside of the row. Therefore, the center of gravity of the molten solder accumulated on the short circuit prevention hole 761 can be positioned in the direction in which the adjacent pin 784 does not exist. When the pin 784 positioned at the end of the row is positioned at the rear end in the transport direction, the molten solder accumulated around the pin 784 merges with the molten solder around the adjacent pin 784. Can be prevented. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the generation of the solder bridge 751 between the pin 784 at the end of the row and the pin 784 adjacent to the pin 784.

A short circuit prevention hole 761 is formed not only around the pin 784 located at one end of the row but also around the pin 784 located at the other end of the row so as to extend toward the outside of the row. Therefore, in the soldering process, it is less likely that the solder bridge 751 is formed around the pin 784 that is located at the rear end in the carrying direction regardless of the carrying direction of the printed wiring board 741. can do.

The length of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 formed around the via hole 793 protruding from the via hole 793 toward the inside of the row (adjacent pin 784 side) is the solder fillet formed on the short-circuit prevention hole 761. It is set to the minimum length necessary to maintain the strength of 799. If the short circuit prevention hole 761 is configured to largely protrude from the via hole 793 to the inner side of the row in order to secure a large area of the short circuit prevention hole 761, the adjacent bonding hole 762 or the adjacent short circuit prevention from the molten solder adhering to the short circuit prevention hole 761 is prevented. The distance to the molten solder adhering to the hole 761 becomes short, and the molten solder may easily merge. In this case, the effect of suppressing the formation of the solder bridge 751 by securing a large area of the short circuit prevention hole 761 is halved. On the other hand, by limiting the length of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 protruding from the via hole 793 toward the inside of the row to the minimum necessary, the molten solder attached to the short-circuit prevention hole 761 moves toward the adjacent via hole 793. The possibility can be reduced. This can prevent the effect of suppressing the formation of the solder bridge 751 due to the provision of the short circuit prevention hole 761 from being halved.

When the pins 784 are arranged in a row wider than the reference value, the area of the row of the pins 784 is larger than that of the bonding hole 762 around the pins 784 located at the end of the printed wiring board 741 in the transport direction. This is a configuration in which the large short circuit prevention hole 761 is not used. By eliminating the unnecessary short-circuit prevention hole 761 on the printed wiring board 741 having a limited area, it is possible to increase the number of insert mounting components that can be mounted on the printed wiring board 741 and cope with high density of the board. it can.

In addition, except in the case of the two-pole connector 781 in which it is inevitable to dispose the pin 784 connected to the GND solid 851 at the end of the row constituted by the plurality of pins 784, the pin 784 connected to the GND solid 851 is arranged in the row. It is a structure that is not arranged at the end. Further, the interval of the pins 784 serving as a reference for providing the short circuit prevention hole 761 in the two-pole connector 781 is set wider than the interval of the pins 784 serving as a reference for providing the short circuit prevention hole 761 in the one-row connector 782 and the two-row connector 783. ing. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the solder bridge 751 is generated due to the temperature of the molten solder dropping around the pin 784 connected to the GND solid 851.

When the printed wiring board 741 includes a plurality of rows of via holes 793, the via holes 793 located at the end of the first row and the via holes 793 located at the end of the second row different from the first row. And are arranged closer to each other than the reference value on the printed wiring board 741, even when the distance between the centers of adjacent via holes 793 in each column is wider than the reference for providing the short-circuit prevention hole 761. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 is provided in both of the via holes 793 located at the ends of the two rows. This reduces the possibility that the solder bridge 751 is formed between the pins 784 inserted into the two via holes 793 located in the ends of different rows and in the environment where the amount of the molten solder attached increases. be able to.

<Another form of the nineteenth embodiment>
In the nineteenth embodiment described above, the direction in which the short circuit prevention holes 761 around the pins 784 located at both ends of the row are formed to extend is not limited to the opposite direction of the adjacent pins 784. For example, in the row of pins 784 arranged along the left-right direction, the direction formed by extending the short-circuit prevention holes 761 around the pin 784 located at the right end and the pin 784 located at the left end is relative to the left-right direction. It may be inclined at a predetermined angle. The short circuit prevention hole 761 inclined at a predetermined angle with respect to the left-right direction is referred to as a tilt short circuit prevention hole 861. The tilt short circuit prevention hole 861 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 98(a).

The printed wiring board 863 is different from the printed wiring board 741 in the nineteenth embodiment in that the printed wiring board 863 is provided with the one-row back surface region 862 in which the inclined short circuit prevention holes 861 are formed. FIG. 98(a) is a rear view of the printed wiring board 863 showing the back surface region 862 for one row having the inclined short circuit prevention hole 861 in an enlarged manner. Here, in FIG. 98A, the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851 (FIG. 92B) are not shown. Hereinafter, a case where the printed wiring board 863 is conveyed rightward in the soldering process will be described. As shown in FIG. 98(a), two 1-row connectors 782 (FIG. 89(a)) are mounted side by side in the 1-row back surface region 862 of the printed wiring board 863.

As shown in FIG. 98(a), four pins 784 (FIG. 91) included in the first connector, which is the first one-row connector 782, are inserted into the one-row back surface region 862. As via holes, first via holes 864 are arranged in one row in the left-right direction at 1.5 mm intervals. Here, the first via hole 864 has the same structure as the via hole 793 (FIG. 90(b)) in the nineteenth embodiment.

In addition, the second via holes 865, which are via holes for inserting the four pins 784 provided in the second connector, which is the second one-row connector 782, are spaced at 1.5 mm intervals in the one-row back surface region 862. It is lined up in one row in the left-right direction. Here, the second via hole 865 has the same structure as the via hole 793 (FIG. 90(b)) in the nineteenth embodiment.

Further, the centers of the four first via holes 864 and the centers of the four second via holes 865 are aligned on the same straight line. Further, the second via hole 865 is located on the right side of the first via hole 864, and from the center of the first via hole 864 located on the right end of the four first via holes 864, the left end of the four second via holes 865 is formed. The distance to the center of the second via hole 865 located at is 3 mm.

Bonding holes 762 are formed around the first via holes 864 not located at both ends of the row of the first via holes 864 and around the second via holes 865 not located at both ends of the row of the second via holes 865. Then, the first via hole 864 located at the right end of the four first via holes 864 and the second via hole 865 located at the right end of the four second via holes 865 are respectively slanted to the right. An inclined short circuit prevention hole 861 is formed extending upward. The inclined short circuit prevention hole 861 has an elliptical shape having the same shape and size as the short circuit prevention hole 761 in the nineteenth embodiment, and the center thereof is located diagonally to the upper right of the via holes 864 and 865 located at the right end. ing.

Further, the first via hole 864 located at the left end of the four first via holes 864 and the second via hole 865 located at the left end of the four second via holes 865 are respectively slanted to the left. An inclined short circuit prevention hole 861 is formed extending downward. The inclined short circuit prevention hole 861 has an elliptical shape having the same shape and size as the short circuit prevention hole 761 in the nineteenth embodiment, and its center is located diagonally below and to the left of the via holes 864 and 865 located at the left end. ing.

Thus, in the configuration in which the pin 784 located at the right end of the first connector and the pin 784 located at the left end of the second connector are close to each other in the transport direction, the pin 784 is located at the right end of the first connector. The inclined short circuit prevention hole 861 around the pin 784 extending diagonally to the right is formed, and the inclined short circuit prevention hole 861 around the pin 784 located at the left end of the second connector is inclined leftward. The structure is formed so as to extend downward. As a result, the molten solder that collects in the inclined short circuit prevention hole 861 at the right end of the first connector and the molten solder that collects in the inclined short circuit prevention hole 861 at the left end of the second connector merge to form a solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)). ) Can be prevented from being formed.

In the nineteenth embodiment described above, the via hole 793 is located at the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761, and the distance between the short-circuit prevention hole 761 and the bonding hole 762 is the same as the distance between the bonding holes 762. It may have a certain configuration. A specific example of the structure will be described with reference to FIG.

The printed wiring board 866 has a distance from the center of the via hole 793 at the right end to the center of the via hole 793 adjacent to the via hole 793 at the right end, and from the center of the via hole 793 at the left end to the center of the via hole 793 adjacent to the via hole 793 at the left end. Is larger than the distance between the centers of the via holes 793 inside the row, which is different from the printed wiring board 741 in the nineteenth embodiment. FIG. 98B is a back view of the printed wiring board 866 showing the back surface region 867 for one row in an enlarged manner. Here, in FIG. 98(b), the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851 (FIG. 92(b)) are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 98( b ), a via hole 793 for inserting the four pins 784 a to 784 d forming the one-row connector 782 is formed in the left-right direction in the one-row back surface area 867 of the printed wiring board 866. Are formed side by side in one row. A short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed around the via hole 793 located at the right end in such a manner that the via hole 793 at the right end is located at the center, and the via hole 793 at the left end is located at the center around the via hole 793 located at the left end. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed in a manner that is located at. Around the via hole 793 located second from the right and around the via hole 793 located third from the right, a bonding hole 762 is formed such that the via hole 793 is located in the center.

Here, the distance between the left end of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the via hole 793 located at the right end and the right end of the joining hole 762 around the via hole 793 located second from the right is set to the distance LC1 and the second from the right. The distance between the left end of the joining hole 762 around the positioned via hole 793 and the right end of the joining hole 762 around the via hole 793 located third from the right is defined as a distance LC2. Further, the distance between the left end of the bonding hole 762 around the via hole 793 located third from the right and the right end of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 located at the left end is a distance LC3.

In this case, the distance LC1, the distance LC2, and the distance LC3 are set to be the same distance, so that the molten solder adhered onto the short-circuit prevention hole 761 can be compared with the structure in which all the via holes 793 are equidistant. The center of gravity of the molten solder is far from the center of gravity of the molten solder attached to the bonding hole 762, and the probability that the molten solder on the short circuit prevention hole 761 and the molten solder on the bonding hole 762 join together to form the solder bridge 751 is reduced. You can Further, since the pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782 are fixed to the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761, the strength of the solder fillet 799 formed on the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is increased, so that vibration during use can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the solder fillet 799 will be damaged by the above, and to extend the life of the main control board 61.

In the nineteenth embodiment described above, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 may be formed such that the via hole 793 located inside the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is located at the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761. The configuration will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 98(c).

The printed wiring board 868 is different from the printed wiring board 741 in the nineteenth embodiment described above in that the short circuit prevention hole 761 is provided with a back row region 869 for one row formed in a manner centered on the via hole 793. FIG. 98(c) is a rear view of the printed wiring board 868 showing an enlarged one-row rear surface region 869 of the printed wiring board 868. Here, in FIG. 98(c), the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851 (FIG. 92(b)) are not shown.

As shown in FIG. 98(c), the printed wiring board 868 has four via holes 793 in the left-right direction for inserting the four pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782 at 1.5 mm intervals. They are formed side by side. A short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed around the via hole 793 located at the right end in such a manner that the via hole 793 at the right end is centered, and the via hole 793 at the left end is centered around the via hole 793 located at the left end. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed in this manner. In addition, a bonding hole 762 is formed around the via hole 793 located at the second position from the right, with the via hole 793 located in the center, and the via hole 793 is located around the via hole 793 located at the third position from the right. The joining hole 762 is formed in such a manner that the center is at.

As described above, the pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782 are inserted into the via hole 793 formed in the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 and soldered, so that both ends of the one-row connector 782 are positioned. The solder fillet 799 formed around the corresponding pins 784a and 784d is stronger in the lateral force than the solder fillet 799 formed when the via hole 793 is formed at the end of the short circuit prevention hole 761. Strong against force. Therefore, the main control board 61 can be a board which is less likely to be broken even when vibration or the like is applied.

The distance between the four via holes 793 formed in the back surface region 869 for one row is 1.5 mm, which is the same as the distance between the four via holes 793 formed in the back surface region 842 for one row in the nineteenth embodiment. Therefore, the main control board 61 can be a board that is resistant to vibration without adjusting the distance between the pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782 before the soldering step.

<Twentieth Embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the nineteenth embodiment in that a joining hole 762 and a separation type short circuit prevention hole 871 are formed instead of the short circuit prevention hole 761. Hereinafter, the description of the same configuration as that of the nineteenth embodiment will be basically omitted.

The main control board 61 of this embodiment includes a printed wiring board 872. In the printed wiring board 872, around the pins 784a and 784d (FIG. 89(a)) at both ends of the one-row connector 782 and around the two pins 784e and 784f (FIG. 89(b)) of the two-pole connector 781. And around the pins 784g, 784j, 784k, 784p at both ends in each row of the two-row connector 783, a separate type short-circuit prevention hole for suppressing the occurrence of the solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)). 871 and 874 are formed. The structure around the one-row connector 782 of the printed wiring board 872 will be described with reference to FIGS. 99(a) and 99(b). FIG. 99(a) is a back view of the printed wiring board 872 showing the back region 873 for one row in an enlarged manner, and FIG. 99(b) is a printed wiring board showing the periphery of the pin 784 of the one-row connector 782 in an enlarged manner. FIG. 87 is a vertical sectional view of 872. Here, in FIGS. 99A and 99B, the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851 (FIG. 92B) are not shown.

First, the shape of the joint hole 762 formed in the printed wiring board 872 of the main control board 61 will be described. As shown in FIG. 99(a), the printed wiring board 872 is formed with four via holes 793 for inserting the four pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782. The via holes 793 are arranged in the left-right direction at intervals of 1.5 mm.

In the printed wiring board 872, bonding holes 762 are formed around the four via holes 793. The joining hole 762 is a circular hole that is slightly larger than the via hole 793, and the via hole 793 is formed in a mode in which it is located at the center of the joining hole 762.

Of the four pins 784a to 784d forming the one-row connector 782, the pin 784 arranged in the nth position from the right is referred to as the nth pin 784. For example, the pin 784 arranged second from the right is the second pin 784b. In addition, regarding the four via holes 793 formed in the printed wiring board 872, the via hole 793 formed nth from the right is referred to as an nth via hole 793. For example, the via hole 793 formed third from the right is the third via hole 793c. Further, the bonding hole 762 formed around the nth via hole 793 is referred to as an nth bonding hole 762. For example, the bonding hole 762 formed around the fourth via hole 793d is the fourth bonding hole 762d. Here, n is a natural number of 1 to 4.

Four via holes 793a to 793d are arranged in one row in the left-right direction in the one-row back surface area 873 of the printed wiring board 872, and the first via hole 793a is formed at the right end of the row of the via holes 793a to 793d. At the same time, a fourth via hole 793d is formed at the left end. In the vicinity of the left side of the fourth via hole 793d located at the left end of the row of the via holes 793a to 793d, a separation type short circuit prevention hole 871 which is a short circuit prevention hole separated from the fourth joining hole 762d is formed. The separation-type short-circuit prevention hole 871 has a semicircular reservoir portion 871a having a diameter larger than that of the joining hole 762, and a contraction that is continuous with the reservoir portion 871a and gradually narrows toward the fourth joining hole 762d. And a width portion 871b. The reduced width portion 871b has a width substantially the same as the diameter of the storage portion 871a in the up-down direction of the back surface region for one row 873 in a region continuous with the storage portion 871a. Further, the distance LD1 from the right end of the reduced width portion 871b to the left end of the fourth joining hole 762d is shorter than the distance LD2 from the right end of the fourth joining hole 762d to the left end of the third joining hole 762c.

Further, in the vicinity of the right side of the first via hole 793a located at the right end of the row of the via holes 793a to 793d, a separation type short circuit prevention hole 874 which is a short circuit prevention hole separated from the first bonding hole 762a is formed. The separation-type short-circuit prevention hole 874 is a semicircular reservoir portion 874a having a diameter larger than that of the joining hole 762, and a contraction that is continuous with the reservoir portion 874a and gradually narrows toward the first joining hole 762a. And a width portion 874b. The reduced width portion 874b has a width that is substantially the same as the diameter of the reservoir portion 874a in the up-down direction of the back surface region for one row 873 in a region continuous with the reservoir portion 874a. The distance LD1 from the left end of the reduced width portion 871b to the right end of the first bonding hole 762a is shorter than the distance LD2 from the left end of the first bonding hole 762a to the right end of the second bonding hole 762b.

Next, in the soldering process, when the printed wiring board 872 is transported rightward and the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 is positioned at the rear end in the transport direction, the printed wiring board 872 is positioned at the rear end in the transport direction. A mechanism for suppressing the generation of the solder bridge 751 around the fourth pin 784d is described below with reference to FIG. 99(b). In the soldering step, immediately before the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 comes out of the contact state with the jet flow 821 (FIG. 93(b)), the fourth joint hole 762d formed around the fourth pin 784d and its rear side. The separation-type short circuit prevention hole 871 formed in the vicinity is in contact with the jet flow 821.

Immediately after the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 comes out of contact with the jet flow 821, the molten solder that has adhered to the fourth joint hole 762d and the molten solder that has adhered to the separation-type short circuit prevention hole 871. The molten solder deposited on the fourth bonding hole 762d and the molten solder deposited on the separation-type short-circuit prevention hole 871 become independent from each other through an intermediate state in which

In the intermediate state before the molten solder deposited on the fourth joint hole 762d becomes independent, the molten solder remaining around the fourth pin 784d is separated from the upper portion of the fourth joint hole 762d and the separation type short circuit prevention hole 871. And above. Therefore, as compared with the configuration in which the separation-type short-circuit prevention hole 871 is not formed around the fourth joining hole 762d, as shown in FIG. 99(b), by using the separation-type short-circuit prevention hole 871, It is possible to reduce the amount of the molten solder adhering to the fourth bonding hole 762d and reduce the possibility that excess molten solder that causes the solder bridge 751 is generated on the fourth bonding hole 762d.

As described above with reference to FIG. 99A, the separation-type short-circuit prevention hole 871 is formed in a manner not continuous with the fourth bonding hole 762d, and the molten solder that has once moved onto the separation-type short-circuit prevention hole 871 is The structure is such that it is hard to move above the 4th joint hole 762d. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the molten solder cannot be completely accommodated on the fourth joint hole 762d and the solder bridge 751 is formed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 99A, the separation-type short-circuit prevention hole 871 has a larger area than the fourth joining hole 762d. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of the molten solder that moves onto the separation-type short circuit prevention hole 871 in the intermediate state and reduce the amount of the molten solder that moves onto the fourth joining hole 762d. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that excess molten solder that causes the solder bridge 751 is generated on the fourth joint hole 762d.

As shown in FIG. 99(a), the storage portion 871a has a larger area than the reduced width portion 871b and has a large width in the up-down direction of the one-row back surface region 873. As shown in b), most of the molten solder accumulated on the separation-type short circuit prevention hole 871 moves onto the reservoir 871a due to the surface tension of the molten solder.

As shown in FIG. 99(a), in order to hold most of the molten solder accumulated on the separation-type short circuit prevention hole 871 at a position away from the molten solder accumulated on the fourth bonding hole 762d, a reservoir portion 871a is provided at a position farther from the fourth joint hole 762d than the reduced width portion 871b. This reduces the possibility that the molten solder on the separation-type short circuit prevention hole 871 comes into contact with the molten solder on the fourth bonding hole 762d and moves toward the fourth bonding hole 762d.

As shown in FIG. 99(a), when excess molten solder is generated on the fourth bonding hole 762d, in order to move the excess molten solder in a direction different from that of the third bonding hole 762c, contraction is performed. The distance LD1 from the width portion 871b to the fourth joint hole 762d is set shorter than the distance LD2 from the fourth joint hole 762d to the third joint hole 762c.

When the printed wiring board 872 is transported leftward in the soldering process, the first via hole 793a located at the right end of the back row region 873 for one row is located at the rear end in the transport direction. As shown in FIG. 99(a), a separation type short circuit prevention hole 874 is formed in the vicinity of the right side of the first joining hole 762a in order to suppress the generation of the solder bridge 751 around the first via hole 793a. ing.

The separation type short circuit prevention hole 874 formed near the right side of the first joining hole 762a has the same size and shape as the separation type short circuit prevention hole 871 formed near the left side of the fourth joining hole 762d. is doing. The separation-type short-circuit prevention hole 874 holds the storage portion 874a more than the reduced-width portion 874b in order to hold most of the molten solder adhered on the separation-type short-circuit prevention hole 874 at a position away from the first joining hole 762a. Is also provided so as to be located far from the first joint hole 762a.

Here, in the board provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a reference for providing the separate type short circuit prevention holes 871 and 874 around the pin 784 (FIG. 91), the pachinko machine of the nineteenth embodiment described above is used as a reference. The same standard as that for providing the short-circuit prevention hole 761 (FIG. 92(b)) around the pin 784 is applied to the board provided in the No. 10 board. Specifically, in the board provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the one-row connector is mounted on the board, the condition that the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is 1.5 mm or less is satisfied. Separate type short-circuit prevention holes 871 and 874 (FIG. 99(a)) are provided around the pins on both ends of the single-row connector. This reduces the possibility that the solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95C) is formed around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction. On the other hand, a joint hole 762 (FIG. 90) is provided around the pin 784 of the one-row connector in which the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is wider than 1.5 mm.

In the board provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the board is equipped with a two-pole connector, the two-pole connector satisfies the condition that the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is 2.5 mm or less. Separate type short-circuit prevention holes 871 and 874 (FIG. 99A) are provided around the two pins 784 of FIG. This reduces the possibility that the solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95C) is formed around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction. On the other hand, a joint hole 762 (FIG. 90) is provided around the pin 784 of the two-pole connector in which the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is larger than 2.5 mm.

In the board provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the case where a two-row connector is mounted on the board, and the distance between the centers of the pins 784 in each row is 1.5 mm or less, or When at least one of the conditions that the distance between the centers of the pins 784 located at the ends of each row is 2.5 mm or less is satisfied, the pins 784 located at both ends of each row of the two-row connector are surrounded. Are provided with separation type short circuit prevention holes 871 and 874 (FIG. 99(a)). This reduces the possibility that the solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95C) is formed around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction. On the other hand, when the distance between the centers of the pins 784 in each row is larger than 1.5 mm and the distance between the centers of the pins 784 located at the ends of each row is larger than 2.5 mm, the circumference of the pins 784 is A joint hole 762 (Fig. 90) is provided.

According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

At the left end of the one-row back surface region 873, the separation-type short-circuit prevention hole 871 is provided to the left of the fourth joining hole 762d in a manner not continuous with the fourth joining hole 762d. As a result, the amount of molten solder that adheres onto the fourth joint hole 762d can be reduced, and the possibility that excess molten solder that causes the solder bridge 751 to occur on the fourth joint hole 762d can be reduced. it can. Since the fourth bonding hole 762d and the separation-type short circuit prevention hole 871 are not continuous, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the molten solder that has once moved onto the separation-type short circuit prevention hole 871 returns to the fourth bonding hole 762d. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that excess molten solder is generated on the fourth joint hole 762d and the solder bridge 751 is formed.

Since the area of the separation type short circuit prevention hole 871 is set to be larger than the area of the fourth bonding hole 762d, the molten solder that moves onto the separation type short circuit prevention hole 871 in the intermediate state where the solder fillet 798 is formed. The amount can be increased to reduce the amount of molten solder that moves onto the fourth bonding hole 762d. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that excess molten solder that will cause the solder bridge 751 to occur on the fourth joint hole 762d.

In the separation-type short circuit prevention hole 871, the reservoir portion 871a has a larger area than the reduced width portion 871b, and holds more molten solder than the reduced width portion 871b. The reservoir portion 871a is provided further to the left of the fourth joint hole 762d than the reduced width portion 871b. Therefore, most of the molten solder accumulated on the separation-type short circuit prevention hole 871 is held in a state of being separated from the molten solder accumulated on the fourth joining hole 762d. As described above, by adopting a configuration in which the amount of the molten solder existing on the fourth bonding hole 762d is unlikely to increase, it is possible to prevent the molten solder from being unable to fit on the fourth bonding hole 762d, and to prevent the solder bridge 751 Occurrence can be suppressed.

The distance LD1 from the reduced width portion 871b to the fourth joint hole 762d is set shorter than the distance LD2 from the fourth joint hole 762d to the third joint hole 762c. Therefore, the excess molten solder generated on the fourth bonding hole 762d is merged with the molten solder on the separation-type short circuit prevention hole 871, and the excess molten solder is combined with the molten solder on the third bonding hole 762c. It is possible to prevent merging. This can reduce the possibility that the solder bridge 751 is formed between the pin 784d inserted into the fourth joint hole 762d and the pin 784c inserted into the third joint hole 762c.

At the right end of the one-row back surface region 873, the separation-type short-circuit prevention hole 874 is provided to the right of the first joining hole 762a in a manner not continuous with the first joining hole 762a. Thus, in the soldering process, even if the printed wiring board 872 is transported leftward, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the solder bridge 751 around the first via hole 793a that is located at the rear end in the transport direction. You can

<Another form of the twentieth embodiment>
-In 20th Embodiment mentioned above, the number of the isolation|separation type short circuit prevention holes 871 formed in the vicinity of the 4th joining hole 762d is not limited to one. Further, the number of separation type short circuit prevention holes 874 formed in the vicinity of the first joint hole 762a is not limited to one. For example, in the vicinity of the fourth joining hole 762d, the left separation type short circuit prevention hole 886, the upper left separation type short circuit prevention hole 875, and the left lower separation which have the same size and shape as the separation type short circuit prevention hole 871 of the twentieth embodiment. The right separation type short circuit prevention hole having the same size and shape as the separation type short circuit prevention hole 874 according to the twentieth embodiment is provided in the vicinity of the first joint hole 762a. 887, an upper right separation type short circuit prevention hole 877, and a lower right separation type short circuit prevention hole 878 may be provided. The configuration will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 100(a) is a rear view of the printed wiring board 879 showing the enlarged one-row rear surface region 885 in which the six separation type short circuit preventing holes 875 to 878, 886 and 887 are formed. Here, in FIG. 100A, the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851 (FIG. 92B) are omitted. As shown in FIG. 100A, in the vicinity of the left side of the fourth joining hole 762d, the separation type short circuit prevention hole 871 already described in the above twentieth embodiment is formed as the left separation type short circuit prevention hole 886. There is. Further, an upper left separation type short-circuit prevention hole 875 is formed diagonally above the fourth joining hole 762d, and a lower left separation type short-circuit prevention hole 876 is formed diagonally below the fourth joining hole 762d. ..

The upper left separation type short circuit prevention hole 875 is composed of an upper left storage portion 875a and an upper left reduced width portion 875b, and the width of the upper left reduced width portion 875b is gradually reduced toward the fourth joint hole 762d. It is provided close to the joint hole 762d. In the upper left separation type short-circuit prevention hole 875, the upper left reservoir portion 875a is provided at a position further leftward than the upper left reduced width portion 875b from the fourth joint hole 762d. Further, the lower left separation type short-circuit prevention hole 876 is composed of a lower left storage portion 876a and a lower left reduction width portion 876b, and the width of the lower left reduction width portion 876b gradually decreases toward the fourth joint hole 762d. It is provided close to the fourth joint hole 762d. In the lower left separation type short-circuit prevention hole 876, the lower left reservoir portion 876a is provided at a position farther to the upper left from the fourth joint hole 762d than the lower left reduced width portion 876b.

Further, in the vicinity of the right side of the first joining hole 762a, the separation type short circuit prevention hole 874 which has already been described in the above twentieth embodiment is formed as the right separation type short circuit prevention hole 887. Further, an upper right separation type short-circuit prevention hole 877 is formed diagonally above the first joining hole 762a, and a lower right separation type short-circuit prevention hole 878 is formed diagonally below the first joining hole 762a. There is.

The upper right separation type short-circuit prevention hole 877 is composed of an upper right reservoir 877a and an upper right narrowed width portion 877b. The width of the upper right narrowed width portion 877b gradually decreases toward the first joint hole 762a. It is provided close to the joining hole 762a. In the upper right separation type short-circuit prevention hole 877, the upper right storage portion 877a is set at a position farther to the upper right from the first joint hole 762a than the upper right reduction width portion 877b. Further, the lower right separation type short-circuit prevention hole 878 is composed of a lower right reservoir portion 878a and a lower right reduction width portion 878b, and the width of the lower right reduction width portion 878b gradually increases toward the first joint hole 762a. It is set close to the first joint hole 762a in a decreasing manner. In the lower right separation type short-circuit prevention hole 878, the lower right reservoir portion 878a is set at a position farther to the lower right from the first joint hole 762a than the lower right reduced width portion 878b.

As described above, by forming the left separation type short-circuit prevention hole 886, the upper left separation type short-circuit prevention hole 875, and the lower left separation type short-circuit prevention hole 876 around the fourth joint hole 762d, the upper surface of the fourth joint hole 762d is formed. When excessive molten solder adheres, the excess molten solder is pulled in three different directions from the third joint hole 762c adjacent to the fourth joint hole 762d, and is pulled into three reservoirs 875a, 876a, 886a. Can be stored. Therefore, even if an excessive amount of molten solder adheres on the fourth joint hole 762d, it is possible to prevent the molten solder from joining the molten solder on the adjacent third joint hole 762c and generating the solder bridge 751. You can

When the printed wiring board 879 is conveyed to the left in the soldering step, the first joining hole 762a is located at the rear end in the conveying direction in the back row region 885 for one row. When excess molten solder adheres on the first bonding hole 762a, the excess molten solder is pulled in three different directions from the second bonding hole 762b adjacent to the first bonding hole 762a, and three It can be stored in the storage portions 877a, 878a, 887a. Therefore, even if an excessive amount of molten solder adheres on the first joint hole 762a, it is possible to prevent the molten solder from joining the molten solder on the adjacent second joint hole 762b and generating the solder bridge 751. You can

-Instead of the separation-type short-circuit prevention hole 871 of the twentieth embodiment described above, a three-direction separation-type short-circuit prevention hole 881 that surrounds the periphery of the fourth joining hole 762d from three directions may be set. The three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 881 will be described with reference to FIG.

The printed wiring board 882 is different from the printed wiring board 872 of the twentieth embodiment in that the printed wiring board 882 is provided with a back row region 883 for one row in which two three-direction separation type short circuit prevention holes 881 and 884 are formed. FIG. 100(b) is a rear view of the printed wiring board 882, showing an enlarged view of the one-row rear surface region 883 in which two three-direction separation type short-circuit prevention holes 881 and 884 are formed. Here, in FIG. 100B, the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851 (FIG. 92B) are not shown.

First, in the printed wiring board 882, the configuration around the fourth bonding hole 762d located at the left end of the one-row back surface region 883 will be described. As shown in FIG. 100(b), the left side of the fourth joint hole 762d has a U-shape that surrounds the fourth joint hole 762d on three sides of the upper side, the left side, and the lower side. A three-way separation type short circuit prevention hole 881 is formed. The left three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 881 includes an upper portion 881a located above the fourth joining hole 762d, a left portion 881b located to the left of the fourth joining hole 762d, and a lower portion of the fourth joining hole 762d. And a lower portion 881c located at. Between the fourth joint hole 762d and the upper portion 881a of the left-side three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 881, between the fourth joint hole 762d and the left portion 881b, and between the fourth joint hole 762d and the lower portion 881c. Is shorter than the distance from the right end of the fourth joint hole 762d to the left end of the third joint hole 762c. In addition, the total area of the left side three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 881 is larger than the area of the joining hole 762.

In the left-side three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 881, the upper portion 881a, the left portion 881b, and the lower portion 881c have a convex portion 881d extending toward the fourth joint hole 762d in a manner not continuous with the fourth joint hole 762d. I have it.

When the excessive molten solder adheres to the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 and cannot fit in the fourth joint hole 762d, the surplus molten solder has a different direction from that of the third joint hole 762c, Excessive molten solder can be drawn into the left three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 881 by contacting the molten solder on the left three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 881 having a larger area than the joining hole 762. it can.

The convex portions 881d of the upper portion 881a, the left portion 881b, and the lower portion 881c are closer to the fourth joint hole 762d from three directions, and the convex portion 881d is the fourth joint hole than the third joint hole 762c. It is located near 762d. Thereby, it is possible to increase the probability that the molten solder generated on the fourth bonding hole 762d moves in three directions different from the third bonding hole 762c.

By configuring the excess molten solder generated on the fourth bonding hole 762d so as not to go to the adjacent third bonding hole 762c, the excess molten solder moves onto the third bonding hole 762c and the solder bridge 751. It is possible to reduce the possibility that

Further, since the melted solder that comes into contact with the three convex portions 881d and is drawn in three different directions is held in the common left-side three-way separated type short-circuit prevention hole 881, generation of the solder bridge 751 in the printed wiring board 882 is prevented. The area occupied by the structure for suppressing can be suppressed to the minimum, and high density of the printed wiring board 882 can be dealt with.

Next, in the printed wiring board 882, the configuration around the first bonding hole 762a located at the right end of the one-row back surface region 883 will be described. As shown in FIG. 100(b), the right side of the first joint hole 762a has a U-shape that surrounds the first joint hole 762a in three directions of upper side, right side, and lower side. A three-way separated type short circuit prevention hole 884 is formed. The right side three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 884 includes an upper portion 884a located above the first joining hole 762a, a right portion 884b located to the right of the first joining hole 762a, and a lower portion of the first joining hole 762a. And a lower portion 884c located at. Between the first joint hole 762a and the upper portion 884a of the right side three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 884, between the first joint hole 762a and the right side portion 884b, and between the first joint hole 762a and the lower portion 884c. Is shorter than the distance from the right end of the first joint hole 762a to the right end of the third joint hole 762c. Further, the total area of the right side three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 884 is larger than the area of the joining hole 762.

In the right side three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 884, the upper portion 884a, the right side portion 884b, and the lower portion 884c have a convex portion 884d extending toward the first joint hole 762a in a manner not continuous with the first joint hole 762a. I have it.

When the printed wiring board 882 is transported leftward in the soldering process, the first bonding hole 762a is located at the rear end in the transport direction in the back row region 883 for one row. Similar to the left side three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 881 provided around the fourth joining hole 762d, the right-side three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 884 is provided around the first joining hole 762a to form the first joining. Even if excess molten solder adheres to the hole 762a, it is possible to prevent the molten solder from joining the molten solder on the adjacent second bonding hole 762b and generating the solder bridge 751.

Since the melted solder that is brought into contact with the three convex portions 884d and drawn in three different directions is held in the common right-side three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 884, the solder bridge 751 of the solder bridge 751 is formed at the right end of the back surface region 883 for one row. A structure for suppressing the generation can minimize the area occupied by the printed wiring board 882, and can cope with high density of the printed wiring board 882.

<Twenty-first embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the nineteenth embodiment in that short circuit prevention hole groups 891 to 895 and 921 to 925 are formed instead of the short circuit prevention hole 761. Hereinafter, the description of the same configuration as that of the nineteenth embodiment will be basically omitted.

The main control board 61 of this embodiment includes a printed wiring board 897. In the printed wiring board 897, around the pins 784a and 784d (FIG. 89(a)) at both ends of the one-row connector 782 and around the two pins 784e and 784f (FIG. 89(b)) of the two-pole connector 781. And around the pins 784g, 784j, 784k, 784p at both ends in each row of the two-row connector 783, a short circuit prevention hole group 891 for suppressing the generation of the solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)). ~895, 921-925 are formed. The configuration around the one-row connector 782 of the printed wiring board 897 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a rear view of the printed wiring board 897 in which a short-circuit prevention hole group 891 to 895, 921 to 925 for suppressing the generation of the solder bridge 751 is formed and an enlarged one-row rear surface region 896 is shown. Here, in FIG. 101, the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851 (FIG. 92B) are not shown.

As shown in FIG. 101, via holes 793a to 793d for inserting the four pins 784a to 784d (FIG. 89A) of the one-row connector 782 are formed in the one-row back surface region 896. In the back surface region 896 for one row, the four via holes 793a to 793d are lined up in one row in the left-right direction, and the spacing between the via holes 793a to 793d in the row is 1.5 mm.

As shown in FIG. 101, among the four via holes 793a to 793d, the via hole arranged in the nth position from the right is referred to as the nth via hole. For example, the rightmost via hole is the first via hole 793a. Here, n is a natural number of 1 to 4.

As shown in FIG. 101, a circular joining hole 762 is formed around the second via hole 793b and the third via hole 793c. The bonding hole 762 has a larger area than the via holes 793b and 793c, and the via holes 793b and 793c are formed so as to be located at the center of the bonding hole 762.

Short circuit prevention hole groups 891 to 895 are formed on the left side of the fourth via hole 793d located at the left end of the row of via holes 793a to 793d. Further, short-circuit prevention hole groups 921 to 925 are formed on the right side of the first via hole 793a located at the right end of the row of via holes 793a to 793d. First, the short circuit prevention hole groups 891 to 895 formed on the left side of the fourth via hole 793d will be described.

As shown in FIG. 101, a small short circuit prevention hole 891 having the same size and shape as the bonding hole 762 is formed around the fourth via hole 793d. The small short circuit prevention hole 891 is formed such that the fourth via hole 793d is located at the center of the small short circuit prevention hole 891. A large short circuit prevention hole 892 having a larger area than the small short circuit prevention hole 891 is formed on the left side of the small short circuit prevention hole 891. The small short circuit prevention hole 891 and the large short circuit prevention hole 892 are small short circuit prevention holes. They are connected by a first passage region 894 having a passage width smaller than the diameter of the hole 891.

In addition, a medium-sized short-circuit prevention hole 893 having a larger area than the small-sized short-circuit prevention hole 891 and a smaller area than the large-sized short-circuit prevention hole 892 is formed on the upper right and the lower right of the large-sized short-circuit prevention hole 892. The large-sized short circuit prevention hole 892 and the medium-sized short circuit prevention hole 893 are connected by the second passage region 895 having a passage width wider than that of the first passage region 894.

In the soldering process, when the printed wiring board 897 is conveyed rightward, the fourth pin 784d (FIG. 89(a)) located at the left end of the one-row connector 782 is located at the rear end in the carrying direction. Will be done. In this case, in the one-row connector 782, when the fourth pin 784d located at the rear end in the transport direction comes out of the contact state with the jet flow 821 (FIG. 93(a)), the small short-circuit prevention hole 891 and the medium-sized short-circuit prevention hole 893 are provided. , And the large-sized short circuit prevention hole 892 has molten solder attached thereto. Since a large amount of the molten solder remains on the hole having a large area, the amount of the molten solder remaining on the small-sized short circuit prevention hole 891 and the medium-sized short circuit prevention hole 893 is the same as that of the molten solder remaining on the large short circuit prevention hole 892. Less than the amount.

The mass of molten solder remaining on the small short circuit prevention hole 891 is connected to the mass of molten solder remaining on the large short circuit prevention hole 892 at the first passage region 894. The lump of molten solder remaining on the medium-sized short-circuit prevention hole 893 is connected to the lump of molten solder remaining on the large-sized short-circuit prevention hole 892 at the second passage region 895.

The molten solder has a surface tension, and when the small molten solder mass and the large molten solder mass contact each other, the molten solder moves from the small molten solder mass toward the large molten solder mass. Therefore, after the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 (FIG. 89(a)) comes out of contact with the jet stream 821, the molten solder attached around the fourth pin 784d is cooled and solidified. In the meantime, the molten solder moves from the small-sized short circuit prevention hole 891 and the medium-sized short circuit prevention hole 893 toward the large short circuit prevention hole 892.

A small area hole is formed around the pin located at the rear end in the transport direction, and a large area hole is formed downstream of the small area hole. After the molten solder has moved from the hole in the large area to the hole in the large area, the excess molten solder generated in the hole in the large area flows backward toward the hole in the small area, and the solder around the pin located at the rear end in the conveying direction. A bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)) may be formed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 101, when excess molten solder is generated in the large short circuit prevention hole 892 after the molten solder has moved from the small short circuit prevention hole 891 to the large short circuit prevention hole 892, the second passage region The passage width of 895 is wider than the passage width of the first passage region 894, and the area of the two medium-sized short circuit prevention holes 893 is larger than the area of the small short circuit prevention hole 891. It becomes a short circuit prevention hole 893. As a result, the amount of molten solder flowing back from the large short circuit prevention hole 892 toward the small short circuit prevention hole 891 can be reduced. Then, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the molten solder flows back from the large-sized short circuit prevention hole 892 to form the solder bridge 751 around the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782.

Next, the short circuit prevention hole groups 921 to 925 formed on the right side of the first via hole 793a will be described. As shown in FIG. 101, a small short circuit prevention hole 921 having the same size and shape as the bonding hole 762 is formed around the first via hole 793a. The small short circuit prevention hole 921 is formed such that the first via hole 793a is located at the center of the small short circuit prevention hole 921. On the right side of the small short circuit prevention hole 921, a large short circuit prevention hole 922 having an area larger than that of the small short circuit prevention hole 921 is formed. The small short circuit prevention hole 921 and the large short circuit prevention hole 922 are small short circuit prevention holes. They are connected by a first passage region 924 having a passage width smaller than the diameter of the hole 921.

In addition, a medium-sized short-circuit prevention hole 923 having a larger area than the small-sized short-circuit prevention hole 921 and a smaller area than the large-sized short-circuit prevention hole 922 is formed on the upper right and the lower right of the large-sized short-circuit prevention hole 922. The large-sized short circuit prevention hole 922 and the medium-sized short circuit prevention hole 923 are connected by the second passage region 925 having a passage width wider than that of the first passage region 924.

In the soldering process, when the printed wiring board 897 is conveyed leftward, the first pin 784a (FIG. 89(a)) located at the right end of the one-row connector 782 is located at the rear end in the carrying direction. Will be done.

Since the short circuit prevention hole groups 921 to 925 are formed on the right side of the first via hole 793a, in the soldering process, when the printed wiring board 897 is conveyed to the left side, the small short circuit prevention hole 921 is formed. The amount of molten solder flowing back from the large-sized short circuit prevention hole 922 can be reduced. Then, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the molten solder flows back from the large-sized short circuit prevention hole 922 and the solder bridge 751 is formed around the first pin 784 a of the one-row connector 782.

Here, in the board provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a reference for providing the short circuit prevention hole groups 891 to 895, 921 to 925 around the pin 784 (FIG. 91), the nineteenth embodiment described above is used. In the board provided in the pachinko machine 10, the same standard as the standard for providing the short circuit prevention hole 761 (FIG. 92B) around the pin 784 is applied. Specifically, in the board provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the one-row connector is mounted on the board, the condition that the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is 1.5 mm or less is satisfied. Short-circuit prevention hole groups 891 to 895, 921 to 925 (FIG. 101) are provided around the pins at both ends of the single-row connector. Therefore, the amount of molten solder flowing back from the large short circuit prevention holes 892 and 922 toward the small short circuit prevention holes 891 and 921 around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction is reduced. This reduces the possibility that the solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)) is formed around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction. On the other hand, a joint hole 762 (FIG. 90) is provided around the pin 784 of the one-row connector in which the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is wider than 1.5 mm.

In the board provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the board is equipped with a two-pole connector, the two-pole connector satisfies the condition that the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is 2.5 mm or less. Short-circuit prevention hole groups 891 to 895, 921 to 925 (FIG. 101) are provided around the two pins 784. Therefore, the amount of molten solder flowing back from the large short circuit prevention holes 892 and 922 toward the small short circuit prevention holes 891 and 921 around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction is reduced. This reduces the possibility that the solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)) is formed around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction. On the other hand, a joint hole 762 (FIG. 90) is provided around the pin 784 of the two-pole connector in which the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is larger than 2.5 mm.

In the board provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the case where a two-row connector is mounted on the board, and the distance between the centers of the pins 784 in each row is 1.5 mm or less, or When at least one of the conditions that the distance between the centers of the pins 784 located at the ends of each row is 2.5 mm or less is satisfied, the pins 784 located at both ends of each row of the two-row connector are surrounded. Is provided with short circuit prevention hole groups 891 to 895, 921 to 925 (FIG. 101). Therefore, the amount of molten solder flowing back from the large short circuit prevention holes 892 and 922 toward the small short circuit prevention holes 891 and 921 around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction is reduced. This reduces the possibility that the solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)) is formed around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction. On the other hand, when the distance between the centers of the pins 784 in each row is larger than 1.5 mm and the distance between the centers of the pins 784 located at the ends of each row is larger than 2.5 mm, the circumference of the pins 784 is A joint hole 762 (Fig. 90) is provided.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

The small short-circuit prevention hole 891 and the large-sized short-circuit prevention hole 892 formed around the fourth via hole 793d are connected by the first passage region 894 having a small passage width, and the large-sized short-circuit prevention hole 892 and the medium-sized short-circuit prevention hole 893 are provided. And are connected by the second passage region 895 having a wide passage width. Therefore, the molten solder remaining in the small short circuit prevention hole 891 easily moves to the large short circuit prevention hole 892. Further, since excess molten solder that may occur in the large-sized short circuit prevention hole 892 preferentially moves to the medium-sized short circuit prevention hole 893, the occurrence of backflow of molten solder from the large circuit prevention hole 892 to the small circuit prevention hole 891 is suppressed. Has been done. Therefore, in the soldering process, when the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 is located at the rear end in the transport direction, the solder bridge 751 may be formed around the fourth pin 784d. It can be reduced.

In addition, the short-circuit prevention hole groups 921 to 925 are set on the right side of the first via hole 793a. Therefore, in the soldering process, when the first pin 784a of the one-row connector 782 is located at the rear end in the transport direction, the reverse flow of the molten solder from the large short circuit prevention hole 922 to the small short circuit prevention hole 921 occurs. The occurrence can be suppressed, and the possibility that the solder bridge 751 is formed around the first pin 784a can be reduced.

<Another form of the 21st embodiment>
The short circuit prevention hole groups 891 to 895 of the twenty-first embodiment described above include the small short circuit prevention hole 891 excluding the first passage region 894, the large short circuit prevention hole 892, the medium-sized short circuit prevention hole 893, and the second passage region 895. It may be configured. Specifically, the large short circuit prevention hole 892 is set as a hole that is not continuous with the small short circuit prevention hole 891 but is not continuous with the small short circuit prevention hole 891. In this case, until the molten solder solidifies in the soldering process, the excess molten solder that has adhered to the large-sized short circuit prevention hole 892 has a second passage than the small-sized short circuit prevention hole 891 that is not in physical contact. It is easy to move toward the medium-sized short circuit prevention hole 893 that is in physical contact with the area 895. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the excess molten solder initially attached to the large-sized short circuit prevention hole 892 from flowing back to the small-sized short circuit prevention hole 891 and forming the solder bridge 751 around the fourth pin 784d.

-The number of medium-sized short-circuit prevention holes 893 that configure the short-circuit prevention hole groups 891 to 895 of the twenty-first embodiment described above is not limited to two. For example, the number of medium-sized short-circuit prevention holes 893 forming the short-circuit prevention hole groups 891 to 895 may be one. While leaving one medium-sized short circuit prevention hole 893 for preventing excess molten solder from moving to the small short circuit prevention hole 891 on the large short circuit prevention hole 892 before the molten solder solidifies in the soldering process, the printed wiring board is left. By suppressing the area occupied by the short circuit prevention hole groups 891 to 895 on 741, it is possible to cope with high density of the main control board 61.

<Twenty-second Embodiment>
The game board 931 of the present embodiment is provided with a first special figure display portion 932a corresponding to the first operation port 938, and a second special figure display portion 932b corresponding to the second operation port 939. It is provided. In the following description, differences from the first embodiment will be described, and the description of the same configurations as those of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 931 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a front view of the game board 931 according to the present embodiment. On the surface of the game board 931, similarly to the first embodiment, an inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 constitute a guide rail, and the player turns the operation handle to shoot a game ball. The game ball B1 (FIG. 53(a)) fired from the mechanism 27 (FIG. 2) is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

The guide rail is formed so that its exit portion faces the upper center of the game area PA on one side of the game area PA. Therefore, as the turning operation amount of the operation handle by the player increases, the arrival position of the game ball B1 in the upper part of the game area PA is from the side of the side where the exit of the guide rail is formed to the exit. It shifts to the side of the side opposite the formed side. The exit portion of the guide rail is provided on the left side portion of the game area PA.

As in the first embodiment, the game area PA is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a variable display unit 36, and the like. Here, in the game board 931 of the present embodiment, the second operating port 939 is provided in a place different from the first operating port 938, and the pair of through gates 935 and 936 are provided. This is different from the first embodiment. These positional relationships will be described below with reference to the position of the variable display unit 36.

The variable display unit 36 is arranged on the center side of the game area PA so that the flow-down area of the game ball B1 is secured in the upper, lower, left and right thereof. That is, in the game area PA, as a flow-down area of the game ball B1, a flow-down area 941 on the upper side of the variable display unit 36, a flow-down area 942 on the lower side of the variable display unit 36, a flow-down area 943 on the left side of the variable display unit 36, and A flow-down area 944 on the right side of the variable display unit 36 is provided. The center frame 252 forming a part of the variable display unit 36 is provided below the center frame 252 because the roof unit 253 forming a part extending from the upper part to the left and right sides of the center frame 252 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. The game ball B1 flowing down the game area PA does not traverse or cross the variable display unit 36 except the game ball B1 introduced to the selected stage.

The first operation port 938, which is one of the pair of operations 938 and 939, is provided in the lower flow-down region 942 as a first operation port device. The first working port 938 corresponds to the first working port 33 (FIG. 3) in the first embodiment. Here, in each of the flow-down areas 941 to 944, a dispersion member for dispersing the flow-down direction of the game ball B1 by collision with the game ball B1 is provided, and the flow-down direction of the game ball B1 is related to the game. A guide member for guiding in a predetermined direction by collision with the ball B1 is provided. The dispersing member includes the nail 24b, the guiding member includes the roof unit 253, and the decoration member 945 arranged along the outer edge of the lower side of the game area PA. Then, the dispersion member and the guide member can flow down toward the first operating port 938 regardless of which position in the upper part of the game area PA the game ball B1 fired from the game ball firing mechanism 27 reaches. It is provided as possible.

That is, the game ball B1 that has been launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and has started to flow down on the exit side of the guide rail in the upper part of the game area PA, that is, on the left side of the game area PA, is the upper flow area 941 → the left flow area 943. → The game area PA is flowed down on the left side path (first path) called the lower flow area 942. In this case, the dispersion member and the guide member are provided so that the game ball B1 that flows down the game area PA on the left path can reach the first operation port 938 depending on the flow-down mode. Has been. Further, the game ball B1 which has been launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and has started to flow down on the opposite side of the exit portion of the guide rail in the upper part of the game area PA, that is, on the right side of the game area PA, is the upper flow area 941 → the right flow area. The game area PA is flowed down on the right side path (second path) of the area 944 to the lower side flow-down area 942. In this case, the dispersion member and the guide member are provided so that the game ball B1 that flows down the game area PA on the right path can reach the first operation port 938 depending on the flow-down mode. Has been.

The second operation port 939, which is the other of the pair of operations 938 and 939, is provided in the right-side flow-down area 944 as a second operation port device. The second working port 939 corresponds to the second working port 34 (FIG. 3) in the first embodiment. That is, the second operating port 939 is provided with the electric accessory 939a as a guide piece including a pair of left and right movable pieces. The electric accessory 939a operates between the closed state and the open state similarly to the general electric accessory 34a in the first embodiment. The trigger and the content of the operation are the same as those of the general electric accessory 34a in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted. In this case, the nail 24b is provided above the second operation port 939, and when the electric accessory 939a is in the closed state, the nail 24b causes the second operation port 939 to win a prize (the game ball B1 is inserted). Sphere) is not possible. Note that the winning may not be disabled, but the winning may be difficult.

Here, as already described, since the second operation port 939 is provided in the right-side flow-down area 944, it is emitted from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and is opposite to the exit portion of the guide rail in the upper part of the game area PA, that is, the game. The game ball B1 (FIG. 53(a)), which has started to flow down on the right side of the area PA, can flow down toward the second operating port 939, but is discharged from the game ball launching mechanism 27 to cause a decrease in the game area PA. The game ball B1 that has started to flow down on the exit side of the guide rail, that is, on the left side of the game area PA in the upper part cannot flow down toward the second operating port 939.

As described above, the winning in the first operating port 938 can occur regardless of whether the game ball B1 flows to the first route side or the game ball B1 flows to the second route side. On the other hand, the winning in the second operating port 939 can occur only when the game ball B1 flows to the second route side. Thereby, for the player, by adjusting the turning operation amount of the operation handle, the player can play the game by aiming for the winning in the first operating opening 938 while preventing the winning in the second operating opening 939. In addition to being able to play, it is possible to play a game aiming at winning in the second operating port 939.

In the pair of through gates 935 and 936, one first through gate 935 is provided in the left flow-down area 943, and the other second through gate 936 is provided in the right flow-down area 944. In this case, the second through gate 936 provided in the right-side flow-down area 944 is provided upstream of the second operating port 939, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second operating port 939 is provided. May be provided on the downstream side.

The internal lottery is triggered by the winning of the through-gates 935 and 936, and is displayed on the universal figure display portion 38a of the universal figure unit 38 provided in the lower left corner of the game area PA where the game ball B1 does not pass. The variable display of the pattern is performed. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electric power combination open winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the universal figure display portion 38a is ended, the electric power combination is released. In the electric role open state, the electric accessory 939a is opened in a predetermined manner.

In the universal figure unit 38, a universal figure hold display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal figure display section 38a. The maximum number of game balls B1 won in the through gates 935, 936 is four, and the number of the reserved numbers is displayed by turning on the universal figure reservation display section 38b.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the frequency of the electric accessory 939a of the second operation port 939 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low, which has already been described in the first embodiment. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set. In the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operating opening 938 is higher than in the second operating opening 939, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operating opening 939 is more likely to be won than the first operating opening 938. The probability of winning a prize increases.

A winning lottery is carried out with the winning of the first operating opening 938 or the second operating opening 939 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result of the winning lottery is clearly shown through the display effect on the symbol display device 41 of the special drawing unit 932 and the variable display unit 36.

The special figure unit 932 is provided with a first special figure display portion 932a and a second special figure display portion 932b. The display area of the first special figure display unit 932a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display apparatus 41, and similarly, the display area of the second special figure display unit 932b is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display apparatus 41. Further, the area of the display area including the first special figure display portion 932a and the second special figure display portion 932b is smaller than that of the display surface 41a.

In the first special view display portion 932a, a variation display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed by a winning lottery triggered by the winning of the first operation opening 938. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Further, in the second special figure display portion 932b, a winning or lottery is performed with the winning of the second operating port 939 as a trigger, and thereby variable display or predetermined display of the pattern is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

In the special figure unit 932, a first special figure hold display section 932c and a second special figure hold display section 932d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display section 932a and the second special figure display section 932b. .. The maximum number of game balls B1 that have won in the first operating port 938 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the first special figure reservation display portion 932c. In addition, the maximum number of game balls B1 won in the second operating port 939 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the second special figure reservation display portion 932d.

In the symbol display device 41, when the variable display or the predetermined display of the pattern is performed on the first special symbol display portion 932a based on the winning of the first operation port 938, the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is displayed accordingly. When the variable display or the predetermined display of the pattern is performed on the second special figure display portion 932b based on the winning in the second operation port 939, the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is performed in accordance with the change display or the predetermined display. ..

When the big hit or the small hit is achieved in the winning lottery based on the winning of the first operation opening 938, the opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won is performed. Similarly, even when the big hit or the small hit is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 939, the opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won can be performed.

On the back surface of the game board 931, a discharge passage portion (not shown) that guides the entered game ball B1 to a discharge ball collection portion (not shown) corresponding to each of the first operation port 938 and the second operation port 939. ) Has been formed. As shown in FIG. 102, in the discharge passage portion through which the game ball B1 entering the first operation opening 938 passes, a first operation opening detection sensor 951 for detecting the game ball B1 passing through the discharge passage portion. Is provided, and in the discharge passage portion through which the game ball B1 entering the second operation opening 939 passes, a second operation opening detection sensor 952 for detecting the game ball B1 passing through the discharge passage portion. Is provided.

FIG. 103A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection mode between the first control port detection sensor 951 and the second control port detection sensor 952 and the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. 103(a), the first working port detection sensor 951 is connected to the main control board 61 via the first harness 951a, and the second working port detection sensor 952 is different from the first harness 951a. It is connected to the main control board 61 via a different second harness 952a. The first harness 951a is a fluorescent harness having a yellow fluorescent color, and the second harness 952a is a fluorescent harness having a green fluorescent color. The first harness 951a and the second harness 952a have fluorescent colors that can be visually identified. Here, the fluorescent yellow color used for the first harness 951a and the fluorescent green color used for the second harness 952a are not used for other harnesses used in the pachinko machine 10. Is the color. Therefore, the first harness 951a and the second harness 952a can be visually distinguished from other harnesses.

As shown in FIG. 103(a), the first harness 951a is a bundle of two signal lines 958, one end of which is connected to the first working port detection sensor 951 and the other end of which is a male type. A two-pole connector 953 is provided. The second harness 952a is a bundle of two signal lines 958, one end of which is connected to the second working port detection sensor 952, and the other end of which is provided with a male bipolar connector 954. .. The signal line 958 is covered with an insulator.

The main control board 61 includes a first working port connector 955, which is a female two-pole connector for connecting the first working port detection sensor 951 to the main control substrate 61, and a second working port detection sensor 952. A second working port connector 956, which is a female two-pole connector for connecting to the main control board 61, is provided. The two-pole connector 953 of the first harness 951a is connected to the first working port connector 955 of the main control board 61 to connect the first working port detection sensor 951 to the main control board 61 and the second harness. The second operation port detection sensor 952 is connected to the main control board 61 by connecting the two-pole connector 954 of 952a to the second operation port connector 956 of the main control board 61.

The first working port connector 955 has a yellow fluorescent color like the first harness 951a, and the second working port connector 956 has a green fluorescent color like the second harness 952a. .. Therefore, when connecting the first operation port detection sensor 951 and the second operation port detection sensor 952 to the main control board 61, the yellow first harness 951a is connected to the yellow first operation port connector 955 and the green The second harness 952a is connected to the green second working port connector 956. This suppresses the occurrence of a mistake in which the connection destinations of the first harness 951a and the second harness 952a are exchanged. Here, the fluorescent yellow color used for the first working port connector 955 and the fluorescent green color used for the second working port connector 956 are the other connectors used in the pachinko machine 10. Is a color that has not been used for. Therefore, the first working port connector 955 and the second working port connector 956 can be visually distinguished from other connectors, and the occurrence of connection errors is suppressed.

Two signal lines 958 extending from the first operation port detection sensor 951 and two signal lines 958 extending from the second operation port detection sensor 952 are bundled into one bundle, and four pins 784 (FIG. 91) are provided at one end thereof. A configuration in which a single row connector is provided is also possible. However, in the case of adopting the configuration, it is possible to output the signals from the first operating port detection sensor 951 and the second operating port detection sensor 952 only by connecting an unauthorized circuit board that transmits an unauthorized signal to the main control circuit board 61 at one place. It becomes possible to illegally manipulate the signal input to the main control board 61. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by increasing the number of connectors that need to be connected in order to use the illegal board to two, it is made difficult to execute the illegality.

Further, when the signal lines 958 extending from the first operation port detection sensor 951 and the second operation port detection sensor 952 are configured as one bundle, there is a possibility that an unauthorized substrate cannot be found because the signal lines 958 block the signal lines 958. There is. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the signal line 958 is divided into small bundles in units of the respective operation port detection sensors 951 and 952 to make it easy to find an illegal substrate from between the bundles of signal lines 958.

The main control board 61 is an electronic circuit mounting board configured by mounting a large number of electronic components on a printed wiring board 957. A mode in which the first working port connector 955 and the second working port connector 956 are mounted on the printed wiring board 957 of the main control board 61 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 103B is an enlarged view of the first working port area 961 where the first working port connector 955 is mounted and the second working port area 962 where the second working port connector 956 is mounted. It is a back view of the printed wiring board 957. Here, in FIG. 103( b ), in order to explain a mounting mode of the first working port connector 955 and the second working port connector 956 to the printed wiring board 957, the first working port connector 955 and the second working port connector 955 are provided. The state in which the solder fixing the working port connector 956 to the printed wiring board 957 is removed is shown. Further, FIG. 103B shows a state in which the main control board 61 in FIG. 103A is turned upside down. Therefore, left-right inversion does not occur between the main control board 61 in FIG. 103(a) and the main control board 61 in FIG. 103(b). The left side of the main control board 61 in FIG. 103(a) is the left side of the main control board 61 in FIG. 103(b), and the right side of the main control board 61 in FIG. 103(a) is the main control in FIG. 103(b). It is the right side of the substrate 61.

As shown in FIG. 103B, the second working port region 962 is provided on the right side of the first working port region 961. The two-pole connector 953 (FIG. 103(a)) of the first harness 951a (FIG. 103(a)) includes the first pin 784q on the right side and the second pin 784r on the left side in the first working port region 961. Is equipped with. The two-pole connector 954 (FIG. 103(a)) of the second harness 952a (FIG. 103(a)) is provided with the first pin 784s on the right side and the second pin on the left side in the second working port area 962. It has a pin 784t.

As shown in FIG. 103(b), in the printed wiring board 957, the first via hole 793q in which the first pin 784q of the first harness 951a (FIG. 103(a)) is inserted in the first operation port area 961. And a second via hole 793r through which the second pin 784r is inserted. In addition, the printed wiring board 957 is provided with a first via hole 793s in which the first pin 784s of the second harness 952a (FIG. 103A) is inserted in the second working port area 962, and the second It has a second via hole 793t through which the pin 784t is inserted. Here, the via holes 793q to 793t of this embodiment are the same through holes as the via holes 793 (FIG. 90(a)) already described in the nineteenth embodiment, and penetrate the printed wiring board 957 in the vertical direction. ing.

As shown in FIG. 103B, in the second working port region 962, the first via hole 793s and the second via hole 793t are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and the second via hole 793t is provided on the left side of the first via hole 793s. Has been. The distance from the center of the first via hole 793s to the center of the second via hole 793t is 2.5 mm.

As shown in FIG. 103(b), around the first via hole 793s, in order to connect the first via hole 793s to an electronic component on the printed wiring board 957, the structure shown in FIG. ), the wiring pattern 776 already described above is formed, and in order to ground the second via hole 793t around the second via hole 793t, it has already been described in FIG. 92(b) of the nineteenth embodiment. The formed GND solid 851 is formed. On the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851, the solder resist 792 already described in FIGS. 92A and 92B of the nineteenth embodiment is formed. Therefore, the molten solder does not adhere to the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851 in the soldering process.

As shown in FIG. 103( b ), in the second working port area 962, the short circuit around the first via hole 793 s and the second via hole 793 t has already been described in FIG. 92( b) of the 19th embodiment. A prevention hole 761 is provided. The short circuit prevention hole 761 around the second via hole 793t is connected to the GND solid 851 by the connection portion 763 already described in FIGS. 92(a) and 92(b) of the nineteenth embodiment.

On the printed wiring board 957, in addition to the first working port connector 955 and the second working port connector 956, electronic components having terminals 775 already described in FIG. 88(a) of the nineteenth embodiment are mounted. Has been done. As shown in FIG. 103B, in the printed wiring board 957, a via hole 793 through which the terminal 775 of the electronic component is inserted is provided below the first operation port region 961 and the second operation port region 962. Has been. The via hole 793 is the through hole which has already been described in FIG. 90A of the nineteenth embodiment and is the same through hole as the via holes 793q to 793t.

As shown in FIG. 103B, the distance from the via hole 793 around the terminal 775 to the pins 784q and 784r of the first working port connector 955 and the pins 784s and 784t of the second working port connector 956 is the above-mentioned 19th Is longer than the reference value for providing the short circuit prevention hole 761 described in the above embodiment. In the printed wiring board 957, around the via hole 793 through which the terminal 775 of the electronic component is inserted, the joining hole 762 already described in FIG. 92(b) of the nineteenth embodiment is provided.

In the printed wiring board 957, even if the terminal 775 exists at the shortest distance from the first via hole 793q or the second via hole 793r in the first working port region 961, the terminal 775 to the first via hole 793q or the second via hole 793r is present. Is set to be longer than a reference value for providing the short circuit prevention hole 761. Further, even if the terminal 775 exists in the shortest distance from the first via hole 793s or the second via hole 793t in the second working port region 962, the distance from the terminal 775 to the first via hole 793s or the second via hole 793t is It is set to be longer than the reference value for providing the short circuit prevention hole 761. Therefore, the solder bridge 751 is provided between the pins 784q and 784r of the first working port connector 955 and the pins 784s and 784t of the second working port connector 956, and the terminals 775 of other electronic components existing nearby. It is suppressed from being formed.

As described above, in the game board 931, the second operation port 939 is provided in the right-side flow-down area 944 of the variable display unit 36. By adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle, the player can aim for winning in the second operating port 939. Further, in the present embodiment, the type of jackpot result that can be selected when the jackpot is won is to the second jack 939 rather than the case where the winning to the first jack 938 occurs and the lottery is performed. It is set to be more advantageous to the player when the winning of the prize occurs and the winning lottery is performed. The details of the winning lottery will be described later. Then, in the winning lottery for each game time, which will be described later, the holding information acquired based on the winning of the second operating opening 939 is prioritized over the holding information acquired based on the winning of the first operating opening 938. Is set to. Therefore, the player aims at the second operating port 939 while having greater expectations than when aiming at the first operating port 938.

As shown in FIG. 102, in the game area PA, the second operating port detection sensor 952 provided in the right-side flow-down area 944 of the variable display unit 36 is a player's aim for the right-side flow-down area 944, The game ball B1 (FIG. 53(a)) is detected only when the turning amount is adjusted. Therefore, while the player is adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle by aiming at the left-side flow-down area 943 of the variable display unit 36, the solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)) in the second operation port area 962. Even if a gap is formed, it may not be possible to know that there is a short circuit. In this case, the defect of the main control board 61 is not revealed until the player increases his/her expectation and aims at the flow-down area 944 on the right side of the variable display unit 36 and wins the second operation port 939. The game is interrupted with the player having strong expectations, which gives the player great disappointment.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103(b), in the second operation port region 962 of the printed wiring board 957, the above-mentioned nineteenth portion is formed around the first via hole 793s and the second via hole 793t. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 already described in FIG. 92(b) of the above embodiment is provided. The area of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is set larger than the area of the bonding hole 762 around the terminal 775 described above, and the first pin 784s inserted into the first via hole 793s in the soldering process of the printed wiring board 957. The possibility that a solder bridge 751 is formed between the second pin 784t and the second pin 784t inserted through the second via hole 793t and a short circuit is reduced is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 103(b), the short-circuit prevention hole 761 has an elliptical shape whose width in the left-right direction is wider than its width in the up-down direction. By extending the short-circuit prevention hole 761 in the left-right direction, the width in the vertical direction is widened, and the short-circuit prevention hole 761 approaches the terminal 775 (FIG. 88(a)) of the electronic component other than the second working port connector 956. While suppressing this, the area is enlarged to reduce the possibility that the solder bridge 751 is formed between the first pin 784s and the second pin 784t of the second working port connector 956.

As shown in FIG. 103B, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the first via hole 793s has a second via hole in which the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is adjacent to the first via hole 793s with reference to the first via hole 793s. The short circuit prevention hole 761 provided around the second via hole 793t is provided so as to exist on the side opposite to the second via hole 793t, and the center of the short circuit prevention hole 761 is based on the second via hole 793t. Is provided so as to be present on the side opposite to the first via hole 793s adjacent to. Since the two short-circuit prevention holes 761 are provided in such a manner that the distance from the left end of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the first via hole 793s to the right end of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the second via hole 793t is kept wide, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is provided. It is possible to adopt a mode in which the center of gravity of the molten solder accumulated on top is located in the direction opposite to the adjacent via holes 793s and 793t.

Accordingly, when the first via hole 793s is located at the rear end in the transport direction, it is possible to create an environment in which the molten solder around the first via hole 793s is unlikely to move toward the adjacent second via hole 793t. When the second via hole 793t is located at the rear end in the transport direction, it is possible to create an environment in which the molten solder around the second via hole 793t does not easily move in the direction of the adjacent first via hole 793s. Generation of 751 is suppressed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 103B, in the first working port region 961, the first via hole 793q and the second via hole 793r are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and the second via hole 793r is on the left side of the first via hole 793q. It is provided in. The distance from the center of the first via hole 793q to the center of the second via hole 793r is 2.5 mm.

As shown in FIG. 103(b), the wiring pattern 776 is formed around the first via hole 793q in the same manner as around the first via hole 793s in the second working port region 962 described above. A GND solid 851 is formed around the second via hole 793r, similar to the second via hole 793r in the second working port region 962 described above. A solder resist 792 is formed on the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851, similarly to the above-described second operation port area 962. Therefore, the molten solder does not adhere to the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851 in the soldering process.

As shown in FIG. 103B, in the first working port region 961, around the first via hole 793q and the second via hole 793r, the short circuit preventing hole 761 is provided in the same manner as the second working port region 962 described above. Is provided. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the second via hole 793r is connected to the GND solid 851 by the connecting portion 763, as in the case around the second via hole 793t in the second working port region 962 described above.

As shown in FIG. 103(b), the area of the short circuit prevention hole 761 is set larger than the area of the bonding hole 762 around the terminal 775 described above, and in the soldering process of the printed wiring board 957, the first via hole 793q. The possibility that a solder bridge 751 is formed between the first pin 784q inserted through the second pin 784r and the second pin 784r inserted through the second via hole 793r and a short circuit is reduced is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 103(b), the short-circuit prevention hole 761 has an elliptical shape whose width in the left-right direction is wider than its width in the up-down direction. By extending the short-circuit prevention hole 761 in the left-right direction, the width in the vertical direction is widened, and the short-circuit prevention hole 761 approaches the terminal 775 (FIG. 88(a)) of the electronic component other than the first working port connector 955. While suppressing this, the area is increased to reduce the possibility that the solder bridge 751 is formed between the first pin 784q and the second pin 784r of the first working port connector 955.

As shown in FIG. 103B, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the first via hole 793q is a second via hole in which the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is adjacent to the first via hole 793q with the first via hole 793q as a reference. The short circuit prevention hole 761 provided around the second via hole 793r is provided on the opposite side to the second via hole 793r, and the center of the short circuit prevention hole 761 is based on the second via hole 793r. Is provided so as to exist on the opposite side of the first via hole 793q adjacent to. Since the two short-circuit prevention holes 761 are provided in such a manner that the distance from the left end of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the first via hole 793q to the right end of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the second via hole 793r is kept wide, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 It is possible to adopt a mode in which the center of gravity of the molten solder accumulated on top is located in the direction opposite to the adjacent via holes 793q and 793r.

Accordingly, when the first via hole 793q is located at the rear end in the transport direction, it is possible to create an environment in which the molten solder around the first via hole 793q does not easily move in the direction of the adjacent second via hole 793r. When the second via hole 793r is located at the rear end in the transport direction, it is possible to create an environment in which the molten solder around the second via hole 793r does not easily move in the direction of the adjacent first via hole 793q. Generation of 751 is suppressed.

<Electrical structure for performing various lottery in the main CPU 63>
Next, the electrical configuration for executing the winning lottery in the main CPU 63 (FIG. 5) will be described. For the winning lottery, the hold information acquired based on the occurrence of a prize at the first operating port 938 (FIG. 102) or the second operating port 939 (FIG. 102) is used.

The main CPU 63 has a random number counter C1, a big jack type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, a random number initial value counter CINI, and a variation type counter CS in the lottery counter area 65b already described in FIG. 6 of the first embodiment. , Equipped with a general electric utility open counter C4. Further, the main CPU 63 is provided with a normal electric power holding area 65c, and in the holding storage area 65a, in addition to the execution area AE, a first special figure holding area as a holding area RE corresponding to the first operating port 938. (Not shown), and a second special figure holding area (not shown) as a holding area RE corresponding to the second operation port 939. In the present embodiment, the execution area AE (FIG. 6) in the reserved storage area 65a (FIG. 6) will be hereinafter referred to as a special drawing execution area AE.

The first special figure reservation area includes a first special figure first area, a first special figure second area, a first special figure third area, and a first special figure fourth area, which are not shown. When a winning is generated in the first working opening 938, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are held on the special drawing side in accordance with the winning history of the first working opening 938. It is stored in any area as information.

In this case, in the first special figure first area to the first special figure fourth area, when the winnings to the first working port 938 occur a plurality of times in succession, the first special figure first area The numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the second area for the first special figure, the third area for the first special figure, and the fourth area for the first special figure. By providing the four areas in this way, the winning history of the game ball B1 (FIG. 53(a)) to the first operating port 938 can be reserved and stored up to a maximum of four.

Note that the number that can be reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more, It may be singular.

The second special figure reservation area includes a first special figure first area, a second special figure second area, a second special figure third area, and a second special figure fourth area, which are not shown. When a prize for the second operation port 939 is generated, each numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is reserved on the special drawing side in accordance with the winning history of the second operation port 939. It is stored in any area as information.

In this case, in the first area for the second special figure to the fourth area for the second special figure, when the winnings to the second working port 939 are continuously generated a plurality of times, the first area for the second special figure is generated. The numerical information is stored in time sequence in the order of the second area for the second special figure, the third area for the second special figure, and the fourth area for the second special figure. Since the four areas are provided in this way, the winning history of the game ball B1 to the second operating port 939 can be reserved and stored up to a maximum of four.

Note that the number that can be reserved and stored in the second special figure reservation area is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more, It may be singular.

In the special area execution area AE, when the variable display is started in any of the special figure display portions 932a and 932b, the pending information of the target for the special figure right/wrong determination or the distribution determination is stored. Area. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special figure display portion 932a is started, the reservation information stored in the first special figure first area of the first special figure reservation area is the special area execution area. Moved to AE. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special figure display portion 932b is started, the hold information stored in the second special figure first area of the second special figure holding area is moved to the special figure execution area AE. To be done.

Next, a description will be given of the success/failure determination performed using the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special figure holding area or the second special figure holding area.

The value of the random number that is won at the time of the win/fail judgment is stored as a win/loss table in the main ROM 64 (FIG. 5). In the hit/miss table, a big hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result are set as the hit/miss results. The jackpot result is a win/loss result that can be a trigger to shift to the opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is controlled to be opened/closed, and a trigger to shift at least one of the win/loss lottery mode and the support mode. The small hit result is a win/loss result that does not trigger a shift in both the win/win lottery mode and the support mode, while triggering a shift to the open/close execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is controlled to open/close. The disengagement result is a win/loss result that does not trigger the shift to the opening/closing execution mode and further does not trigger the shift in the win/loss lottery mode and the support mode.

In the present embodiment, the winning/losing table stored in the main ROM 64 (FIG. 5) is for the first special figure used when determining whether the pending information acquired based on the winning of the first operating opening 938 is true or false. A win/loss table and a win/loss table for the second special figure, which is used when determining whether the pending information acquired based on the winning of the second operation opening 939 is set, are set. Further, in the hit/damage table for the first special figure, there are a low-probability hit table and a high-probability hit table. There is a win/fail table. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, different winning/absence tables are set for the hold information acquired based on the winning of the first operating port 938 and the hold information acquired based on the winning of the second operating port 939. In addition to being referred to, in either case, there are a low probability mode and a high probability mode as lottery modes in the winning/winning lottery.

Explaining each win/loss table in detail, in the low certainty win/loss table for the first special figure, there are two random number values (for example, “5” and “305”) that result in a big hit, and a small hit result. There are three random number values (for example, “55”, “355”, and “555”). The other values are random number values that result in the deviation.

The number of random number values that result in a big hit is set in the high probability hit table for the first special figure is larger than that in the low probability hit table for the first special figure, and specifically, 20. (For example, "5", "34", "65", "130", "163", "192", "220", "245", "276", "305", "334", "365", "392", "420", "470", "495", "520", "558", "575", "599"). In this case, the value group of the hit random number counter C1 that is a big hit in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the big random number counter C1 that is a big hit in the high probability mode. On the other hand, the value of the random number that results in the small hit is the same as that in the low probability table for the first special figure.

In the low certainty/prohibition table for the second special figure, the value of the random number that is the jackpot result is the same as that in the low certainty/prohibition table for the first special figure. On the other hand, the number of random number values that result in a small hit is set to be larger than that in the low accuracy table for the first special figure, and specifically, it is 40 (for example, “3”, “8”). , “31”, “37”, “55”, “68”, “127”, “133”, “160”, “166”, “189”, “195”, “217”, “223”, “ "242", "248", "273", "279", "302", "308", "331", "337", "355", "368", "389", "395", "417". , "423", "467", "473", "492", "498", "517", "523", "555", "561", "572", "578", "596", "598". )). Note that the number of random number values that result in a small hit may be the same as in the case of the low probability table for the first special figure, and may be set smaller than in the case of the low probability table for the first special figure. It may be configured to be.

In the high-probability hit/miss table for the second special figure, the value of the random number that is the jackpot result is the same as in the high-probability hit/miss table for the first special figure. Therefore, the number of random number values resulting in the jackpot result is larger than that in the low probability table for the second special figure. On the other hand, the value of the random number that results in the small hit is the same as in the case of the low certainty hit/miss table for the second special figure.

If the high-probability mode has a higher probability of a jackpot result than the low-probability mode, the number and value of the winning random numbers are arbitrary, and the jackpot result in a low-probability mode The value group of the hit random number counter C1 may or may not include a part of the value group of the hit random number counter C1 that is a big hit in the high probability mode. ..

Next, the distribution determination performed by using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first special figure holding area or the second special figure holding area will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the frequency of winning the special electric prize winning device 32 (FIG. 102) from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high or low. The high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, which have already been described in the first embodiment, are set.

In the high frequency winning mode, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened/closed in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are lower in the high frequency winning mode. The frequency of winning the special electric prize winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is set to be higher than that of the frequency winning mode.

The distribution destination of the kind of the big hit result to the big hit type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 64 (FIG. 5) as a distribution table. In the distribution table, in addition to the low-probability jackpot result and the most advantageous jackpot result already described in the first embodiment, the implicit high-probability jackpot result and the explicit high-probability jackpot result are set in the distribution table. ing.

The unspecified high-precision jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after completion of the opening/closing execution mode, the win/win lottery mode before switching to the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-probability mode. is there. This high-probability mode is at least continued until the next big hit result and the switching to the open/close execution mode due to the big hit result. Further, the support mode is a high frequency support mode if the mode before shifting to the open/close execution mode is a high frequency support mode, while it is a low frequency support mode if the mode before shifting to the open/close execution mode is a low frequency support mode. The support mode is at least continued until the next big hit result and the transition to the opening/closing execution mode due to the big hit result.

As for the explicit high certainty jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, it becomes the high probability mode regardless of which win/loss lot mode before the opening/closing execution mode shifts, and the opening/closing execution It is a big hit result that it becomes a high frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before the mode transition. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode result in a big hit next, and at least continue until the transition to the open/close execution mode is caused.

In the main ROM 64 of the present embodiment, as a distribution table, a distribution table for the first special figure used in the distribution determination of the suspension information acquired based on the winning of the first operation port 938, The distribution table for the second special figure, which is used in the distribution determination of the suspension information acquired based on the winning of the second operation port 939, is set.

Explaining each distribution table in detail, the distribution table for the first special map is a type of jackpot result to be distributed, as a type of jackpot result, low-probability jackpot result, implicit high-precision jackpot result, and explicit high-probability result. The jackpot result and the most advantageous jackpot result are all set. In the distribution table for the first special figure, "0-9" of the jackpot type counters C2 of "0-29" correspond to the low-probability jackpot result, and "10-14" are implicitly high. Corresponding to the positive jackpot result, "15 to 19" corresponds to the explicit high-precision jackpot result, and "20 to 29" corresponds to the most advantageous jackpot result. In the case of the sorting table for the first special map, the probability of a low-probability jackpot result is 1/3 when the jackpot is won, and the implicit high-probability jackpot result, the explicit high-probability jackpot result, and the most advantageous The probability of a high-precision jackpot result such as a jackpot result is 2/3. In the opening/closing execution mode, the probability of becoming the high-frequency winning mode is 2/3, and the probability of being in the low-frequency winning mode is 1/3.

On the other hand, in the distribution table for the 2nd special map, only the low-probability jackpot result and the most favorable jackpot result are set as the types of jackpot results to be distributed. No jackpot results have been set. In the distribution table for the second special map, among the jackpot type counters C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” correspond to the low-probability jackpot result, and “10 to 29” is the most advantageous jackpot. It corresponds to the result. In the case of the sorting table for the second special map, when the jackpot is won, the probability of a low-probability jackpot result is 1/3, and the probability of the most advantageous jackpot result is 2/3. The open/close execution mode is always the high frequency winning mode.

In other words, the distribution table for the first special figure and the distribution table for the second special figure have the same probability of becoming the high-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode in the case of a big hit. On the other hand, the probability of becoming the high frequency winning mode in the opening/closing execution mode is higher in the distribution table for the second special figure than in the distribution table for the first special figure. More specifically, the distribution table for the first special figure can be in the low frequency winning mode, whereas the distribution table for the second special figure cannot be in the low frequency winning mode. Therefore, as a type of jackpot result that can be selected when the jackpot is won, the winning of the jack of the second working 939 is generated more than when the winning of the jack of the first operating 938 is performed and the lottery is performed. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to win the lottery.

<Special map special electric control processing>
Next, in the special figure special electricity control processing of this embodiment which is executed in order to execute the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the opening/closing execution mode, the special figure special electricity control processing of the first embodiment (first execution Differences from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) of step S213) will be described.

First, the process of acquiring the reservation information on the special map side in the special map special electric control process of the present embodiment will be described. In the acquisition process, when the winning of the game ball B1 (FIG. 53(a)) to the first operating port 938 has occurred, the number of holding information stored in the first special figure holding area is read, When the number of the hold information is less than the upper limit value (specifically “4”), the winning random number counter C1 (FIG. 6), the big hit type counter C2 (FIG. 6) and the reach random number counter C3 (FIG. 6) are selected. The respective values are stored in the uppermost area in which the holding information is not stored in the first special figure holding area. In addition, in the acquisition process, when the winning of the game ball B1 to the second operating port 939 occurs, the number of holding information stored in the second special figure holding area is read and the number of holding information is read. Is less than the upper limit value (specifically, “4”), the respective values of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the holding information of the first special figure holding area. Not stored in the top area.

In the acquisition process, when the hold information about the first special view holding area or the hold information about the second special drawing holding area is acquired, the hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (FIG. 5). The voice emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding to the received hold command to the display control device 82 (FIG. 5). In the display control device 82, by receiving the hold command, the display of the number of hold information on the symbol display device 41 (FIG. 102) is changed in correspondence with the increase of the hold number. In this case, since the hold command includes information indicating which hold information has increased in the first special figure hold area and the second special figure hold area, the symbol display device 41 has increased the information. The display of the number of holdings corresponding to the side is changed.

Further, when the number of hold information increases as described above, in the display control process of step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), the first special figure hold display section 932c (FIG. 102) and the second special figure hold display unit 932c. Display control is performed on the side corresponding to the increase in the number of holdings in the figure holding display portion 932d (FIG. 102) so that the display content is changed to the content corresponding to the increase in the number of holdings.

In the special figure special electric power control processing of the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned special figure side holding information acquisition processing, processing for controlling the effect for game turning and processing for controlling the opening/closing execution mode, ,It is included. As a process for controlling the effect for game turn, the special figure variation start process for starting the effect for game turn, the process for advancing the effect for game turn, and the process for game turn A process for ending the effect is set.

Further, as processing for controlling the opening/closing execution mode, processing for controlling the opening of the opening/closing execution mode, processing for controlling the open state of the special electric prize winning apparatus 32 (FIG. 102), and special electric prize winning apparatus A process for controlling the closed state of 32 and a process for controlling the ending of the open/close execution mode and the transition of the game state at the end of the open/close execution mode are set.

The main RAM 65 (FIG. 5) includes a special figure special power counter as a counter for the main CPU 63 (FIG. 5) to know which one of the plurality of types of processing should be executed. The main ROM 64 (FIG. 5) is provided with a special figure special telephone address table in which start addresses of programs for executing the plurality of types of processing are set.

The special map special electric counter controls the special figure special electric control at the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information when the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is completed is satisfied. 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or “0” is cleared according to the processing executed in the processing. In the special figure special electric power control processing at each processing time, processing according to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric power counter is executed.

Next, the special figure fluctuation start process executed in the special figure special power control process of the present embodiment will be described. The special figure variation start process includes a win/fail determination process, a distribution determination process, and a reach determination process. The hit determination processing is executed on the condition that the holding information is not stored during the game play and the opening/closing execution mode.

First, it is determined whether or not the common reservation number, which is the total number of pieces of reservation information in the first special figure reservation area and the second special figure reservation area, is 1 or more. If the number of common holdings is less than 1, it means that the holding information is not stored in the first special figure holding area and the second special figure holding area. .. On the other hand, when the common hold number is 1 or more, the data setting process is executed.

In the data setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of reservations in the second special figure reservation area is "0". If the number of reservations in the second special figure reservation area is "0", the data setting process for the first special figure reservation area is executed, and if the number of reservations in the second special figure reservation area is not "0", 2 Execute the data setting process for special drawings.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the common pending number is 1 or more, as already described. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the number of reservations in the second special figure reservation area is "0", and when it is not "0", that is, the second special figure display unit 932b is used for variable display. When the holding information is stored, the data stored in the second special drawing holding area is set as the variable display regardless of whether the number of holdings in the first special drawing holding area is 1 or more. I decided to do it. Accordingly, when the hold information is stored in both the first special figure holding area and the second special figure holding area, the holding stored in the second special figure holding area corresponding to the second operating port 939 is held. The information will be given priority as the start target of the game.

In the data setting process for the first special figure, first, the data stored in the first special figure first area of the first special figure reservation area is moved to the special figure execution area AE (FIG. 6). Then, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first special figure first area to the first special figure fourth area to the lower area side.

After that, the second special figure flag provided in the main RAM 65 (FIG. 5) is cleared to “0”. The second special figure flag is a flag for specifying which of the first special figure display section 932a and the second special figure display section 932b started the variable display this time. Then, a shift command, which is information for making the voice emission control device 81 (FIG. 5), which is the sub-side control device, recognize that the data in the first special figure reservation area has been shifted is output, This data setting process ends. In the voice emission control device 81, by transmitting a command corresponding to the received shift time command to the display control device 82 (FIG. 5), the number of pieces of reservation information corresponding to the first special figure reservation area in the symbol display device 41 Change the display according to the decrease in the number of items to be held.

Further, when the number of holding information items in the first special figure holding area is decreased as described above, the display control process of step S215 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8) causes the first special figure holding display portion 932c to display the information. On the other hand, the display control is performed so that the display content is changed to correspond to the decrease in the number of holdings.

In the data setting process for the second special figure, first, the data stored in the first area for the second special figure of the second special figure holding area is moved to the execution area AE (FIG. 6) for the special figure. Then, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first special area for the second special figure to the fourth area for the second special figure to the lower area side.

Then, "1" is set to the second special figure flag provided in the main RAM 65. Then, a shift command, which is information for causing the voice emission control device 81 to recognize that the data in the second special figure reservation area has been shifted, is output, and this data setting process ends. In the sound emission control device 81, by transmitting a command corresponding to the received shift time command to the display control device 82, the display of the number of pieces of reservation information corresponding to the second special figure reservation area in the symbol display device 41 is displayed as a reservation number. Change according to the decrease of.

When the number of reservation information items in the second special figure reservation area decreases as described above, the second special figure reservation display portion 932d is displayed in the second special figure reservation display portion 932d by the display control process of step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8). On the other hand, the display control is performed so that the display content is changed to correspond to the decrease in the number of holdings.

After the data setting process is executed, the success/failure determination process is executed. In the hit determination process, by determining whether or not "1" is set in the second special map flag of the main RAM 65, the current game time is the first special map reservation area and the second special map reservation area. It is determined which hold information corresponds to. Further, it is determined whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. Then, the win/loss tables corresponding to these determination results are a low certainty hit/miss table for the first special figure, a high certainty hit/miss table for the first special figure, a low certainty hit/miss table for the second special figure, and a second special figure. Select from the high accuracy table. After the selection of the hit/no hit table, the information for hit/miss determination among the pending information stored in the execution area AE (FIG. 6) for special drawings, that is, the numerical value information acquired from the random number counter C1 is selected as described above. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical value information set as the jackpot result in the hit/miss table. If the numerical information set as the big hit result does not match, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information set as the small hit results in the selected hit/miss table.

When the result of the hit determination processing is the jackpot result, the sorting determination processing is executed. In the distribution determination process, by determining whether or not "1" is set in the second special map flag of the main RAM 65, the current game time is the first special map reservation area and the second special map reservation area. It is determined which of the above-mentioned hold information corresponds to. Then, the distribution table corresponding to the determination result is selected from the distribution table for the first special map and the distribution table for the second special map. After selecting the distribution table, the distribution determination information, that is, the numerical value information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2, among the pending information stored in the special drawing execution area AE (FIG. 6), Understand which type of jackpot result corresponds to the selected distribution table. Specifically, when the distribution table for the 1st special map is selected, any of the big hit results of low-probability jackpot result, implicit high-precision jackpot result, explicit high-probability jackpot result, and most advantageous jackpot result Understand whether it corresponds to. Further, when the distribution table for the second special diagram is selected, it is grasped which one of the low-probability jackpot result and the most advantageous jackpot result corresponds to the jackpot result.

Then, a process of setting a flag according to the type of the jackpot result identified this time in the main RAM 65 (FIG. 5) is executed. Specifically, when it is specified that the result is a low-probability jackpot, the low-probability flag is set to "1", and when it is specified that the result is an imprecise high-probability jackpot, the implicit flag is set to "1". Is set, and if it is specified that the result is an explicit high-precision jackpot, the explicit flag is set to "1". If it is specified that the result is the most advantageous jackpot, "1" is set to the most advantageous flag. set. In the following description, it is determined whether or not various jackpot results are obtained by determining whether or not a flag corresponding to the main RAM 65 is set.

Then, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, in the main game ROM 64 (FIG. 5), information about the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display portion 932a or the second special figure display portion 932b in the current game is stored in advance. It is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. In this stop result table for jackpot results, the types of the patterns of the symbols stopped and displayed on the first special figure display portion 932a or the second special figure display portion 932b are set differently for each type of big jackpot result. Then, the main RAM 65 stores information on the aspect of the pattern according to the identified type of the jackpot result.

The information on the type of the pattern to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In this case, the pattern mode may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of pattern modes may be set for each jackpot result.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the result is not the big hit result, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit/miss determination process is the small hit result. If the result is a small hit, the small hit flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1". Then, the stop result setting process for the small hit result is executed. Specifically, in the game time this time, the information of the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display portion 932a or the second special figure display portion 932b is stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. It is specified from the result stop result table, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

When it is determined that the result is not the small hit, the stop result setting process for the disengagement result is executed. Specifically, in the game time this time, the information of the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display portion 932a or the second special figure display portion 932b is stored in the main side ROM 64 in advance as a removal result. The specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the big hit result and the information of the pattern mode selected in the case of the small hit result.

After executing any one of the stop result setting process for the big hit result, the stop result setting process for the small hit result, and the stop result setting process for the out-of-range result, the display continuation time grasping process is executed. In this process, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated on the symbol display device 41 at the current game time. Specifically, when the current game time is the most advantageous big hit result or the low-probability big hit result, it is determined that the reach display is generated. Further, if the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE for special figures (FIG. 6) is not the result of any big hit, but the numerical value information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach is displayed, the reach display is displayed. Determined to occur.

When it is determined that the reach display is generated, the reach generation display continuation time table stored in the main ROM 64 is referred to and the display continuation time information corresponding to the numerical value information of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, it is determined whether or not the game time this time is one of the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result, the non-explicit high-accuracy jackpot result, and the small hit result. In some cases, the display duration table corresponding to the result is read from the main ROM 64, and the display duration information corresponding to the numerical value information of the fluctuation type counter CS this time is acquired. In this case, at least in the game times triggered by the holding information held and stored in the first special figure holding area, it is impossible or difficult to identify which of the implicit high-accuracy jackpot result and the small hit result. The display continuation time is selected so that the effect is executed by the symbol display device 41 (FIG. 102), the display light emitting unit 53 (FIG. 1), and the speaker unit 54 (FIG. 1) in a mode. However, due to the difference in the display duration table that is referenced in the case of the implicit high-accuracy big-hit result and the case of the small-hit result, the degree of expectation that the win/loss lot mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high probability mode It is possible to make the selection rate of high performance different in both cases.Specifically, the production with high expectation occurs in the case of implicit high-accuracy big hit result than in the case of small hit result. It's getting easier. On the other hand, when the reach display is not generated and the result is neither the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result, the implicit high-accuracy jackpot result, or the small hit result, the deviation display continuation time table is read from the main side ROM 64, and The display continuation time information corresponding to the numerical value information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired.

In addition, the display continuation time information when the display continuation time table for detachment is referred to, if it is a game time triggered by the suspension information stored in the first special diagram reservation area, is displayed in the first special diagram reservation area. It is set so that the display continuation time becomes shorter as the number of stored hold information increases, and if the game time is triggered by the hold information stored in the second special figure reservation area, the second special feature is set. The display continuation time is set to be shorter as the number of hold information items stored in the figure hold area increases. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, compared with the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode, compared with the case where the number of hold information is the same, a short display duration is selected so that it can be used as an outlier. The display duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the display duration does not change according to the number of hold information and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Further, the above configuration may be applied to the display continuation time when the reach occurs.

After that, the information on the grasped display continuation time is set in the special map special electric power timer counter. The updating of the numerical information set in the timer counter is executed by the timer updating process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) of the main CPU 63. By the way, as the effect for game play, the variable display of the symbol on the first special symbol display portion 932a or the second special symbol display portion 932b and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 are performed. When it is finished, the final stop is displayed over the final stop time in a state in which the stop result of the game time is displayed (in the symbol display device 41, a predetermined symbol combination is waiting on the activated line). .. In this case, the acquired display continuation time is the time obtained by subtracting the final stop time from the total time for one game. In this respect, the display continuation time can be restated as the time before the final stop.

After setting the information on the display continuation time in the Tokushu Tokuden timer counter, the variation command and the type command are output. The variation command includes information on the display duration time. Here, as described above, the display duration obtained by referring to the deviation display duration table is different from the display duration obtained by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table. Even if the information regarding whether or not the reach has occurred is not included in the above, the voice emission control device 81 can specify whether or not the reach has occurred from the information of the display continuation time. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. It should be noted that the variation command may include information directly indicating whether or not the reach has occurred. Further, the type command includes information on the game result. The output variation command and type command are received by the audio emission control device 81 which is a sub-side control device.

After that, the variable display of the pattern is started on the display unit of the first special figure display unit 932a and the second special figure display unit 932b on the execution target side of the current game time. Then, by adding "1" to the special figure special power counter, a process for advancing the game use effect is executed in the next special figure special power control process.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

The game board 931 has a structure in which the player can separately aim for winning in the first operating opening 938 and winning in the second operating opening 939 by adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle. .. In addition, in each game, the winning lottery performed using the holding information acquired based on the winning of the second operating port 939 is the holding information acquired based on the winning of the first operating port 938. It is set to be more advantageous to the player than the winning lottery performed using. Then, in the winning/winning lottery of each game time, the holding information acquired based on the winning of the second operating opening 939 is prioritized over the holding information acquired based on the winning of the first operating opening 938. is there. In other words, the player is expected to achieve a better result when aiming for the second operation port 939 than when aiming for the first operation port 938. In the configuration, the printed wiring board 957 of the main control board 61 includes a second working port connector 956 to which the two-pole connector 954 of the second harness 952a extending from the second working port detection sensor 952 is attached, In the wiring board 957, a short circuit prevention hole 761 is formed around the two pins 784s and 784t of the second working port connector 956. Therefore, in the soldering process, it is possible to prevent the molten solder adhering around the two pins 784s and 784t of the second working port connector 956 from merging and forming a solder bridge. This reduces the possibility that a connection failure will occur in the connection of the second working opening detection sensor 952 with the main control board 61, and a winning of the second working opening 939 will not be detected. It is possible to reduce the possibility of giving a great disappointment to the player by reducing the possibility that the winning is not detected at the second operation port 939, which the player expects for a good result.

The signal line 958 extending from the first operating port detection sensor 951 and the second operating port detection sensor 952 is divided into units of the respective operating port detection sensors 951 and 952 into a bundle, which is connected to the main control board 61. Therefore, a gap is formed between the bundles of the signal lines 958, and an unauthorized board can be found from the gap.

The first harness 951a extending from the first working port detection sensor 951 and the second harness 952a extending from the second working port detection sensor 952 are connected to separate working port connectors 955 and 956 on the main control board 61. is there. Assuming that an illegal board is used, by setting a large number of connectors to which the illegal board must be connected, it is possible to make it difficult to use the illegal board in the game hall.

The fluorescent color of the first harness 951a and the first working port connector 955 to which the first harness 951a is connected is for the second working port to which the second harness 952a and the second harness 952a are connected. It is different from the fluorescent color of the connector 956. Therefore, in the work of connecting the first working port detection sensor 951 and the second working port detection sensor 952 to the main control board 61, the connection destinations of the harnesses 951a and 952a can be identified by colors, and the harness 951a can be identified. , 952a can be prevented from being mistakenly mistaken for the connection destination.

The printed wiring board 957 includes a first working port connector 955 to which the two-pole connector 953 of the first harness 951a extending from the first working port detection sensor 951 is attached, and the printed wiring board 957 has the first working port connector 955. A short circuit prevention hole 761 is formed around the two pins 784q and 784r of the connector 955. As a result, it is possible to prevent a short circuit due to the formation of the solder bridge 751 in the connection of the first working port detection sensor 951 with the main control board 61.

<Another form of the 22nd embodiment>
In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the first working port connector 955 may be provided with four pins 784 (FIG. 91). For example, two signal lines 958 extending from the first operation port detection sensor 951 and two signal lines extending from other electronic components connected to the main control board 61 are connected to the first operation port connector 955. It may be configured. As a result, the effect of suppressing connection mistakes between the first harness 951a and the second harness 952a, the effect of making it difficult to use the illegal board in the game hall, and the effect of the second working opening detection sensor 952 and the main control board 61 While maintaining the effect that the formation of the solder bridge 751 is suppressed in the connection, the work of connecting the electronic component including the first working port detection sensor 951 to the main control board 61 can be facilitated. Further, for example, the first working port detection sensor 951 may include four signal lines 958, and the four signal lines may be connected to the first working port connector 955 having four pins 784. Good. The number of signal lines 958 that the first working port detection sensor 951 has is not limited to two, so that the number of types of sensors that can be used as the first working port detection sensor 951 is increased and the degree of freedom in design is increased. You can

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, one of the two signal lines 958 forming the first harness 951a has a yellow fluorescent color, and the other has no fluorescent color. Good. Further, only one of the two signal lines 958 forming the second harness 952a may have a green fluorescent color and the other may not have a fluorescent color. By visually observing the first harness 951a, the connection destination of the first harness 951a can be known in relation to the color of the first working port connector 955, and by visually observing the second harness 952a, the second working port With the configuration in which the connection destination of the second harness 952a can be known in relation to the color of the connector 956, connection mistakes of the first harness 951a and the second harness 952a can be suppressed.

In the second operation port area 962 of the twenty-second embodiment described above, the structure for preventing the formation of the solder bridge 751 is not limited to the short circuit prevention hole 761. For example, instead of the short-circuit prevention hole 761, the separation type short-circuit prevention hole 871 already described in FIG. 99A of the twentieth embodiment may be used. The configuration will be described below.

Around the first via hole 793s in the second working port area 962 (FIG. 103(b)), the bonding hole 762 (FIG. 99(a)) already described in the twentieth embodiment is formed, The separation type short circuit prevention hole 874 (FIG. 99(a)) already described in the twentieth embodiment is provided on the right side of the joining hole 762. The separation-type short circuit prevention hole 874 is not continuous with the bonding hole 762 around the first via hole 793s, and the reduced width portion 874b (FIG. 99(a)) is formed in a manner facing the first via hole 793s. ing. Therefore, in the soldering process of the printed wiring board 957, when the first via hole 793s is located at the rear end in the carrying direction, the pin 784s inserted in the first via hole 793s (FIG. 103(b)). The possibility that the molten solder adhering to the periphery of () moves toward the second via hole 793t to form the solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)) is reduced.

Around the second via hole 793t in the second working port area 962 (FIG. 103(b)), the bonding hole 762 (FIG. 99(a)) already described in the twentieth embodiment is formed, The separation type short circuit prevention hole 871 (FIG. 99(a)) already described in the twentieth embodiment is provided on the left side of the joining hole 762. The separation-type short-circuit prevention hole 871 is not continuous with the bonding hole 762 around the second via hole 793t, and the reduced width portion 871b (FIG. 99(a)) is formed so as to face the second via hole 793t. ing. Therefore, in the soldering process of the printed wiring board 957, when the second via hole 793t is located at the rear end in the transport direction, the pin 784t inserted in the second via hole 793t (FIG. 103(b)). ), the possibility that the molten solder adhering around) moves toward the first via hole 793s to form the solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)) is reduced.

As described above, the separation-type short-circuit prevention holes 871 and 874 are provided around the two via holes 793s and 793t in the second operation port area 962, and the solder bridge is used in the connection between the second operation port detection sensor 952 and the main control board 61. By reducing the possibility that 751 is formed, the winning is not detected even if the winning is generated in the second operating port 939, and the player who aimed at the second operating port 939 with great expectation is disappointed. The possibility can be reduced.

In addition, around the two via holes 793q and 793r (FIG. 103(b)) of the first operation port region 961 (FIG. 103(b)), like the two via holes 793s, 793t of the second operation port region 962. By providing the separation type short-circuit prevention holes 871 and 874 (FIG. 99(a)) in the connection, the first working port detection sensor 951 (FIG. 103(b)) and the main control board 61 (FIG. 103(b)) are connected. In, the possibility that the solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)) is formed can be reduced.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, you may change as follows. By the way, the configurations of the following different modes may be applied individually or in combination with the configurations of the above-described embodiments.

(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 are all targets for storing history information (or entry history). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34 is the storage target of the history information. The configuration may be set as follows. For example, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the second operating opening 34 may be the target of storing history information, or the general winning opening 31 may be the target of storing history information. It’s good. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the entering mode of the game ball in a predetermined period for the entering part for which the history information is stored.

(2) In each of the above-described embodiments, information corresponding to the result of entering the game ball is transmitted in association with the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. Although the signal paths 118a to 118c for setting are set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to the ball entry result for the same type of ball entering portion is the same type of ball entering portion. There may be a plurality of ball entrance detection sensors and a plurality of ball entrance detection sensors corresponding thereto, or one kind of information may be transmitted. This makes it possible to reduce the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66.

(3) In the first embodiment and the like, correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence information may be stored in advance in the management IC 66. In this case, since it is not necessary to execute the processing for causing the management IC 66 to recognize the correspondence information, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main CPU 63.

(4) In the first embodiment and the like, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the configuration is performed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, bidirectional communication between the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 is possible, and the management IC 66 handles it. The correspondence information may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when a signal requesting transmission of the relationship information is received. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and is used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped to the main CPU 63. Even if the supply of the operating power is stopped, the correspondence memory 116 stores and holds it. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the correspondence information is transmitted.

(5) In the first embodiment and the like, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the configuration is performed using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting the information of the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence information is mainly used. A dedicated signal path for transmitting from the side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 may be provided. As a result, the management IC 66 can grasp which type of information is being received from the main CPU 63 by the type of the buffers 122a to 122o that receives the information.

(6) In the first embodiment and the like, information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, but information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 based on the history information may be transmitted to the main CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute the notification control of the notification means as in the eleventh embodiment so that the notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters is performed. By transmitting a command corresponding to the contents of the various parameters received by the main CPU 63 to the sound emission control device 81, the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 are used to change the contents of the various parameters. The configuration may be such that the corresponding notification is executed.

(7) When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, various parameters are calculated by the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the calculated parameters are calculated. The contents of various parameters may be notified by using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, the symbol display device 41, and the like. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether or not the entering mode of the game balls in the game area PA on the last business day is normal at the start of the game hall business.

(8) When various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 10 cannot start the game until the prohibition cancel operation is performed. May be As a configuration that prevents the game from being started, for example, a configuration in which the game ball is not allowed to be launched, the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a may be invalidated, and the first operation opening It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the winning/non-winning determination processing is not executed even if a win is generated in 33 or the second operating port 34. Further, the prohibition canceling operation may be an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again while the RAM erasing switch is turned on, and can be operated when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the outer frame 11. Alternatively, the operation means may be operated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played as it is in a situation where the game ball in the game area PA is in an abnormal mode.

(9) Although history information corresponding to the detection results of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the memory 117 for history, calculation of various parameters using the history information is performed by either the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112. The configuration may be such that it is not executed. In this case, the history information may be read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and the operator of the reading operation may calculate various parameters using the read history information. Of course, the reading device may be configured to execute various parameters using the read history information. In this case, the processing load on the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 can be reduced.

(10) The management IC 66 may not be provided, and the main CPU 63 may have the function of executing the storage process of the history information and the function of calculating various parameters in each of the above embodiments. The configuration may be included in the CPU 92, or may be included in the voice emission control device 81. When the payout side CPU 92 or the voice emission control device 81 is provided with these functions, the information of the detection result of each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the control subject having the function. It will be.

(11) The management IC 66 is provided with a power source different from the main CPU 63, and even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 calculates various parameters using history information. Alternatively, the history information or the information of various parameters may be output. As a result, even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the history information and various parameters can be read by the reading device.

(12) The reading terminal 102 used for reading the program from the main ROM 64 is also used as the terminal used for reading the history information or various parameters by the reading device, but is not limited to this. Alternatively, the terminal used for reading the history information or various parameters by the reading device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 102 for reading the program from the main ROM 64. In this case, the terminal used to read the history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62, or may be provided in a position different from the MPU 62 in the main control board 61.

(13) The correspondence relationship memory 116, the history memory 117, and the calculation result memory 131 in each of the above embodiments are not limited to the configuration provided as a non-volatile storage unit such as a flash memory. Any one of 116, 117, and 131 is provided as a volatile storage unit that requires power supply to store and hold information, and backup power is supplied to the memory, thereby operating power to the main CPU 63. The information may be stored and held even if the supply of the information is stopped. In this case, a dedicated backup power device may be provided for that memory, or a configuration in which backup power is supplied to the memory from a power supply/launch control device 78 that supplies backup power to the main RAM 65. Good.

(14) The history information is not limited to the configuration in which various parameters are calculated, the history information is not stored and held, and the game ball is detected by any of the entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. Various parameters may be calculated and updated each time they are newly detected. In this case, although the frequency of calculation of various parameters increases, it becomes possible to extract various parameters at arbitrary timing.

(15) The management IC 66 includes the management-side CPU 112 as a general-purpose CPU, and is not limited to the configuration in which the history-information storage processing and various parameter calculation processing are executed based on the programs and data stored in the management-side ROM 113. Alternatively, a hard circuit designed to have these functions may be formed in the management IC 66. More specifically, regarding the configuration, in the case of the first embodiment, for example, the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that one of the detection sensors 42a to 48a has detected a game ball. The correspondence relationship information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored in the history memory 117 from the correspondence relationship memory 116, and the RTC 115 information at that time is stored in the history memory 117. To do. Further, for example, in the case of the ninth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that any one of the detection sensors 42a to 48a has detected a game ball, the hardware circuit receives the signal. The value of the counter corresponding to the buffer is incremented by 1. Further, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters by using the history information at the time when the calculation trigger in the first embodiment or the like occurs. Further, when an external output trigger to the reading terminal 102 is generated, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters that are calculation results and history information.

(16) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the information on the detection results of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored as history information, the configuration in which the transition to the opening/closing execution mode has been stored as history information is also possible. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the transition timing to the open/close execution mode and the end timing are stored as history information, and the configuration in which the occurrence of the transition to the high-frequency support mode is stored as history information, and a predetermined abnormality The occurrence of may be stored as history information. Further, by using the history information as described above, the transition probability to the open/close execution mode may be calculated, or the transition probability to the high-frequency support mode may be calculated. The frequency of occurrence may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be read by a reading device.

(17) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, may be provided as a separate substrate, or may be provided as a separate control device.

(18) In the first embodiment and the like, with respect to the number of game balls entering the out port 24a, the number of game balls is measured, while the general prize hole 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operation port 33, and the like. History information including RTC information may be stored for paying out prize balls of game balls such as the second operating port 34 or entering a privilege-triggered ball part that triggers the winning/non-winning determination process. As a result, it is possible to calculate the entry frequency of the game ball into each privilege-triggered ball portion with respect to the total number of discharged game balls, while enabling the entry history of the game ball into the bonus-triggered ball portion to be extracted. Become.

(19) The objects to be left as history information may include those other than those in the above embodiments. For example, at least one of the timing when the lower tray 56a is full, the timing when the full tank is started, and the timing when the full tank is released may be stored as history information. At least one of the time when the non-ball state is started, the timing when the no-ball state is started, and the timing when the no-ball state is released may be stored as history information, and the payout device 76 is in an abnormal state. That is, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 is started and the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 is released may be stored as history information. In this case, it becomes possible to grasp the occurrence frequency of these events.

(20) In the first embodiment and the like described above, it is set in advance in the design stage of the management IC 66 that the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management-side I/F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fact that the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal is recognized by the management IC 66 when the type identification command is transmitted from the main CPU 63. It may be configured. In this case, it is not necessary to set the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p in the management IC 66 in advance.

(21) The number of game balls entered into a predetermined ball-entering portion that has occurred when the front door frame 14 is in an open state is stored as history information, and the number of entered balls grasped by using the history information is stored. May be externally output to the reading device. As a result, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball-in portion in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state, and it is possible to grasp the presence or absence of fraud. In addition, the number of balls entered into a predetermined ball entering portion that occurs when the front door frame 14 is in the open state is calculated when a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, and the calculated number of entered balls is an abnormal number. In some cases, the abnormality notification may be executed. As a result, it is possible to deal with an illegal act in which the front door frame 14 is illegally opened and the game ball is inserted into a predetermined ball entrance portion.

(22) The management IC 66 may be configured to send a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when it is operating normally. In this case, the main CPU 63 can monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

(23) In the first embodiment and the like, the management CPU 112 may perform the confirmation processing of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o in the opposite order to the first embodiment and the like. In this case, the order in which the main CPU 63 executes the processing for changing the output state of each signal and the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the confirmation processing for the buffers 122a to 122o match.

(24) When the information stored in the main ROM 64 is externally output using the reading terminal 102, one of the program and the data may be selectively externally output, and a predetermined program may be used. Only one of them may be externally output. In this case, the information to be analyzed can be selectively read by the reading device. As a configuration for selectively outputting the information to the outside, the main CPU 63 selects the information to be the external output target from the selection information received from the reading device through the reading terminal 102, and outputs the selected information to the outside. Can be considered.

(25) The other information to be externally output through the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program stored in the main ROM 64 is not limited to the history information and various parameters. For example, when an abnormality occurs, The history information of the abnormality occurrence may be stored and the stored history information may be externally output through the reading terminal 102.

(26) Detecting sensors 42a to 48a are individually provided for each of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, and the detection sensors 42a to 48a are provided. The total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is grasped by totaling the number of detected game balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, all the game balls discharged from the game area PA. It is also possible to provide a passage area in which the game balls pass one by one and to provide a discharge detection sensor for detecting the game balls passing through the passage area. In this case, it is possible to grasp the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA by using the detection result of the discharge detection sensor. Further, in the configuration, similarly to each of the above-described embodiments, a detection sensor for detecting the number of entered game balls of each of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. By providing 42a to 47a, it is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game balls entered in each ball entering portion to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA.

(27) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the sound emission control device 81 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60, the display control is performed based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The device 82 may control the audio emission control device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are separately provided, both control devices may be provided as one control device, and the function of one of both control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 60, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 60. Further, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are also arbitrary.

(28) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a big hit is generated, a pachinko machine provided with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball.

Further, a non-ball-ball type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of kinds of symbols in the circumferential direction is provided, the reel is started to rotate by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels stop after a predetermined time elapses, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can be applied to a slot machine.

In addition, the game machine main body that is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage unit and a loading device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, in which the reel starts to rotate.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, for example, the result of the lottery process of the winning combination executed when one game is started based on the operation of the start lever is history information. The actual winning probability of each winning combination may be calculated by using the history information, and when a transition to a special game state such as a bonus game occurs, it is stored as history information and the history thereof is stored. The information may be used to calculate the actual transition probability to the special game state, or the ratio of the number of stay games in the special game state to the total number of exhausted games may be calculated. Then, the history information and various parameters may be read by a reading device, or a notification corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters may be performed by the gaming machine itself.

(29) The characteristic configurations of the first to twelfth embodiments may be mutually applied in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the twelfth embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the second embodiment may be combined. You may combine the characteristic structure of embodiment, the characteristic structure of the said 4th embodiment, and the characteristic structure of the said 8th embodiment.

(30) In the thirteenth to sixteenth embodiments described above, the nails 213, 214, 262, 322 and the base 351 which divide the course of the game ball B1 into two ways have one distribution result and the other distribution probability. The course of the game ball B1 may be distributed in such a manner that a significant difference is generated between the probability of the result and the result. For example, in the first left/right distribution nail 213 of the thirteenth embodiment, the area of the first distribution surface 217a is larger than the area of the second distribution surface 218a. All of the game balls B1 located and part of the game balls B1 located on the front side are distributed to the right side, and only the remaining game balls B1 located on the front side of the game area PA are distributed to the left side. By making the first distribution surface 217a more likely to hit the second distribution surface 218a in this way, the probability that the game ball B1 that collides with the first left/right distribution nail 213 will enter the operation ports 33, 34 is increased. The behavior of the game ball B1 around the first left/right distribution nail 213 can attract the player's attention.

Further, for example, in the front-rear distribution nail 262 of the fourteenth embodiment, the area of the first distribution surface 264a is larger than the area of the second distribution surface 265a. All of the game balls B1 located at and some of the game balls B1 located at the front side are distributed to the back side, and only the remaining game balls B1 located at the front side of the game area PA are distributed to the front side. .. By making the first distribution surface 264a more likely to hit the second distribution surface 265a in this way, the probability that the game ball B1 colliding with the front-rear distribution nail 262 will enter the working ports 33, 34 is increased. The player's attention can be focused on the behavior of the game ball B1 around the distribution nail 262.

Further, for example, in the repulsion nail 322 of the fifteenth embodiment, the length of the high repulsion portion 334d is set to be longer than the length of the low repulsion member 333, so that the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA. , And a part of the game ball B1 located on the front side collides with the repulsion nail 322 and rebounds greatly, and only the remaining game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA collides with the repulsion nail 322. Bounce small. In this way, by configuring the high-repulsion portion 334d to hit the low-repulsion member 333 more easily, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball B1 colliding with the repulsion nail 322 will win the operating ports 33, 34, and the game balls around the repulsion nail 322. The behavior of B1 can attract the attention of the player.

Further, for example, in the front-rear sorting table 351 of the sixteenth embodiment, the area of the first downstream surface 372 is larger than the area of the second downstream surface 373, so that the area is located on the back side of the game area PA. All of the game balls B1 and a part of the game balls B1 located on the front side are distributed to the back side, and only the remaining game balls B1 located on the front side of the game area PA are distributed to the front side. In this way, by making the structure that rolls on the first downstream surface 372 more easily than the second downstream surface 373, the game ball B1 rolling on the front-rear distribution table 351 wins the working ports 33, 34. It is possible to increase the probability of playing and to attract the player's attention to the behavior of the game ball B1 around the front and rear sorting table 351.

(31) The game board of each of the above embodiments is not limited to plywood, but may be an acrylic board. In each of the above embodiments, a polycarbonate plate may be used as the game board. The point is that it may be a plate-shaped member that can define the game area PA in which the game ball B1 flows down. Here, in the game board, the game board 24 (FIG. 3) in the first to twelfth embodiments, the game board 233 (FIG. 50) in the thirteenth embodiment, and the game in another embodiment of the thirteenth embodiment. Board 235 (Fig. 59), game board 236 (Fig. 60), game board 237 (Fig. 61(b)), game board 238 (Fig. 62(b)), game board 261 in the fourteenth embodiment (Fig. 63). , The game board 321 (FIG. 68) in the fifteenth embodiment, the game board 341 (FIG. 72) in the sixteenth embodiment, the game board 381 (FIG. 75) in another form of the sixteenth embodiment, and the seventeenth embodiment. A game board 421 (FIG. 78) in the embodiment, a game board 451 (FIG. 82) in the eighteenth embodiment, a game board 452 (FIG. 87(a)) in another embodiment of the eighteenth embodiment, and a twenty-second embodiment. A game board 931 (FIG. 102) is included.

(32) The solder according to the nineteenth to twenty-second embodiments is a connecting means made of a tin alloy containing a low melting point component such as lead or bismuth or silver. Lead-free solder (tin alloy containing copper and zinc and not containing lead) may be used as the connecting means. In addition to solder, a metal such as iron, nickel, copper, zinc, silver, indium, gold, or bismuth, or an alloy of these metals may be used as the connecting means. Any connecting means may be used as long as it can be attached to the terminals of the electronic component or the connector and the connection region of the substrate in a molten state and solidified to mount the electronic component or the connector on the substrate. When using the connecting means, by providing a hole for preventing a short circuit around the connection area on the substrate, the connecting means around the adjacent terminals may communicate with each other to form a short circuit. It can be reduced. Here, the terminal includes the terminal 775 and the pins 784, 784a to 784t. In addition, the connection region on the substrate includes via holes 793, 793a to 793t. The region for connection includes, in addition to through holes that vertically penetrate the substrate, holes that are formed up to an intermediate position of the substrate and do not penetrate the substrate. Further, the holes for preventing the short circuit are the short circuit prevention hole 761 (FIG. 92(b)) in the nineteenth embodiment, the inclined short circuit prevention hole 861 (FIG. 98(a)) in another form of the nineteenth embodiment, and the Separation-type short-circuit prevention holes 871 and 874 (FIG. 99(a)) in the twentieth embodiment, and separation-type short-circuit prevention holes 875 to 878, 886, 887 (FIG. 100(a), 3 in another embodiment of the twentieth embodiment). Direction-separated short-circuit prevention holes 881 and 884 (FIG. 100(b)), short-circuit prevention hole groups 891 to 895, 921 to 925 (FIG. 101) in the twenty-first embodiment, and short-circuit prevention hole 761 in the twenty-second embodiment ( 103(b)), which includes the separate type short-circuit prevention holes 871 and 874 (FIG. 99(a)) in the modification of the 22nd embodiment.

Further, in addition to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the above-described first to twenty-second embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination, the configuration in the above-described another mode may be applied in any combination.

<Regarding invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
The features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. It should be noted that, in the following, for ease of understanding, the configuration corresponding to each of the above-described embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in brackets or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Predetermined entering means (out opening 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first working opening 33, second working opening 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
When the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, the information corresponding to the game ball is stored in the specific storage means (main RAM 65), the specific storage execution means (the main CPU 63 executes the entrance detection processing). Function),
A privilege to execute a process for giving a privilege to a player based on the fact that the information corresponding to the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering device is stored in the specific storage device. Giving means (a function of the main CPU 63 to execute the process of step S217, a function of the payout CPU 92 to execute the process of step S408),
In a gaming machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the tenth embodiment). Then, the main information is executed on the main RAM 65), and the predetermined information (first number) which enables the number of balls entered into the predetermined ball entering means or the frequency of entering the balls to be specified by the game machine or a device external to the game machine. -Predetermined storage execution means (first storage means) for storing history information in the eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) In the ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management-side CPU 112, and in the tenth embodiment, step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316 in the main-side CPU 63, A game machine having a function of executing the processing of steps S2320 and S2323.

According to the characteristic A1, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, the corresponding information is stored in the specific storage means, and when the information is stored in the specific storage means, the player is provided with a privilege. To be done. As a result, the player will play the game while expecting that the game ball will enter the predetermined ball entering means. In the configuration, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the number of the game balls entering the predetermined ball entering means or the frequency of entering the ball. Predetermined information that enables the control means of the game machine or a device outside the game machine to specify the information is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of balls or the frequency of entering the game balls into the predetermined ball entering means. By using this managed information, the predetermined information can be stored. It is possible to appropriately manage the entering mode of the game ball into the entering device. Further, by storing and holding the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the predetermined information does not trigger execution of a process for granting a privilege to the player.

According to the characteristic A2, the predetermined information does not trigger the execution of the process for granting the privilege to the player, so that it is aimed to appropriately manage the entering mode of the game ball into the predetermined entering means. It becomes possible to store and hold the predetermined information in the information form.

Features A3. It is provided with a specific ball-in means (outlet port 24a, a general prize hole 31, a special electric prize winning device 32, a first operation port 33, a second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
When the game ball enters the specific ball entering means, the predetermined memory executing means causes the predetermined memory means to store information corresponding to the game ball, and when the game ball enters the specific ball entering means. Specific information (the history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) that allows the control means of the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine to specify the number of balls. The game machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized in that the measured numerical information) is stored in the predetermined storage means.

According to the characteristic A3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entering means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entering means is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it is possible to manage not only the entering mode of the game ball into the predetermined entering device but also the entering form of the game ball into the specific entering device. Also, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of the frequency of entering the ball between the predetermined entering means and the specific entering means.

Features A4. All the ball entering means for ejecting the entered game ball from the game area, including the predetermined ball entering means, are the storage targets of the information corresponding to the occurrence of the ball entering the game ball in the predetermined storage means. The game machine according to any one of the features A1 to A3, which is a ball entering means.

According to the characteristic A4, all the ball entering means for ejecting the game ball from the game area are subject to management using the information stored in the predetermined storage means, and thus the ball entering frequency for any ball entering means. Can be managed by using the information stored in the predetermined storage means. Further, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering the predetermined ball entering means with respect to the number of game balls discharged from the game area, using the information stored in the predetermined storage means.

Features A5. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the predetermined information includes information corresponding to a timing at which a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means.

According to the characteristic A5, since the predetermined information includes information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, by using the predetermined information, the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means It is possible to grasp the entry history in detail.

Features A6. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, characterized in that the predetermined information is counting information of the number of game balls entered in the predetermined entering means.

According to the characteristic A6, since the predetermined information is the counting information of the number of game balls entered in the predetermined ball entering means, the mode of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entering means is suppressed while suppressing the information capacity of the predetermined information. Can be managed.

Features A7. The predetermined storage execution means is means for causing the predetermined storage means to store information that enables identification of whether or not a game ball has entered the predetermined ball insertion means in a predetermined situation (first In the first to seventh embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management-side CPU 112, in the eighth embodiment, the function of performing the processing of step S2104 in the management-side CPU 112, and in the ninth embodiment, management The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, which is provided with a function of executing the processing of step S2203 in the side CPU 112.

According to the characteristic A7, it is possible to manage whether or not the game ball is entering the predetermined ball entering means by distinguishing whether or not the predetermined situation is present.

Feature A8. Any of the features A1 to A7 characterized by including an external output unit (a function for executing an external output process in the management-side CPU 112) that outputs the information stored in the predetermined storage unit to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the characteristic A8, it becomes possible to read the information stored in the predetermined storage means from the gaming machine and analyze the entering mode of the game ball into the predetermined entering means by using the read information.

Feature A9. The information output unit (reading terminal 102) is used to provide a program output unit (a function for executing the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine.
The game machine according to feature A8, wherein the external output means uses the information output section to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the game machine.

According to the characteristic A9, it is possible to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to the outside by using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature A10. Means for identifying whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the information stored in the predetermined storage unit or the control program, and outputting the information corresponding to the identification result (mainly The game machine according to Feature A9, which is provided with a function of executing the process of step S902 in the side CPU 63.

According to the characteristic A10, in the configuration in which the information output unit for externally outputting the control program is used to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage unit, the information to be externally output is the control program and the predetermined information. Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only the necessary information even if the information output section is also used.

Features A11. First control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means,
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided.

According to the characteristic A11, the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the specific storage execution means has the predetermined storage execution means, so that the processing load of the first control means is extremely increased. It is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described while preventing the occurrence of the above.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to the characteristic A12, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means is prevented. It becomes possible to prevent it.

Feature A13. It is provided with a specific ball-in means (outlet port 24a, a general prize hole 31, a special electric prize winning device 32, a first operation port 33, a second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
When the game ball enters the specific ball entering means, the predetermined memory executing means causes the predetermined memory means to store information corresponding to the game ball, so that the game to the specific ball entering means is executed. Specific information (the history information, the ninth to the ninth in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, which enables the control means of the game machine or a device outside the game machine to specify the number of balls entered or the frequency of entering the balls. In the eleventh embodiment, the numerical information measured by the counter is stored in the predetermined storage means,
The first control means is
First transmitting means (first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63 for transmitting the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means) Function to output either),
Second transmitting means for transmitting second information to the second control means by using a second signal path when a game ball enters the specific ball entering means (of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) Function to output either),
The gaming machine according to the feature A11 or A12, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic A13, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entering means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entering means is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it is possible to manage not only the entering mode of the game ball into the predetermined entering device but also the entering form of the game ball into the specific entering device. Also, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of the frequency of entering the ball between the predetermined entering means and the specific entering means.

In addition, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the game ball enters the specific ball entering means. The second information is transmitted to the second control means using the second signal path. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and it is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the second control means.

Features A14. The first control means transmits, to the second control means, identification information that enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation is present, using the third route. (In the first, third to ninth and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, in the second embodiment, the open/close execution mode signal in the main CPU63, The gaming machine according to Feature A13, which is provided with a function of outputting either a high frequency support mode signal or a door opening signal.

According to the characteristic A14, it is possible to manage whether the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means and the game ball enters the specific ball entering means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. Further, since the identification information that enables identification of whether or not the predetermined situation is present is transmitted to the second control means using the third route, the second control means transmits the identification information to the first information and the first information. It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing it from other information such as 2 information.

Feature A15. The first control means, to the second control means, identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entering means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entering means. The gaming machine described in the feature A13 or A14, which is provided with an identification information transmitting means (a function of executing a recognition process in the main CPU 63) for transmitting.

According to the characteristic A15, the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined entrance means and the second information corresponds to the specific entrance means is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Therefore, it is not necessary to store the correspondence relationship of these pieces of information in the second control means in advance. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to Feature A15, wherein the identification information transmitting unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit when supply of operating power to the first control unit is started.

According to the characteristic A16, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when the supply of the operating power to the first control means is started, so that the predetermined ball entering means and the specific ball entering means are provided. In a situation in which a game ball may enter the ball, it is possible for the second controller to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first controller and the ball entered. Become.

Feature A17. The identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic A17, the identification information is transmitted to the second control means by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, so that a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with.

Features A18. When the second control means receives the identification information, the second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entering means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entering means. Any of the features A15 to A17 characterized by including a unit (a function of executing the correspondence setting process in the management side CPU 112) for storing the correspondence relation information in the correspondence relation storage unit (correspondence relation memory 116). The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the characteristic A18, the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means is stored in the second control means. Thus, the second control means is provided with information that enables the second control means to identify the ball entry means corresponding to the information to be transmitted, every time the first control means transmits the first information or the second information. There is no need to do it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the first information and the second information.

Features A19. The first control means transmits third information, which enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present, to the second control means by using a third route. (In the first, third to ninth and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, in the second embodiment, the open/close execution mode signal in the main CPU63, With the function to output either a high frequency support mode signal or a door opening signal),
The feature A15 characterized in that the second control means can recognize the third information as information that can identify whether or not the predetermined condition is present, without receiving the identification information. The gaming machine according to any one of A to A18.

According to the feature A19, it is possible to manage whether the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means and the game ball enters the specific ball entering means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. Further, the fact that the third information is information that can identify whether or not the predetermined condition is present can be identified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. .. This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature A20. The second control means is a receiving unit capable of receiving the information from the first control means, and the number of types of information required to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means is larger than the number of types of information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A19, characterized in that a large number of receiving units (buffers 122a to 122p) are provided.

According to the characteristic A20, since the second control means is provided with the number of receiving units that is larger than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, Accordingly, even if the number of types of the information increases or decreases, it is possible to deal with the information without changing the configuration of the receiving unit. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the versatility of the second control means.

Feature A21. First external output means (management Function for executing external output processing in the side CPU 112),
A second external output unit (management Function for executing external output processing in the side CPU 112),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A13 to A20, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A21, the information stored in the predetermined storage means is read from the gaming machine, and the read information is used to enter the game ball into the predetermined ball entering means and the game ball to the specific ball entering means. It is possible to specify the entering mode. In addition, when the external output is performed, information of a combination of predetermined information and information that makes it possible to recognize that the predetermined information corresponds to the predetermined ball entrance means is externally output, and also corresponds to the specific information and the specific ball entrance means. Information of a combination with the information that makes it possible to recognize that it is being output is output to the outside. Thereby, it is possible to specify each incoming mode by using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

Feature A22. Using the predetermined information, information calculation means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, ninth) for calculating mode information corresponding to a ball entering mode of the game ball in the game area in a predetermined period. In the tenth and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of step S1008, step S1013 and step S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, the processes of step S1408, step S1413 and step S1417 in the management side CPU 112 are executed. Function, the function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the function of executing the process in step S1802 in the management CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A21, which is provided with a function of executing the process of step S2005, and a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment). ..

According to the characteristic A22, the form information corresponding to the entering form of the game ball is calculated by the game machine using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform the process corresponding to the entering mode of the game ball, or it is possible to output the mode information which is the result of the calculation using the predetermined information. ..

Feature A23. The predetermined storage execution means is a means for causing the predetermined storage means to have information for specifying whether or not the game ball has entered the predetermined ball insertion means in a predetermined situation (first). -Function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment, function of executing processing of step S2104 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, management side in the ninth embodiment A function of executing the process of step S2203 in the CPU 112),
The information calculation means calculates the aspect information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry means in the predetermined situation (first, second, and second). In the sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013, and step S1017 in the management-side CPU 112, in the third embodiment, step S1408 in the management-side CPU 112, A function of executing the processing of steps S1413 and S1417, a function of executing the processing of step S1602 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S1802 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment. A characteristic A22 characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of step S2005 in the management-side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2603 in the main-side CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment). The game machine described.

According to the characteristic A23, it becomes possible to calculate the mode information corresponding to the entering mode of the game ball by distinguishing whether or not the situation is the predetermined one.

Feature A24. A means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth implementations). In the embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1019 in the management-side CPU 112, and a function of executing the process of step S1605 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment) are included in the feature A22 or A23. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic A24, when the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is deleted, so that it is difficult for the predetermined information to exceed the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means. It becomes possible.

Feature A25. Even if the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the state in which the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored in the predetermined storage means is maintained. Or the game machine described in A23.

According to the characteristic A25, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the mode information is read and the game ball enters the ball. When analyzing the aspect, it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to the predetermined information that is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature A26. The information calculation means, when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage executing means is stopped, or when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage executing means is started, The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A25, wherein the aspect information is calculated.

According to the characteristic A26, the aspect information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped. Therefore, the aspect information is calculated for each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

Feature A27. Characteristic A22 to A22, wherein the information calculation means calculates the aspect information when a calculation trigger that may occur repeatedly occurs in a situation where operating power is being supplied to the control means having the specific storage execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of A26.

According to the characteristic A27, the mode information is calculated every time the calculation trigger repeatedly occurs in the situation where the operating power is being supplied to the control means, and therefore the mode information is finely managed within the range of one business day. Is possible.

Feature A28. The information calculation means calculates the aspect information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period,
The period measuring means stops the measurement of the period when the game is not being executed, and when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped, restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop. The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A27.

According to the characteristic A28, since the aspect information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the aspect information only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, when the game is not being executed, the measurement for the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. This makes it possible to exclude the situation where the game is not being executed from the calculation target of the situation information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the situation information in the situation where the game is being performed.

Feature A29. Features A22 to A28, which are equipped with an external output unit (a function for executing an external output process in the management side CPU 112) that outputs the aspect information calculated by the information calculation unit to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the characteristic A29, the aspect information is output to the device outside the gaming machine, so that it is possible to easily grasp the entering aspect of the game ball.

Feature A30. The game machine according to feature A29, wherein the external output unit outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the game machine when the aspect information is output to a device outside the game machine.

According to the characteristic A30, not only the aspect information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine, so that when the aspect information is read and the entering aspect of the game ball is analyzed, not only the aspect information but also the aspect information It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Features A31. First control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means,
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means,
Equipped with
The external output means outputs the aspect information to a device external to the gaming machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, A29 or A game machine described in A30.

According to the characteristic A31, the second control means having the external output means is provided separately from the first control means to reduce the processing load of the first control means, and based on an instruction from the first control means. The information can be output to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature A32. The information calculation means calculates the aspect information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs,
Result storage executing means for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculating means in the calculation result storing means (calculation result memory 131) (in the third embodiment, steps S1410, S1414 and S1418 in the management CPU 112). The game machine according to any one of features A22 to A31, which is provided with a function of performing the process of step S1604 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment.

According to the characteristic A32, it becomes possible to accumulate the mode information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read a plurality of aspect information when managing the entry aspect of the game ball.

Feature A33. The result storage executing means,
Means for determining whether or not the mode information is storage target information (a function of the management-side CPU 112 for executing the processing of step S1603);
Means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means when the mode information is the storage target information (a function of the management-side CPU 112 for executing the processing of step S1604);
A gaming machine according to feature A32, which is provided with:

According to the feature A33, when the aspect information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the aspect information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to limit the form information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature A34. The game according to feature A32 or A33, characterized in that the result storage execution means stores information in the operation result storage means in association with the aspect information, which makes it possible to specify the time when the aspect information was calculated. Machine.

According to the characteristic A34, the information that enables the time when the aspect information is calculated is to be attached to the aspect information. Thereby, it becomes possible to analyze each aspect information while grasping the time when each aspect information was calculated.

Feature A35. First control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means,
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means,
Equipped with
The information calculation means calculates the aspect information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. Game machine.

According to Feature A35, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, an aspect based on an instruction from the first control means The information can be calculated by the second control means.

Feature A36. A notification control unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S2605, S2607, and S2608 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification unit (the notification light emitting unit 151) to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A22 to A35.

According to the characteristic A36, the content corresponding to the aspect information is notified by the gaming machine itself. Thereby, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the entering mode of the game ball without reading the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature A37. The control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine according to feature A36, wherein the notification unit is provided on the control board.

According to the feature A37, it becomes possible to make it difficult to illegally access the communication path between the notification control unit and the notification unit.

Feature A38. First control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means,
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means,
Equipped with
The game machine according to feature A36 or A37, wherein the first control means includes the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to the characteristic A38, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the aspect information and the calculation result thereof. It is possible to integrate the function for executing the notification corresponding to the first control means.

Feature A39. The notification control means controls the notification means so that the first notification is executed when the aspect information is the information of the first range, and when the aspect information is the information of the second range, The gaming machine according to any one of features A36 to A38, characterized in that the notifying means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to the feature A39, the aspect information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification means from having too many notification patterns, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature A40. Features A1 to A1, which are provided with a unit (a function for executing the process of step S218 in the main CPU 63) for externally outputting corresponding information when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering unit. The gaming machine according to any one of A39.

According to the characteristic A40, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means in a configuration in which when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, the corresponding information corresponding thereto is externally output. With this, by using the correspondence information, the predetermined number of game balls entered into the predetermined ball entering means can be easily grasped, and the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means can be used. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls entering the ball means and the frequency of entering the balls.

Feature A41. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A40, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the characteristic A41, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as already described in the configuration in which the predetermined storage executing means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features A1 to A41, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the information corresponding to the predetermined event is a predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the main side in the tenth embodiment). The predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical value information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is executed by the RAM 65). Predetermined storage execution means to be stored in the storage means (function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, main side CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment). In step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320, and step S2323)).
Information calculating means for calculating aspect information corresponding to a result of a game in a predetermined period by using the predetermined information (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth embodiments Then, the function of executing the processes of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management CPU 112, and the function of executing the processes of steps S1408, S1413 and S1417 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, the fourth embodiment. A function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management CPU 112, a function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and a process of step S2005 of the management CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. Function, in the eleventh embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic B1, when the predetermined event occurs, the storage of the information corresponding to the predetermined event is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event, and by using this managed information, it is possible to appropriately manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing and holding the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is calculated in the gaming machine. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform a process corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period, or it is possible to externally output the mode information which is the result of the calculation using the predetermined information. Become.

Feature B2. The predetermined storage execution means is means for causing the predetermined storage means to store information that enables identification of whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation (in the first to seventh embodiments, A function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management CPU 112, a function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and a processing of step S2203 in the management CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment. Function to execute)
The information calculation means is means for calculating the aspect information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation (first, second, sixth, eighth, eighth). In the ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of step S1008, step S1013, and step S1017 in the management-side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, the processes of step S1408, step S1413, and step S1417 in the management-side CPU 112. Function for executing step S1602 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, function for executing step S1802 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, management in the seventh embodiment The game machine according to Feature B1 having a function of executing the process of step S2005 in the side CPU 112, and a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment).

According to the feature B2, it is possible to calculate whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation, and to calculate the aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period.

Feature B3. A means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth implementations). Form B1 or B2) having a function of executing the process of step S1019 in the management CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S1605 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment). Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic B3, when the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is deleted, and thus it is difficult for the predetermined information to exceed the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means. It becomes possible.

Feature B4. A feature B1 characterized in that, even if the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the state in which the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored in the predetermined storage means is maintained. Alternatively, the gaming machine described in B2.

According to the feature B4, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the mode information is read and the game in the predetermined period is performed. When analyzing the result of (3), it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to the predetermined information that is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature B5. A feature B1 characterized in that the information computing means computes the aspect information when the supply of the operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of to B4.

According to the feature B5, the aspect information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started. Therefore, the aspect information is calculated for each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

Feature B6. One of the features B1 to B5 characterized in that the information computing unit computes the aspect information when a computation trigger that may occur repeatedly occurs in a situation where operating power is being supplied to the control unit (MPU 62). The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the feature B6, the mode information is calculated every time when the operation trigger is repeatedly generated in the situation where the operating power is supplied to the control means. Therefore, the mode information can be managed finely within the range of one business day. Is possible.

Feature B7. The information calculation means calculates the aspect information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period,
The period measuring means stops the measurement of the period when the game is not being executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6.

According to the characteristic B7, since the aspect information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the aspect information only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, when the game is not being executed, the measurement for the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. This makes it possible to exclude the situation where the game is not being executed from the calculation target of the situation information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the situation information in the situation where the game is being performed.

Feature B8. Features B1 to B7, which are provided with an external output unit (a function for executing an external output process in the management side CPU 112) that outputs the aspect information calculated by the information calculation unit to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature B8, the aspect information is output to the device outside the gaming machine, so that the entering aspect of the game ball can be easily grasped.

Feature B9. The game machine according to feature B8, wherein the external output unit outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the game machine when the aspect information is output to a device outside the game machine.

According to the feature B9, not only the aspect information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine, so that when the aspect information is read and the entering aspect of the game ball is analyzed, not only the aspect information but also the aspect information It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature B10. First control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means,
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means,
Equipped with
The external output means outputs the aspect information to a device external to the gaming machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, B8 or A gaming machine described in B9.

According to Feature B10, the second control means having the external output means is provided separately from the first control means to reduce the processing load of the first control means, and the aspect is based on the instruction from the first control means. The information can be output to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature B11. The information calculation means calculates the aspect information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs,
Result storage executing means for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculating means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131) (in the third embodiment, step S1410, step S1414 and step S1418 in the management CPU 112). The game machine according to any one of the features B1 to B10, which has a function of executing the process of (1), and a function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment).

According to the characteristic B11, it becomes possible to accumulate the mode information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read a plurality of aspect information when managing the aspect of the result of the game in a predetermined period.

Feature B12. The result storage execution means is provided with means (a function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112) for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means when the mode information is storage target information. A gaming machine described in Feature B11.

According to the feature B12, when the aspect information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the aspect information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to limit the form information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature B13. The game according to feature B11 or B12, characterized in that the result storage executing means stores information in the operation result storage means in association with the aspect information, which makes it possible to specify the time when the aspect information is calculated. Machine.

According to the feature B13, the information that enables the time when the aspect information is calculated is attached to the aspect information. Thereby, it becomes possible to analyze each aspect information while grasping the time when each aspect information was calculated.

Feature B14. First control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means,
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means,
Equipped with
The information calculation means calculates the aspect information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. Game machine.

According to Feature B14, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the mode is based on the instruction from the first control means. The information can be calculated by the second control means.

Feature B15. A notification control unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S2605, S2607, and S2608 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification unit (the notification light emitting unit 151) to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B14.

According to the characteristic B15, the content corresponding to the aspect information is notified by the gaming machine itself. Thereby, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game in a predetermined period without reading the mode information from the game machine.

Feature B16. The control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine according to Feature B15, wherein the notification unit is provided on the control board.

According to the feature B16, it becomes possible to make it difficult to illegally access the communication path between the notification control unit and the notification unit.

Feature B17. First control means (main CPU 63) having the information calculation means and the notification control means,
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means,
The gaming machine according to the feature B15 or B16, which is provided with.

According to Feature B17, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the aspect information and the calculation result thereof It is possible to integrate the function for executing the notification corresponding to the first control means.

Feature B18. The notification control means controls the notification means so that the first notification is executed when the aspect information is the information of the first range, and when the aspect information is the information of the second range, The gaming machine according to any one of features B15 to B17, characterized in that the notifying means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to the feature B18, not the aspect information is reported as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification means from having too many notification patterns, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature B19. Predetermined entering means (out opening 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first working opening 33, second working opening 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the tenth embodiment). Then, the predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is executed by being executed in the main RAM 65). Is stored in the predetermined storage means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, a function of executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112, in the tenth embodiment, A function of executing the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320 and step S2323 in the main CPU 63),
Information calculating means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, ninth) for calculating the aspect information corresponding to the entering aspect of the game ball in the game area in a predetermined period using the predetermined information. In the tenth and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of step S1008, step S1013, and step S1017 in the management-side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, the processes of step S1408, step S1413, and step S1417 in the management-side CPU 112 is executed. Function, the function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management-side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. A function of executing the process of step S2005, a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B19, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, a storage process of information corresponding to the game ball is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of balls or the frequency of entering the game balls into the predetermined ball entering means. By using this managed information, the predetermined information can be stored. It is possible to appropriately manage the entering mode of the game ball into the entering device. Further, by storing and holding the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the mode information corresponding to the entering mode of the game ball is calculated in the game machine. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform the process corresponding to the entering mode of the game ball, or it is possible to output the mode information which is the result of the calculation using the predetermined information. ..

Feature B20. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B19, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature B20, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as already described in the configuration in which the predetermined storage executing means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

It should be noted that features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to the configurations of the features B1 to B20. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the information corresponding to the predetermined event is a predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the main side in the tenth embodiment). The predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical value information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is executed by the RAM 65). Predetermined storage execution means to be stored in the storage means (function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, main side CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment). In step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320, and step S2323)).
Information calculation means (first, second, sixth, eighth) for calculating the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period by using the predetermined information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs. In the ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013, and step S1017 in the management-side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, step S1408, step S1413, and step S1417 in the management-side CPU 112. Function of executing step S1602 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, function of executing step S1802 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and seventh embodiment A function of executing the process of step S2005 in the management-side CPU 112, and a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main-side CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment).
Result storage executing means for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculating means in the calculation result storing means (calculation result memory 131) (in the third embodiment, steps S1410, S1414 and S1418 in the management CPU 112). The function of executing the processing of step S1604 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic C1, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storing means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storing means. .. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of balls or the frequency of entering the game balls into the predetermined ball entering means. By using this managed information, the predetermined information can be stored. It is possible to appropriately manage the entering mode of the game ball into the entering device. Further, by storing and holding the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is calculated in the gaming machine. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform a process corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period, or it is possible to externally output the mode information which is the result of the calculation using the predetermined information. Become.

In addition, it becomes possible to accumulate the mode information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read a plurality of aspect information when managing the aspect of the result of the game in a predetermined period.

Feature C2. The result storage execution means is provided with means (a function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112) for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means when the mode information is storage target information. A gaming machine described in Feature C1.

According to the characteristic C2, when the aspect information of the operation result corresponds to the storage target information, the aspect information is stored in the operation result storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to limit the form information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature C3. The game according to the feature C1 or C2, wherein the result storage executing means stores information in the operation result storage means in association with the aspect information, which makes it possible to specify the time when the aspect information is calculated. Machine.

According to the characteristic C3, the information that enables the time when the aspect information is calculated is attached to the aspect information. Thereby, it becomes possible to analyze each aspect information while grasping the time when each aspect information was calculated.

Feature C4. The predetermined storage execution means is means for causing the predetermined storage means to store information that enables identification of whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation (in the first to seventh embodiments, A function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management CPU 112, a function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and a processing of step S2203 in the management CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment. Function to execute)
The information computing means computes the aspect information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation (first, second, sixth, eighth, eighth). In the ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of step S1008, step S1013, and step S1017 in the management-side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, the processes of step S1408, step S1413, and step S1417 in the management-side CPU 112. Function for executing step S1602 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, function for executing step S1802 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, management in the seventh embodiment Any one of features C1 to C3 characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of step S2005 in the side CPU 112, and a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment). Game machine.

According to the characteristic C4, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the situation is the predetermined situation and calculate the aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period.

Feature C5. A means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth implementations). Any of the features C1 to C4 characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of step S1019 in the management-side CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S1605 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment). The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the characteristic C5, when the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is deleted, so that it is difficult for the predetermined information to exceed the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means. It becomes possible.

Feature C6. Even if the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the state in which the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored in the predetermined storage means is maintained. The gaming machine according to any one of C5 to C5.

According to the characteristic C6, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the mode information is read and the game in the predetermined period is performed. When analyzing the result of (3), it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to the predetermined information that is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature C7. A feature C1 characterized in that the information computing means computes the aspect information when the supply of the operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of to C6.

According to the characteristic C7, the aspect information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started. Therefore, the aspect information is calculated for each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

Feature C8. One of the features C1 to C7 characterized in that the information computing unit computes the aspect information when a computation trigger that may occur repeatedly occurs in a situation where operating power is being supplied to the control unit (MPU 62). The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the characteristic C8, the mode information is calculated every time the calculation trigger repeatedly occurs in the situation where the operating power is supplied to the control means, and therefore the mode information is finely managed within the range of one business day. Is possible.

Feature C9. The information calculation means calculates the aspect information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period,
The period measuring means stops the measurement of the period when the game is not being executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8.

According to the characteristic C9, the aspect information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses. Therefore, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the aspect information only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, when the game is not being executed, the measurement for the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. This makes it possible to exclude the situation where the game is not being executed from the calculation target of the situation information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the situation information in the situation where the game is being performed.

Feature C10. Features C1 to C9, which are provided with an external output unit (a function for executing an external output process in the management-side CPU 112) that outputs the aspect information calculated by the information calculation unit to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the characteristic C10, the aspect information is output to the device outside the gaming machine, so that the entering aspect of the game ball can be easily grasped.

Feature C11. The game machine according to feature C10, wherein the external output unit outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the game machine when the aspect information is output to a device outside the game machine.

According to the characteristic C11, not only the aspect information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine, so that when the aspect information is read out and the entering aspect of the game ball is analyzed, not only the aspect information but also the aspect information It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature C12. First control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means,
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means,
Equipped with
The external output means outputs the aspect information to a device external to the gaming machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, C10 or The gaming machine described in C11.

According to Feature C12, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the external output means separately from the first control means, an aspect based on an instruction from the first control means The information can be output to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature C13. First control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means,
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means,
Equipped with
The information calculation means calculates the aspect information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. Game machine.

According to Feature C13, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, an aspect based on an instruction from the first control means The information can be calculated by the second control means.

Feature C14. A notification control unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S2605, S2607, and S2608 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification unit (the notification light emitting unit 151) to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C13 characterized by being present.

According to the characteristic C14, the content corresponding to the aspect information is notified by the gaming machine itself. Thereby, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game in a predetermined period without reading the mode information from the game machine.

Feature C15. The control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine according to feature C14, wherein the notification unit is provided on the control board.

According to the characteristic C15, it becomes possible to make it difficult to illegally access the communication path between the notification control unit and the notification unit.

Feature C16. First control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means,
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means,
Equipped with
The game machine according to feature C14 or C15, wherein the first control means includes the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to the characteristic C16, in the configuration in which the second control means having the predetermined storage means is provided separately from the first control means to reduce the processing load of the first control means, the function of calculating the aspect information and the calculation result thereof It is possible to integrate the function for executing the notification corresponding to the first control means.

Feature C17. The notification control means controls the notification means so that the first notification is executed when the aspect information is the information of the first range, and when the aspect information is the information of the second range, The gaming machine according to any one of features C14 to C16, characterized in that the notifying means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to the characteristic C17, not the aspect information is reported as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification means from having too many notification patterns, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature C18. Predetermined entering means (out opening 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first working opening 33, second working opening 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the tenth embodiment). Then, the predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is executed by being executed in the main RAM 65). Is stored in the predetermined storage means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, a function of executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112, in the tenth embodiment, A function of executing the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320 and step S2323 in the main CPU 63),
Every time a predetermined calculation trigger is generated, the predetermined information is used to calculate the mode information corresponding to the entering mode of the game ball in the game area in the predetermined period (first, first In the second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of step S1008, step S1013, and step S1017 in the management-side CPU 112, and the step in the management-side CPU112 in the third embodiment. A function of executing the processing of S1408, step S1413 and step S1417, a function of executing the processing of step S1602 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, and a processing of step S1802 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment. Function, the function of executing the process of step S2005 in the management-side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main-side CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment).
Result storage executing means for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculating means in the calculation result storing means (calculation result memory 131) (in the third embodiment, steps S1410, S1414 and S1418 in the management CPU 112). The function of executing the processing of step S1604 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic C18, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, a storage process of information corresponding to the game ball is executed in the predetermined storing means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storing means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of balls or the frequency of entering the game balls into the predetermined ball entering means. By using this managed information, the predetermined information can be stored. It is possible to appropriately manage the entering mode of the game ball into the entering device. Further, by storing and holding the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the mode information corresponding to the entering mode of the game ball is calculated in the game machine. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform the process corresponding to the entering mode of the game ball, or it is possible to output the mode information which is the result of the calculation using the predetermined information. ..

In addition, it becomes possible to accumulate the mode information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read a plurality of aspect information when managing the aspect of the result of the game in a predetermined period.

Feature C19. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C18, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the characteristic C19, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described in the configuration in which the predetermined storage executing means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

It should be noted that features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to the configurations of the features C1 to C19. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, storage of information corresponding to the predetermined event is performed by a predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, a main side in the tenth embodiment). Predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is stored in the RAM 65) to execute the predetermined information. First storage execution means to be stored in the storage means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, a main side in the tenth embodiment) A function of executing steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320 and S2323 in the CPU 63),
When a specific event occurs as a result of a game, the specific information is stored in the predetermined storage means so as to be stored in the predetermined storage means (the history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, In the ninth to eleventh embodiments, the second storage execution means (first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments) for storing the numerical information measured by the counter in the predetermined storage means. (A function of executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112, a function of executing processing of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320, and S2323 in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment). ,
First external output means (management side CPU 112) for outputting the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine so that the predetermined information can be recognized as corresponding to the predetermined event. Function for executing external output processing in), and
Second external output means (management side CPU 112) that outputs the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine so that the specific information can be recognized as corresponding to the specific event. Function for executing external output processing in), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic D1, it becomes possible to read the information stored in the predetermined storage means from the gaming machine and use the read information to specify the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event. In addition, when the external output is performed, the specific information corresponds to the specific event while the specific information corresponds to the specific event, and the specific information corresponds to the specific event. The specific information is output to the outside so as to be recognized. With this, even if the second control unit does not process the information, it is possible to specify the occurrence mode of each event by using the information read from the predetermined storage unit.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, further comprising means (a function of executing the process of step S218 in the main CPU 63) that externally outputs corresponding information when the predetermined event occurs.

According to the characteristic D2, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means in a configuration in which the corresponding information corresponding to the predetermined event is externally output when the predetermined event occurs. This makes it possible to accurately grasp the number of occurrences and the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event by using the correspondence information, and accurately determine the number of occurrences and the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. It becomes possible to grasp.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein the predetermined information is information on the number of times the predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is information on the number of times the specific event has occurred.

According to the characteristic D3, the predetermined information is the count information of the number of times the predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is the count information of the number of times the specific event has occurred. Therefore, while suppressing the information capacity of the predetermined information and the specific information, It is possible to manage the occurrence mode of a predetermined event and the occurrence mode of a specific event.

Feature D4. The information output unit (reading terminal 102) is used to provide a program output unit (a function for executing the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine.
The first external output means and the second external output means use the information output section to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device external to the gaming machine. The gaming machine described in any one of D3.

According to the feature D4, it is possible to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to the outside by using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature D5. A selection unit that specifies whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the information stored in the predetermined storage unit or the control program, and outputs the information corresponding to the identification result ( The game machine according to Feature D4, which is provided with a function of executing the process of step S902 in the main CPU 63.

According to the feature D5, in the configuration in which the information output unit for externally outputting the control program is used to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage unit, the information to be externally output is the control program and the predetermined information. Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only the necessary information even if the information output section is also used.

Feature D6. The selecting means, based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output part, information to be output from the information output part is stored in the predetermined storage part and the control program is stored. The gaming machine described in the feature D5, which is characterized by specifying which one of them.

According to the characteristic D6, which information is to be output from the information output unit is specified based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the information output unit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the configuration regarding the selection of the information to be output from becoming complicated.

Feature D7. A chip (MPU 62) having a program storage unit (main side ROM 64) that stores the control program in advance has the information output unit, the first external output unit, and the second external output unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D6.

According to the feature D7, the signal paths for the information output unit can be integrated in the chip. As a result, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as already described while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the information output unit.

It should be noted that features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to the configurations of the features D1 to D7. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Program output means (a function for executing the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102),
An information output unit (a function for executing external output processing in the management-side CPU 112) that outputs special information using the information output unit;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E1, it is possible to output the special information to the outside by using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to output the special information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature E2. Selection means for specifying whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the special information or the control program and outputting the information corresponding to the specified result (step S902 in the main CPU 63) (A function of executing the process of). The gaming machine described in the feature E1.

According to the feature E2, in the configuration in which the special information is externally output by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program, the information targeted for external output is either the control program or the special information. Is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only the necessary information even if the information output section is also used.

Feature E3. The selection means determines, based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit, whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the special information or the control program. The gaming machine according to feature E2 characterized by being specified.

According to the feature E3, which information is to be output from the information output unit is specified based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the information output unit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the configuration regarding the selection of the information to be output from becoming complicated.

Feature E4. Any one of features E1 to E3 characterized in that a chip (MPU 62) having a program storage means (main side ROM 64) for storing the control program in advance has the information output section and the information output means. Gaming machine described in.

According to the feature E4, the signal paths for the information output unit can be integrated in the chip. As a result, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the information output unit.

It should be noted that features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to the configurations of the features E1 to E4. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. A first control means (main side CPU 63) and a second control means (management side CPU 112),
The first control means is
A privilege giving means (a function for executing the process of step S217 in the main CPU 63, a function for executing the process of step S408 in the payout CPU 92) for giving a bonus to the player when a predetermined event occurs,
An information transmitting unit (a function for executing management output processing in the main CPU 63) that transmits predetermined event information corresponding to the predetermined event when the predetermined event occurs;
Equipped with
When the second control means receives the predetermined event information, the second control means stores predetermined information (corresponding to the predetermined event information in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments in the history memory 117 and the tenth history memory). In the embodiment, by being executed in the main side RAM 65), predetermined information (first to eighth) that enables the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine to specify the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. The predetermined storage execution means (first to ninth storage means) for storing history information in the twelfth embodiment and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) in the predetermined storage means. The function of executing the history setting process in the management-side CPU 112 in the 11th to 12th embodiments, and the step S2302, the step S2305, the step S2308, the step S2312, the step S2316, the step S2320 in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment. A game machine having a function of executing the processing of step S2323).

According to the characteristic F1, a privilege is given to the player when a predetermined event occurs. As a result, the player will play the game while expecting that a predetermined event will occur. In the configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, the information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the number of times or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be specified by the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine. The predetermined information to be stored is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event, and by using this managed information, it is possible to appropriately manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing and holding the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, since the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the privilege granting means has the predetermined storage executing means, the processing load of the first control means is prevented from extremely increasing. However, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as already described.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to the feature F2, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means. It becomes possible to prevent it.

Feature F3. When the specific event occurs, the predetermined storage execution means executes a storage process of information corresponding to the specific event in the predetermined storage means to determine the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the specific event in the gaming machine or the outside of the gaming machine. Specific information that can be specified by the device (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means. So that
The first control means is
First transmitting means for transmitting the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the predetermined event occurs (function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
Second transmitting means for transmitting the second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the specific event occurs (function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
The gaming machine according to the feature F1 or F2, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the feature F3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined event but also the specific information corresponding to the specific event is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the occurrence mode of the predetermined event but also the occurrence mode of the specific event. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of the occurrence frequency between the predetermined event and the specific event.

Further, when a predetermined event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a specific event occurs, the second information is utilized by using the second signal path. It is transmitted to the second control means. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and it is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the second control means.

Feature F4. The first control means transmits, to the second control means, identification information that enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation is present, using the third route. (In the first, third to ninth and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, in the second embodiment, the open/close execution mode signal in the main CPU63, The gaming machine according to feature F3, which is provided with a function of outputting either a high frequency support mode signal or a door opening signal.

According to the characteristic F4, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is the predetermined situation. Further, since the identification information that enables identification of whether or not the predetermined situation is present is transmitted to the second control means using the third route, the second control means transmits the identification information to the first information and the first information. It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing it from other information such as 2 information.

Feature F5. The first control means transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event to the second control means. The gaming machine described in the feature F3 or F4, which is provided with a transmitting unit (a function of executing a recognition process in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature F5, the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. It is not necessary for the second control means to store the correspondence of these pieces of information in advance. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to Feature F5, wherein the identification information transmission unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit when supply of operating power to the first control unit is started.

According to the feature F6, since the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when the supply of the operating power to the first control means is started, a predetermined event and a specific event may occur. In the situation, it becomes possible for the second control means to be able to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means.

Feature F7. The identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Amusement machine.

According to the feature F7, the identification information is transmitted to the second control means by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, and therefore a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with.

Feature F8. Correspondence relationship information that enables the second control means to specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event when the identification information is received. The correspondence storage means (correspondence relationship memory 116) stores means (function for executing correspondence relationship setting processing in the management CPU 112) according to any one of features F5 to F7. Amusement machine.

According to the feature F8, the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the type of event is stored in the second control means. Thereby, the second control means is provided with information that enables the second control means to specify the type of event corresponding to the information to be transmitted, every time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. There is no need to do it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the first information and the second information.

Feature F9. The first control means transmits third information, which enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present, to the second control means by using a third route. (In the first, third to ninth and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, in the second embodiment, the open/close execution mode signal in the main CPU63, With the function to output either a high frequency support mode signal or a door opening signal),
A feature F5 characterized in that the second control means can recognize the third information as information that can identify whether or not the predetermined situation is present, without receiving the identification information. A gaming machine according to any one of to F8.

According to the feature F9, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is the predetermined situation. Further, the fact that the third information is information that can identify whether or not the predetermined condition is present can be identified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. .. This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature F10. The game machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the characteristic F10, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described in the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

For the configurations of the features F1 to F10, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions relating to the characteristic A group, the characteristic B group, the characteristic C group, the characteristic D group, the characteristic E group, and the characteristic F group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko game machine, the game machine front face section is provided with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device. , Is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entering portion provided in the game area, for example, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage part. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known that includes an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are launched. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to manage the gaming machine appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature G group>
Features G1. A first control means (main side CPU 63),
Second control means (management side CPU 112) for receiving the information transmitted from the first control means,
Equipped with
The first control means is
First transmission means for transmitting the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the first event occurs (function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
Second transmitting means for transmitting the second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the second event occurs (function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
Identification information transmitting means (main side) for transmitting to the second control means identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event. A function of executing recognition processing in the CPU 63),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to Feature G1, the first information is sent to the second control means using the first signal path when the first event occurs, and the second signal path is used when the second event occurs. Then, the second information is transmitted to the second control means. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and it is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the second control means.

Further, since the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, these information items are transmitted. It is not necessary for the second control means to store the correspondence relationship of No. in advance. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Features G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to the feature G2, when the supply of the operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means. In a situation in which a game ball may enter the ball, it is possible for the second controller to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first controller and the ball entered. Become.

Features G3. The identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Amusement machine.

According to the feature G3, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a configuration is provided in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with.

Features G4. When the identification information is received, the second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event. Any one of the characteristics G1 to G3 characterized in that it is provided with means (a function for executing the correspondence setting processing in the management side CPU 112) for storing the relationship information in the correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116) The game machine described.

According to the feature G4, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means is stored in the second control means. With this, it is necessary to provide the second control means with information that enables the second control means to identify an event corresponding to the information to be transmitted, every time the first control means transmits the first information or the second information. Disappears. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the first information and the second information.

Features G5. The first control means transmits third information, which enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present, to the second control means by using a third route. (In the first, third to ninth and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, in the second embodiment, the open/close execution mode signal in the main CPU63, With the function to output either a high frequency support mode signal or a door opening signal),
A feature G1 characterized in that the second control means can recognize the third information as information that can identify whether or not the predetermined situation is present, without receiving the identification information. The gaming machine according to any one of to G4.

According to the characteristic G5, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the first event and the occurrence mode of the second event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is the predetermined situation. Further, the fact that the third information is information that can identify whether or not the predetermined condition is present can be identified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. .. This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Features G6. As a signal path capable of transmitting information from the first control unit to the second control unit, the number of types of information that is greater than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit is used. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that a signal path is provided.

According to the characteristic G6, since the number of signal paths that is larger than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means is provided, the number of signal paths of the information is changed according to the model of the gaming machine. Even if the number of types is increased or decreased, it is possible to deal with it without changing the configuration related to the signal path. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the versatility of the second control means.

Features G7. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the characteristic G7, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as already described in the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features G1 to G7, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the characteristic group G, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko game machine, the game machine front face section is provided with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device. , Is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entering portion provided in the game area, for example, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage part. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known that includes an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are launched. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to make the configuration relating to communication suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature H group>
Features H1. A transparent plate (window panel 52) is arranged on the front side of the game board (for example, the game board 233), and the game ball (game ball B1) is a game area (game area PA) between the game board and the transparent board. ) In the gaming machine that flows down from upstream to downstream,
The game board has predetermined changing means (first left/right distribution nails 213, 242, second) for changing the movement mode of the game ball after contact depending on the position of the contacting game ball in the depth direction in the game area. The left/right distribution nail 214, the reversal nail 251, the front/rear distribution nail 262, the repulsion nail 322, the front/rear distribution tables 351, 391, 392, the position change passage 423, the replacement position change passage 442, and the inclined nail). A gaming machine characterized by.

According to the feature H1, since the game balls in the game area can be dispersed in a manner that the course of the game ball is different according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction, only the lateral position of the contacting game ball It is possible to increase the interest of the game by increasing the variation of the movement of the game ball in the game area, as compared with the gaming machine that influences the path of the game ball.

The game board in this feature H1 is a plate-like object having a predetermined changing means, and defines a game area for playing a game.

Features H2. The predetermined changing means bounces off the game ball by applying a resistance to the game ball that has come into contact with the game ball from the upstream side of the game area. The movement mode of the game ball due to the bounce back is the contact in the depth direction of the game ball. The gaming machine described in the feature H1 is characterized in that it is different depending on the position.

According to the feature H2, the movement mode of the game ball after the bounce back can be made different according to the contact position in the depth direction of the game ball, and the movement mode can be changed by bouncing the game ball flowing down the game area. It is possible to add a novel movement mode of changing the bounce direction according to the position in the depth direction while adopting the conventional configuration of changing the position.

Features H3. The predetermined change means is for rolling a game ball placed above from the upstream side of the game area, and a movement mode of the game ball due to the rolling is determined according to a contact position of the game ball in the depth direction. The gaming machine according to the feature H1 or H2, which is different.

According to the feature H3, since the movement mode of the game ball is changed in the process of rolling the game ball, the movement mode of the game ball according to the contact position in the depth direction is assumed to be the mode assumed at the game machine design stage. Easy to control.

Features H4. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein a plurality of the predetermined changing means are arranged in parallel in the game area.

According to the characteristic H4, the game ball that has reached the region where the plurality of predetermined changing means are arranged in parallel easily contacts any one of the predetermined changing means. As a result, it becomes easy to change the movement mode of the game ball according to the contact position in the depth direction.

Features H5. Another change means (first left/right distribution nails 213, 242, second left/right distribution nail 214) in which the movement mode of the game ball after contact according to the position of the contacting game ball in the depth direction is different from the predetermined changing means. , Reverse nail 251, front-rear distribution nail 262, rear nail 271, front priority member 291, repulsion nail 322, front-rear distribution table 351,391,392, position change passage 423, replacement position change passage 442, inclined nail). Prepare,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the different changing means is provided in parallel with the predetermined changing means in the game area.

According to the characteristic H5, the game sphere that has reached the region where the predetermined changing means and the different changing means are arranged in parallel is located at the contact position in the depth direction depending on which of the predetermined changing means and the different changing means is contacted. It is possible to change the moving mode of the game ball according to the above. In this case, the player pays attention to which of the predetermined changing means and the different changing means the game ball comes into contact with while expecting the movement mode desired by the player. Further, for example, depending on the position in the depth direction when one of the predetermined changing means and another changing means is contacted, it is possible to make the movement mode of the game ball different when contacting the other after that. .. In this case, it becomes possible to correlate the movement mode of the game ball by both changing means with each other.

Features H6. Features H1 to H5 characterized in that the predetermined changing means changes a lateral movement mode of the game ball in the game area after the contact in accordance with a position of the game ball in contact in the depth direction. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the feature H6, it is possible to change the lateral movement mode of the game ball according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction. As a result, it becomes possible to correlate the position of the game ball in the depth direction and the lateral movement mode of the game ball, and a player who pays attention to the movement of the game ball recognizes the position of the game ball in multiple directions. The movement of the game ball will be predicted. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Features H7. The predetermined changing means,
First predetermined changing means (first distribution surface 217a, which changes the lateral movement mode of the game ball contacting the first predetermined range in the depth direction (for example, the back side of the game area PA) in the first predetermined mode. 232a, 244a, the first inversion surface 254a, the rear nail 271, the low-repulsion member 333, the first inclined portion of the inclined nail),
A second predetermined change that changes the lateral movement mode of the game ball that contacts a second predetermined range (for example, the front side of the game area PA) that does not overlap with the first predetermined range in the depth direction in a second predetermined mode. Means (second distribution surfaces 218a, 234a, 245a, second reversal surface 254b, front priority member 291, high repulsion portion 334d, second inclined portion of the inclined nail),
A gaming machine according to feature H6, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the feature H7, the lateral movement mode of the game ball after the contact is uniquely changed according to the contact position in the depth direction. As a result, in the configuration in which the movement mode of the lateral game sphere is changed according to the contact position in the depth direction, the player is expected to some extent of the subsequent movement mode of the lateral game sphere with respect to the position of the game sphere in the depth direction. It becomes possible.

Features H8. The first predetermined changing means applies a force including a leftward component to the game ball contacting the first predetermined range,
The gaming machine according to Feature H7, wherein the second predetermined changing unit applies a force including a rightward component to the game ball contacting in the second predetermined range.

According to the feature H8, the lateral component of the force applied to the game ball is exactly opposite according to the contact position in the depth direction. As a result, it is possible to significantly change the movement mode of the game ball in the lateral direction according to the contact position in the depth direction.

Features H9. The first predetermined changing means applies a force including a component in a predetermined direction, which is one of leftward and rightward, to the game ball contacting the first predetermined range,
The second predetermined changing means applies a force including a component in the predetermined direction to the game ball in contact with the second predetermined range, and a force larger than the first predetermined changing means as the force in the predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to Feature H7, which is provided.

According to the feature H9, regardless of whether the contact position in the depth direction is in the first predetermined range or the second predetermined range, the same lateral force is applied to the game ball, and the magnitude of the force is changed. It is possible to make them different. As a result, it is possible to move the game ball in the same lateral direction while varying the amount of movement according to the contact position in the depth direction.

Feature H10. Any one of the features H1 to H9, wherein the predetermined changing means changes a moving mode of the game ball in the depth direction after the contact depending on a position of the game ball in contact in the depth direction. Gaming machine described in.

According to the feature H10, it is possible to change the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction. As a result, it is possible to diversify the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature H11. The predetermined changing means,
Third predetermined changing means (first reversing surface 254a, first inversion surface 254a, first changing surface 254a, which changes the movement mode in the depth direction of the game ball that contacts the third predetermined range in the depth direction (for example, the back side of the game area PA) 1 distribution surface 264a, first downstream surface 372, inner side wall surface 443a),
A fourth predetermined change that changes a movement mode in the depth direction of a game ball that comes into contact with a fourth predetermined range (for example, the front side of the game area PA) that does not overlap with the third predetermined range in the depth direction. Means (second inversion surface 254b, second distribution surface 265a, second downstream surface 373, front side wall surfaces 422b, 443b),
A gaming machine according to the feature H10, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the feature H11, the movement mode in the depth direction of the game sphere after the contact is uniquely changed according to the contact position in the depth direction. Thereby, in the configuration in which the movement mode of the game ball in the lateral direction is changed according to the contact position in the depth direction, the player is predicted to some extent the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction thereafter with respect to the position of the game ball in the depth direction. It becomes possible.

Features H12. The third predetermined changing means applies a force including a forward component to the game ball contacting the third predetermined range,
The gaming machine according to Feature H11, wherein the fourth predetermined changing unit applies a force including a backward component to the game ball that contacts the fourth predetermined range.

According to the feature H12, the component in the depth direction of the force applied to the game ball becomes the exact opposite according to the contact position in the depth direction. As a result, it becomes possible to significantly change the movement mode of the game sphere in the depth direction according to the contact position in the depth direction.

Features H13. The gaming machine according to feature H12, wherein the third predetermined range is located on the inner side of the fourth predetermined range.

According to the feature H13, the position of the game ball in the depth direction can be changed between the back side and the front side by the existence of the predetermined changing means.

Features H14. The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H13, wherein the predetermined changing means has a coefficient of restitution that differs depending on a position in the depth direction.

According to the feature H14, it is possible to apply a reaction force having a different size to the game balls having different collision positions in the depth direction. Thereby, the bounce speed of the game ball after colliding with the predetermined changing means can be made different. In this way, by increasing the variation of the movement of the game ball in the game area, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature H15. The predetermined changing means,
Resin members (first left/right distribution members 215, 243, second left/right distribution member 231, reversing member 254) for changing the movement mode of the contacting game ball according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction. , The front-rear distribution member 263, the plate member 292),
A metal member (fixing member 216, support members 293, 294) for fixing the predetermined changing means to the game board in a state in which the resin member is exposed in the game area,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H14, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the feature H15, the member for changing the course of the game ball is made of resin which is easy to mold, so that the degree of freedom in designing the member for changing the course of the game ball can be increased. Further, by adopting a structure in which the resin member is firmly fixed with a metal member, the durability of the predetermined changing means is improved, and the situation in which maintenance of the gaming machine equipped with the predetermined changing means is frequently required It can be avoided.

Feature H16. Any one of features H1 to H15 characterized in that the predetermined changing means is fixed to a base body (left-side guiding member 255) provided separately from the game board and fixed to the game board. The game machine described.

According to the feature H16, by fixing the base body in which the predetermined changing means is integrated to the game board, the predetermined changing means can be provided on the game board. Thereby, it becomes possible to provide the predetermined changing means on the game board after carefully performing the alignment of the predetermined changing means.

Feature H17. The gaming machine according to Feature H16, wherein a plurality of the predetermined changing units are fixed to the base body.

According to the feature H17, since it is possible to provide these predetermined changing means on the game board after carefully performing the relative alignment of the plurality of predetermined changing means, the relative alignment of the plurality of predetermined changing means It is possible to improve accuracy.

Feature H18. Any one of features H1 to H17 characterized in that the game board is provided with an obstacle nail (obstacle nail 228) that changes the moving manner of the game ball after contact in a manner corresponding to the contact position in the left-right direction. Gaming machine described in.

According to the feature H18, it is possible to provide a sufficient number of means for dispersing the paths of the game balls on the game board. When changing all the obstacle nails in the conventional game board to the predetermined changing means, if the predetermined changing means is manufactured larger than the obstacle nail in order to secure the strength, the number of predetermined changing means that can be provided on the game board is limited. I will end up. On the other hand, as means for dispersing the paths of the game balls on the game board, by mixing small obstacle nails and large predetermined changing means, the game balls that can be provided on the game board are dispersed. It is possible to suppress the decrease of the means and sufficiently disperse the game balls. Then, it is possible to have a configuration of the game board capable of both changing the course according to the position of the game ball in the left-right direction and changing the course according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction.

Features H19. The predetermined changing means changes the lateral movement mode of the game ball in the game area after contact according to the position of the contacting game ball in the depth direction,
The game board is located at a position upstream of the predetermined changing means in the game area, and is a specific changing means (reversing nail 251, which enables the moving mode of the contacting game ball in the depth direction to be a specific mode). Any one of features H1 to H18 characterized in that it is provided with a front-rear distribution nail 262, a front-rear distribution table 351, 391, 392, a position changing passage 423, a replacement position changing passage 442, a guide passage 461). The game machine described.

According to the feature H19, it is possible to change the position of the game ball in the depth direction by providing the specific changing means. The game board is provided with not only the specific changing means but also predetermined changing means for changing the lateral movement mode of the game sphere according to the contact position in the depth direction, thereby varying the movement mode of the game sphere. It becomes possible to make it.

Further, since the specific changing means is provided on the upstream side of the predetermined changing means, depending on whether or not the position of the game ball in the depth direction is changed by the specific changing means, the game ball by the predetermined changing means thereafter. It is possible to change the lateral distribution mode of the. As a result, it becomes possible to correlate the movement mode of the game ball by the specific changing means and the predetermined changing means with each other.

Feature H20. The game board is provided with an opening (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) that serves as an opportunity to provide advantageous benefits to the player by entering a game ball.
The game sphere that has come into contact with the predetermined changing means after the movement mode in the depth direction has become the particular manner by the particular changing means is more than the game sphere that has come into contact with the predetermined changing means without being the particular aspect. The gaming machine according to feature H19, wherein the specific changing means and the predetermined changing means are provided so that the player can easily enter the opening.

According to the characteristic H20, when the movement mode of the game sphere in the depth direction is set to the specific mode by the specific changing means, it is easier to enter the opening portion, so that the player's attention to the specific changing means is increased. It becomes possible. In addition, even if the game ball has the movement mode in the depth direction set to the specific mode by the specific changing means, it will come into contact with the predetermined changing means after that, and the movement mode in the depth direction becomes the specific mode in the process up to the contact. Can be different modes, so that it becomes possible for the player to pay attention to the process until the game ball contacts the predetermined changing means.

Feature H21. The game according to feature H19 or H20, characterized in that the specific changing means changes the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction after the contact depending on the position of the contacting game ball in the depth direction. Machine.

According to the feature H21, it is possible to change the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction. As a result, it is possible to diversify the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature H22. The specific changing means,
A first specific changing unit (first inversion surface 254a, first inversion surface 254a, a first reversing surface 254a 1 distribution surface 264a, inner side wall surface 443a),
A second specific change in which the moving mode in the depth direction of the game ball that contacts a second specific range (for example, the front side of the game area PA) that does not overlap with the first specific range in the depth direction is changed in the second specific mode. Means (second inversion surface 254b, second distribution surface 265a, front side wall surfaces 422b, 443b),
The gaming machine described in the feature H21, which is characterized by including:

According to the feature H22, the movement mode of the game sphere in the depth direction after the contact is uniquely changed according to the contact position in the depth direction. Thereby, in the configuration in which the movement mode of the game ball in the lateral direction is changed according to the contact position in the depth direction, the player is predicted to some extent the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction thereafter with respect to the position of the game ball in the depth direction. It becomes possible.

Feature H23. The first specific changing means gives a force including a forward component to the game ball contacting the first specific range,
The gaming machine according to Feature H22, wherein the second specific changing unit applies a force including a backward component to the game ball that contacts the second specific range.

According to the feature H23, the component in the depth direction of the reaction force applied to the game ball is exactly opposite according to the contact position in the depth direction. As a result, it becomes possible to significantly change the movement mode of the game sphere in the depth direction according to the contact position in the depth direction.

Feature H24. The gaming machine according to feature H23, wherein the first specific range exists on the inner side of the second specific range.

According to the feature H24, it is possible to change the position of the game ball in the depth direction between the back side and the front side in reverse due to the presence of the specific changing means.

Feature H25. The specific changing means has a guide passage (position changing passage 423, replacement position changing passage 442, guide passage 461) through which the game ball passes, and a movement mode in the depth direction of the game ball discharged from the guide passage. The gaming machine according to any one of features H19 to H24, wherein the gaming machine has a configuration capable of being the specific mode.

According to the characteristic H25, the player who pays attention to the position of the game ball in the depth direction pays attention to whether or not the game ball enters the guide passage, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

Feature H26. The game machine according to feature H25, wherein the movement mode in the depth direction of the game ball discharged from the guide passage is changed according to the passage mode of the game ball in the guide passage.

According to the feature H26, the movement mode in the depth direction of the game ball discharged from the guide passage is determined according to the passage mode of the game ball in the guide passage, so that the game ball enters the guide passage. It becomes possible to pay attention to the player whether or not it is possible, and it is possible to pay attention to the player as to how the game balls pass through the guide passage.

Feature H27. In the feature H25 or H26, the guide passage changes the movement mode of the game ball discharged from the guide passage in the depth direction according to the position of the game ball at the entrance of the guide passage. The game machine described.

According to the feature H27, the movement mode of the game ball discharged from the guide passage in the depth direction varies depending on the position of the game ball at the entrance of the guide passage, so that the game ball enters the guide passage. It becomes possible to pay attention to the player whether or not, and also to pay attention to the position of the game ball when entering the entrance of the guide passage.

Feature H28. The guide passage is formed by being divided into a plurality of passage walls, and is provided extending in the vertical direction,
Of the plurality of passage walls, a predetermined passage wall (front side wall surfaces 422b and 443b, a rear side wall surface 443a) comes into contact with a game ball passing through the guide passage, and the depth direction of the game ball discharged from the guide passage. 27. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H25 to H27, wherein the movement mode of the game machine is the specific mode.

According to the characteristic H28, the configuration in which the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction is changed by contact with the passage wall of the guide passage can achieve the excellent effect as already described while simplifying the configuration. Is possible.

Feature H29. The guide passage has a game ball existing in a first range in the depth direction (near the surfaces of the game boards 421 and 451) at the entrance of the guide passage, and at the exit of the guide passage, the front side of the first range. The game ball existing in the second range (near the rear surface of the window panel 52) which is on the front side of the first range at the entrance of the guide passage from the second range at the exit of the guide passage. The gaming machine according to any one of features H25 to H28, wherein the gaming machine is also configured to move to the back side.

According to the feature H29, it is possible to guide the game ball to a position opposite to the position in the depth direction at the entrance of the guide passage. This makes it possible to positively change the position of the game ball in the depth direction.

Feature H30. The guide passage is in the depth direction at the exit of the guide passage for the game ball existing on the front side of the first range and on the rear side of the second range at the entrance of the guide passage. The gaming machine according to feature H29, which is configured not to apply a force for changing the position of.

According to the feature H30, it is possible to cause a situation in which the position of the game ball in the depth direction does not change even when passing through the guide passage. This makes it possible to diversify the position of the game ball in the depth direction after passing through the guide passage.

Features H31. In the feature H25, the guide passage is configured to set the movement mode of the game ball discharged from the guide passage in the depth direction to the specific mode regardless of the passing mode of the game ball in the guide passage. The game machine described.

According to the feature H31, since the game ball that has entered the guide passage has a certain movement mode in the depth direction after passing through the guide passage, the influence of the guide passage on the game board can be increased. Becomes Therefore, it becomes possible to attract the interest of the player to the movement of the game ball around the guide passage, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature H32. The guide passage is provided in a passage forming member (passage forming member 422, exchange passage forming member 441, guide member 471, exchange guide member 561) provided separately from the game board. The gaming machine according to any one of features H25 to H31.

According to the feature H32, since the guide passage is provided in the passage forming body which is provided separately from the game board, the depth of the game ball can be changed by using the same game board by exchanging the passage forming body. It is possible to change the movement mode of the direction.

Feature H33. The game board is provided with an opening (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) that serves as an opportunity to provide advantageous benefits to the player by entering a game ball.
The predetermined change means sorts the movement mode of the contacting game ball after the contact into a movement mode in which the probability of entering the opening is high and a movement mode in which the probability of entering the opening is low. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H32.

According to the feature H33, the probability that the game ball wins the opening differs depending on the position of the game ball in the depth direction. In this way, the position of the game ball in the depth direction upstream of the opening is reflected in the game result, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature H34. The game board is provided with guide means (stage unit 354) for guiding a game ball to a place with a high probability of entering the opening.
Characteristic H33 characterized in that the predetermined changing means has a case of guiding the game ball to the guiding means according to a position of the game ball in the depth direction and a case of not guiding the game ball to the guiding means. Gaming machine described in.

According to the feature H34, by making the player pay attention to whether or not the game ball whose course has been changed by the predetermined changing means is guided to the guiding means, the player's interest in the movement of the game ball is increased, The interest in can be improved. Further, by reflecting the difference in the position of the game ball in the depth direction in the game area in the game result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features H1 to H34, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature group I>
Feature I1. A transparent plate (window panel 52) is arranged on the front side of the game board (eg, game board 261), and a game ball (game ball B1) is a game area (game area PA) between the game board and the transparent board. ) In the gaming machine that flows down from upstream to downstream,
The game board can be contacted by a game ball whose position in the depth direction in the game area is in a contactable range (for example, either one of the back side and the front side of the game area PA), and the game ball in the depth direction. A game ball whose position does not exist in the contactable range cannot be contacted, and special changing means (rear nail 271, front priority member 291, passage forming member 422) that can change the movement mode of the contacting game ball. , A passage forming member 441) for exchange, which is characterized by being provided.

According to the characteristic I1, only the game ball whose position in the depth direction in the game area exists in the contactable range can contact the special changing means. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to come into contact with the special change means expects that the game ball exists in the contactable range, and the player's attention to the position in the depth direction of the game ball in the game area. It is possible to increase the degree. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The game board in this feature I1 is a plate-like one provided with a special changing means, and defines a game area for playing a game.

Feature I2. The special changing means is present from the surface of the game board to an intermediate position in the depth direction of the game area so that the contactable range is on the back side of the game area. The gaming machine described in I1.

According to the feature I2, only the game ball existing on the back side of the game area can come into contact with the special changing means. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to come into contact with the special changing means expects that the game ball exists behind the game area. Further, since the special changing means is arranged to extend from the surface of the game board to an intermediate position in the depth direction, the special changing means can be provided with a simple structure.

Feature I3. The game board is provided with an opening (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) that serves as an opportunity to provide advantageous benefits to the player by entering a game ball.
The game ball that has reached the area where the special changing means is provided is easy to enter or not enter the opening, depending on whether or not the special changing means contacts the area. The gaming machine according to the feature I1 or I2, which is characterized by differentness.

According to the characteristic I3, whether or not the game ball enters the opening portion or the ease of entering the game ball into the opening portion differs depending on whether or not the special changing means is contacted. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the special changing means.

Feature I4. Any one of features I1 to I3 characterized in that the game board includes an obstacle nail (obstacle nail 228) for changing the movement manner of the game ball after contact in a manner corresponding to the contact position in the left-right direction. Gaming machine described in.

According to the feature I4, it is possible to provide a sufficient number of means for dispersing the paths of the game balls on the game board. When changing all the obstacle nails in the conventional game board to the predetermined changing means, if the predetermined changing means is manufactured larger than the obstacle nail in order to secure the strength, the number of predetermined changing means that can be provided on the game board is limited. I will end up. On the other hand, as means for dispersing the paths of the game balls on the game board, by mixing small obstacle nails and large predetermined changing means, the game balls that can be provided on the game board are dispersed. It is possible to suppress the decrease of the means and sufficiently disperse the game balls. Then, it is possible to have a configuration of the game board capable of both changing the course according to the position of the game ball in the left-right direction and changing the course according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction.

Feature I5. On the upstream side of the special changing unit, a specific changing unit (front-rear distribution nail 262, obstacle nail 228, concave front-rear distribution nail) that allows the game ball to contact regardless of the position in the depth direction is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of the features I1 to I4.

According to the feature I5, the game ball that has reached the position of the specific changing means surely contacts the specific changing means, whereas the game ball that has reached the position of the special changing means does not contact the special changing means. Can happen. Since the specific changing means is provided on the upstream side of the special changing means, the player is informed that the game ball does not come into contact with the special changing means despite reaching the position of the special changing means. It is possible to give unexpectedness.

Feature I6. The special change means and the specific change means are provided so as to be arranged in a predetermined direction,
The gaming machine according to feature I5, wherein a plurality of the specific changing means are provided so as to sandwich the special changing means in the predetermined direction.

According to the characteristic I6, a situation in which the game ball is guided in a predetermined direction by the special changing means and the specific changing means according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction, and the game ball in the predetermined direction at the position of the special changing means. It is possible to cause a situation in which the guidance of is ended. As a result, a player who expects the game ball to be guided in a predetermined direction pays attention to the arrangement area of the special changing means and the specific changing means, and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

Feature I7. The game machine according to feature I5 or I6, wherein the specific changing means is capable of changing the position of the game ball in contact in the depth direction.

According to the characteristic I7, the position in the depth direction of the game ball before reaching the position of the special changing means is changed from the position so far by the game ball contacting the specific changing means. As a result, it becomes possible to draw the player's attention to the presence or absence of contact of the game ball with the specific changing means and the position in the depth direction of the game ball after contact.

Feature I8. The gaming machine according to feature I7, wherein the specific changing means changes a moving mode of the game ball in the depth direction after contacting in accordance with a position of the game ball in contact in the depth direction.

According to the feature I8, it is possible to change the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction. As a result, it is possible to diversify the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature I9. The specific changing means,
First specific changing means (first distribution surface 264a) for changing the movement mode in the depth direction of the game ball contacting the first specific range in the depth direction (for example, the back side of the game area PA). When,
A second specific change in which the moving mode in the depth direction of the game ball that contacts a second specific range (for example, the front side of the game area PA) that does not overlap with the first specific range in the depth direction is changed in the second specific mode. Means (second distribution surface 265a),
A gaming machine according to feature I8, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature I9, the movement mode in the depth direction of the game sphere after the contact is uniquely changed according to the contact position in the depth direction. Thereby, in the configuration in which the movement mode of the game ball in the lateral direction is changed according to the contact position in the depth direction, the player is predicted to some extent the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction thereafter with respect to the position of the game ball in the depth direction. It becomes possible.

Feature I10. The first specific changing means gives a force including a forward component to the game ball contacting the first specific range,
The game machine according to feature I9, wherein the second specific changing means applies a force including a backward component to the game ball contacting the second specific range.

According to the characteristic I10, the component in the depth direction of the reaction force applied to the game ball is exactly opposite according to the contact position in the depth direction. As a result, it becomes possible to significantly change the movement mode of the game sphere in the depth direction according to the contact position in the depth direction.

Feature I11. The gaming machine according to feature I10, wherein the first specific range is located on the back side of the second specific range.

According to the characteristic I11, the position of the game ball in the depth direction can be changed between the back side and the front side by the existence of the specific changing means.

It should be noted that features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to the configurations of the features I1 to I11. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Features J1. A transparent plate (window panel 52) is arranged on the front side of the game board (eg, game board 261), and a game ball (game ball B1) is a game area (game area PA) between the game board and the transparent board. ) In the gaming machine that flows down from upstream to downstream,
The game board is a specific changing means (reversing nail 251, front-rear sorting nail 262, front-rear sorting table 351 and 391) that makes it possible to set the movement mode of the contacting game ball in the depth direction in the game area as a specific manner. , 392, a position change passage 423, a replacement position change passage 442, and a guide passage 461).

According to the feature J1, it is possible to change the position of the game ball in the depth direction by providing the specific changing means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the movement mode of the game balls in the game area not only in the lateral direction but also in the depth direction, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The game board according to this feature J1 is a plate-like object having a specific changing means, and defines a game area for playing a game.

Features J2. The game machine according to feature J1, wherein the specific changing means changes a movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction after the contact according to a position of the game ball in contact in the depth direction.

According to the feature J2, it is possible to change the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction. As a result, it is possible to diversify the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Features J3. The specific changing means,
A first specific changing unit (first inversion surface 254a, first inversion surface 254a, a first reversing surface 254a 1 distribution surface 264a, inner side wall surface 443a),
A second specific change in which the moving mode in the depth direction of the game ball that contacts a second specific range (for example, the front side of the game area PA) that does not overlap with the first specific range in the depth direction is changed in the second specific mode. Means (second inversion surface 254b, second distribution surface 265a, front side wall surfaces 422b, 443b),
A gaming machine according to feature J2, which is provided with:

According to the feature J3, the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction after the contact is uniquely changed according to the contact position in the depth direction. Thereby, in the configuration in which the movement mode of the game ball in the lateral direction is changed according to the contact position in the depth direction, the player is predicted to some extent the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction thereafter with respect to the position of the game ball in the depth direction. It becomes possible.

Features J4. The first specific changing means gives a force including a forward component to the game ball contacting the first specific range,
The game machine according to feature J3, wherein the second specific changing means applies a force including a backward component to the game ball contacting the second specific range.

According to the feature J4, the component in the depth direction of the reaction force applied to the game ball is exactly opposite according to the contact position in the depth direction. As a result, it becomes possible to significantly change the movement mode of the game sphere in the depth direction according to the contact position in the depth direction.

Features J5. The gaming machine according to feature J4, wherein the first specific range exists on the inner side of the second specific range.

According to the feature J5, the position of the game ball in the depth direction can be changed between the back side and the front side by the existence of the specific changing means.

Features J6. The specific changing means has a guide passage (position changing passage 423, replacement position changing passage 442, guide passage 461) through which the game ball passes, and a movement mode in the depth direction of the game ball discharged from the guide passage. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, wherein the gaming machine has a configuration capable of being the specific mode.

According to the feature J6, the player who pays attention to the position of the game ball in the depth direction pays attention to whether or not the game ball enters the guide passage, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

Features J7. The game machine according to feature J6, wherein a movement mode of the game ball discharged from the guide passage in the depth direction is changed according to a passage mode of the game ball in the guide passage.

According to the feature J7, the movement mode of the game ball discharged from the guide passage in the depth direction is set to a specific mode according to the passage mode of the game ball in the guide passage, so that the game ball enters the guide passage. It becomes possible to pay attention to the player whether or not it is possible, and it is possible to pay attention to the player as to how the game balls pass through the guide passage.

Features J8. In the feature J6 or J7, the guide passage is configured to change the movement mode in the depth direction of the game ball discharged from the guide passage according to the position of the game ball at the entrance of the guide passage. The game machine described.

According to the feature J8, the movement mode in the depth direction of the game ball discharged from the guide passage differs depending on the position of the game ball at the entrance of the guide passage, so that the game ball enters the guide passage. It becomes possible to pay attention to the player whether or not, and also to pay attention to the position of the game ball when entering the entrance of the guide passage.

Features J9. The guide passage is formed by being divided into a plurality of passage walls, and is provided extending in the vertical direction,
Of the plurality of passage walls, a predetermined passage wall (front side wall surfaces 422b and 443b, a rear side wall surface 443a) comes into contact with a game ball passing through the guide passage, and the depth direction of the game ball discharged from the guide passage. The game machine according to any one of the features J6 to J8, wherein the movement mode of the game machine is the specific mode.

According to the feature J9, since the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction is changed by contact with the passage wall of the guide passage, the excellent effect as already described can be achieved while the configuration is simplified. Is possible.

Features J10. The guide passage has a game ball existing in a first range in the depth direction (near the surfaces of the game boards 421 and 451) at the entrance of the guide passage, and at the exit of the guide passage, the front side of the first range. The game ball existing in the second range (near the rear surface of the window panel 52) which is on the front side of the first range at the entrance of the guide passage from the second range at the exit of the guide passage. The game machine according to any one of features J6 to J9, wherein the game machine is also configured to move to the back side.

According to feature J10, it is possible to guide the game ball to a position opposite to the position in the depth direction at the entrance of the guide passage. This makes it possible to positively change the position of the game ball in the depth direction.

Feature J11. The guide passage is in the depth direction at the exit of the guide passage for the game ball existing on the front side of the first range and on the rear side of the second range at the entrance of the guide passage. The game machine according to feature J10, wherein the game machine is configured not to apply a force for changing the position of the game machine.

According to the feature J11, it is possible to cause a situation in which the position of the game ball in the depth direction does not change even when passing through the guide passage. This makes it possible to diversify the position of the game ball in the depth direction after passing through the guide passage.

Features J12. In the feature J6, the guide passage is configured to set the movement mode of the game ball discharged from the guide passage in the depth direction to the specific mode regardless of the passage mode of the game ball in the guide passage. The game machine described.

According to the feature J12, since the game ball that has entered the guide passage has a certain movement mode in the depth direction after passing through the guide passage, the influence of the guide passage on the game board can be increased. Becomes Therefore, it becomes possible to attract the interest of the player to the movement of the game ball around the guide passage, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Features J13. The guide passage is provided in a passage forming member (passage forming member 422, exchange passage forming member 441, guide member 471, exchange guide member 561) provided separately from the game board. The gaming machine according to any one of features J6 to J12.

According to Feature J13, since the guide passage is provided in the passage forming body that is provided separately from the game board, the depth of the game ball can be changed while using the same game board by exchanging the passage forming body. It is possible to change the movement mode of the direction.

Features J14. The game board is provided with an opening (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) that serves as an opportunity to provide advantageous benefits to the player by entering a game ball.
The specific changing means sorts the movement mode of the contacting game ball after the contact into a movement mode having a high probability of entering the opening and a movement mode having a low probability of entering the opening. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J13.

According to the feature J14, the probability of the game ball winning the opening differs depending on the position of the game ball in the depth direction. In this way, the position of the game ball in the depth direction upstream of the opening is reflected in the game result, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Features J15. The game board is provided with guide means (stage unit 354) for guiding a game ball to a place with a high probability of entering the opening.
Characteristic J14 characterized in that the specific changing means has a case of guiding the game ball to the guiding means according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction and a case of not guiding the game ball to the guiding means. Gaming machine described in.

According to the feature J15, by making the player pay attention to whether or not the game ball whose course has been changed by the predetermined changing means is guided to the guiding means, the player's interest in the movement of the game ball is increased and the game is improved. The interest in can be improved. Further, by reflecting the difference in the position of the game ball in the depth direction in the game area in the game result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features J1 to J15, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the characteristic H group, the characteristic I group, and the characteristic J group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine includes a game board that defines a game area in which a game ball flows down, and the game board has nails and nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area. Various members such as a windmill are provided. Further, the game board is provided with openings for paying out game balls, such as a general winning opening, a special electric winning device, and an operating opening. The game balls launched from the game ball launching device flow down the game area while colliding with nails and the like, and when the game balls enter the general winning opening, the special electricity winning device, the working opening, etc. The game ball is paid out to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately distribute the game balls in the game area, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. Insertion holes (via holes 793) through which the terminals (pins 784a to 784t, terminals 775) of the mounting components (connectors 781 to 783, first operating port connector 955, second operating port connector 956, and insertion mounting component) are inserted. 793a to 793t) and a connecting region (short-circuit preventing hole 761, joining hole 762) provided around the insertion hole, and the terminal of the mounting component is inserted into the insertion hole. In a state, in a gaming machine including a board (for example, a main control board 61) in which the terminals of the mounting component and the connection area are electrically connected by solder,
The substrate has a first connection region (bonding hole 762) and a first connection region having a larger area than the first connection region as the connection regions provided for the different insertion holes. A game machine characterized in that it is provided with two connection regions (short-circuit prevention holes 761).

According to the characteristic K1, since the second connection region having a larger area than the first connection region is provided, the melting that adheres to a predetermined terminal when soldering is performed while the substrate is being transported. The possibility that the solder will move toward the adjacent terminals is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a solder bridge will be formed.

Features K2. The mounting component includes a terminal row in which a plurality of terminals are arranged in a row (a row of pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782, a row of pins 784e and 784f of the two-pole connector 781, and a pin 784g of the two-row connector 783). Row of ~ 784p, row of pins 784q and 784r of the first working port connector 955, row of pins 784s and 784t of the second working port connector 956),
The second connection region is provided at least corresponding to the insertion hole into which the terminal (for example, the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782) existing at one end of the terminal row is inserted. The gaming machine described in the feature K1.

According to the characteristic K2, the second connection region is provided corresponding to the predetermined terminal located at the end of the terminal row in which the amount of the molten solder that tends to adhere when soldering while carrying the substrate is large. There is. This reduces the possibility that the molten solder will move from the vicinity of the predetermined terminal located at the end of such a terminal row toward the terminal adjacent to the predetermined terminal, resulting in the formation of the solder bridge. It is possible to reduce the possibility that it will occur.

Features K3. The second connection region has at least the insertion hole into which the terminal existing at one end of the terminal row is inserted and the terminal existing at the other end of the terminal row (for example, the one-row connector 782). A first pin 784a) of the game machine is provided corresponding to each of the insertion holes, and the game machine according to the feature K2.

According to the characteristic K3, when soldering is performed while the substrate is being transported, the substrate can be designed before the transport direction of the substrate is determined. Further, even if the transfer direction of the board is reversed before soldering, the board with a low probability of solder bridge generation can be obtained.

Features K4. The terminal row is provided with three or more terminals including grounding terminals (pins 784c, 784e, 784i connected to the GND solid 851) for grounding,
The game machine according to feature K2 or K3, wherein the grounding terminal is arranged so as to avoid an end of the terminal row.

According to the characteristic K4, since the grounding terminal in which the temperature of the molten solder is likely to drop around the terminal is not present at the end of the terminal row, the predetermined terminal is provided from the vicinity of the predetermined terminal present at the end of the terminal row. The possibility that the molten solder will move toward the terminal adjacent to is reduced. Then, by reducing the possibility that the molten solder moves in this way, it becomes possible to prevent the area required for the second connection region from becoming extremely large.

Features K5. The first connection region is provided so as to correspond to the insertion hole through which a terminal existing at a position different from the end of the terminal row in the terminal row is inserted. The gaming machine according to any one of to K4.

According to the characteristic K5, for the terminals (for example, the second pin 784b and the third pin 784c of the one-row connector 782) existing at the positions different from the ends of the terminal row, the first connection area is not the second connection area. The provision of the connecting regions makes it possible to prevent the range occupied by these connecting regions on the substrate from becoming extremely wide.

Features K6. The second connection region has a predetermined dimension between two adjacent terminals (a reference value of 1.5 mm for a pin interval in a row of a single-row connector, 2.5 mm for a pin interval of a two-pole connector). A reference value, a reference value of 1.5 mm regarding a pin spacing within a row of a two-row connector, and a reference value of 2.5 mm regarding a row spacing), and at least one of the plurality of terminals is inserted. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5, which is provided so as to correspond to a common hole.

According to the characteristic K6, by providing the second connecting region only in the place where the solder bridge is likely to occur, it is possible to prevent the range occupied by the connecting region in the substrate from becoming extremely wide. It will be possible.

Features K7. As the mounting component, a first mounting component (for example, a two-pole connector 781) in which the terminals are arranged in a first arrangement, and a second mounting component in which the terminals are arranged in a second arrangement (for example, one row) Connector 782),
The gaming machine according to feature K6, wherein the predetermined size is different between the first array mode and the second array mode.

According to the characteristic K7, the predetermined dimension between the terminals serving as the reference for providing the second connection region is different depending on the arrangement mode of the terminals, so that only the place where the solder bridge is likely to occur on the substrate is It is possible to provide two connection areas. This makes it possible to prevent the range occupied by the connection area on the substrate from becoming extremely wide.

Features K8. The first arrangement mode is an arrangement mode in which two terminals are arranged in a predetermined direction (an arrangement of pins 784e and 784f of the two-pole connector 781),
The second array mode is an array mode in which three or more terminals are arrayed in a predetermined direction (for example, an array of pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782),
The gaming machine according to feature K7, wherein the predetermined size in the first arrangement mode is larger than the predetermined size in the second arrangement mode.

According to the characteristic K8, in the case of the first arrangement mode in which two terminals are arranged in the predetermined direction, the terminal existing at the end in the arrangement direction becomes the grounding terminal, so that three or more terminals are predetermined. Solder bridges are more likely to occur than in the second arrangement mode in which the solder bridges are arranged in the direction. In this case, according to the characteristic K8, the predetermined dimension in the first arrangement mode is set to be larger than the predetermined dimension in the second arrangement mode. While providing the connection area, it is possible to reduce the number of terminals for which the second connection area is to be formed.

Features K9. The first arrangement mode is an arrangement mode in which there are two terminal rows in which three or more terminals are arranged in a predetermined direction in a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction (for example, an arrangement of pins 784g to 784p of a two-row connector 783). And
The second arrangement mode is an arrangement mode in which there is only one terminal row in which three or more terminals are arranged in a predetermined direction (for example, an arrangement of pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782),
The gaming machine according to feature K7, wherein the predetermined size in the first arrangement mode is larger than the predetermined size in the second arrangement mode.

According to the characteristic K9, in the case of the first arrangement mode in which the two terminal rows are arranged in parallel, the solder bridge is more likely to occur than in the second arrangement mode in which the terminal row is only one. In this case, according to the characteristic K9, the predetermined dimension in the first arrangement mode is set to be larger than the predetermined dimension in the second arrangement mode. While providing the connection area, it is possible to reduce the number of terminals for which the second connection area is to be formed.

Features K10. The mounting component includes a predetermined terminal row (row of pins 784e and 784f of the two-pole connector 781) in which two terminals are arranged in a predetermined direction,
Features K1 to K9 characterized in that the second connection region is provided corresponding to each of the insertion holes into which the two terminals existing in the predetermined terminal row are individually inserted. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the characteristic K10, in the case of the predetermined terminal row in which two terminals are arranged in the predetermined direction, the terminal existing at the end in the arrangement direction becomes the ground terminal, so that three or more terminals are arranged in the predetermined direction. Solder bridges are more likely to occur than the terminal rows arranged in the above. In this case, according to the characteristic K10, since the second connection region is provided corresponding to each of the two terminals of the predetermined terminal row, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a solder bridge. Is possible.

Features K11. The second connection area is formed such that the area on the side different from the terminal side existing closest to the terminal inserted into the insertion hole corresponding to the second connection area is wide. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K10, which is characterized in that

According to the characteristic K11, when the soldering is performed while the substrate is being transported, the molten solder attached around the predetermined terminal can be held in a direction different from that of the terminal adjacent to the predetermined terminal. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the molten solder held in the second connection region from joining with the molten solder around the adjacent terminals before the solidified solder is solidified to form a solder bridge.

Features K12. The second connection region has the largest area on the side opposite to the terminal side existing closest to the terminal inserted into the insertion hole corresponding to the second connection region. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K11, which is formed.

According to the characteristic K12, the molten solder attached around the predetermined terminal can be held on the side farthest from the terminal adjacent to the predetermined terminal, so that it is possible to prevent the solder bridge from being formed.

Features K13. The mounting component includes a terminal row in which a plurality of terminals are arranged in a row (a row of pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782, a row of pins 784e and 784f of the two-pole connector 781, and a pin 784g of the two-row connector 783). Row of ~ 784p, row of pins 784q and 784r of the first working port connector 955, row of pins 784s and 784t of the second working port connector 956),
The second connection region is formed such that a length dimension thereof in the arrangement direction of the plurality of terminals in the terminal row is larger than that in a direction orthogonal to the arrangement direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K12.

According to the characteristic K13, it is possible to provide the second connection region while suppressing the influence on the board design in the direction orthogonal to the arrangement direction of the terminals in the terminal row on the board.

Features K14. The second connection area is
A peripheral region (small short-circuit prevention holes 891, 921) formed around the insertion hole corresponding to the second connection region,
An external region (large short circuit prevention holes 892, 922) provided outside the peripheral region on the substrate;
A connection region (first passage regions 894, 924) that connects the peripheral region and the external region,
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K13, characterized in that

According to the feature K14, it is possible to separate and hold the molten solder in the external region that is separated from the surrounding region with the connection region interposed therebetween. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the molten solder will move to the peripheral region side.

Features K15. The gaming machine according to Feature K14, wherein the external region has a larger area than the surrounding region.

According to the characteristic K15, since the external region has a larger area than the peripheral region, the molten solder accumulated in the peripheral region is attracted toward the external region. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the molten solder will move to the peripheral region side.

Features K16. The game machine according to feature K14 or K15, wherein the connection region has a width smaller than that of the external region.

According to the characteristic K16, the possibility that the molten solder held in the outer area will move to the surrounding area through the connection area is reduced.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features K1 to K16, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. Insertion holes (via holes 793) through which the terminals (pins 784a to 784t, terminals 775) of the mounting components (connectors 781 to 783, first operating port connector 955, second operating port connector 956, and insertion mounting component) are inserted. 793a to 793t) and a connection region (joint hole 762) provided around the insertion hole, and the terminal of the mounting component is inserted into the insertion hole, and the mounting is performed. In a gaming machine provided with a board (main control board 61) in which a terminal of a component and the connection area are electrically connected by soldering,
The board is provided at a position outside the connection area without communicating with the connection area, and a special area (separation type short-circuit prevention holes 871, 874, 875-878, 886) where solder can be fastened. 887, three-way separation type short-circuit prevention holes 881, 884) are provided.

According to the feature L1, it is possible to separate and hold the molten solder adhering to the connection region in the special region when soldering is performed while the substrate is being transported. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that a solder bridge will be formed. In particular, since the molten solder is held in the special region while being separated from the connection region, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the molten solder moves from the special region to the connection region.

Feature L2. As the connection area,
A predetermined connection region (for example, the fourth bonding hole 762d of the one-row back surface region 873) provided corresponding to the insertion hole into which the predetermined terminal is inserted;
A specific connection region (for example, the third joining hole 762c of the back surface region 873 for one row) provided corresponding to the insertion hole through which the adjacent terminal adjacent to the predetermined terminal is inserted;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the special area is provided on a side different from the specific connection area side with the predetermined connection area as a reference.

According to the feature L2, it is possible to prevent the molten solder held in the special area from moving to the specific connection area side.

Feature L3. The gaming machine according to feature L2, wherein the special area is provided on the side opposite to the specific connection area side with respect to the predetermined connection area.

According to the feature L3, it is possible to hold the molten solder that adheres to the predetermined connection area in the direction away from the specific connection area. When the predetermined connection area is on the rear side in the transport direction with respect to the specific connection area, the special area is on the rear side in the transport direction with respect to the predetermined connection area. As a result, the molten solder attached to the predetermined connection area is easily held in the special area.

Feature L4. The special region is provided at a position where a distance (distance LD1) between the predetermined connection region and the predetermined connection region is shorter than a distance (distance LD2) between the predetermined connection region and the specific connection region. The gaming machine described in the feature L2 or L3.

According to the feature L4, the special area is located closer to the predetermined connection area than the specific connection area. Accordingly, when soldering is performed while the substrate is being transported, the excess molten solder generated on the surface of the predetermined connection area is more easily held in the special area than the specific connection area.

Feature L5. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, wherein the special region has a larger area than the connection region.

According to the feature L5, since the special region has a larger area than the connecting region, the molten solder is easily attracted to the special region.

Feature L6. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, wherein the special region is formed such that a side farther from the connection region has a larger area than a side closer thereto.

According to the feature L6, most of the melted solder held in the special area is held on the side far from the connection area, so that the melted solder held in the special area is difficult to move to the connection area side.

Feature L7. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L6, wherein the special region is provided so as to exist in a plurality of directions with the connection region as a reference.

According to the feature L7, since the special regions are provided so as to exist in a plurality of directions with the connection region as a reference, it is possible to secure many movement paths of the molten solder that move from the connection region to the special region. It will be possible. Therefore, the excess molten solder generated on the surface of the connection area is easily held in the special area.

Feature L8. The gaming machine according to Feature L7, wherein a plurality of the special regions are provided around one connection region.

According to the feature L8, since there are a plurality of special regions around the connection region for retracting the excess molten solder generated on the surface of the connection region, the molten solder is retained in the special region. It will be easier.

Feature L9. The mounting component includes a terminal row in which a plurality of terminals are arranged in a row (a row of pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782, a row of pins 784e and 784f of the two-pole connector 781, and a pin 784g of the two-row connector 783). Row of ~ 784p, row of pins 784q and 784r of the first working port connector 955, row of pins 784s and 784t of the second working port connector 956),
The special region is provided for the connection region corresponding to the insertion hole into which at least a terminal (for example, the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782) existing at one end of the terminal row is inserted. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L8, which is characterized by being provided.

According to the feature L9, the special area is provided in correspondence with the predetermined terminal located at the end of the terminal row in which the amount of the molten solder that tends to adhere when soldering while carrying the substrate is large. This reduces the possibility that the molten solder will move from the vicinity of the predetermined terminal located at the end of such a terminal row toward the terminal adjacent to the predetermined terminal, resulting in the formation of the solder bridge. It is possible to reduce the possibility that it will occur.

Feature L10. The special area is at least the terminal existing at one end of the terminal row and the connection area corresponding to the insertion hole into which the terminal existing is inserted and the terminal existing at the other end of the terminal row (for example, The gaming machine according to feature L9, wherein the first pin 784a) of the one-row connector 782 is provided for each of the connection regions corresponding to the insertion holes.

According to the feature L10, when soldering is performed while the substrate is being transported, it is possible to design the substrate before the transport direction of the substrate is determined. Further, even if the transfer direction of the board is reversed before soldering, the board with a low probability of solder bridge generation can be obtained.

Feature L11. The terminal row is provided with three or more terminals including grounding terminals (pins 784c, 784e, 784i connected to the GND solid 851) for grounding,
The gaming machine according to feature L9 or L10, wherein the grounding terminal is disposed so as to avoid an end of the terminal row.

According to the feature L11, since the grounding terminal in which the temperature of the molten solder is likely to drop around the terminal does not exist at the end of the terminal row, the predetermined terminal is provided from around the predetermined terminal existing at the end of the terminal row. The possibility that the molten solder will move toward the terminal adjacent to is reduced. By reducing the possibility that the molten solder moves in this way, it becomes possible to prevent the area required as the special area from becoming extremely large.

Feature L12. The special region is in the insertion hole into which the terminals (for example, the second pin 784b and the third pin 784c of the one-row connector 782) existing at positions different from the ends of the terminal row in the terminal row are inserted. The gaming machine according to any one of features L9 to L11, which is not provided for the corresponding connection area.

According to the feature L12, since the special area is not provided for the terminal existing at the position different from the end of the terminal row, the range occupied by the special area on the substrate does not become extremely wide. It becomes possible to

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features L1 to L12, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature M group>
Features M1. Firing means (gaming ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a gaming ball toward the gaming area (gaming area PA) based on the shooting operation by the player.
A starting ball entering portion (first operating port 938, second operating port 939) into which a game ball flowing down in the game area can enter.
Entry detection means (first actuation opening detection sensor 951, second actuation opening detection sensor 952) for detecting a game sphere that has entered the starting entry part.
Connecting means (first actuation port connector 955, second actuation port connector) to which transmission means (first harness 951a, second harness 952a) for transmitting information on the detection result of the ball detection means is electrically connected. 956) and a specific control means (main control device 60) having a specific substrate (main control board 61),
Equipped with
At least a first starting ball entering portion (first operating port 938) and a second starting ball entering portion (second operating port 939) are provided as the starting ball entering portion.
As the ball entrance detection means, a first ball entrance detection means (first actuation opening detection sensor 951) for detecting a game ball that has entered the first starting ball entrance part, and a ball entering the second starting ball entrance part. At least a second ball detection unit (second operating port detection sensor 952) for detecting the played game ball,
As the transmitting means, a first transmitting means (first harness 951a) for transmitting information on a detection result of the first ball detecting means and a second transmission for transmitting information on a detection result of the second ball detecting means. Means (second harness 952a),
As the connecting means, first connecting means (first operating port connector 955) to which the first transmitting means is connected, and second connecting means (second operating port connector 956) to which the second transmitting means is connected. ) And,
The first connecting means and the second connecting means are individually provided to the specific substrate,
There are two connection terminals provided in the second connection means, a first connection terminal (first pin 784s) and a second connection terminal (second pin 784t),
The specific substrate is
A first insertion hole (first via hole 793s) through which the first connection terminal is inserted;
A second insertion hole (second via hole 793t) through which the second connection terminal is inserted;
A first connection region (short-circuit prevention hole 761) provided around the first insertion hole;
A second connection region (short-circuit prevention hole 761) provided around the second insertion hole;
A predetermined insertion hole (via hole 793) through which a predetermined terminal of a predetermined mounting component is inserted;
A predetermined connection region (joint hole 762) provided around the predetermined insertion hole;
Equipped with
In a state in which the first connection terminal is inserted into the first insertion hole, the first connection terminal and the first connection region are electrically connected by soldering,
The second connection terminal and the second connection region are electrically connected by solder in a state where the second connection terminal is inserted into the second insertion hole,
In a state where the predetermined terminal is inserted into the predetermined insertion hole, the predetermined terminal and the predetermined connection region are electrically connected by solder,
In the game area, the first start ball entering portion is provided at a position where the game ball shot can be reached when at least the firing operation according to the first operation mode is performed,
In the game area, the second starting ball entering portion is a position where the game ball shot when the shooting operation according to the first operation mode is performed is unreachable or difficult to reach, and the second operation mode Is provided at a position where the game ball shot when the shooting operation by
The specific control means,
A first acquisition unit (a function of executing the process of step S213 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information (holding information) based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first ball detection unit;
A first acquisition information storage unit that stores the special information acquired by the first acquisition unit (a first special figure reservation area, a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the process of step S213);
Second acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S213 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second entrance detection means,
A second acquisition information storage unit (a second special figure reservation area, a function of executing the process of step S213 in the main CPU 63) that stores the special information acquired by the second acquisition unit;
Assignment determination means (main CPU 63) that determines whether or not the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means or the second acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined assignment information. Function for executing the processing of step S213 in step S.
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determining means being the grant corresponding result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information ( A function of executing the process of step S213 in the main CPU 63),
Acceptance control capable of switching the second starting entrance ball section to either a first state in which a game ball is difficult or impossible to enter or a second state in which a game ball is easier to enter Means (function of executing the process of step S214 in the main CPU 63),
Equipped with
The acceptance control means has a first mode (low frequency support mode) as a control mode of the second starting ball entering portion, and a second mode (high frequency support mode) that is more likely to be in the second state than the first mode. ) And,
The special information stored in the second acquired information storage means is the target of the grant determination, as compared to the case where the special information stored in the first acquired information storage means is the target of the grant determination. In the case of being, it is a configuration in which the privilege advantageous to the player is or is easily granted,
The first connection region and the second connection region are formed to have a larger area than the predetermined connection region,
The first connection region is formed such that the area on the side different from the second insertion hole side is large with reference to the first insertion hole.
The second connection region is formed such that an area on a side different from the first insertion hole side is large with respect to the second insertion hole as a reference.

According to the feature M1, the award determination made when the player has entered the second starting ball entering portion is more advantageous to the player than the awarding determination made when the player has entered the first starting ball entering portion. Therefore, when a game ball enters the second starting ball entering portion, the player holds great expectations. A first connecting area having a larger area than the predetermined connecting area is provided around the first connecting terminal of the second connecting means, and an area having a larger area than the predetermined connecting area is provided around the second connecting terminal. A wide second connection area is provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a short circuit due to formation of a solder bridge between the first connection terminal and the second connection terminal in the soldering process of the specific substrate. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a situation in which the entry of the game ball into the second starting entry ball portion is not detected due to poor connection will occur. It is possible to avoid disappointing the expected player due to poor connection.

Further, the first connecting means for connecting the first detecting means to the specific board and the second connecting means for connecting the second detecting means to the specific board are individually provided for the specific board. When an illegal board is used, it is possible to make it illegal to make an illegal act in the game hall by setting a large number of connection points necessary for connecting the illegal board to the specific board.

Features M2. The first connection region and the second connection region are longer in the arrangement direction in which the first connection terminals and the second connection terminals are lined up than in the direction orthogonal to the arrangement direction. The gaming machine according to the feature M1, wherein the gaming machine is formed to have a large size.

According to the feature M2, the first connection region and the second connection region are provided on the specific substrate while suppressing the influence on the substrate design in the direction orthogonal to the arrangement direction of the first connection terminals and the second connection terminals. It becomes possible.

Features M3. The first connection area is
A first peripheral region (small short-circuit prevention holes 891, 921) formed around the first insertion hole;
A first external region (large short circuit prevention holes 892, 922) provided outside the first peripheral region in the specific substrate;
A first connection region (first passage region 894, 924) connecting the first surrounding region and the first outer region;
Is equipped with
The second connection area is
A second peripheral region (small short-circuit prevention holes 891, 921) formed around the second insertion hole;
A second external region (large short-circuit prevention holes 892, 922) provided outside the second peripheral region in the specific substrate;
A second connection region (first passage region 894, 924) connecting the second peripheral region and the second outer region;
The gaming machine according to the feature M1 or M2, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the feature M3, it is possible to separate and hold the molten solder in the first external region that is separated from the first peripheral region with the first connection region interposed therebetween, and to the second peripheral region. It is possible to separate and hold the molten solder in the second external region that is separated by the second connection region. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the molten solder will move to the first peripheral region side and the second peripheral region side.

Features M4. The first outer region has a larger area than the first surrounding region,
The game machine according to feature M3, wherein the second external region has a larger area than the second peripheral region.

According to the feature M4, since the first external region has a larger area than the first peripheral region, the molten solder accumulated in the first peripheral region is attracted toward the first external region. Further, since the second outer region has a larger area than the second peripheral region, the molten solder accumulated in the second peripheral region is attracted toward the second outer region. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the molten solder will move to the first peripheral region side and the second peripheral region side.

Features M5. The first connection region is narrower than the first outer region,
The game machine according to feature M3 or M4, wherein the second connection region has a width smaller than that of the second outer region.

According to the feature M5, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the molten solder held in the first outer region will move to the first surrounding region through the first connecting region, and the molten solder held in the second outer region will be reduced. The possibility that the solder will move to the second peripheral region through the second connection region is reduced.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features M1 to M5, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the characteristic group K, the characteristic group L, and the characteristic group M, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a main control device that controls the main control of the game, a voice emission control device that outputs sound and light for effect based on a command received from the main control device, and the like. These main control device, voice emission control device, and the like include a board inside, and the board is configured by mounting an electronic component such as an IC and a resistor and a connector on a printed wiring board. Electronic components, connectors, and the like are fixed by soldering while being electrically connected to the wiring formed on the printed wiring board.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to preferably perform soldering when mounting electronic components, connectors, etc. on a printed wiring board, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The following is a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature.

Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each game component arranged in the area, and gives a bonus to the player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

Spinning machine such as slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means In addition, or after a lapse of a predetermined time, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped, and a gaming machine that gives a privilege to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

10... Pachinko machine, 24a... Out opening, 27... Game ball launching mechanism, 31... General winning opening, 32... Special electric winning device, 33... First working opening, 34... Second working opening, 52... Window panel, 60... Main control device, 61... Main control board, 62... MPU, 63... Main CPU, 65... Main RAM, 92... Dispensing side CPU, 102... Read terminal, 112... Management CPU, 116... Correspondence memory , 131... Calculation result memory, 151... Notification light emitting part, 213... First left/right distribution nail, 214... Second left/right distribution nail, 215... First left/right distribution member, 216... Fixing member, 217a... 1st distribution surface, 218a... 2nd distribution surface, 228... obstruction nail, 231... 2nd left-right distribution member, 232a... 1st distribution surface, 233... game board, 234a... 2nd distribution surface, 242 ... 1st left-right distribution nail, 243... 1st left-right distribution member, 244a... 1st distribution surface, 245a... 2nd distribution surface, 251... Inversion nail, 254... Inversion member, 254a... 1st inversion surface, 254b... 2nd inversion surface, 255... Left side guide member, 262... Front-back distribution member, 263... Front-back distribution member, 264a... 1st distribution surface, 265a... 2nd distribution surface, 271... Rear nail, 291... Front priority member, 292... Plate member, 293... First support member, 294... Second support member, 322... Repulsion nail, 333... Low repulsion member, 334d... High repulsion portion, 351... Front/rear distribution table, 354... Stage Unit, 372... First downstream surface, 373... Second downstream surface, 391, 392... Front-rear distribution table, 422... Passage forming member, 422b... Front side wall face, 423... Position change passage, 441... Replacement passage forming member , 442... Replacement position changing passage, 443a... Back side wall surface, 443b... Front side surface, 461... Guide passage, 462... Guide surface, 471... Guide member, 561... Replacement guide member, 761... Short circuit prevention hole, 762 ... Joining hole, 762c... Third joining hole, 762d... Fourth joining hole, 775... Terminal, 781... Two-pole connector, 782... One-row connector, 783... Two-row connector, 784a-784t... Pin, 793, 793a- 793t... Via hole, 891... Small-sized short circuit prevention hole, 892... Large-sized short circuit prevention hole, 894... First passage area, 851... GND solid, 871... Separation type short circuit prevention hole, 873... Back row region for one row, 874 Short circuit prevention hole, 875... Upper left separation type short circuit prevention hole, 876... Lower left separation type short circuit prevention hole, 877... Upper right separation type short circuit prevention hole, 878... Lower right separation type short circuit prevention hole, 881, 884. Prevention hole, 886... Left separation type short circuit prevention hole, 887... Right separation type short circuit prevention hole, 921... Small size short circuit prevention hole, 922... Large size short circuit prevention hole, 924... First passage area, 938... First operation port, 939... Second operation port, 951... First operation port detection sensor , 951a... First harness, 952... Second actuation port detection sensor, 952a... Second harness, 955... First actuation port connector, 956... Second actuation port connector, B1... Game ball, PA... Game area.

Claims (2)

An insertion hole through which the terminal of the mounting component is inserted, and a connection region provided around the insertion hole, in a state in which the terminal of the mounting component is inserted into the insertion hole, In a gaming machine including a substrate in which the terminals of the mounting component and the connection area are electrically connected by solder,
The substrate has a first connection region and a second connection region having a larger area than the first connection region as the connection regions provided for the different insertion holes. ,,
The mounting component includes a terminal row in which a plurality of terminals are arranged in a row,
The second connection region is provided so as to correspond to at least the insertion hole through which the terminal existing at one end of the terminal row is inserted,
As the mounting component, a first mounting component in which the terminal row is formed by two terminals, a second mounting component in which a predetermined terminal row is formed by a predetermined number of terminals that is three or more, and three or more A third mounting component in which the terminal row is formed by terminals,
The predetermined terminal row is provided with the predetermined number of terminals including a grounding terminal for grounding,
The grounding terminal is not arranged at the end of the predetermined terminal row, but is arranged as a terminal other than the end of the predetermined terminal row ,
The second connection region is provided as the connection region corresponding to the insertion hole through which the terminal of the first mounting component is inserted,
The terminal spacing in the second mounting component is set narrower than the terminal spacing in the third mounting component,
The second connection region is provided as the connection region corresponding to the insertion hole through which the terminal of the second mounting component is inserted,
The second connection area is not provided as the connection area corresponding to the insertion hole through which the terminal of the third mounting component is inserted,
The gaming machine characterized in that the terminal spacing in the third mounting component is less than or equal to the terminal spacing in the first mounting component . The game machine according to claim 1, wherein a game is played using a game medium.

Images